Analizoare de Spectru - 5963-2930

About this Manual
Weve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support
your product. This manual is the best copy we could find; it may be incomplete
or contain dated information. If we find a more recent copy in the future, we will
add it to the Agilent website.
Support for Your Product

Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. Our service centers may be able
to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from
Agilent is available. You will find any other available product information on the
Agilent Test & Measurement website, www.tm.agilent.com.
HP References in this Manual

This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that
Hewlett-Packard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and
chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have
made no changes to this manual copy. In other documentation, to reduce
potential confusion, the only change to product numbers and names has been in
the company name prefix: where a product number/name was HP XXXX the
current name/number is now Agilent XXXX. For example, model number
HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A.
HP 8590 EM Series
User's Guide
EMC Analyzer
ABCDE
HP Part No. 5963-2930
Printed in UK August 1995
Notice
Restricted Rights Legend
The information contained in this document is subject to change

without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this
material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and tness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard
shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental
or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing,
performance, or use of this material.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights of
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013
for DOD agencies, and subparagraphs (c) (1) and (c) (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR
52.227-19 for other agencies.
c
Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1995
All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without

prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway, Santa Rosa CA, 95403-1799, USA
Certication
Regulatory Information
Warranty
Hewlett-Packard Company certies that this product met its

published specications at the time of shipment from the factory.
Hewlett-Packard further certies that its calibration measurements
are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute's calibration facility,
and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards
Organization members.
Regulatory information is located in the HP 8590 EM Series EMC
Analyzer Verication Guide.
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects

in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of
shipment. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company
will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be
defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a
service facility designated by Hewlett-Packard. Buyer shall prepay
shipping charges to Hewlett-Packard and Hewlett-Packard shall pay
shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall
pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to
Hewlett-Packard from another country.
Hewlett-Packard warrants that its software and rmware designated
by Hewlett-Packard for use with an instrument will execute
its programming instructions when properly installed on that
instrument. Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the operation
of the instrument, or software, or rmware will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Limitation of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from

improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied
software or interfacing, unauthorized modication or misuse,
operation outside of the environmental specications for the
product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED.
HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exclusive Remedies
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER'S SOLE AND

EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT,
TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
iii
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance

agreements are available for Hewlett-Packard products. For any
assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service
Oce.
Compliance
This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with

IEC Publication 348, Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring
Apparatus, and has been supplied in a safe condition. The instruction
documentation contains information and warnings which must be
followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the
instrument in a safe condition.
Safety Notes
The following safety notes are used throughout this manual.

Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and its meaning before
operating this instrument.
WARNING
CAUTION
iv
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure

which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until
the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if

not correctly performed or adhered to, would result in damage to or
destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign
until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
General Safety Considerations

WARNING
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to

qualied personnel. To prevent electrical shock, do not remove
covers.
If this instrument is not used as specied, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired. This instrument
must be used in a normal condition (in which all means for
protection are intact) only.
For continued protection against re hazard, replace line fuse
only with same type and rating ([F 5A/250V]). The use of other
fuses or material is prohibited.
CAUTION
Before switching on this instrument, make sure that the line voltage
selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the
correct fuse is installed.
Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this
instrument. Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not
using this cord may cause instrument damage.
Only clean the instrument cabinet using a damp cloth.
L
CE
ISM1-A
CSA
The instruction documentation symbol. The product is

marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the
user to refer to the instructions in the documentation.
The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European
Community. (If accompanied by a year, it is when the
design was proven.)
This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientic and Medical
Group 1 Class A product.
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian
Standards Association.
Manual Conventions
Front-Panel Key5 This represents a key physically located on the
instrument.
Softkey
This indicates a \softkey," a key whose label is
determined by the rmware of the instrument.
Screen Text This indicates text displayed on the instrument's
screen.
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
HP 8590 EM Series Documentation Description
The following documents are provided with the EMC analyzer.

User's Guide describes installing your instrument, instrument
features and how to make measurements, menu maps, error
messages, and key descriptions.
Verication Guide provides information for verifying instrument
operation, specications and characteristics, and customer support.
Quick Reference Guide provides information on remote control
instrument conguration, creating programs, and parameters for
each of the programming commands available.
vi
HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer Documentation Description

Manuals Shipped with Your EMC Analyzer
HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer User's Guide
Describes how to prepare the analyzer for use.

Describes analyzer features.
Describes common applications.
Tells how to make measurements with your EMC analyzer.
Includes error messages.
HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer Verication Guide
Provides analyzer specications and characteristics.

Provides manual procedures to verify specications.
Indicates the test equipment required for verication.
HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer Quick Reference Guide
Describes how to make a simple measurement with your EMC

analyzer.
Brie y describes the EMC analyzer functions.
Lists all the programming commands.
Options
Option 910: Additional User's Documentation

Provides an additional copy of the HP 8590 EM Series EMC
Analyzer User's Guide, HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer Quick
Reference Guide, and the HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer
Verication Guide.
Option 915: Service Guide and Component-Level Information
Describes troubleshooting and repair of the EMC analyzer.

Option 915 consists of two manuals:
HP 8590 Series, and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer,

Assembly-Level Repair Service Guide describes adjustment and
assembly level repair of the analyzer.
HP 8590 Series, and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer,

Component-Level Repair Service Guide provides information
for component-level repair of the analyzer.
How to Order Manuals
Each of the manuals listed above can be ordered individually. To

order, contact your local HP Sales and Service Oce.
vii
Contents
1. Preparing for Use
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . .

Introducing the EMC Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzer . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzer/HP 85420E RF lter
section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the EMC Analyzer Products for Use . . . . .
Preparing the EMC Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking generator self-calibration . . . . . . . . . .
YTF self-calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the RF Filter Section . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing a Static-Safe Work Station . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing ESD damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static-safe ESD accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Getting Acquainted with the EMC Analyzer
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . .

Front-Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . .
Data controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hold key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number/units keypad . . . . . . . . .
Step keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine-focus control . . . . . . . . . .
EMC Analyzer Screen Annotation . . . . .
Menu and Softkey Overview . . . . . . .
Making a Basic Measurement . . . . . . .
Spectrum Analyzer Mode Screen Annotation
3. Calibration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . .

Improving Accuracy with Self-Calibration Routines .
Warm-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing the tracking generator self-calibration
routine (Option 010 only) . . . . . . . . . .
Performing the YTF self-calibration routine . . .
When is self-calibration needed? . . . . . . . . .
Memory Card Insertion and Battery Replacement . .
Changing the memory card battery . . . . . . .
Procedure to change the memory card battery .
Analyzer Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the AutoCal function . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-20
1-22
1-23
1-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-1
2-2
2-6
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-13
2-14
2-18
. .
. .
. .
3-1
3-1
3-1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
Contents-1
Setting the analyzer's clock . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting AutoCal time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Making Pre-compliance Measurements
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . .

Introducing the SETUP, TEST, and OUTPUT Keys . . .
Setting Up a Measurement Using the SETUP Key . . .
Using standard congurations . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre-compliance System Congurations . . . . . . . .
Equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading pre-dened congurations from a card . .
Customizing the standard congurations . . . . . .
Modifying start and stop frequencies . . . . . . .
Modifying reference level and input attenuation .
Modifying IF and averaging bandwidths . . . . .
Selecting the active detector . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the measured detectors . . . . . . . .
Measuring detector dwell times . . . . . . . . .
Controlling autoranging . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using limit lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a limit line from the card . . . . . . . .
Using amplitude correction factors . . . . . . . . .
Loading an amplitude correction factor le from a
card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating the windows display format . . . . . . .
Making a Radiated Measurement . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the marker to tune the analyzer . . . . . . .
Using the measure-at-marker function . . . . . . .
Using the auto-measure feature . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring and generating a report . . . . . . . .
Making a Conducted Measurement . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading pre-dened congurations from a card . .
5. List-Based Measurements
What you'll nd in this chapter

Adding signals to the list . . .
Viewing the signal list . . . .
Sorting the signal list . . . . .
Deleting signals from the list .
Marking signals . . . . . . . .
Remeasuring signals . . . . .
Saving signal lists . . . . . . .
Recalling signal lists . . . . .
Graphing signal lists . . . . .
Saving signal lists graphs . . .
Contents-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-10
3-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-11
4-12
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-19
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-4
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-10
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-14
6. Stepped Measurements
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . .

Performing a stepped measurement . . . . .
Selecting a detector and setting a dwell time
Using the marker . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding data to the signal list table . . . . .
Changing the frequency step . . . . . . .
Restarting and stopping the measurement .
Using logarithmic and linear steps . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-1
6-1
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-7

Making Diagnostic Measurements Using a Close-Field
Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring systems for diagnostic emissions . . . . .
Setting up the test equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making an automated diagnostic emission test . . . .
Conguring the analyzer for testing . . . . . . . .
Storing the data to internal memory . . . . . . . .
Recalling the data from internal memory . . . . . .
Making a eld-strength measurement . . . . . . .
Characterizing the emissions . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a manual diagnostic emission test . . . . . .
Other Diagnostic Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving signals of equal amplitude . . . . . . . . .
Resolving small signals hidden by large signals . . . .
Increasing the frequency readout resolution . . . . .
Decreasing the frequency span . . . . . . . . . . .
Peaking signal amplitude with preselector peak . . . .
Tracking unstable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the marker track function . . . . . . . . . .
Using maximum-hold and minimum-hold . . . . . .
Comparing signals using delta markers . . . . . . . .
Measuring dierences between two signals . . . . .
Measuring dierences between signals on screen and
o screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring low-level signals . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing input attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing IF bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing averaging bandwidth . . . . . . . . . .
Using video averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing for distortion using the linearity check . . .
Measuring small signals in the presence of a large
ambient signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using linearity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demodulating and listening to an AM or FM signal .
Using the analyzer in zero frequency span . . . . .
Measuring signals near band boundaries using harmonic
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Localized Susceptability Testing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring systems for localized susceptability testing
Equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making localized susceptability measurements . . . .
Setting up the tracking generator . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7. Making EMC Diagnostic Measurements
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-9
7-11
7-11
7-14
7-17
7-19
7-20
7-22
7-22
7-24
7-27
7-27
7-28
7-30
7-30
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-38
7-38
7-41
7-44
7-45
7-48
7-51
7-51
7-52
7-52
7-52
Contents-3
Tuning the tracking generator . . . . . . . . . . .

Turning the tracking generator on . . . . . . . . .
8. Making Other Measurements
What you'll nd in this section . . . . . . . . . . .

Stimulus-response measurements . . . . . . . . . .
What are stimulus-response measurements? . . . .
Using the EMC analyzer with the internal tracking
generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stepping through the measurement . . . . . . . .
Tracking generator unleveled condition . . . . . .
Making re ection calibration measurements . . . . .
Re ection calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the return loss . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring amplitude modulation with the fast Fourier
transform function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the sidebands on a signal . . . . . . . .
Repeating the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring 3 dB and 6 dB bandwidth . . . . . . . . .
Measuring 99% power bandwidth . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring percent AM modulation . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring amplitude and frequency dierence . . . .
Making third order measurements . . . . . . . . . .
Using the RF Filter Section HP 85420E Option 1EM
only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learning about the analog+ display mode (option 101
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering on a selected line of a video picture eld .
9. Limit Lines
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . .

Using EMC Limit Lines . . . . . . . . .
Creating, editing, or viewing a limit line
Editing an existing limit line . . . . .
Dening a limit margin . . . . . . . .
Activating limit-line testing . . . . . .
Saving or recalling limit-line tables . .
Saving a limit-line table . . . . . . .
Recalling a limit-line table . . . . . .
Viewing the card catalog . . . . . .
Using Spectrum Analyzer Limit Lines . .
Creating, editing or viewing a limit line
Selecting limit-line parameters . . . .
Selecting the amplitude scale . . . .
Selecting the limit-line table format . .
Activating limit-line testing . . . . . .
Contents-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-53
7-53
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-10
8-12
8-12
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-22
8-24
8-26
8-28
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-5
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-9
9-9
9-10
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-14
9-15
10. Amplitude Correction Factors

Creating, editing, or viewing the amplitude-correction
tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating amplitude correction . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving or recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. Windows
12. Saving, Recalling, and Outputting Data
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . .

Using a Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting the card . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available operations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a prex . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Recalling Data from Internal Memory
Saving a state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling a state . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting Internal Data from Being Overwritten
How to Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring a printer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring and generating a report . . . . .
13. Additional Features
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . .

Spectrum Analyzer Emulation . . . . . . .
Demodulator (all except option 703) . . . .
Tracking Generator . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . .
External keyboard features . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the template . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering data using the external keyboard
Entering annotation . . . . . . . . .
Entering programming commands . . .
Entering a screen title . . . . . . . .
Entering a prex . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-1
10-1
10-6
10-7
11-1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-1
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-6
12-11
12-11
12-11
12-12
12-12
12-13
12-14
12-14
12-15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 13-1
. 13-1
. 13-2
. 13-2
. 13-4
. 13-4
. 13-7
. 13-7
. 13-9
. 13-9
. 13-10
. 13-10
. 13-11
14. EMC Analyzer Error Messages
What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Nonrecoverable System Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Contents-5
15. Customer Support

If You Have a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling HP Sales and Service Oces . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your EMC analyzer does not turn on . . . . . . . .
If the HP 8590 EM series used with an HP 85420E
option 1EM does not seem to be working HP 85420E
option 1EM only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the EMC analyzer cannot communicate via HP-IB .
Verication of proper operation . . . . . . . . . . .
If the HP 8590 EM series used with an HP 85420E
option 1EM does not power o HP 85420E option
1EM only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAX support line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning the EMC Analyzer for Service . . . . . . . .
Package the EMC analyzer for shipment . . . . . . .
16. Key Menus
17. Key Dictionary

Service Functions . . . . . . .
Service calibration functions .
Service diagnostic functions . .
Key Functions . . . . . . . . .
% AM . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCK ON OFF . . . . . . .
A/m . . . . . . . . . . . .
V/m . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-2.9 Gz BAND 0 . . . . .
2.75-6.5 BAND 1 . . . . .
2v REF DETECTOR . . . . .
3 dB POINTS . . . . . . . .
3rd ORD MEAS . . . . . . .
6.0-12.8 BAND 2 . . . . .
6 dB POINTS . . . . . . . .
9 kHz 0150 kHz . . . . . .
9 kHz EMI BW . . . . . . .
+10V REF DETECTOR . . . .
-10V REF DETECTOR . . . .
12.4-19 BAND 3 . . . . . .
19.1-22 BAND 4 . . . . . .
30 MHz 0300 MHz . . . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Contents-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15-1
15-1
15-1
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-3
15-3
15-3
15-3
15-4
15-5
15-5
16-1
17-1
17-2
17-2
17-2
17-4
17-4
17-4
17-4
17-5
17-5
17-6
17-6
17-6
17-6
17-7
17-7
17-7
17-8
17-8
17-8
17-8
17-9
17-9
99% PWR BW . . .
120 kHz EMI BW .
150 kHz 030 MHz
200 Hz EMI BW .
200 MHz 01 GHz .
A <--> B . . . .
A0B ! A ON OFF
A ! C . . . . . .
ABCDEF . . . . .
Abort . . . . . .
ADD TO LIST . . .
ALC INT EXT . . .
ALC MTR INT XTAL
ALC TEST . . . .
ALL DLP ! CARD
Amp Cor . . . . .
AMP COR ON OFF .
AMPL SCL LOG LIN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AMPLITUDE5 . . . .
Amptd Units . . .
ANALOG+ ON OFF .
ANALYZER ADDRESS
ANNOTATN ON OFF
ANTENNA ! CARD
Antenna Factors
ANTENNA ON OFF .
Antenna Units .
APND CAT ITEM .
ATTEN AUTO MAN .
AUTO ALL . . . .
AUTO CAL ON OFF
AUTO COUPLE5 . . .
AUTO-MEASURE . .
AUTOEXEC
AUTORANG
AUX B .
Aux Conn
ON OFF
ON OFF
. . . . .
Control
AUX/USER5 . . . . .
AV DWELL TIME .
AVG BW AUTO MAN

AVG ON OFF . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-9
17-10
17-10
17-10
17-11
17-11
17-12
17-12
17-13
17-13
17-13
17-14
17-14
17-14
17-15
17-15
17-15
17-16
17-16
17-17
17-17
17-17
17-18
17-18
17-19
17-19
17-19
17-20
17-20
17-21
17-21
17-22
17-22
17-23
17-23
17-23
17-24
17-24
17-24
17-25
17-25
Contents-7
AV/IF BW RATIO
B ! C . . . . .
B <--> C . . .
B0DL ! B . . .
Band Lock . . .
BAUD RATE . . .
BINARY SPAN . .
BLANK A . . . .
BLANK B . . . .
BLANK C . . . .
BLANK CARD . .
BND LOCK ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
BW5 . . . . . . . .
CABLE ! CARD . .
Cable Factors .
CABLE ON OFF . .
4CAL5 . . . . . . . .
CAL AMPTD . . . .
Cal At Time . . .
CAL CISPR BW . .
CAL FETCH . . . .
CAL FREQ . . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FREQ & AMPTD

CAL MXR . . . . .
CAL STORE . . . .
CAL TIMEBASE . .
CAL TRK GEN . . .
CAL YTF . . . . .
Card Config . . .
CATALOG ALL . . .
CATALOG CARD . .
Catalog Internal
CATALOG PREFIX .
CATALOG REGISTER
CATALOG VARIABLS
CENTER FREQ . . .
CF STEP AUTO MAN
Change Prefix .
Change Title . .
CLEAR ANNOTATN .
CLEAR MARK . . .
Contents-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-26
17-26
17-26
17-27
17-27
17-28
17-28
17-28
17-29
17-29
17-29
17-30
17-30
17-31
17-31
17-31
17-31
17-32
17-32
17-32
17-32
17-33
17-33
17-33
17-34
17-34
17-34
17-35
17-35
17-35
17-36
17-36
17-38
17-38
17-39
17-39
17-40
17-41
17-42
17-42
17-43
CLEAR WRITE A .
CLEAR WRITE B .
CLEAR WRITE C .
CLR ALL MARKS .
CNTL A 0 1 . . .
CNTL B 0 1 . . .
CNTL C 0 1 . . .
CNTL D 0 1 . . .
CNT RES AUTO MAN
COARSE TUNE DAC
COMB GEN ON OFF
COMPLMNT MARKS .
CONF TEST . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4CONFIG5 . . . . . . .
4COPY5 . . . . . . . .
COPY DEV PRNT PLT

COPY SCREEN . . . .
CORRECT ON OFF . .
Correctn Factors .
CORRECTN ON OFF .
COUPLE AC DC . . .
CRT HORZ POSITION
CRT VERT POSITION
DACS . . . . . . . .
DATEMODE MDY DMY .
dBm . . . . . . . .
dBmV . . . . . . . .
dBV . . . . . . . .
DEFAULT CAL DATA .
DEFAULT CONFIG . .
DEFAULT SYNC . . .
Define List . . . .
Define Report . .
DELETE ALL SIGS .
DELETE FACTORS . .
DELETE FILE . . . .
DELETE LIMIT . . .
DELETE MARKED . .
DELETE POINT . . .
DELETE SEGMENT . .
DELETE SIGNAL . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-44
17-45
17-46
17-46
17-47
17-47
17-47
17-48
17-48
17-48
17-49
17-49
17-49
17-50
17-51
17-55
17-55
17-55
17-56
17-56
17-56
17-57
17-57
17-57
17-57
17-58
17-58
17-58
17-59
17-59
17-60
17-60
17-60
17-61
17-61
17-61
17-63
17-63
17-64
17-64
17-65
Contents-9
Delete Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-65

DELTA MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-65
DEMOD5 . . . . . . . . .
DEMOD AM FM . . . . . .
DEMOD ON OFF . . . . .
DESKJET 310/550C . . .
DESKJET 540 . . . . . .
4DET5 . . . . . . . . . . .
DETECTOR PK QP AV . .
DETECTOR PK SP NG . .
DETECTOR SMP PK . . .
4DISPLAY5 . . . . . . . . .
DISPLAY ! CARD . . .
DISPLAY CAL DATA . . .
DISPLAY CNTL I . . . .
Dispose User Mem . . .
DROOP . . . . . . . . .
DSP LINE ON OFF . . .
DWELL TIME . . . . . .
EDIT AMP COR . . . . .
EDIT ANNOTATN . . . .
EDIT ANTENNA . . . . .
EDIT CABLE . . . . . .
EDIT CAT ITEM . . . .
EDIT DONE . . . . . . .
EDIT FLATNESS . . . .
EDIT LAST . . . . . . .
Edit Limit . . . . . .
EDIT LIMIT . . . . . .
EDIT LIST . . . . . . .
EDIT LOWER . . . . . .
EDIT MID/DELT . . . .
EDIT OTHER . . . . . .
EDIT UP/LOW . . . . . .
EDIT UPPER . . . . . .
EDIT UPR LWR . . . . .
Editor . . . . . . . .
EMC ANALYZER . . . . .
4ENTER5
. . . . . . . . .
EP LQ570 SML LRG . . .
EP MX80 SML LRG . . .
Contents-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-65
17-66
17-66
17-67
17-67
17-67
17-67
17-68
17-68
17-69
17-69
17-69
17-69
17-70
17-70
17-71
17-71
17-71
17-72
17-72
17-72
17-73
17-73
17-74
17-75
17-75
17-76
17-76
17-77
17-78
17-78
17-79
17-79
17-80
17-80
17-80
17-82
17-82
17-82
ERASE DLP MEM .

ERASE MEM CARD .
ERASE STATEALL .
ERASE TRACEALL .
EXECUTE TITLE .
EXIT . . . . . . .
EXIT CATALOG . .
EXIT EDIT . . . .
EXIT GRAPH . . .
EXIT MEASURE . .
EXIT SHOW . . . .
EXTERNAL . . . .
EXTERNAL PREAMPG
FAST STP ON OFF
FFT MEAS . . . .
FINE TUNE DAC .
FLAT . . . . . . .
Flatness Data .
FM COIL DRIVE .
FM GAIN . . . . .
FM OFFSET . . . .
FM SPAN . . . . .
FORMAT CARD . . .
FREE RUN . . . .
FREQ DIAG . . . .
FREQ OFFSET . . .
FREQ SCL LOG LIN
FREQ STEP . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FREQUENCY5
FRQ DISC NORM OFF

FRQ SCAN ON OFF .
FULL SPAN . . . . .
Gauss . . . . . . .
GHIJKL . . . . . .
GND REF DETECTOR .
GRAT ON OFF . . . .
HOLD . . . . . . . .
HP B&W PRINTER . .
HP B&W DJ540 . . .
IDNUM . . . . . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-82
17-82
17-83
17-83
17-83
17-83
17-84
17-85
17-86
17-86
17-86
17-87
17-87
17-88
17-88
17-88
17-89
17-89
17-89
17-90
17-90
17-90
17-91
17-91
17-91
17-92
17-93
17-94
17-94
17-94
17-95
17-95
17-95
17-96
17-96
17-96
17-96
17-97
17-97
17-97
Contents-11
IF BW AUTO MAN .
IF GAINS . . . .
INIT FLT . . . .
INPT LCK ON OFF
Input . . . . . .
INPUT 1 9k-50M .
INPUT 2 20M-2.9G
INPUT 2 BYPASS .
INPUT Z 50
75
INTERNAL ! STATE
Internal ! Trace
LAST SPAN . . . .
Limit 1 . . . . .
LIMIT 1 ON OFF .
Limit 2 . . . . .
LIMIT 2 ON OFF .
Limit Lines . . .
LIMIT LINES . . .
LIMITS ! CARD .
LIMITS FIX REL .
LIMITS FRQ TIME
LIN CHCK ON OFF
LIN ON OFF . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LINE5 . . . . . . .
LINE . . . . . . .
LIST ! CARD . .
LIST ON OFF . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LMT DISP Y N AUTO

LMT TEST ON OFF .
LOAD FILE . . . . .
(LOCAL) . . . . . . .
LOG ON OFF . . . .
LOGF SPD STD FAST

MAIN COIL DR . . .
MAIN SPAN . . . . .
MAN TRK ADJUST . .
MARGIN 1 ON OFF .
MARGIN 2 ON OFF .
MARK ALL DUPLICAT
MARK ALL SIGNALS .
MARK LWR DUPLICAT
Contents-12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-97
17-98
17-98
17-98
17-99
17-99
17-99
17-100
17-100
17-100
17-101
17-101
17-102
17-102
17-102
17-103
17-103
17-104
17-104
17-105
17-106
17-106
17-107
17-107
17-107
17-107
17-108
17-108
17-109
17-110
17-111
17-111
17-112
17-112
17-112
17-113
17-113
17-114
17-114
17-114
17-115
MARK SIGNAL . . .
MARK TO END . . .
MARKER . . . . .
MARKER # ON OFF
MARKER 1 . . . .
MARKER 1 SPAN .
MARKER ! CF . .
MARKER !CF STEP
MARKER ! HIGH .
MARKER !MINIMUM
MARKER !PK-PK .
MARKER !REF LVL
MARKER ! START
MARKER ! STOP .
MARKER ALL OFF .
MARKER AMPTD . .
MARKER NORMAL .
MARKER TUNE SPN
MAX HOLD A . . .
MAX HOLD B . . .
MAX/MIN ON OFF .
MAX/MIN VIEW . .
MAX MXR LVL . . .
MEAS SNG CONT .
MEAS STEPPED . .
MEASURE AT MKR .
Measure Detector
MEM LOCKED . . .
MIN HOLD C . . .
MIXER BIAS DAC .
MK COUNT ON OFF
MK NOISE ON OFF
MK PAUSE ON OFF
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4MKR5 . . . . . . . .
4MKR !5 . . . . . . .
MK READ F T I P .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MK TRACE AUTO ABC

MK TRACK ON OFF .
MNOPQR . . . . . .
MODE5 . . . . . . . .
NEW EDIT . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-115
17-115
17-116
17-116
17-117
17-117
17-117
17-118
17-118
17-118
17-119
17-119
17-119
17-120
17-120
17-120
17-121
17-122
17-123
17-123
17-123
17-124
17-124
17-124
17-125
17-125
17-125
17-126
17-126
17-126
17-127
17-127
17-128
17-128
17-128
17-129
17-129
17-130
17-130
17-130
17-131
Contents-13
NEXT5 . . . . . . .
NEXT PAGE . . . .
NEXT PEAK . . . .
NEXT PK LEFT . .
NEXT PK RIGHT .
NO CONVERSN . . .
No User Menus .
NORM A/B
NORMLIZE
NORMLIZE
NTSC . .
ON OFF
ON OFF
POSITION
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . .
WINDOWS 4ON5 . . . .
OTHER ! CARD . . .
Other Factors . .
OTHER ON OFF . . .
4OUTPUT5 . . . . . . .
OUTPUT REPORT . .
OVLD ON OFF . . . .
PAINTJET PRINTER .
PAL . . . . . . . .
PAL0M . . . . . . .
PEAK EXCURSN . . .
PK DWELL TIME . .
PK-PK MEAS . . . .
Plot Config . . . .
PLOTTER ADDRESS .
PLT!LJT ON OFF .
PLT_ _ LOC_ _ . .
PLT MENU ON OFF .
Plt Port Config .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLT PORT HPIB PAR

PLT PORT SER PAR .
PLTS/PG 1 2 4 . .
POINT . . . . . . .
POWER ON IP LAST .
PREAMP ON OFF . .
PRESEL DAC . . . .
PRESEL DEFAULT . .
PRESEL PEAK . . . .
PRESET5 . . . . . . .
Print Config . . .
Contents-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 17-131
. 17-131
. 17-132
. 17-132
. 17-132
. 17-133
. 17-133
. 17-133
. 17-134
. 17-134
. 17-134
. 17-135
. 17-136
. 17-136
. 17-136
. 17-136
. 17-137
. 17-137
. 17-137
. 17-137
. 17-138
. 17-138
. 17-139
. 17-139
. 17-139
. 17-139
. 17-140
. 17-140
. 17-140
. 17-140
. 17-140
. 17-141
. 17-141
. 17-142
. 17-143
. 17-144
. 17-144
. 17-144
. 17-145
. 17-145
. 17-148
PRINTER ADDRESS .
PRINTER SETUP . .
Prn Port Config .
PRN PORT HPIB PAR
PRN PORT SER PAR .
PRT MENU ON OFF .
pTesla . . . . . .
PURGE AMP COR . .
PURGE LIMITS . . .
PWR SWP ON OFF . .
QP/AVG 10X OFF . .
QP DET ON OFF . .
QP DWELL TIME . .
QP GAIN ON OFF . .
QP ON OFF . . . . .
QPD OFFSET . . . .
QPD RST ON OFF . .
RECALL AMP COR . .
RECALL ANTENNA . .
RECALL CABLE . . .
Recall Card . . . .
RECALL DISPLAY . .
RECALL DLP . . . .
Recall Internal .
RECALL LIMITS . .
RECALL LIST . . . .
RECALL OTHER . . .
RECALL SETUP . . .
RECALL STATE . . .
RECALL TRACE . . .
REF LVL . . . . . .
REF LVL OFFSET . .
REMEAS ALL SIGS .
REMEAS MARKED . .
REMEAS SIGNAL . .
Re-measure . . . .
RESTART . . . . . .
RPG TITLE . . . . .
SAVE AMP COR . . .
SAVE ANTENNA . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-148
17-148
17-148
17-149
17-149
17-149
17-149
17-150
17-150
17-151
17-152
17-152
17-152
17-153
17-153
17-153
17-154
17-154
17-154
17-155
17-155
17-155
17-155
17-156
17-156
17-156
17-157
17-157
17-157
17-158
17-158
17-159
17-159
17-160
17-160
17-160
17-161
17-161
17-161
17-162
Contents-15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4SAVE/RECALL5 . . . .
SAVE SETUP . . .
SAVE AUTOEXEC
SAVE CABLE . .
Save Card . . .
SAVE EDIT . . .
Save Internal
SAVE LIMITS . .
SAVE LIN GRAPH
SAVE LIST . . .
SAVE LOG GRAPH
SAVE OTHER . .
Save/Rcl List
SAV LOCK ON OFF

SCALE LOG LIN .
SECAM0L . . . . .
SELECT 1 2 3 4 .
SELECT AMPLITUD
Select Axis . . .
SELECT DLT AMPL
SELECT FREQ . . .
SELECT FRM LIST
SELECT LWR AMPL
SELECT MID AMPL
SELECT POINT . .
SELECT PREFIX .
SELECT SEGMENT .
SELECT TIME . . .
Select Type . . .
SELECT UPR AMPL
Selectv Mark . .
Service Cal . . .
Service Diag . .
SET ATTN ERROR .
Set B&W Printer
Set Colr Printer
SET DATE . . . .
SET TIME . . . .
SETTINGS ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SETUP5 . . . . . . .
SETUP ! CARD . .
Contents-16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-162
17-162
17-163
17-163
17-163
17-164
17-164
17-165
17-165
17-166
17-166
17-166
17-167
17-167
17-168
17-168
17-168
17-169
17-170
17-170
17-171
17-172
17-173
17-173
17-173
17-174
17-176
17-177
17-178
17-178
17-179
17-179
17-179
17-179
17-180
17-180
17-180
17-180
17-181
17-181
17-181
SGL SWP5 . . . . . . . .
SHOW 1 1 PK QP AV .
SHOW 1 2 PK QP AV .
SHOW COR ON OFF . .
SHOW DET PK QP AV .
SHOW MKR ON OFF . .
SHOW SETUP . . . . .
SHW INST CONFIG . .
SIG LIST ON OFF . .
Signal Marking . . .
SLOPE . . . . . . . .
SORT BY AVG AMP . .
SORT BY DLTA LIM . .
SORT BY FREQ . . . .
SORT BY PK AMP . . .
SORT BY QP AMP . . .
Sort Signals . . . .
. . . .
4SPAN5 or SPAN
SPAN ZOOM . . . . . .
SPEAKER ON OFF . . .
SPECTRUM ANALYZER .
SQUELCH . . . . . . .
SRC ATN MAN AUTO . .
SRC PWR OFFSET . . .
SRC PWR ON OFF . . .
SRC PWR STP SIZE . .
START FREQ . . . . .
STATE ! CARD . . . .
STATE ! INTRNL . .
STEP LOG LIN . . . .
STOP . . . . . . . . .
STOP FREQ . . . . . .
STORE FLATNESS . . .
STOR PWR ON UNITS .
STP GAIN ZERO . . .
STUVWX . . . . . . .
SWEEP CONT SGL . . .
SWEEP LOG LIN . . .
SWEEP RAMP . . . . .
SWEEP TIME DAC . . .
4SWEEP/TRIG5 . . . . . .
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-181
17-182
17-182
17-182
17-183
17-183
17-183
17-184
17-184
17-184
17-185
17-185
17-186
17-186
17-186
17-187
17-187
17-187
17-188
17-188
17-188
17-189
17-189
17-190
17-190
17-190
17-191
17-191
17-191
17-192
17-192
17-192
17-192
17-193
17-193
17-193
17-194
17-194
17-194
17-195
17-195
Contents-17
SWP CPLG SR SA . .
SWP TIME AUTO MAN
SYNC NRM NTSC . .
SYNC NRM PAL . . .
TABLE ADDRESS . .
TABLE CCW STOP . .
TABLE CW STOP . .
TEST5 . . . . . . . .
THRESHLD ON OFF .
Time Date . . . . .
TIMEDATE ON OFF .
TOWER ADDRESS . .
TOWER DN STOP . .
Tower/ Turntbl . .
TOWER UP STOP . .
TOWER VERT HOR . .
4TRACE5 . . . . . . . .
TRACE A B C . . . .
TRACE A . . . . . .
TRACE B . . . . . .
TRACE B VW OFF . .
TRACE C . . . . . .
Trace ! Card . . .
Trace ! Intrnl .
Track Gen . . . . .
TRACKING PEAK . .
Trigger . . . . . .
TUNE SLO FAST . .
TV LINE # . . . . .
TV Standard . . . .
TV SYNC NEG POS .
TV TRIG . . . . . .
TV TRIG EVEN FLD .
TV TRIG ODD FLD .
TV TRIG VERT INT .
User Menus . . . .
VERIFY TIMEBASE .
VID AVG ON OFF . .
VIDEO . . . . . . .
VIEW 1 OFF . . . .
VIEW A . . . . . .
Contents-18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-195
17-196
17-196
17-197
17-197
17-197
17-197
17-198
17-198
17-198
17-199
17-199
17-199
17-199
17-199
17-200
17-200
17-200
17-200
17-201
17-201
17-202
17-202
17-203
17-203
17-204
17-204
17-204
17-205
17-205
17-205
17-206
17-206
17-207
17-207
17-207
17-208
17-208
17-208
17-209
17-209
VIEW B . . . .
VIEW C . . . .
VIEW CAL ON OFF
VIEW PK QP AV
Volts . . . . .
Watts . . . . .
WINDOWS OFF . .
X FINE TUNE DAC
YTF DRIVER . .
YTF SPAN . . .
YTF TUNE COARSE
YTF TUNE FINE
YZ_# Spc Clear
ZERO SPAN . . .
ZONE CENTER . .
ZONE PK LEFT .
ZONE PK RIGHT
ZONE SPAN . . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. . .
. . .
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
4ZOOM5 . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-210
17-210
17-211
17-211
17-211
17-212
17-212
17-212
17-212
17-213
17-213
17-213
17-213
17-214
17-214
17-215
17-215
17-216
17-216

EMC analyzer . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . .
Transducers and accessories . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18-1
18-1
18-1
18-2
Service Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status byte denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service request activating commands . . . . . . . .
A-1
A-1
A-3
18. Options and Accessories
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A. SRQ
B. EMC Setups, Limit Lines and Antenna Factors Card
Auto-execute radiated emissions test setup sample

Radiated emissions test setup sample . . . . . .
Conducted emissions test setup sample . . . . . .
Diagnostic emissions test setup sample . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-1
B-2
B-2
B-3
Index
Contents-19
Figures
1-1. HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzer. . . . . . . . . . .

1-2. HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzer with the HP 85420E
RF lter section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3. Static-safe work station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1. Front-panel feature overview. . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2. Rear-panel feature overview. . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3. Adjusting the ne focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4. EMC analyzer screen annotation. . . . . . . . . . .
2-5. Placing the marker on a signal. . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6. Displaying a list on the screen. . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7. Displaying the list as a log graph. . . . . . . . . . .
2-8. Spectrum analyzer mode screen annotation. . . . . .
3-1. Inserting the memory card. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2. Memory card battery date code location. . . . . . . .
3-3. Memory card battery replacement. . . . . . . . . .
3-4. Rear-panel battery information label. . . . . . . . .
4-1. Radiated EMC measurement test setup. . . . . . . .
4-2. Active detector and measured detector messages. . . .
4-3. Using the measure at marker function. . . . . . . . .
4-4. Conducted EMC measurement test setup. . . . . . .
4-5. Display using the log sweep mode. . . . . . . . . . .
5-1. 300 MHz calibrator signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2. 300 MHz calibrator signal with harmonics. . . . . . .
5-3. Peak, quasi-peak, and average detectors measurement
results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4. Signal added to signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5. Signal list of 300 MHz calibrator signal and harmonics.
5-6. Signal list sorted by peak amplitude. . . . . . . . . .
5-7. Last harmonic signal deleted. . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8. Last harmonic signal remeasured and added to list. . .
5-9. Signal marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10. Marked signals deleted and list reordered. . . . . . .
5-11. Remaining signals in list remeasured. . . . . . . . .
5-12. Signals plotted on linear frequency scale. . . . . . .
5-13. Signals plotted on log frequency scale. . . . . . . . .
6-1. Stepped measurement display. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2. Stepped measurement using two detectors. . . . . . .
6-3. Using the marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4. Data added to the signal list table. . . . . . . . . . .
6-5. Stepped measurement stopped at 300.2 MHz. . . . . .
6-6. Using a logarithmic step size. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7. Using a linear step size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1. Diagnostic (close-eld probe) test setup. . . . . . . .
7-2. eSAMPLE D selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3. Moving the marker to the highest response. . . . . .
7-4. Reducing the span. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-20
1-2
1-3
1-22
2-2
2-6
2-10
2-11
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
4-4
4-6
4-17
4-23
4-24
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-7
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5.
7-6.
7-7.
7-8.
7-9.
7-10.
7-11.
7-12.
7-13.
7-14.
7-15.
7-16.
7-17.
7-18.
7-19.
7-20.
7-21.
7-22.
7-23.
7-24.
7-25.
7-26.
7-27.
7-28.
7-29.
7-30.
7-31.
7-32.
7-33.
7-34.
7-35.
7-36.
7-37.
7-38.
7-39.
7-40.
7-41.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
8-8.
8-9.
8-10.
8-11.
8-12.
8-13.
8-14.
8-15.
8-16.
8-17.
Saving the displayed response in view mode. . . . . .

Reading the probe's output in dBA/m. . . . . . . .
Signals viewed with MAX, MIN, VIEW. . . . . . . . .
Measuring the harmonic interval. . . . . . . . . . .
30 MHz 0300 MHz setup selected. . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the reference level and attenuation. . . . .
Setup for obtaining two signals. . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving signals of equal amplitude. . . . . . . . .
IF bandwidth for resolving small signals. . . . . . . .
Signal resolution with a 30 kHz IF bandwidth. . . . .
Signal resolution with a 10 kHz IF bandwidth. . . . .
Using the marker counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After zooming in on the signal. . . . . . . . . . . .
Peaking signal amplitude using preselector peak. . . .
Using marker tracking to track an unstable signal. . .
Viewing an unstable signal using Max Hold A. . . . .
Viewing an unstable signal using Max and Min Hold. .
Placing a marker on the CAL OUT signal. . . . . . . .
Using the marker delta function. . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency and amplitude dierences. . . . . . . . .
Low-level signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using 0 dB attenuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decreasing IF bandwidth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decreasing averaging bandwidth. . . . . . . . . . .
Using the video averaging function. . . . . . . . . .
Set-up for obtaining two signals. . . . . . . . . . . .
Using linearity check to detect compression. . . . . .
Set-up for obtaining two signals. . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating third order distortion products. . . . . . .
Using linearity check to identify distortion products. .
Viewing an AM signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring modulation in zero span. . . . . . . . . .
Using harmonic lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Harmonic locking o. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Localized susceptability measurements test setup. . .
Setting up the tracking generator. . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the tracking generator on. . . . . . . . . .
EMC analyzer/tracking generator system block diagram.
Transmission measurement test setup. . . . . . . . .
Tracking-generator output power activated. . . . . .
Normalized trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the rejection of the lter. . . . . . . . . .
Re ection measurement short calibration test setup. .
Measuring the return loss of the lter. . . . . . . . .
Maximum modulation frequency versus sweep time. .
Using the FFT function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the 6 dB points function. . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the 99% pwr BW function. . . . . . . . . . .
Using the % AM function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Delta Meas function. . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Pk-Pk function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup for making third order measurements. . . . . .
Using 3rd Ord Meas function. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the calibrator signal through the RF lter
section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-19
7-21
7-23
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-31
7-32
7-33
7-35
7-36
7-39
7-40
7-41
7-42
7-43
7-46
7-47
7-49
7-50
7-51
7-52
7-53
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-6
8-7
8-9
8-11
8-14
8-15
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
Contents-21
8-18.
8-19.
8-20.
8-21.
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
10-1.
10-2.
11-1.
11-2.
11-3.
11-4.
11-5.
11-6.
11-7.
13-1.
17-1.
17-2.
Contents-22
Turning the preamplier on. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Analog+ display mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Triggering on an odd eld of a video format. . . . . . 8-28
Triggering on an even eld of a video format. . . . . 8-29
Completed limit-line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
Editing an existing limit-line table. . . . . . . . . . .
9-6
Signal failing the limit line margin. . . . . . . . . .
9-7
Signal exceeding the limit line. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Conversion factors dened with a log frequency scale. 10-4
Conversion factors dened with a linear frequency
scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
300 MHz calibrator signal with harmonics. . . . . . . 11-2
Windows display mode on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Zone markers moved to the right of the current span.
11-3
Zone span increased to include three signals. . . . . . 11-4
Full-sized display of the applications window. . . . . 11-4
Full-sized display of the overview window. . . . . . . 11-5
Windows display mode o. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
External keyboard template. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Internal memory catalog information. . . . . . . . . 17-36
Connecting a printer to the analyzer. . . . . . . . . 17-54
Tables
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
4-1.
12-1.
12-2.
12-3.
12-4.
13-8.
15-1.
17-1.
17-2.
17-3.
17-4.
17-5.
17-6.
17-7.
17-8.
A-1.
EMC Analyzer Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5
RF Filter Section Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
AC Power Cables Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Static-Safe ESD Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
RF Output Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
EMC Analyzer Screen Annotation . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Screen Annotation for Trace, Trigger, and Sweep Modes 2-12
Spectrum Analyzer Mode Screen Annotation . . . . . 2-19
Screen Annotation for Trace, Trigger, and Sweep Modes 2-19
Standard Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Internal Memory and Card Operations . . . . . . . . 12-3
Save Functions Using a Card . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Recall Functions Using a Card . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Summary of Save and Recall Operations, Internal
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
External Keyboard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Oces . . . . . . 15-6
Center Frequency and Span Settings for Harmonic
Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-27
Setting of HP ThinkJet Printer Mode Switches . . . . 17-52
Default Conguration Values . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-59
Preset EMC Analyzer Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 17-81
Functions Which Exit The Windows Display Format . 17-135
Preset for EMC Analyzer Conditions . . . . . . . . . 17-146
Preset Spectrum Analyzer Conditions . . . . . . . . 17-147
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-151
Status Byte Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Contents-23
1
Preparing for Use
This chapter describes the process of getting the EMC analyzer ready
to use when you have just received it. See \Preparing the EMC
Analyzer" (in this chapter) for the process steps. The process includes
steps for setting up the EMC analyzer as well as for setting up the
EMC analyzer with the RF lter section. Information about static-safe
handling procedures is also included in this chapter.
Preparing for Use
1-1
Introducing the EMC Analyzer

HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzer
Figure 1-1. HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzer.
The HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzers are small, lightweight test

instruments that cover the RF and microwave frequency ranges:
HP 8591EM, 9 kHz to 1.8 GHz
HP 8593EM, 9 kHz to 22 GHz (or 26.5 GHz)
1-2
Preparing for Use
HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzer/HP 85420E RF lter section
Figure 1-2.
HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzer with the HP 85420E RF lter
section.
The HP 85420E RF lter section Option 1EM can be used with the
HP 8591EM, HP 8594EM, HP 8595EM, or the HP 8596EM EMC
analyzer to prevent RF overload at the input of the EMC analyzer.
This is useful in geographical areas where ambient signals are
abundant.
Preparing for Use
1-3
Initial Inspection
1-4
Preparing for Use
Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the shipping container

or cushioning material is damaged, keep it until you have veried
that the contents are complete and you have tested the EMC analyzer
mechanically and electrically.
\Accessories" contains the accessories shipped with the EMC analyzer
and the RF lter section. If the contents are incomplete or if the
EMC analyzer does not pass the operation verication tests in the
verication manual, notify the nearest Hewlett-Packard oce. If
the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows
signs of stress, also notify the carrier. Keep the shipping materials
for the carrier's inspection. The HP oce will arrange for repair or
replacement without waiting for a claim settlement.
If the shipping materials are in good condition, retain them for
possible future use. You may wish to ship the EMC analyzer to
another location or return it to Hewlett-Packard for service.
Accessories
The accessories shipped with the HP 8590 EM Series EMC analyzers

are listed below:
Table 1-1. EMC Analyzer Accessories
Description
HP Part Number
Comments
Memory Card (RAM)
08591-10008
Blank RAM memory card
Memory Card (ROM)
08590-10027
ROM memory card with EMC setups, limit lines, and correction
factors
Memory Card Holder
9222-1545
Two holders included
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f)
1250-0780
One adapter is shipped with the EMC analyzer for the INPUT
50
connector (not shipped with Option 026 and Option 027).
An additional adapter is shipped with
Option 010, the tracking generator option.
Adapter BNC (m) to SMA (f)
1250-1700
Shipped with Option 026 and Option 027 only.
Connector, APC-3.5 mm (f) to (f)
5061-5311
Shipped with Option 026 only.
Connector, Type N (m) to SMA (f)
5061-5311
Shipped with Option 027 only.
Reference Connector
1250-1499
Shipped connected between the 10 MHz REF OUT and the EXT
REF IN on the rear panel of the EMC analyzer.
Cable, 50
, BNC
8120-2682
Not shipped with Option 026 or Option 027.
Cable, SMA (m) to Type N (m)
8120-5148
Shipped with HP 8593EM and HP 8596EM.

Not shipped with Option 026 or Option 027.
Cable, SMA (m) to SMA (m)

Keyboard overlay
Power cable
08592-60061
5182-1204
Shipped with Option 026 and 027 only.

Overlay for external keyboard
See Table 1-3
The accessories shipped with the HP 85420E RF lter section are

listed below:
Table 1-2. RF Filter Section Accessories
Description
HP Part Number
Comments
Flexible cable, Type N (m) to

Type N (m), 260 mm (10.2 in)
8120-6479
RF OUTPUT to INPUT 50
cable

BNC (m), 250 mm (9.8 in)
8120- 6480
CAL OUT to 300 MHz INPUT 50

cable

Type N (m), 350 mm (13.8 in)
8120-6482
RF OUT 50
to TRACKING GENERATOR INPUT cable (Option
010 only)
Auxiliary interface cable
8120-6481
9-pin interface bus cable
Flexible sweep cables, 505 mm (20 in)
8120-5049
2 cables, High Sweep and Sweep Ramp cables
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f)
1250-0780
Two adapters
Cable BNC (m) to BNC (m),

30 cm (12 in)
8120-1838
Calibration cable
Front handles
5062-3989
Power cable
See Table 1-3
Preparing for Use
1-5
Preparing the EMC Analyzer Products for Use
The EMC analyzer preparation procedures are straightforward and

require minimal time to complete. There are two procedures for
preparing the equipment for use. The rst procedure, \Preparing the
EMC Analyzer", explains how to prepare the EMC analyzer for use.
The second procedure, \Preparing the RF Filter Section", explains
how to prepare the RF lter section for use with the EMC analyzer.
If you have the RF lter section and the EMC analyzer, rst, follow
the procedures in \Preparing the EMC Analyzer", then follow the
procedures in \Preparing the RF Filter Section".
The EMC analyzer procedures include:
Installing the EMC analyzer.

Performing frequency and amplitude self-calibration.
Performing a tracking generator self-calibration (for models
equipped with a tracking generator).
Performing a lter self-calibration (for models equipped with a
YIG-tuned lter).
The RF lter section procedures include:
Installing the RF lter section.

Connecting the EMC analyzer to the RF lter section.
Ensuring that the EMC analyzer is controlling the RF lter
section.
1-6
Preparing for Use
Preparing the EMC Analyzer

1 Unpack and inspect the EMC analyzer to
ensure that it is complete and that it was not

damaged during shipment. Refer to \Initial
Inspection" for specic instructions. Refer to
Table 1-1 for a list of accessories shipped with
the EMC analyzer.
CAUTION
Do not connect ac power until you have
veried that the line voltage is correct, the

proper fuse is installed, and the line voltage
selector switch is properly positioned, as
described in the following paragraphs.
Damage to the equipment could result.
Before connecting the EMC analyzer to the
power source, you must set the rear-panel
voltage selector switch correctly to adapt
the EMC analyzer to the power source. An
improper selector switch setting can damage
the EMC analyzer when it is turned on.
2 Set the voltage selector switch on the EMC analyzer's rear-panel to the line voltage range
(115 V or 230 V). Use a small screwdriver to slide the switch so that the proper voltage label
is visible.
Preparing for Use
1-7
3 Check the line fuse housed in the container at the rear of the analyzer. Insert the tip of a
screwdriver in the slot at the middle of the container and pry gently to extend the container.
The fuse closest to the EMC analyzer is the fuse in use. The container also houses a spare
fuse. If the fuse is defective or missing, install a new fuse in the proper position and reinsert
the fuse container.
WARNING
The EMC analyzer is equipped with a

three-wire power cable, in accordance with
international safety standards. When
connected to an appropriate power line
outlet, this cable grounds the instrument
cabinet.
Failure to ground the EMC analyzer properly
can result in personal injury. Before turning
on the EMC analyzer, you must connect its
protective earth terminals to the protective
conductor of the main power cable. Insert
the main power cable plug only into a
socket outlet that has a protective earth
contact. DO NOT defeat the earth-grounding
protection by using an extension cable,
power cable, or autotransformer without a
protective ground conductor.
If you are using an autotransformer, make
sure its common terminal is connected to
the protective earth contact of the power
source outlet socket.
1-8
Preparing for Use
4 Connect the power cord.
5 Ensure the reference connector is
connected between the 10 MHz OUTPUT and

EXT REF IN rear-panel connectors. If you
wish to use an external 10 MHz source as the
reference frequency, remove the reference
connector from the rear-panel and connect the
external reference source to the EXT REF IN
connector.
6 Press 4LINE5.
7 Record the rmware date here and keep it for reference.
Firmware date:
After a few seconds, the screen displays the rmware date in the YYMMDD format. For
example, 93.05.22 indicates May 22, 1993.
If you should need to call Hewlett-Packard for service or with any questions regarding
your EMC analyzer, it will be helpful to have the rmware date readily available.
Preparing for Use
1-9
8 Connect the type N (m) to BNC (f)
Allow the EMC analyzer to warm up at least

30 minutes before performing the
self-calibration routines.
connector (shipped with the EMC analyzer) to

the INPUT 50
. Connect the 50
coaxial cable
(also shipped with the EMC analyzer) between
the front-panel CAL OUT and the INPUT 50
connector.
9 Press 4CAL5 then CAL FREQ & AMPTD .

During the frequency routine, CAL: SWEEP,

CAL: FREQ, and CAL: SPAN are displayed as
the sequence progresses. For an Option 102,
CAL: FM GAIN + OFFSET is also displayed.
During the amplitude routine, CAL; AMPTD,
CAL: 3 dB BW, CAL: ATTEN, and
CAL: LOGAMP are displayed as the sequence
progresses. CAL: DONE appears when the
routine is completed.
Any failures or discrepancies produce an
error message on the screen.
1-10
Preparing for Use
10 Press CAL STORE to store the correction

factors when the frequency and amplitude

self-calibration routines are complete.
The self-calibration routines calibrate the

EMC analyzer by generating correction
factors. The softkey CAL STORE stores the
correction factors in the area of EMC
analyzer memory that is saved when the
EMC analyzer is turned o; the EMC
analyzer will automatically apply these
factors in future measurements. If
CAL STORE is not pressed, the correction
factors remain in eect until the EMC
analyzer is turned o.
If your EMC analyzer is an option 010,

Continue the calibration at \Tracking generator self-calibration".
If your EMC analyzer is not an option 010, but is an:
HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM,
Continue the calibration at \YTF self-calibration".
HP 8591EM or HP 8594EM, and
Came with the RF lter section, continue at \Preparing the RF Filter Section".
Did not come with the RF lter section, continue at Chapter 2. The instrument
preparation is complete.
Preparing for Use
1-11
Tracking generator self-calibration
For EMC analyzers with Option 010 only.
1 Connect the tracking generator output (RF 2 Press 4CAL5 then More 1 of 4 ,
OUT 50
) to the INPUT 50
connector using
More 2 of 4 , and CAL TRK GEN to start the
the BNC calibrator cable and a BNC-to-Type N tracking generator self-calibration.

adapter.
3 After the test is complete, press

CAL STORE to save the calibration data.
If you EMC analyzer is an HP 8593EM,

HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM,
Continue the calibration at \YTF
self-calibration".
If you EMC analyzer is an HP 8591EM or
HP 8594EM, and
Came with the RF lter section, continue
at \Preparing the RF Filter Section".
Did not come with the RF lter section,
continue at Chapter 2. The instrument
preparation is complete.
1-12
Preparing for Use
YTF self-calibration
For HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM, and HP 8596EM EMC analyzers only.
1 Connect a low-loss cable from 100 MHz
Comb OUT (the CAL OUT connector on the

HP 8595EM) to the INPUT 50
connector.
2 Press 4CAL5 then More 1 of 4 ,

More 2 of 4 , More 3 of 4 , and CAL YTF
to start the YTF self-calibration.
3 After the YTF self-calibration routine is

complete, press CAL STORE to save the
calibration data. The calibration time varies

between 3 and 7 minutes depending on the
frequency range of the EMC analyzer.
If your EMC analyzer came with the RF

lter section, continue at \Preparing the RF
Filter Section".
If your EMC analyzer did not come with the
RF lter section, continue at Chapter 2. The
instrument preparation is complete.
Preparing for Use
1-13
Preparing the RF Filter Section

1 Unpack and inspect the RF lter section to 2 Install the handles on the RF lter section
ensure that it is complete and that it was not according to the installation procedure
damaged during shipment. Refer to \Initial
shipped with the handles.
Inspection" for specic instructions. Refer to
Table 1-2 for a list of accessories shipped with
the RF lter section.
3 Turn the EMC analyzer's line switch o.
1-14
Preparing for Use
4 Place the EMC analyzer on top of the RF
lter section.
5 Set the voltage selector switch on the RF lter section's rear-panel to the line voltage
range (115 V or 230 V). Use a small screwdriver to slide the switch so that the proper voltage
label is visible.
6 Check the line fuse housed in the container at the rear of the RF lter section. If the fuse
is defective or missing, install a new fuse.
Preparing for Use
1-15
CAUTION
7 Connect the power cord to the RF lter
section.
Before turning this instrument on, make
sure that the line voltage selector switch is
set to the voltage of the power supply and
the correct fuse is installed. Ensure that the
supply voltage is in the specied range.
Do not position this instrument where it is
dicult to disconnect the power cord.
8 Connect a cable from the RF lter
9 Connect the AUX INTERFACE cable from

section's HIGH SWEEP connector to the EMC the RF lter section's AUX INTERFACE
analyzer's HIGH SWEEP IN/OUT (TTL)
connector to the EMC analyzer's AUX
connector. Connect a cable from the RF lter INTERFACE connector.
section's SWEEP RAMP connector to the EMC
analyzer's SWEEP OUTPUT connector.
1-16
Preparing for Use

section's 300 MHz INPUT 50
connector to the section's RF OUT connector to the EMC
EMC analyzer's CAL OUT connector.
analyzer's INPUT 50
connector.
12 For Option 010 models only, connect a

cable from the RF lter section's TRACKING
GENERATOR INPUT connector to the EMC
analyzer's RF OUT 50
connector.
13 Turn the EMC analyzer's line switch on.
Preparing for Use
1-17
14 Verify that the RF lter section turns on
when the EMC analyzer's line switch is turned

on.
15 Press 4SETUP5.
16 Press the 9 kHz -150 kHz softkey and verify that the RF lter section's INPUT 1 LED
is on.
1-18
Preparing for Use
17 Press the 200 MHz -1 GHz softkey and verify that the RF lter section's INPUT 2 LED
is on.
Continue at Chapter 2. The instrument preparation is complete.
Preparing for Use
1-19
Power Cables
WARNING
The EMC analyzer and the RF lter section are equipped with
three-wire power cables, in accordance with international safety
standards. When connected to an appropriate power line outlet, these
cables ground the instrument cabinet.
This is a Safety Class 1 Product provided with a protective
earthing ground incorporated in the power cord. The mains
plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a
protective earth contact. Any interruption of the protective
conductor inside or outside of the instrument is likely to make
the instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Various power cables are available to connect the EMC analyzer to the
types of ac power outlets unique to specic geographic areas. The
cable appropriate for the area in which the EMC analyzer is originally
shipped is included with the unit. You can order additional ac power
cables for use in dierent areas. Table 1-3 lists the available ac power
cables, illustrates the plug congurations, and identies the geographic
area in which each cable is appropriate.
1-20
Preparing for Use
Table 1-3. AC Power Cables Available
Preparing for Use
1-21
Preparing a Static-Safe Work Station
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic

components. Therefore, all work performed on assemblies consisting
of electronic components should be done at a static-safe work station.
Figure 1-3 shows an example of a static-safe work station. Two types
of ESD protection are shown:
a conductive table mat and wrist strap combination
a conductive oor mat and heel strap combination
Figure 1-3. Static-safe work station.
These two types of ESD protection must be used together.

Refer to Table 1-4 for a list of static-safe accessories and their
HP part numbers.
CAUTION
1-22
Preparing for Use
Do not touch the edge-connector contacts or trace surfaces with

bare hands. Always handle board assemblies by the edges.
Do not use erasers to clean the edge-connector contacts. Erasers
generate static electricity and degrade the electrical quality of the
contacts by removing the thin gold plating.
Do not use paper of any kind to clean the edge-connector contacts.
Paper or lint particles left on the contact surface can cause
intermittent electrical connections.
Reducing ESD damage
To help reduce the amount of ESD damage that occurs during testing
and servicing use the following guidelines:
Be sure that all instruments are properly earth-grounded to prevent
buildup of static charge.
Personnel should be grounded with a resistor-isolated wrist strap
before touching the center pin of any connector and before
removing any assembly from the unit.
Before connecting any coaxial cable to an instrument connector for
the rst time each day, momentarily short the center and outer
conductors of the cable together.
Handle all PC board assemblies and electronic components only at
static-safe work stations.
Store or transport PC board assemblies and electronic components
in static-shielding containers.
PC board assembly edge-connector contacts may be cleaned by
using a lint-free cloth with a solution of 80% electronics-grade
isopropyl alcohol and 20% deionized water. This procedure should
be performed at a static-safe work station.
Static-safe ESD accessories

Table 1-4. Static-Safe ESD Accessories
HP Part
Number
Description
9300-0797 Set includes: 3M static control mat 0.6 m 2 1.2 m (2 ft

2 4 ft) and 4.6 m (15 ft) ground wire. (The wrist-strap
and wrist-strap cord are not included. They must be
ordered separately.)
9300-0865 Ground wire, 4.6 m (15 ft)
9300-0980 Wrist-strap cord 1.5 m (5 ft)
9300-1383 Wrist-strap, color black, stainless steel, without cord,
has four adjustable links and a 7 mm post-type
connection.
9300-1169 ESD heel-strap (reusable 6 to 12 months).
Order the following by calling HP DIRECT at (800) 538-8787 or
through any Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Oce.
Preparing for Use
1-23
2
Getting Acquainted with the EMC Analyzer
This chapter provides an introduction to the EMC analyzer. The

features included in this chapter are:
front-panel features
rear-panel features
an explanation of screen annotation
an overview of menus and softkeys
the procedure for making a basic measurement
The EMC analyzer also supplies a spectrum analyzer operating mode,
with screen annotation, described in \Spectrum Analyzer Mode Screen
Annotation" at the end of this chapter.
2-1
Front-Panel Features
The following section provides a brief description of front-panel

features.
Figure 2-1. Front-panel feature overview.

1
Front-Panel Display is the area on the front-panel where
information is provided to the user. That information includes

the:
Active Function Block area. Functions appearing in this block
include, for example, marker, span, center frequency, and
reference level.
Message Block area. This block is where MEAS UNCAL and the
asterisk (*) appear. If one or more functions are manually
set (uncoupled), and the amplitude or frequency becomes
uncalibrated, MEAS UNCAL appears. (Press 4AUTO COUPLE5, then
AUTO ALL , to recouple functions.) The asterisk indicates that
the display is not updated for new settings.
Softkey labels. Softkey labels are the annotation on the
screen next to the unlabeled keys. Most of the labeled keys
on the EMC analyzer's front panel (also called front-panel
keys) access menus of related softkeys.
Softkeys are the unlabeled keys next to the screen.
4FREQUENCY5, 4SPAN5, and 4AMPLITUDE5 are the three large
dark-gray keys that activate the primary EMC analyzer tuning
functions and access menus of related functions.
4SETUP5 and 4TEST5 are the dark-gray keys that access menus of
functions used to setup the instrument, then make fast and
accurate EMC measurements.
2
3
4
2-2
Note
INSTRUMENT STATE functions aect the state of the entire
EMC analyzer. Self-calibration routines and special-function

menus are accessed with these keys. The green 4PRESET5 key
resets the entire EMC analyzer state and can be used as a
\panic" button when you wish to return to a known state.
If you wish to reset the EMC analyzer conguration to the state
it was in when it was originally shipped from the factory, use
DEFAULT CONFIG . Refer to the DEFAULT CONFIG softkey description
in Chapter 17 for more information.
COPY5 key prints or plots screen data. Use 4CONFIG5,

Plot Config or Print Config , and COPY DEV PRNT PLT
before pressing 4COPY5.
4
2-3
8
9
10
Caution
Note
2-4
MEASUREMENT CONTROL functions access menus that

allow you to make manual or automated quasi-peak average
measurements, adjust the IF bandwidth, adjust the sweep
time, store and manipulate trace data, demodulate signals,
control the markers, control the instrument display, and make
measurements.
WINDOWS functions include 4ON5 to turn on the windows
display mode, 4NEXT5 for switching between windows, and
4ZOOM5 for controlling the zone span and center frequency.
DATA keys, STEP keys, and knob allow you to change the
numeric value of an active function.
INPUT 50
is the signal input for the spectrum analyzer.
Excessive signal input will damage the EMC analyzer input attenuator
and the input mixer. The maximum power that the EMC analyzer can
tolerate appears on the front panel.
Excessive dc voltage can also damage the input attenuator. For your
particular instrument, note the maximum dc voltage that should not
be exceeded on the EMC analyzer front panel (under the INPUT 50
connector).
11
12
13
14
15
PROBE PWR provides the power for an active probe and other
accessories.
CAL OUT provides a calibration signal of 300 MHz at 87 dBV.
VOL-INTEN changes the brightness of the screen display, and
the volume of the speaker.
Memory card reader reads from a read-only (ROM) or random
access (RAM) memory card. The memory card reader writes to
a RAM card.
100 MHz COMB OUT is the output of the comb generator of
the HP 8593EM and HP 8596EM EMC analyzers. The output is
used to perform a CAL YTF .
16
17
Caution
RF OUT 50
is the output for the built-in tracking generator.
Option 010 only.
4
LINE5 turns the instrument on or o and performs an

instrument check.
If the tracking generator output power is too high, it may damage the
device under test. Do not exceed the maximum power that the device
under test can tolerate.
Table 2-1. RF Output Frequency Range
Model Number
HP 8591EM
HP 8593EM
HP 8594EM
HP 8595EM
HP 8596EM
Note
Option 010
Frequency Range
100 kHz to 1.8 GHz

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz
9 kHz to 2.9 GHz
9 kHz to 2.9 GHz
9 kHz to 2.9 GHz
The instrument continues to draw power when it is plugged into the

ac power source, even if the line power switch is o.
2-5
Rear-Panel Features
The following section provides a brief description of rear-panel

features.
Figure 2-2. Rear-panel feature overview.

1
2
3
4
5
2-6
EXT ALC INPUT allows the use of an external detector or
power meter for automatic leveling control of the tracking

generator. Allows the use of an external detector for an
HP 8591EM, HP 8593EM, HP 8594EM, HP 8595EM, or

HP 8596EM Option 010 only.
TV TRIG OUTPUT (TTL) provides TV trigger output using
TTL and negative-edge triggering. For Options 101 and 102
combined or for Option 301.
EARPHONE connector provides a connection for an earphone
jack instead of using the internal speaker. Not used in Option
703.
SWEEP+TUNE OUTPUT provides a voltage ramp that is
proportional to the EMC analyzer span (0 to 10 V) plus the

tuning voltage of the LO. For Option 009 only.
LO OUT provides the output of the rst LO, which is
proportional to the frequency that the EMC analyzer is tuned
to. For Option 009 or 010 only.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Caution
EXT REF IN accepts an external frequency source to provide
the 10 MHz, 02 to +10 dBm frequency reference used by the

EMC analyzer.
10 MHz REF OUTPUT provides a 10 MHz, 0 dBm minimum,
time-based reference signal.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR adapts the unit to the power source:
115 V or 230 V.
Power input is the input for the line power source. Make
sure that the line-power source outlet has a protective ground
contact.
MONITOR OUTPUT drives an external monitor with a signal
that has a 15.7 kHz horizontal synchronizing rate. It can also be
switched to provide an NTSC format output which is compatible
with VHS video recorders or a PAL format which is compatible
with PAL/SECAM video recorders.
AUX INTERFACE provides a nine-pin \D" subminiature
connector for control of external devices, such as the
HP 85420E Option 1EM RF lter section. Refer to HP 8590 EM
Series EMC Analyzer Verication Guide for a more detailed
description.
Turn o the EMC analyzer before connecting the AUX INTERFACE

connector to a device. Failure to do so may result in loss of
factory-correction constants.
Do not exceed the current limits for the +5 V supply when using the
AUX INTERFACE connector. Exceeding the current limits may result
in loss of factory-correction constants.
Do not use the AUX INTERFACE as a video monitor interface.
Damage to the video monitor will result.
2-7
12
13
14
15
16
17
Caution
interface buses that support remote instrument operation and

direct plotting or printing of screen data. Parallel interface
supports parallel printing.
AUX IF OUTPUT is a 50
, 21.4 MHz IF output that is the
down-converted signal of the RF input of the EMC analyzer.
Amplitude-correction factors are not applied to this signal.
AUX VIDEO OUTPUT provides detected video output
(before the analog-to-digital conversion) proportional to
vertical de ection of the trace. Output is from 0 V to 1 V.
Amplitude-correction factors are not applied to this signal.
EXT TRIG INPUT (TTL) accepts the positive edge of an
external voltage input that triggers the EMC analyzer internal
sweep source.
HIGH SWEEP IN/OUT (TTL) indicates when the EMC analyzer
is sweeping or can be grounded to stop sweeping.
EXT KEYBOARD connector is provided with the optional
interface connector. The external keyboard is not included with
the EMC analyzer. The external keyboard can be used to enter
screen titles, prexes, remote commands, and writing simple
DLP's.
Turn o the EMC analyzer before connecting an external keyboard to

the EMC analyzer.
18
2-8
Interface connectors are interfaces for HP-IB or RS-232
SWEEP OUTPUT provides a voltage ramp proportional to the
sweep and the EMC analyzer span (0 V to 10 V).
Data controls
Data controls are used to change values for functions such as center
frequency, start frequency, resolution bandwidth, and marker
position.
The data controls will change the active function in a manner
prescribed by that function. For example, you can change center
frequency in ne steps with the knob, in discrete steps with the
step keys, or to an exact value with the number/units keypad. For
example, resolution bandwidth, which can be set to discrete values
only, is changed to predetermined values with any of the data
controls.
Hold key
Deactivate functions with HOLD which is found under the 4DISPLAY5
key. The active function readout is blanked, indicating that no entry
will be made inadvertently by using the knob, step keys, or keypad.
(Pressing a function key re-enables the data controls.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Knob
The knob allows continuous change of functions, such as center

frequency, reference level, and marker position. It also changes the
values of many functions that change in increments only. Clockwise
rotation of the knob increases values. For continuous changes, the
extent of alteration is determined by the size of the measurement
range; the speed at which the knob is turned does not aect the rate
at which the values are changed.
The knob enables you to change the center frequency, start or stop
frequency, or reference level in smooth scrolling action. The smooth
scrolling feature is designed to move the trace display to the latest
function value as the knob is turned. When either center frequency
or reference level is adjusted, the signal will shift right or left or
up or down with the rotation of the knob before a new sweep is
actually taken. An asterisk is placed in the message block (the upper
right-hand corner of the EMC analyzer display) to indicate that the
data on-screen does not re ect data at the current setting.
Note
When using the knob to change frequency or amplitude settings,

the trace data is shifted. Therefore, when using MAX HOLD A ,
MAX HOLD B , or MIN HOLD C , moving the center frequency with the
knob will not simulate a drifting signal.
Number/units keypad
The number/units keypad allows entry of exact values for many of

the EMC analyzer functions. You may include a decimal point in the
number portion. If not, the decimal point is placed at the end of the
number.
Numeric entries must be terminated with a units key. The units keys
change the active function in a manner prescribed by that function.
For example, the units keys for frequency span are 4GHz5, 4MHz5, 4kHz5,
and 4Hz5, whereas the units for reference level are 4+dBV5, 40dBV5,
4mV5, and 4V5.
2-9
Note
If an entry from the number/units keypad does not coincide with an

allowed function value (for example, that of a 12 MHz bandwidth),
the EMC analyzer defaults to the nearest allowable value.
Step keys
The step keys allow discrete increases or decreases of the active

function value. The step size depends upon the EMC analyzer
measurement range or on a preset amount. Each press results
in a single step change. For those parameters with xed values,
the next value in a sequence is selected each time a step key is
pressed. Changes are predictable and can be set for some functions.
Out-of-range values or out-of-sequence values will not occur using
these keys.
Fine-focus control
The ne-focus control is located on the side of the EMC analyzer. Use
the following procedure to adjust the ne-focus control:
1. Adjust the front-panel intensity control for a comfortable viewing
intensity.
2. Use an adjustment tool or small screwdriver to access the
ne-focus adjustment. Refer to Figure 2-3. Adjust for a focused
display.
Figure 2-3. Adjusting the ne focus.
2-10
EMC Analyzer Screen Annotation
Figure 2-4 shows an example of screen annotation as it appears on

the screen of the EMC analyzer. Table 2-2 lists the screen annotation
features numerically and refers to Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4. EMC analyzer screen annotation.
In Figure 2-4, item number 19 refers to the trigger and sweep modes
of the EMC analyzer. The rst letter (\F") indicates the EMC analyzer
is in free-run trigger mode. The second letter (\S") indicates the EMC
analyzer is in single-sweep mode. (\C") indicates the EMC analyzer is
in continuous-sweep mode.
Item number 20 refers to the trace modes of the EMC analyzer. The
rst letter (\W") indicates the EMC analyzer is in clear-write mode.
The second letter is \A," representing trace A. The next two letters
(\SB") indicate the store-blank mode (\S") for trace B (\B"). The
trace mode annotation for trace C is displayed under the trace mode
annotation of trace A. In Figure 2-4, the trace C trace mode is \SC,"
indicating trace C (\C") is in the store-blank mode (\S").
The WINDOWS display mode splits the screen into two separate
displays. Only one of these displays is active at a time. The active
window will have a solid line around the graticule, rather than
a broken line. The complete annotation is not available for each
window because of space limitations.
2-11
Table 2-2. EMC Analyzer Screen Annotation

Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Feature
reference level
active function block
time/date and command line
screen title
autorange
active and measurement detector
external preamp
marker
softkeys
frequency span or stop
frequency
sweep time
frequency oset
AVG bandwidth
IF bandwidth
center or stop frequency
Item
Feature
16 threshold
17 corrections factors on
18 amplitude correction
factors on
19 trigger
20 trace mode
21 display line
22 video average
23 attenuator setting
24 amplitude scale
Table 2-3 shows the dierent screen annotation codes for trace,
trigger, and sweep modes.
Table 2-3. Screen Annotation for Trace, Trigger, and Sweep Modes
W
M
M
V
S
2-12
=
=
=
=
=
Trace Mode
clear-write (traces A/B/C)

maximum hold (traces A/B)
minimum hold (trace C)
view (traces A/B/C)
store-blank (traces A/B/C)
F
L
V
E
T
=
=
=
=
=
Trigger Mode
Sweep Mode
C = continuous
free run
S = single sweep
line
video
external
TV (Options 101 and 102 only)
Menu and Softkey Overview
The keys labeled FREQUENCY, CAL, and MKR are all examples of
front-panel keys. Pressing most front-panel keys accesses menus of
functions that are displayed along the right side of the display. These
menus are called softkey menus.
Softkey menus list functions other than those accessed directly by
the front-panel keys. To activate a function on the softkey menu,
press the unlabeled key immediately to the right of the annotation on
the screen. The unlabeled keys next to the annotation on the display
screen are called softkeys.
Front-panel keys are designated with a box around the key label, for
example, 4AMPLITUDE5; softkeys are designated by shading on the key
label, for example, REF LVL . The softkeys that are displayed depend
on which front-panel key is pressed and which menu level is enabled.
If a softkey function's value can be changed, it is called an active
function. The function label of the active function appears in inverse
video. For example, press 4AMPLITUDE5. This calls up the softkey menu
of related amplitude functions. Note the function labeled REF LVL
appears in inverse video. REF LVL also appears in the active function
block, indicating that it is the active amplitude function and can now
be changed using any of the data entry controls.
A softkey with ON and OFF in its label can be used to turn the
softkey's function on or o. To turn the function on, press the
softkey so that ON is underlined. To turn the function o, press
the softkey so that OFF is underlined. The following example
demonstrates how an ON or OFF softkey function will be annotated:
VID AVG ON OFF (ON).
A function with AUTO and MAN in the label can either be
auto-coupled or have its value manually changed. The function's
value can be changed manually by pressing the softkey until MAN is
underlined, and then changing its value with the numeric keypad,
knob, or step keys. To auto-couple a function, press the softkey
so that AUTO is underlined. The following example demonstrates
how an AUTO or MAN softkey function will be annotated:
ATTEN AUTO MAN (AUTO).
A summary of all front-panel keys and their related softkeys can be
found in Chapter 16, \Key Menus".
2-13
Making a Basic Measurement
Basic measurements simply involve tuning the instrument to place a

signal on the screen, then placing a marker on one or more signals,
measuring those signals, and moving those signals to a list.
Caution
Do not exceed the maximum input power that is printed on the front
panel of the EMC analyzer.
Let's begin using the EMC analyzer by measuring an input signal.
Since the 300 MHz calibration signal (CAL OUT) is readily available,
we will use it as our input signal.
1. Turn the instrument on and press:
4PRESET5
2. Verify that the start frequency is set to 200 MHz and the stop
frequency to 1.0 GHz. If not, the instrument has been congured
as a spectrum analyzer. Press:
4MODE5
EMC ANALYZER
3. Connect CAL OUT to the EMC analyzer INPUT 50

connector
(on the front panel) using an appropriate BNC cable and a
BNC-to-Type N adapter.
Option 026 only: Connect the SMA (m) to SMA (m) cable to the
EMC analyzer input with an APC-3.5 connector. Connect the
cable to CAL OUT with the BNC-to-SMA adapter.
To access the marker, press:
4TEST5
MARKER is now displayed in the active function block, and the
MARKER softkey label appears in inverse video to indicate that the
marker is the active function. Place the marker on a signal by
pressing:
4 5
Refer to Figure 2-5.
2-14
Figure 2-5. Placing the marker on a signal.
4. The measured marker values are displayed in the upper-right

corner of the display after pressing:
MEASURE AT MKR
5. The measure-at-marker results are saved to an internal list by

pressing:
ADD TO LIST
Signal Added is now displayed on the screen.
6. To place the marker on a second signal, press:

4*5 (one or more times)
7. To add the second signal to the internal list, press:
MEASURE AT MKR
ADD TO LIST
Repeat the process and place a third signal in the internal list.
2-15
8. To display the list on the screen, press:

More 1 of 3
SIG LIST ON OFF
The measure-at-marker results in the form of a list are displayed

on the upper portion of the screen. Refer to Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6. Displaying a list on the screen.
2-16
9. The list can be graphed on screen in either log or linear frequency

scales by pressing:
Save/Rcl List
10. To view the signals in the list on a log graph, press:

SAVE LOG GRAPH
11. To clear the display's active function area, press:

4ENTER5
Note
Figure 2-7. Displaying the list as a log graph.
If the EMC analyzer is connected to either a printer or plotter:

a. Press the 4COPY5 key to obtain a printed copy of the graph.
Changing the conguration may be required, or
b. Press the 4OUTPUT5 key to access the softkeys that will help you:
dene a report.
dene a list.
add up to two pages of text using a keyboard.
12. To return the instrument to a known state, press:
4PRESET5
2-17
Figure 2-8 shows an example of screen annotation as it appears on the

screen of the EMC analyzer when in the SPECTRUM ANALYZER mode.
Instrument modes are changed using the 4MODE5 front-panel key.
Table 2-4 lists the screen annotation features numerically and refers to
Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8. Spectrum analyzer mode screen annotation.
In Figure 2-8, item number 21 refers to the trigger and sweep modes
of the spectrum analyzer. The rst letter (\F") indicates the spectrum
analyzer is in free-run trigger mode. The second letter (\S") indicates
the spectrum analyzer is in single-sweep mode.
Item number 22 refers to the trace modes of the spectrum analyzer
mode. The rst letter (\W") indicates the spectrum analyzer is in
clear-write mode. The second letter is \A," representing trace A. The
next two letters (\SB") indicate the store-blank mode (\S") for trace B
(\B"). The trace mode annotation for trace C is displayed under the
trace mode annotation of trace A. In Figure 2-8, the trace C trace
mode is \SC," indicating trace C (\C") is in the store-blank mode (\S").
The WINDOWS display mode splits the screen into two separate
displays. Only one of these displays is active at a time. The active
window will have a solid line around the graticule rather than a
broken line. The complete annotation is not available for each
window because of space limitations.
2-18
Table 2-4.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Feature
detector mode
reference level
time and date display
screen title
RF attenuation
preamplier gain
external keyboard entry
marker or signal track readout
measurement-uncalibrated or
function-in-progress
messages
service request
frequency span or stop
frequency
sweep time
frequency oset
Item
Feature
14 video bandwidth
15 resolution bandwidth
16 center frequency or
start frequency
17 remote operation
18 threshold
19 correction factors on
20 amplitude correction
factors on
21 trigger
22 trace mode
23 video average
24 display line
25 amplitude oset
26 amplitude scale
27 active function block
Table 2-5 shows the dierent screen annotation codes for trace,
trigger, and sweep modes.
Table 2-5. Screen Annotation for Trace, Trigger, and Sweep Modes
W
M
M
V
S
=
=
=
=
=
Trace Mode
clear-write (traces A/B/C)

maximum hold (traces A/B)
minimum hold (trace C)
view (traces A/B/C)
store-blank (traces A/B/C)
F
L
V
E
T
=
=
=
=
=
Trigger Mode
Sweep Mode
C = continuous
free run
S = single sweep
line
video
external
TV (Options 101 and 102 only)
2-19
3
Calibration
This chapter describes procedures for calibrating the EMC analyzer. In

this chapter you will:
improve accuracy with self-calibration
learn to use the memory card
set the analyzer clock
set the AutoCal time
Improving Accuracy with Self-Calibration Routines
Data from the self-calibration routine is necessary for EMC analyzer

operation. Executing the self-calibration routine regularly ensures
that the EMC analyzer is using current calibration data that improves
the EMC analyzer frequency and amplitude accuracy. Press the 4CAL5
key to view the self-calibration routine menus. The last softkey on
this menu, labeled More 1 of 4 , provides access to additional
self-calibration functions. For more detailed information on the
self-calibration softkeys, refer to Chapter 17, \Key Dictionary".
The self-calibration routines add correction factors to internal
circuitry. The addition of the correction factors is required to meet
frequency and amplitude specications.
When the correction factors are added to internal circuitry, CORR
(corrected) appears on the left side of the screen.
Warm-up time
In order for the EMC analyzer to meet its specications, allow
the EMC analyzer to warm up for 30 minutes, after being turned
on, before attempting to make any calibrated measurements. Be
sure to calibrate the EMC analyzer only after it has met operating
temperature conditions.
The EMC analyzer frequency and amplitude self-calibration routines
are initiated by the CAL FREQ & AMPTD softkey in the menu located
under the 4CAL5 key.
1. To calibrate the instrument, connect the EMC analyzer CAL OUT to
the INPUT 50
connector with an appropriate cable.
Calibration
3-1
Note
A low-loss cable should be used for accurate calibration. Use the 50
cable shipped with the EMC analyzer.

2. On the EMC analyzer, press:
4CAL5
CAL FREQ & AMPTD
Cal signal not found will be displayed if CAL OUT is not
connected to the EMC analyzer input. The frequency and

amplitude self-calibration functions take approximately 5 minutes
to nish, at which time the internal adjustment data is in working
RAM.
3. To save this data in the area of EMC analyzer memory that is saved
when the EMC analyzer is turned o, press:
CAL STORE
Note
To interrupt the calibration routines started by CAL FREQ ,

CAL AMPTD , or CAL FREQ & AMPTD , press 4PRESET5, 4CAL5,
More 1 of 4 , and CAL FETCH . CAL FETCH retrieves the previous
correction factors. Improperly interrupting the self-calibration
routines may result in corrupt correction factors. (If this occurs,
press CAL FREQ & AMPTD to rerun the frequency and amplitude
self-calibration routines.)
The frequency and amplitude self-calibration functions can be done

separately by using the CAL FREQ or CAL AMPTD softkeys instead of
CAL FREQ & AMPTD .
Note
If the frequency calibration CAL FREQ and the amplitude calibration

CAL AMPTD self-calibration routines are used, the frequency
calibration should be performed before the amplitude calibration,
unless the frequency data is known to be accurate.
The CAL FREQ softkey starts the frequency self-calibration routine.

This routine adjusts the frequency, sweep time, and span accuracy in
approximately 2 minutes.
The CAL AMPTD softkey starts the amplitude calibration routine. This
routine takes approximately 3 minutes to adjust the bandwidths, log
and linear switching, IF gains, IF frequency centering, RF attenuation,
and log amplier. When the amplitude calibration routine has
nished, the preset display returns and CAL DONE is displayed.
Although the EMC analyzer stores the correction factors in
battery-backed RAM, the data will not be saved when the EMC
analyzer power is turned o unless the data has been stored with
CAL STORE . Using CAL STORE stores the correction factors
in an area of EMC analyzer memory that is accessed when the
EMC analyzer is turned on. After the frequency and amplitude
self-calibration routines are complete, CORR (corrected) now appears
3-2
Calibration
on the left side of the screen, indicating that the EMC analyzer is
using its frequency and amplitude correction factors. Correction
factors can be turned o by pressing CORRECT ON OFF . When OFF
is underlined, most amplitude correction factors and some frequency
correction factors are not used.
If the self-calibration routines cannot be performed, refer to \Check
the Basics" in Chapter 15.
Note
When used with an HP 85420E Option 1EM RF lter section, the lter
section must be disconnected from the analyzer prior to performing
the self-calibration routines.
Performing the tracking generator self-calibration routine

(Option 010 only)
In order for the tracking generator to meet its specications, allow
the EMC analyzer to warm up for 30 minutes, after being turned on,
before attempting to make any calibrated measurements. Be sure to
calibrate the EMC analyzer and the tracking generator only after the
EMC analyzer has met operating temperature conditions.
Note
Since the tracking-generator self-calibration routine uses the absolute

amplitude level of the EMC analyzer, the EMC analyzer amplitude
should be calibrated prior to using CAL TRK GEN .
1. To calibrate the tracking generator, connect the tracking generator

output (RF OUT 50
) to the EMC analyzer INPUT 50
connector,
using an appropriate cable and adapters.
Note
A low-loss cable should be used for accurate calibration. Use the 50
cable shipped with the EMC analyzer.

2. To calibrate the tracking generator, press:
4CAL5
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
CAL TRK GEN
TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND will be displayed if the tracking generator
output is not connected to the EMC analyzer input.

3. To save this calibration data in the area of EMC analyzer memory
that is saved when the EMC analyzer is turned o, press:
4CAL5
CAL STORE
Calibration
3-3
Performing the YTF self-calibration routine
HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM only

For HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM, and HP 8596EM EMC analyzers only, the
YTF self-calibration routine should be performed periodically. Refer to

\When Is Self-Calibration Needed?" in the following section for some
helpful guidelines on how often the self-calibration routines should be
performed.
1. For the HP 8593EM and HP 8596EM, connect a low-loss cable (such
as HP part number 8120-5148) from 100 MHz COMB OUT to the
EMC analyzer input. For the HP 8595EM, connect the cable from
the CAL OUT to the EMC analyzer input.
2. To calibrate, press:
4CAL5
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
More 3 of 4
CAL YTF
The YTF self-calibration routine completes in approximately:

Model Number Calibration Time
HP 8593EM
HP 8595EM
HP 8596EM
7 minutes
3 minutes
5 minutes
3. To save the calibration factors in memory, press:

4CAL5
CAL STORE
4. To return to normal operation, press:

4PRESET5
When is self-calibration needed?
While it is dicult to provide general advice for your specic

measurement needs, the following suggestions may help you decide
when to use the self-calibration features:
1. Perform the frequency and amplitude self-calibration routines
whenever the instrument experiences signicant environmental
changes such as temperature (65 C), humidity, shock, or vibration
(such as may occur during shipping or transport). This is especially
important if the frequency and amplitude self-calibration routines
were performed the last time in a dierent environment.
2. If the environment is relatively stable (for example, a lab
environment), use CAL FREQ & AMPTD monthly. After being
turned o overnight, the EMC analyzer will need to warm up, but
should not require self-calibration.
3-4
Calibration
3. To achieve optimal amplitude accuracy for relative measurements:

a. Keep the EMC analyzer in a stable environment.
b. Use CAL FREQ & AMPTD before beginning the rst
measurement.
c. Keep the EMC analyzer turned on between measurements.
d. Do not use CAL FREQ & AMPTD before subsequent
measurements (the amplitude drift is normally smaller than the
self-calibration uncertainty).
4. If you change the input signal for EXT REF IN, run the frequency
and amplitude self-calibration routines using CAL OUT. Amplitude
calibration is required to improve IF centering.
5. If preselector peaking ( PRESEL PEAK ) has more than a 2 dB eect
on the signal amplitude when in BAND 1 or above, and in a single
band sweep, then perform the YTF self-calibration routine and
store the data with CAL STORE . The YTF self-calibration routine
improves the preselector default values. (HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM,
or HP 8596EM only.)
6. If accurate self-calibration is needed temporarily in a dierent
environment, use CAL FREQ & AMPTD , but do not press
CAL STORE . The temporary correction factors will be used until
the EMC analyzer is turned o or until CAL FETCH is pressed.
Calibration
3-5
Memory Card Insertion and Battery Replacement
Use the following information to ensure that the memory card is

inserted correctly. Improper insertion causes error messages to occur,
but generally does not damage the card or instrument. Care must be
taken, however, not to force the card into place. The cards are easy
to insert when installed properly.
1. Locate the arrow printed on the card's label.
2. Insert the card with its arrow matching the raised arrow on the
bezel around the card-insertion slot. Refer to Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1. Inserting the memory card.
3. Press the card into the slot. When correctly inserted, about 19 mm
(0.75 in) of the card is exposed from the slot.
3-6
Calibration
Changing the memory card battery

Note
It is recommended that the memory card battery be changed every

2 years. The battery is a lithium commercial CMOS type battery, part
number CR 2016.
The minimum lifetime of the battery (under ordinary conditions) is
more than 2 years.
The date that the memory card battery was installed is either
engraved on the side of the memory card or written on a label on the
memory card.
If the memory card does not have a label with the date that the
battery was installed, use the date code engraved on the side of the
memory card. The date code engraved on the memory card consists
of numbers and letters engraved in the black plastic on the side of
the memory card. Refer to Figure 3-2. The rst number indicates
the year, the following two characters indicate the month, and the
following number indicates the week in the month that the memory
card battery was installed. For example, 8OC3 indicates the battery
was installed in the third week in October in 1988.
Figure 3-2. Memory card battery date code location.
Calibration
3-7
Procedure to change the memory card battery
The battery is located beside the card's write-protect switch on the

end opposite the connector.
Caution
The battery power enables the memory card's memory to retain data.
You can lose the data when the battery is removed. Replace the
battery while the card is installed in a powered-up instrument.
1. Locate the groove along the edge of the battery clip. Refer to
Figure 3-3.
2. Gently pry the battery clip out of the card. The battery ts within
this clip.
3. Replace the battery, making sure the plus (+) sign on the battery is
on the same side as the plus (+) sign on the clip.
4. Insert the battery clip into the memory card, holding the clip as
oriented in Figure 3-3. (Face the \open" edge of the clip toward
the write-protect switch on the memory card.)
5. Write the date that the battery was replaced on the memory card
label. This will help you to remember when the battery should be
replaced.
Figure 3-3. Memory card battery replacement.
3-8
Calibration
Analyzer Battery Information
The HP 8590 EM series EMC analyzers use a 3.6 V lithium battery

to enable the EMC analyzer memory to retain data. The date when
the battery was installed is on a label on the rear panel of the EMC
analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-4.
The minimum life expectancy of the battery is 8 years at 25 C, or
1 year at 55 C. If you experience problems with the battery or the
recommended time period for battery replacement has elapsed, refer
to \Returning the EMC Analyzer for Service" in Chapter 15.
If you wish to replace the battery yourself, you can purchase
the service documentation that provides all necessary test and
maintenance information. The battery is soldered onto the EMC
analyzer processor board.
You can order the service documentation for an HP 8590 EM series
EMC analyzer through your HP Sales and Service oce. The
documentation is described under \Service Documentation
(Option 915)" in Chapter 18 of this manual.
After replacing the EMC analyzer battery, write the date of battery
replacement on the rear-panel label.
Figure 3-4. Rear-panel battery information label.
Calibration
3-9
Using the AutoCal function
The AutoCal function enables you to select a time at which it would

be convenient to have the calibration performed. If the Autocal
function is ON when the analyzer's internal clock reaches the
\AutoCal Time," a calibration will be performed.
Setting the analyzer's clock

1. To set the clock, press:
4CONFIG5
Time Date
TIMEDATE ON OFF ON
SET TIME Use the numeric keys to enter the time in an

HHMMSS format.
2. To terminate the entry, press:
4ENTER5
3. To set the date, press:
SET DATE Use the numeric keys to enter the date in an
YYMMDD format.
4ENTER5
Setting AutoCal time
1. To set the time at which you wish to have the automatic calibration
performed, press:
4CAL5
Cal At Time
SET TIME Use the numeric keys to enter the time in an
HHMMSS format.
4ENTER5
3. To initialize automatic calibration, press:
AUTO CAL ON OFF ON
Note
3-10
Calibration
When the automatic calibration function is ON, the calibration will

be performed at the set time, even if the analyzer is in use. To
successfully complete a calibration, the CAL OUT must be connected to
the INPUT 50
.
4
Making Pre-compliance Measurements
This chapter describes how to congure the EMC analyzer to make
pre-compliance measurements, view and measure signals with the
desired detectors, store these measurements to the internal list and
create a report. The measurement examples presented in this chapter
are:
Setting Up a Measurement Using the SETUP Key
Using standard congurations
Conguring Pre-compliance Systems for Radiated Emissions Testing
Using complete congurations from a memory card
Customizing the standard congurations
Loading user-dened congurations from a card
Loading a limit line from a card
Loading an amplitude correction factor le from a card
Activating the windows display format
Saving a setup to card
Making a Radiated Measurement Using the TEST Key
Tuning the receiver
Using a marker to tune the analyzer and mark a signal
Making a measurement, saving the data in the list, and viewing
the list
Creating a Report Using the OUTPUT Key
Conguring a printer or plotter
Dening and producing a report
Conguring Pre-compliance Systems for Conducted Emissions
Testing
Making a Conducted Measurement
4-1
Introducing the SETUP, TEST, and OUTPUT Keys
The functions associated with the 4SETUP5, 4TEST5, and 4OUTPUT5 keys
have been optimized to match the operations found in nearly all EMC
measurements. These functions make it possible to gather and output
data with a mimimum number of keystrokes. The centralization of
control provides a fast, easy way for you to congure the analyzer,
gather data and generate reports. It also provides a base from which
to learn the other powerful measurement and diagnostic features of
the analyzer. The examples in this section describe the use of these
functions to make radiated and conducted emissions measurements,
and their interactions with other features of the instrument.
Setting Up a Measurement Using the SETUP Key
To prepare the EMC analyzer to make pre-compliance measurements,

the instrument settings must be appropriately congured.
Optional procedures include displaying limit lines, activating
amplitude-correction factors and opening the measurement windows.
The rst level of menus, accessed by pressing the 4SETUP5 key, provide
standard and user-dened congurations. The second, third, and
fourth levels allow you to modify the standard congurations, and use
limit lines and amplitude correction factors.
Using standard congurations
The EMC analyzer provides four standard instrument congurations

which simplify the process of preparing the analyzer to make
measurements. The congurations are based on standard frequency
ranges and are automatically selected by pressing the appropriate
softkey. The settings unique to each conguration are shown in
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. Standard Congurations
MENU LABEL
Start/Stop Frequency
9 kHz{150 kHz
150 kHz{30 MHz
30 MHz{300 MHz
200 MHz{1 GHz
4-2
IF
Bandwidth
200 Hz CISPR
9 kHz CISPR
120 kHz CISPR
120 kHz CISPR
Averaging Reference
Bandwidth
Level
300 Hz
30 kHz
300 kHz
300 kHz
70 dBV
75 dBV
80 dBV
80 dBV
The instrument preset values are:

Peak detector displayed
Peak, quasi-peak and average detectors available (for more
information, refer to \Selecting the measured detectors" later in
this chapter)
Preamplier o (when used with an RF lter section)
RF and IF overload detection on (RF overload available with
RF lter section)
Autorange o
The settings common to all standard congurations are:
10 dB input attenuation
Marker ON
dBV units
Pre-compliance System Congurations
The EMC analyzer comes with two memory cards:

EMC Setups, Limit Lines and Correction Factors.
Empty RAM card for storing user-dened setups, limit lines and
correction factors
The memory card includes complete setups for, radiated, conducted,
and diagnostic measurements and an auto-start program for radiated
measurements. The empty card can be used to store user-dened
settings. Refer to Chapter 12 and Appendix B for more information.
A typical radiated EMC measurement setup is shown in Figure 4-1.
The setup shown uses the HP 84110EM Preproduction evaluation
system.
4-3
Figure 4-1. Radiated EMC measurement test setup.
Equipment list
Conguring the system
EMC analyzer : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8591EM

HP 8593EM
HP 8594EM
HP 8595EM
HP 8596EM
EMC setup, limit lines, correction factors memory card 08590-10027
preamplier : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8447F Option H64
biconical antenna : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11955A
antenna tripod : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11968C
A complete setup can be read from the EMC setup, limit lines,
correction factors memory card.
1. Insert memory card.
2. Connect CAL OUT to INPUT 50
.
Loading pre-dened congurations from a card
3. To select a pre-dened conguration from the card, insert the card
into the card reader and press:
4SETUP5
RECALL SETUP
The analyzer will catalog all setup les resident on the card. Use
the keys or knob to highlight the le eSAMPLE_R.
4. To load the highlighted le, press:
LOAD FILE
4-4
You can now continue the tutorial and complete the section,
\Customizing the standard congurations" or proceed to the section,
\Making a Radiated Measurement" later in this chapter.
Customizing the standard congurations
The standard congurations can be modied to meet specic

requirements. Frequency parameters (start, stop, and center span) are
changed using the menus associated with the FREQUENCY key.
Modifying start and stop frequencies

1. To change the start frequency, press:
4FREQUENCY5
START FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 150 4MHz5
2. To change the stop frequency, press:

STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1100 4MHz5
Modifying reference level and input attenuation
3. To set the reference level and input attenuation, press:

4AMPLITUDE5
4. To change the reference level, press:
REF LVL : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 90 4+dBv5
5. To increase the input attenuation, press:

ATTEN AUTO MAN MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 20 4dB5
Modifying IF and averaging bandwidths
The EMC analyzer oers measurment (CISPR) and diagnostic IF

bandwidths as well as post-detection averaging bandwidths. The
analyzer defaults to the measurement bandwidth appropriate for the
current center frequency.
6. To select a dierent bandwidth, press:
4BW5
7. Each measurement bandwidth has its own softkey. To select a
specic measurement bandwidth, press the appropriate key. To
change to a diagnostic IF bandwidth, press:
IF BW AUTO MAN MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 4kHz5
8. Bandwidths may be selected by entering the desired value using
the numeric keypad followed by the appropriate terminator, or by
using the step keys or knob. To return the analyzer to the default
setting, press:
IF BW AUTO MAN AUTO
9. The analyzer selects an averaging bandwidth appropriate for the

selected IF bandwidth. To select a dierent averaging bandwidth,
press:
4-5
AVG BW AUTO MAN MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 4kHz5
10. To set the analyzer to the default setting, press:

AVG BW AUTO MAN AUTO
Selecting the active detector
The EMC analyzer can scan any one of the three available detectors.
The currently active detector is indicated on the screen in the upper
right-hand corner as the \ACTV DET." Refer to Figure 4-2. The default
detector of the analyzer is the peak detector. The peak detector
scans the measured spectrum faster than the other built-in detectors
because of its short charge and discharge time constants.
11. To scan with the built-in quasi-peak or average detectors, press:
4DET5
QP ON OFF ON or AVG ON OFF ON
When using these detectors, the analyzer scans at a much slower
rate due to longer time constants. Scan times are automatically
selected to match the increased charge and discharge times. When
making diagnostic measurements, it is possible to scan these
slower detectors at a faster rate by reducing the sweeptime. The
analyzer will indicate this condition by displaying a \MEAS UNCAL"
error message, as shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2. Active detector and measured detector messages.
12. Turn the scanning o by pressing:

QP ON OFF OFF
4-6
Selecting the measured detectors

The MEASURE AT MKR softkey can be used to measure any of the
three available detectors. The detectors selected to be measured
are displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the screen labeled
\MEAS DET". Refer to Figure 4-2. The default conguration makes all
three detectors active. Selecting only the detectors you need reduces
measurement time. The dwell time for each detector may be set
independently.
13. To select the detectors to be measured and their dwell times,
press:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Measure Detector
14. Locate the DETECTOR PK QP AV softkey.

Notice each of the detector labels are underlined. This indicates
they will all be measured.
Press the softkey. Notice some detectors are not underlined,
and the detectors indicated next to MEAS DET onscreen have
changed.
Continue pressing the softkey to observe the dierent possible
combinations of detectors. When you are nished examining the
combinations, make all three detectors active by pressing the
following softkey until all three detectors are underlined.
DETECTOR PK QP AV PK QP AV
Measuring detector dwell times
15. To modify the peak detector dwell time, press:

PK DWELL TIME : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Enter the desired dwell time.
The current dwell time is indicated in the active function block.
16. To modify the dwell times for the quasi-peak and average
detectors, press:
QP DWELL TIME : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Enter the desired dwell time.
AV DWELL TIME : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Enter the desired dwell time.
The current dwell time is indicated in the active function block.
Note
The dwell times are added to the time required to obtain a valid
detector reading, as dictated by the specic charge and discharge time
constants. The total dwell time cannot be set below the required
minimum value.
Controlling autoranging
The autoranging feature allows the instrument to automatically

change its sensitivity as needed to remove any RF or IF overloads that
occur during operation.
4-7
Note
RF overload can only be detected when using an HP 85420E

Option 1EM RF lter section.
The instrument will perform one autoranging activity per scan until
the instrument is no longer in overload. To maximize sensitivity when
the displayed frequencies are changed, the autoranging function will
remove any corrective actions that were taken earlier, then autorange
for the new conditions.
17. The following procedure can be used to activate autoranging:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
AUTORANG ON OFF ON
18. Autoranging can also be activated by pressing:

4AMPLITUDE5
AUTORANG ON OFF ON
Using limit lines
Note
Two limit lines with margins can be displayed on the EMC analyzer.
These limit lines can be used to visually determine whether displayed
signals meet the appropriate limits. Margins are set relative to each
of the limit lines, and are useful when taking into account any
uncertainties that can exist in the entire measurement system.
If you wish to provide a margin of safety when testing to a limit,
you may set a margin below the required limit. When the limit-test
function is activated, the EMC analyzer automatically indicates
onscreen whether or not a displayed signal passes or fails a displayed
limit line or margin. When limit testing is activated, the analyzer
automatically tests to either the limit line or the margin, whichever
is lowest. Failures are indicated both onscreen and over the HP-IB
bus. When performing limit testing with two limit lines and their
associated margins, the analyzer automatically tests to the lowest of
the four.
When using the limit-test function, it is important to keep track of
which detector output is being tested against which limit line. The
peak detector is the default detector, however, most commercial limit
lines indicate acceptable quasi-peak or average detector output levels.
When viewing the peak detector output, it is possible to trigger a
limit failure when testing against a quasi-peak limit line. This type
of failure only indicates the need to remeasure the signal with the
quasi-peak detector. It is quite possible for the peak value of an
impulsive signal to exceed a quasi-peak limit, while the quasi-peak
value of that same signal remains below the limit.
Refer to Chapter 9 for more information on entering and editing
custom limit lines. Refer to Appendix B for a complete listing or the
limit lines supplied on the memory card.
4-8
Loading a limit line from the card
1. Set the analyzer to a known state by pressing:

4PRESET5
4SETUP5
01
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
200 MHz
AMPLITUDE5
GHz
4 5
2. Access the limit-line menu by pressing:

4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Limit Lines
3. Insert the Setups, Limit Lines and Correction Factors card into the
card reader. Load the lEN55022 Class A Radiated, 10 m limit le
from the card by pressing:
RECALL LIMITS
Highlight lEN022A10 using the step keys or knob.

4. To load the le, press:
LOAD FILE
The analyzer will automatically turn the limit lines on after it has
nished loading the le.
5. Enter a 03 dB margin limit relative to limit line 1 by pressing:
Limit 1
MARGIN 1 ON OFF ON : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 4dB5
The dotted margin line is displayed below the limit line. It can also
be adjusted using the knob.
6. Turn limit testing on by pressing:
LMT TEST ON OFF ON
7. Test the functionality of limit-line testing by connecting CAL OUT to

INPUT 50
.
The message \FAIL MARGIN 1" is displayed because the calibrator
signal exceeds the margin line.
8. Turn the margin o by pressing:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Limit Lines
Limit 1
MARGIN 1 ON OFF OFF
The message \FAIL LIMIT 1" is displayed because the calibrator

signal now exceeds the limit line.
4-9
9. Disconnect the internal calibrator signal from INPUT 50

.
The message \PASS LIMIT" is displayed because no onscreen signals
exceed the limit line.
Using amplitude correction factors
The EMC analyzer can correct the displayed data to take into account
the eects of any transducers, cables, preamps, or other two port
devices used when making measurements. The corrections are made
real-time, as the data is displayed onscreen. The EMC analyzer allows
three types of amplitude-correction factors to be applied to the input
signals.
Correction factors
Conversion factors relating eld strength to
measured voltage.
Cable Factors
Conversion factors to correct for cable insertion
loss.
Other Factors
Correction factors to account for the eects of any
other two-port device placed between the antenna
and the analyzer.
Note
Note
4-10
A total of 80 correction frequencies can be specied. They can be

distributed among the three categories in any combination. A matrix
of correction frequencies and amplitudes is entered for each category
desired. The analyzer automatically sums the matrices and applies the
net correction factor to the displayed data.
The amplitude-correction factor applied to the lowest selected
frequency is also applied to all frequencies below the lowest selected
frequency. The amplitude-correction factor applied to the highest
selected frequency is also applied to all frequencies above the highest
selected frequency. Refer to Chapter 10 and Appendix B for more
detailed information.
A fourth type of amplitude-correction factor, called User Factors, is
provided for backward capability with the A, B, C, D, E, and L-series.
It is found under the 4CAL5 key. The methods described below also
apply to User Factors.
Loading an amplitude correction factor le from a card
Matrices can be loaded from a card or entered from the front panel.
The following procedure describes how to load an antenna factor
matrix from the Setups, Limit Lines, and Correction Factors card.
4PRESET5
4SETUP5
01
200 MHz
GHz
2. Access the correction factors menu by pressing:

More 1 of 4
Correctn Factors
3. Insert the EMC Setups, Limit Lines, Correction Factors card into
the card reader.
4. Load the HP 11966D periodic antenna 200 MHz |1 GHz le from
the card by pressing:
Antenna Factors
RECALL ANTENNA
5. Highlight \nLOG_PERD" using the step keys or knob.

LOAD FILE
The analyzer will automatically activate the correction factors after

the le has been loaded. The noise oor will rise accordingly.
4-11
Activating the windows display format
The windows display format can be used to provide a simultaneous

display of both the entire frequency range of interest and a detailed
subset of that range. This display format helps you keep track of all
the signals in the entire spectrum while making measurements on a
specic signal. When the windows display format is rst activated,
the initial trace is transferred into the upper overview window and
a frequency span that is one-tenth the width of the current trace is
actively scanned in the lower applications window. The span of the
applications window is centered around either the center frequency
of the overview window or the marker frequency that was active in
the initial trace. All limit line and amplitude correction information
that was active in the initial trace is automatically transferred to both
the overview and applications window.
When using the windows display format, the information detailing the
state of each window is simplied. Use the 4ZOOM5 key to expand the
active display to full screen. A complete description of the window
state is provided when in this full screen mode. Press the 4ZOOM5 key
again to return to the windows display mode.
1. Before activating the windows display format, connect CAL OUT to
INPUT 50
.
4PRESET5
4SETUP5
01
200 MHz
GHz
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
AUTORANG ON OFF ON
MKR !5
MARKER
HIGH
3. To activate the windows display format, press:

4ON5
Notice the initial trace has been moved to the overview window,
and a ten percent span of that trace, centered around the marker,
has been moved into the applications window.
4-12
4. To activate the overview window, press:

4NEXT5
The outline of the overview window is now highlighted, showing it
to be the active window.
5. Activate the lower applications window again by pressing:
4NEXT5
The outline of the lower applications window is now highlighted.
By repeatedly pressing this softkey, the active trace control toggles
between the upper overview window and the lower applications
window.
6. To activate the zoom function, press:
4ZOOM5
Complete annotation of the active window state is provided when
in the full-screen mode.
Press the 4ZOOM5 key again to return to the windows display mode.
7. To turn the windows mode o, press:
4ON5
WINDOWS OFF
4-13
Making a Radiated Measurement
The main functions necessary for making pre-compliance

measurements are located under the 4TEST5 key. These functions allow
you to tune the analyzer, change the display of a signal by turning the
scan on and o, point to the signal of interest with the marker, make
a measurement of that signal, and enter that measurement into a data
list.
Tuning the analyzer
1. To access the measurement softkeys, press:

4TEST5
2. To tune to a new center frequency, press:
TUNE SLO FAST
and either,
enter the desired value using the numeric keypad
use the step keys
rotate the knob to the desired center frequency
When entering a value with the numeric keys, the entry must be
terminated by pressing one of the units keys, such as 4MHz5 or 4GHz5.
When adjusting the value using the step keys or knob, the units are
entered automatically by the analyzer.
When the knob is used to enter the frequency, two tuning rates are
available, slow and fast.
3. To change the rate at which the analyzer tunes when using the
knob, press:
TUNE SLO FAST FAST
The slow rate is the default rate. It is calculated by the analyzer
and is based on the scan width and the IF bandwidth. The fast rate
is eight times greater than the slow rate.
You may toggle between the two rates by repeatedly pressing
TUNE SLO FAST . The selected speed will be retained until it is
changed, or an instrument preset is performed.
Note
4-14
The frequency of the analyzer can also be changed by using the

CENTER, START, and STOP functions. These functions are accessed
by pressing the 4FREQUENCY5 key. The SPAN function, accessed by
pressing the 4SPAN5 key, or the default user-softkey, can also be used
to change the frequency of the analyzer.
Using the marker to tune the analyzer
The marker function has two modes of operation. In tune mode,

the analyzer retunes the center frequency while maintaining the
current span when the marker is moved to either edge of the display.
This is the default mode. In span mode, the analyzer will not retune
the analyzer when the marker is moved to either the start or stop
frequency of the current span.
1. To see how the tune and span modes work, set the analyzer to a
known state by pressing:
4PRESET5
2. To use the internal calibrator as the test signal, connect CAL OUT
to INPUT 50
.
3. Use the marker to point to the 300 MHz calibrator signal by
pressing:
4TEST5
MARKER TUNE SPN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 MHz
4. Turn the windows display mode on by pressing:

4ON5
The 300 MHz calibrator signal is displayed in the center of the
lower window.
The frequency span is 80 MHz.
5. Select the marker tune mode by pressing:
4TEST5
MARKER TUNE SPN TUNE
6. Rotate the knob clockwise until the marker reaches the right side
of the window. As you continue to rotate the knob the analyzer
changes frequencies. The zone marker is also moving in the upper
overview window indicating the frequency range being displayed.
7. Continue rotating the knob until the 600 MHz calibrator signal is
located in the center of the display.
8. Press the up-arrow (4*5) step key. The analyzer retunes and the
marker moves to the left edge of the display.
9. Press the up-arrow (4*5) step key, again. The marker moves to the
right edge of the display.
10. Continue pressing the up-arrow (4*5) step key until the 900 MHz
calibrator signal is displayed on the screen.
11. To change the marker mode to span, press:
MARKER TUNE SPN SPN
Note that when the knob is rotated counter-clockwise the
analyzer does not retune when the marker reaches the edge of
the display.
4-15
Using the measure-at-marker function
The measure-at-marker function uses a built-in algorithm to

simplify the process of taking data. Measurements are made by
placing the marker on the signal of interest and then selecting the
measure-at-marker function. The algorithm:
locates the signal of interest
turns the scan o at that signal
optimizes the measurement dynamic range
measures all detectors currently selected
displays the results in the onscreen marker box
The marker box remains on the screen until the marker position or
analyzer tuning is changed. The measure-at-marker results can be
saved to the internal list by pressing ADD TO LIST . The contents of
the internal list can be viewed and remeasured, as desired. Refer to
Chapter 6 for more information.
The dwell time used for each detector can be adjusted using the dwell
time function. Refer to the \Customizing Standard Settings" section
earlier in this chapter for more information.
The following example shows how to:
use the measure-at-marker function
use the marker box
store signals in the list
view signals in the list
4PRESET5
2. To use the internal calibrator signal as a test signal connect CAL
OUT to INPUT 50
.
3. Activate the marker by pressing:
4TEST5
MARKER TUNE SPN TUNE
4. Rotate the knob until the marker is on the peak of the 300 MHz
calibrator signal.
5. Measure the signal at the marker by pressing:
MEASURE AT MKR
The measured detector values are displayed on the screen in the

marker box. Refer to Figure 4-3.
6. Save the measurement to the list by pressing:
ADD TO LIST
4-16
Figure 4-3. Using the measure at marker function.
calibrator signal, and then press:
MEASURE AT MKR
8. When the analyzer displays the measured values, press:

ADD TO LIST
calibrator signal, and then press:
MEASURE AT MKR
10. When the analyzer displays the measured values, press:

ADD TO LIST
11. Change the displayed span by pressing:

4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4MHz5
12. View the signals entered into the list by pressing:
4TEST5
More 1 of 3
SIG LIST ON OFF ON
Use the step keys to step through the list. The analyzer highlights
the selection and automatically tunes to the indicated frequency.
Refer to Chapter 6 for more information.
4-17
Note
4-18
The measure-at-marker function uses an algorithm to sequentially

reduce the frequency span until the peak of the signal of interest
is displayed. After each span reduction, the marker moves to the
largest signal present on the display. The analyzer indicates which
signal it measured by leaving the marker at that signal. If you
are measuring a small signal in the presence of a large signal, the
algorithm may measure the larger signal. If this situation occurs,
reduce the span until the larger signal is one major frequency
division away from the smaller signal.
If using the measure-at-marker function to measure a pulsed
signal with a repetition frequency of less than 5 Hz, set the
sweep time to greater than or equal to the inverse of the pulse
repetition frequency. (For example, to measure a 1 Hz CISPR
pulse, set the sweep time to 1 second or greater prior to using the
measure-at-marker function.)
Strong adjacent signals can aect measurement accuracy. The
measure-at-marker algorithm detects when these signals may
be interfering with the measurement and displays the message,
\Strong adjacent signal". The eects of strong signals can be
reduced by increasing the input attenuation or, when making
diagnostic measurements, by reducing the IF bandwidth.
Using the auto-measure feature
Signals on the screen can be measured one at a time using

measure-at-marker, or automatic measurements can be made using
auto-measure.
4PRESET5
.
3. To measure the calibrator and all its on-screen harmonics, press:
4TEST5
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
AUTO-MEASURE
4. The three on-screen signals are measured as if individual

measure-at-markers had been done and automatically added to the
signal list.
5. To speed up the measurement, when a limit margin is on, only
those signals above the limit margin are measured and added to the
list. Refer to Chapter 9.
Note
AUTO-MEASURE may measure the same signal multiple times in a

wide span with multiple closely spaced signals. To prevent this from
occuring, narrow the span until no more than 20-30 signals are on the
screen. To remove duplicate signals from the list, refer to Chapter 5.
4-19
Creating a Report
Note
Conguring a printer
Data collected in the internal list can be printed in a report. The

report can consist of any of the following elements:
the user comments (annotations)
a tabular list of the data
a graph of the data in the list on either a linear or logarithmic
frequency axis with the limit lines that are currently displayed
a listing of the instrument setup parameters, including limit-line and
amplitude-correction les
Only the graph can be sent to a plotter.
The instrument supports a variety of printers. The analyzer must
be congured correctly to operate with a specic printer type.
Conguration options include:
printer type
HP-IB address of the printer
menu printing enabled
The conguration information is used when printing with either the
4COPY5 key or the OUTPUT REPORT softkey (located on the 4OUTPUT5
key menu).
The following procedure congures the analyzer to print to an
HP DeskJet printer.
1. Access the printer conguration menu by pressing:
4CONFIG5
2. To use a DeskJet 550C printer, press:
Print Config
Set Colr Printer
DESKJET 310/550C
Note
The default printer is an HP black and white printer.

3. Set the HP-IB address of the printer. Enter the last two numbers
of the address assigned to the printer. For example, if the printer
address is 1, enter 01 by pressing:
Previous Menu
Prn Port Config
PRINTER ADDRESS : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 01
4. Conrm the entry by pressing:

4ENTER5
4-20
Conguring and generating a report
Use the list that was created in the section \Using the
measure-at-marker function" earlier in this chapter for this procedure.
1. Access the report denition menu by pressing:
4OUTPUT5
Define Report
2. Verify that all report denitions are set to on (default mode), by

selecting the following softkey settings:
ANNOTATN ON OFF ON
LOG ON OFF ON
LIN ON OFF ON
LIST ON OFF ON
SETTINGS ON OFF ON
3. To modify the list, press:

Previous Menu
Define List
The display of the data in the list can be tailored to meet your
needs. You can:
Select which of the measured detectors to print to the list.
Display the dierences between a data point and the limit lines,
for any of the detectors.
Elect to indicate which of the list entries have been \marked,"
(refer to Chapter 5 for more information).
Print the current correction factors used.
4. To modify which detector values are printed to the screen, press:
SHOW DET PK QP AV
The detectors that will be displayed are underlined (defaults are

PK and QP).
Press the softkey repeatedly to view the detector combinations
available.
5. When limit lines are active, the numerical dierence between a
specic detector reading and limit line 1 can be included in your
report by pressing:
SHOW 1 1 PK QP AV
The detectors that will be displayed are underlined. Press the

softkey repeatedly to view the detector combinations available.
6. To include the numerical dierence between a specic detector
reading and limit line 2 in the report, press:
SHOW 1 2 PK QP AV
4-21
The detectors that are currently detected are underlined. Press

the softkey repeatedly to view the detector combinations
available.
7. To include the total current correction factor used for the data
point displayed in the report, press:
SHOW COR ON OFF ON
8. To include the \mark" in the report, press:

SHOW MRK ON OFF ON
Note
When the maximum number of columns exceeds the maximum

number of characters available across a page in portrait orientation,
the analyzer will print the data in landscape orientation. The HP
DeskJet and ThinkJet and the Epson MX80 and LQ570 do not support
landscrape orientation. The maximum number of columns that can be
printed in portrait mode is nine.
9. To return to the top level OUTPUT menu,press:
Previous Menu
10. To add user notes to the report, press:

EDIT ANNOTATN
Annotation is entered with a keyboard. The maximum number

of ASCII characters allowed in the annotation is 1024. For more
information on connecting and using the keyboard, refer to
Chapter 13.
11. To clear any existing annotation, press:
CLEAR ANNOTATN
CLEAR ANNOTATN
12. When you nish entering notes, press:

EXIT EDIT
13. Verify the printer is connected to the analyzer, then output the
report by pressing:
OUTPUT REPORT
14. To halt the operation at any time during the output cycle, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Abort
The analyzer will nish any graphs currently in process before

aborting the output cycle.
4-22
Making a Conducted Measurement
A typical conducted EMC measurement setup is shown in Figure 4-4.

The setup shown uses the HP 84110EM Preproduction evaluation
system.
Caution
Equipment list
Figure 4-4. Conducted EMC measurement test setup.
A transient limiter must be installed for all conducted measurements

to protect the EMC analyzer's input from high-level transients. Such
transients can exist on the power mains or result from cycling power
to the device under test (DUT).
EMC analyzer : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8591EM
HP 8593EM
HP 8594EM
HP 8595EM
HP 8596EM
EMC setup, limit lines, correction factors memory card 08590-10027
transient limiter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11947A
line impedance stabilization network (LISN) : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11967D
or
HP 11967C
Conguring the system
A complete setup can be read from the EMC setup, limit lines,
correction factors memory card.
.
Loading pre-dened congurations from a card
2. To select a pre-dened conguration from the card, insert the card
into the card reader and press:
4SETUP5
RECALL SETUP
The analyzer will catalog all setup les resident on the card. Use
the keys or knob to highlight the le eSAMPLE_C.
4-23
3. To load the highlighted le, press:

LOAD FILE
When this step is performed, the correction factors for the

HP 11967D LISN is part of the setup information that is loaded.
4. If the HP 11967C LISN is being used, perform the following steps
to load the LISN's correction factors:
a. Press:
4SAVE/RECALL5 Recall Card RECALL ANTENNA
b. Use the step keys to highlight the \nLISN" le.
c. Press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LOAD FILE
Once the \nLISN" le is loaded, future measurements are

made using the typical correction factors associated with
the HP 11967C LISN. However, the most accurate EMI
measurements are achieved by entering in the individual
correction factors supplied with the LISN. Refer to Chapter 10
for this procedure.
5. Measurements can now be made as described in the section,
\Making Radiated Measurements", earlier in this chapter.
6. When making conducted measurements the data can be collected
and displayed in Log Sweep mode. To use Log Sweep mode, press:
4FREQUENCY5
SWEEP LOG LIN LOG
Figure 4-5. Display using the log sweep mode.
Data can also be collected and displayed using a stepped measurement

approach. All three detectors and be measured as the analyzer steps
across a frequency range. Refer to Chapter 6 for more information.
To copy, save or print the results, use the same procedures described
earlier in this chapter.
4-24
5
List-Based Measurements
Radiated emissions measurements revolve around signal lists. The

key output of the testing process is a list of the highest amplitude
signals from the equipment under test. It is this list of signals which
regulatory agencies of the world are interested in.
The list-based measurement feature includes the following features:
Add signals to the list.
View the signal list table at any time.
Sort the signal list.
Delete signals from the list.
Mark signals on the list.
Remeasure signals on the list.
Save the tabular list to card and recall it.
Graph the signal list on a logarithmic or linear scale.
Save the signal list graph to a card.
When viewing the signal list table, both list and trace information
are viewed at the same time. The signal list is displayed in the upper
half of the display screen; the lower half of the display screen is the
active window with a live trace. Furthermore, as each signal in the
list is selected, the frequency of the signal is used to tune the active
window. If the frequency is already onscreen, just the marker is
moved, otherwise the tune frequency is changed.
For the purpose of this measurement example, the 300 MHz calibrator
signal and its harmonics will be used to build a signal list.
5-1
Note
Before performing this measurement example, make sure the signal

list is empty by pressing the following keys:
4TEST5
More 1 of 3
EDIT LIST (If table is empty, go to step 1 below.)
Delete Signals
DELETE ALL SIGS
DELETE ALL SIGS
1. Preset the instrument to a known state by pressing:

4PRESET5
.
Figure 5-1. 300 MHz calibrator signal.
5-2
3. Set the analyzer stop frequency to 1.8 GHz in order to view

additional harmonic signals by pressing:
4FREQUENCY5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1.8 4GHz5
Figure 5-2. 300 MHz calibrator signal with harmonics.
4. Place a marker on the 300 MHz calibrator signal by pressing:

4MKR !5
MARKER
HIGH
5-3
Adding signals to the list
5. Measure the peak, quasi-peak, and average detectors for this

signal peak by pressing:
4TEST5
MEASURE AT MKR (wait for results to be displayed)
Figure 5-3.
Peak, quasi-peak, and average detectors measurement results.
6. After the measurement is complete, the results are displayed in

the marker display area, and the signal can now be added to a
signal list by pressing:
ADD TO LIST
7. Step to the rst harmonic signal, take a measurement, and add

this result to the signal list by using the following sequence:
4*5 (positions marker on rst harmonic signal)
MEASURE AT MKR (wait for results to be displayed)
ADD TO LIST
Note
5-4
You may need to press the 4*5 (step up) key more than once to place
the marker on the peak of the signal.
Figure 5-4. Signal added to signal list.
8. Repeat step 7 for the remaining harmonic signals until all signals
have been measured and added to the signal list.
5-5
Viewing the signal list
9. Display the signal list that was created by the 300 MHz calibrator
signal and its harmonics measured above by pressing:
More 1 of 3
SIG LIST ON OFF ON (displays the signal list)
Figure 5-5.
Signal list of 300 MHz calibrator signal and harmonics.
5-6
Sorting the signal list
10. Sort the signal list by peak amplitude by pressing:

EDIT LIST
Sort Signals
SORT BY PK AMP
Figure 5-6. Signal list sorted by peak amplitude.
11. Resort the signal list by frequency by pressing:

SORT BY FREQ
5-7
Deleting signals from the list
12. Delete the last harmonic signal from the signal list by using the
following key sequence:
Previous Menu (returns to the editing menu)
Delete Signals (enters delete signals menu)
SELECT FRM LIST : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4ENTER5
DELETE SIGNAL , DELETE SIGNAL
Note
After pressing DELETE SIGNAL once, the message

\If you are sure, press key again to purge data" will appear.
Pressing DELETE SIGNAL a second time deletes the data.
Figure 5-7. Last harmonic signal deleted.
5-8
13. Notice that after the signal has been deleted, the marker and
signal number are decreased by one. In order to add the last
harmonic signal back to the signal list, use the following key
sequence:
4TEST5
MARKER TUNE SPN TUNE (activates marker)
4*5 (positions marker on last harmonic signal)
MEASURE AT MKR (wait for results)
ADD TO LIST
Figure 5-8.
Last harmonic signal remeasured and added to list.
5-9
Marking signals
14. Mark the 2nd harmonic signal for deletion by pressing:

More 1 of 3
EDIT LIST
Signal Marking : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 4ENTER5
MARK SIGNAL
Figure 5-9. Signal marking.
Notice that signal 2 in the list is highlighted and marked with an

asterisk.
15. Enter each of the 4th and 5th harmonic signal numbers and mark
them by using the following sequence:
Previous Menu
Signal Marking : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : signal number 4ENTER5
MARK SIGNAL
5-10
16. Delete the marked signals by pressing:

Previous Menu
Delete Signals
DELETE MARKED , DELETE MARKED
Figure 5-10. Marked signals deleted and list reordered.
Notice that remaining signals are renumbered sequentially.
5-11
Remeasuring signals
17. Remeasure the remaining signals on the list by pressing:

Previous Menu
Re-measure
REMEAS ALL SIGS
Figure 5-11. Remaining signals in list remeasured.
Saving signal lists

CAUTION
When saving internal data and signal lists are displayed, card warning
messages do not appear. Therefore, it is recommended that you verify
that a le has been saved before clearing the data from your display.
For example, before saving signal list data, make sure that your
card is not write protected. To verify that the le was saved, press
RECALL LIST to catalog signal lists that have been saved to the card,
then check that the correct le was saved by inspecting the le name,
date, and time stamp.
18. To save the current signal list, insert a memory card and press:
4TEST5
More 1 of 3
Save/Rcl List
SAVE LIST
Enter register number 5 and press 4ENTER5
Note
5-12
Signal lists and associated annotation can only be saved to a card.

Refer to Chapter 12 for more information of saving and recalling.
Refer to \Entering data using the external keyboard" in Chapter 13
for information on the annotation editor.
Recalling signal lists
19. To recall the previously saved signal list from the card, press:
RECALL LIST
A catalog of the card lls the screen.

20. Select the lename corresponding to register number 5 using the
knob or step keys, then press:
LOAD FILE
The signals in the le will be added to the end of the current

signal list which remains unchanged. Any annotation for the
signal list created using an external keyboard is also loaded from
the le; any existing annotation is replaced.
Graphing signal lists
21. To show a linear graphical representation of the signals in the

signal list, press:
SAVE LIN GRAPH
Figure 5-12. Signals plotted on linear frequency scale.
22. Press:
EXIT GRAPH
5-13
23. To show a logarithmic graphical representation of the signals in

the signal list, press:
SAVE LOG GRAPH
Figure 5-13. Signals plotted on log frequency scale.
Saving signal lists graphs

Signal list graphs can only be saved to a card, not to internal memory.
Note
24. To save the displayed log signal list graph to a card:
Enter the register number 8 and press 4ENTER5
25. Once the process is saved, press:
EXIT GRAPH
Note
5-14
The \Register #" message is not saved to the le.
6
Stepped Measurements
Stepped measurements allow the analyzer to step across the

frequency band in predened frequency steps. When making the
measurement, the analyzer steps to a given frequency in a xed-tuned
fashion. You can:
Dene the frequency step as either linear or logarithmic.
Specify the step size for each type of step.
Specify which detector(s) to measure.
Specify the dwell time for each detector.
Performing a stepped measurement
1. Preset the analyzer to a known state by pressing:

4PRESET5
2. Display the 300 MHz calibrator signal and its harmonics by
connecting CAL OUT to INPUT 50
.
3. To perform a stepped measurement with a center frequency of
300 MHz and a span of 3 MHz, press:
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 4MHz5
4AMPLITUDE5
4+5 (moves the signal trace to the top of the display)
4TEST5
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
MEAS STEPPED
6-1
Note
To ensure all signals are captured and their amplitudes accurately

displayed, the linear step size should be no more than one-half of a
bandwidth.
When the analyzer completes the stepped measurement, three
traces are displayed as shown below.
Figure 6-1. Stepped measurement display.
The traces are displayed as follows:

Highest amplitude
Peak detector amplitude
Middle amplitude
Quasi-peak detector amplitude
Lowest amplitude
Average detector amplitude
Note
When EXIT MEASURE is pressed, the measurement is stopped and all

data is lost. Be sure to save the data by adding it to the signal list
table prior to pressing EXIT MEASURE .
4. The measurement will be taken continuously, restarting

automatically when the stop frequency is reached. To exit from the
stepped measurement, press:
EXIT MEASURE
6-2
Selecting a detector and setting a dwell time
At each frequency step, you can select a detector and a dwell time for
the detector.
1. To select the peak and quasi-peak detector and set a dwell time of
two seconds, press:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Measure Detector
DETECTOR PK QP AV PK
DETECTOR PK QP AV PK QP
QP DWELL TIME : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 4sec5
2. To view an onscreen display of the signal list and make a stepped

measurement, press:
4TEST5
More 1 of 3
SIG LIST ON OFF ON
More 2 of 3
MEAS STEPPED
When the measurement is completed, the marker is positioned

at the left edge of the screen. The marker box displays the
information on the selected detectors.
Figure 6-2. Stepped measurement using two detectors.
6-3
Using the marker
The marker can be used to read the frequency and amplitude of two
detectors, for example, peak and quasi-peak. When the measurement
is complete, the marker function is the active function. Use the
keypad, step keys or knob to move the marker along the trace. The
frequency and amplitude values of the two traces at the marker are
displayed in the marker box.
Figure 6-3. Using the marker.
The highest trace is the peak detector data and the lowest trace is the
quasi-peak detector data.
6-4
Adding data to the signal list table
The results of the stepped measurement can be added to the signal list
table. Refer to Chapter 5 for more information on the signal list table.
If you wish to add the results of the stepped measurement to the
signal list table, press:
ADD TO LIST
Figure 6-4. Data added to the signal list table.
The new data now appears in the signal list, press:

EXIT MEASURE
Changing the frequency step
The default step size is equal to one IF bandwidth. To change the

default step size, press:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
FREQ STEP : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0.5 4ENTER5
Restarting and stopping the measurement

To start and stop a stepped measurement:
1. Start the measurement by pressing:
4TEST5
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
MEAS STEPPED
6-5
Note
If the measurement is stopped before the trace is completed, the

marker may be used only on the portion of the trace recorded before
the measurement was stopped.
2. When the measurement reaches 300.2 MHz, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STOP
Figure 6-5. Stepped measurement stopped at 300.2 MHz.
3. Use the knob to move the marker along the trace. Observe the
portion of the trace over which the marker is active.
Note
The MEAS SNG CONT function is always active. Executing the

function during a measurement will not corrupt the measurement.
4. To select a continuous step mode, press:
MEAS SNG CONT CONT
5. To restart the measurement, press:

RESTART
Note
When EXIT MEASURE is pressed the measurement is stopped and all

data is lost. Be sure to save the data by adding it to the signal list
table prior to pressing EXIT MEASURE.
6. The measurement will be taken continuously, restarting
automatically when the stop frequency is reached. To exit from the
stepped measurement, press:
EXIT MEASURE
6-6
Using logarithmic and linear steps
During conducted measurements (for example, CISPR bands A and B),

the emissions are usually broadband in nature and you may wish to
use the logarithmic frequency step function. This function can be
used whenever a logarithmic display, spanning several decades, would
be more informative than a linear display. The following gures show
the two display options.
Note
Figure 6-6. Using a logarithmic step size.
When using a logarithmic step size, the frequency step is specied as a

percentage of frequency. The default step size equals three percent.
Figure 6-7. Using a linear step size.
6-7
7
Making EMC Diagnostic Measurements
This chapter demonstrates how to make diagnostic measurements

using the EMC analyzer. Each measurement focuses on dierent
functions. The measurement procedures covered in this chapter are:
Diagnostic emissions testing using a close-eld probe
Conguring systems for diagnotic emissions testing.
Making automatic diagnostic emissions tests.
Making manual diagnostic emissions tests.
Other diagnostic techniques
Resolving signals of equal amplitude using the IF bandwidth
function.
Resolving small signals hidden by large signals using the IF
bandwidth function.
Increasing the frequency readout resolution using the marker
counter.
Decreasing the frequency span using the marker track function.
Peaking signal amplitude using the preselector peak function.
(HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM and HP 8596EM only.)
Tracking unstable signals using marker track and the maximum
hold and minimum hold functions.
Comparing signals using delta markers.
Measuring low-level signals using attenuation, averaging
bandwidth, and video averaging.
Identifying distortion products using the RF attenuator and
traces.
Measuring signals near band boundaries using harmonic lock.
Localized susceptability testing
Conguring Systems for Localized Susceptability Testing
Making Localized Susceptability Measurements
7-1
Making Diagnostic Measurements

Using a Close-Field Probe
This test uses a close-eld probe to help locate problem emissions in
the device under test (DUT) and to characterize those emissions.
Note
The trace information on the display screen presented in this

procedure is only for example. It may not re ect what you see on
your display.
Conguring systems for diagnostic emissions

Setting up the test equipment
Equipment list.
EMC Analyzer : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8591EM

HP 8593EM
HP 8594EM
HP 8595EM
HP 8596EM
EMC memory card : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 08590-10027
HP 11945A close-eld probe set : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11940A
HP 11941A
Preamplier : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8447F Option H64
Figure 7-1. Diagnostic (close-eld probe) test setup.
7-2
Making an automated diagnostic emission test

For manual setup information, refer to \Making a manual diagnostic
Note
emission test" in this chapter.
Conguring the analyzer for testing

4PRESET5
2. Insert the card into the analyzer with the card's arrow matching
the raised arrow on the bezel around the card-insertion slot.
3. To recall a setup, press:
RECALL SETUP
4. Use the step keys or knob to highlight the setup le "eSAMPLE_D".

Figure 7-2. eSAMPLE D selected.

LOAD FILE
6. Press:
4TEST5
7-3
7. To move the marker to the response of interest and record that

frequency, use the knob or step keys or press:
4MKR !5
MARKER
HIGH
Figure 7-3. Moving the marker to the highest response.
8. To move the marker to center frequency, press:

4MKR!5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MARKER
CF
9. To active the span, press:

4SPAN5
10. To reduce the span, use the keypad to input the desired span, for
example, 30 4MHz5. Refer to Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4. Reducing the span.
7-4
11. To record the emission level, press:

4TRACE5
TRACE A B C B
CLEAR WRITE B
TRACE A B C A
MAX HOLD A
12. Move the probe around the DUT to nd the worst-case emission.
Keep the probe tip close to the source of the emissions.
13. To save the displayed response, press:
VIEW A
Figure 7-5. Saving the displayed response in view mode.
Storing the data to internal memory
14. To store the data to internal memory, press:

4SAVE/RECALL5
Save Internal
Trace
Intrnl
15. To enter the trace A data into internal register 1, press:

TRACE A : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 4Hz5
16. To clear-write trace A, press:

4TRACE5
CLEAR WRITE A
17. To turn o trace B, press:

TRACE A B C B
BLANK B
7-5
Recalling the data from internal memory
18. To recall previous EMC data after modifying the device under
test, press:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Recall Internal
Internal
Trace
19. To recall a previous trace, for comparison, from internal register

1, press:
TRACE A : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 4Hz5
Making a eld-strength measurement
20. To make a eld-strength measurement, press:

4MKR5
21. Position the marker on the desired signal. Read the eld-strength
value in dBA/m in the marker box. Refer to Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6. Reading the probe's output in dBA/m.
Characterizing the emissions
22. To characterize the emissions, press:

4TRACE5
More 1 of 4
MAX/MIN ON OFF ON
MAX MIN VIEW (until MAX, MIN and VIEW are underlined)
7-6
23. Toggle MAX/MIN VIEW between MAX, MIN and VIEW to view
max-held, min-held, and both signals on the display. Refer to
Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7. Signals viewed with MAX, MIN, VIEW.
24. To turn o the max/min measurements, press:

MAX/MIN ON OFF OFF
Note
The signals visible during MIN VIEW are continuous signals. The
signals that appear during MAX VIEW and not MIN VIEW are pulsed or
broadband signals.
25. To activate the delta marker, press:

4MKR5
MARKER 1
7-7
26. Measure the harmonic interval using the marker delta function
and scroll to the next peak of interest. Record the interval. Refer
to Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-8. Measuring the harmonic interval.
27. To print the delta marker data in tubular form, connect the
printer to the EMC analyzer (if it has not been previously
connected) and press:
4COPY5
28. To clear the markers, press:
4MKR5
More 1 of 3
MARKER ALL OFF
7-8
Making a manual diagnostic emission test

It is important to perform each step in the following procedures. To
Note
do otherwise will produce results that are dierent than expected.
1. To congure the EMC analyzer for testing, press:
4PRESET5
Note
Measurements can be made outside the close-eld probe's frequency

range, but the probe will not be calibrated.
2. To set the analyzer's start and stop frequencies, when using the
HP 11940A close-eld probe, press:
0300 MHz
kHz 030 MHz if using the HP 11941A close-eld probe.
30 MHz
Select 150
More 1 of 4
Correctn Factors
Antenna Factors
RECALL ANTENNA
Select nHP11940 if using the HP 11940A or nHP11941 if using the

HP 11941A.
LOAD FILE
Note
Figure 7-9. 30 MHz 0300 MHz setup selected.
The entire 30 MHz to 300 MHz range can be viewed since close-eld
probes are not susceptible to troublesome ambient signals, such as
commercial radio stations.
7-9
3. To factor in the preamplier's gain, press:

Previous Menu
Other Factors
RECALL OTHER
Select o8447FHI if using the HP 11940A probe or o8447FLO if

using the HP 11941A probe.
LOAD FILE
The correction factors for the probe and the amplier are now
applied to subsequent measurements.
Depending on the amplitude of the signals being measured, the
reference level and attenuation may need adjusting.
4. To adjust the reference level and attenuation, press:
4AMPLITUDE5
ATTEN AUTO MAN MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 4dB5
Figure 7-10. Adjusting the reference level and attenuation.
The marker and trace functions can be used as described earlier to

characterize emissions in the selected frequency range.
7-10
Other Diagnostic Techniques

Resolving signals of equal amplitude
In responding to a continuous-wave signal, a scanning analyzer traces

out the shape of its intermediate frequency (IF) lter. As we change
the lter bandwidth, we change the width of the displayed response.
If a wide lter is used and two equal-amplitude input signals are close
enough in frequency, then the two signals appear as one. Thus, signal
resolution is determined by the IF lters inside the analyzer.
For maximum exibility, the analyzer allows you to select from the
CISPR 200 Hz, 9 kHz and 120 kHz 6 dB measurement IF bandwidths,
or from the 30 Hz to 3 MHz 3 dB diagnostic IF bandwidth in a 1, 3, 10
sequence, plus 5 MHz. The 1 MHz bandwidth is a 6 dB bandwidth.
The bandwidths tell us how close together equal amplitude signals
can be and still be distinguished from each other. The IFBW function
selects the IF lter setting.
Generally, to resolve two signals of equal amplitude, the IF bandwidth
must be less than or equal to the frequency separation of the
two signals. If the bandwidth is equal to the separation, a dip of
approximately 3 dB is seen between the peaks of the two equal
signals, and it is clear that more than one signal is present. Refer to
Figure 7-12.
In order to keep the analyzer calibrated, sweep time is automatically
set to a value that is inversely proportional to the square of the IF
bandwidth. So, if the IF bandwidth is reduced by a factor of 10,
the sweep time is increased by a factor of 100 when sweep time
and bandwidth settings are coupled. (Sweep time is proportional to
1/BW2 .) For fastest measurement times, use the widest IF bandwidth
that still permits discrimination of all desired signals.
7-11
In this example you will resolve two signals of equal amplitude with a
frequency separation of 100 kHz.
1. Obtain two signals with a 100 kHz separation by connecting two
signal sources to the analyzer input as shown in Figure 7-11.
Figure 7-11. Setup for obtaining two signals.
2. Set the frequencies of the two sources to be 100 kHz apart, for
example, 300 MHz and 300.1 MHz. The amplitude of both signals
should be approximately 87 dBV (020 dBm).
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 4MHz5
4AMPLITUDE5
REF LVL : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 82 4+dBV5
A single signal peak is visible.
4. Since the IF bandwidth must be less than or equal to the frequency
separation of the two signals, an IF bandwidth of 30 kHz or less
must be used to resolve the two input signals. Change the IF
bandwidth to 10 kHz by pressing:
4BW5
IF BW AUTO MAN MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4kHz5
7-12
The display should be similar to that shown in Figure 7-12. To

resolve the signals further, use the knob or step keys to reduce the
IF bandwidth.
Figure 7-12. Resolving signals of equal amplitude.
As the IF bandwidth is decreased, resolution of the individual signals

is improved and the sweep time is increased. For fastest measurement
times, use the widest possible resolution bandwidth.
Since the IF bandwidth has been changed from the coupled value,
a "#" mark appears next to \IF BW" in the lower-left corner of the
screen, indicating that the IF bandwidth is uncoupled.
7-13
Resolving small signals hidden by large signals
When attempting to resolve signals that are not equal in amplitude,

you must consider the shape of the IF lter as well as its 3 dB or
6 dB bandwidth. The shape of the measurement lters is dened
by CISPR 16. The shape of the diagnostic lter is dened by the
shape factor, which is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB
bandwidth. (Generally, the IF lters in this analyzer have shape
factors of 15:1 or less.) If a small signal is too close to a larger signal,
the smaller signal can be hidden by the skirt of the larger signal. To
view the smaller signal, you must select an IF bandwidth such that
k is less than a. Refer to Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13. IF bandwidth for resolving small signals.
The separation between the two signals must be greater than half the
lter width of the larger signal at the amplitude level of the smaller
signal.
The following example resolves two input signals with a frequency
separation of 100 kHz and an amplitude dierence of 50 dB.
1. Obtain two signals with a 100 kHz separation by connecting the
equipment as shown in the previous section, \Resolving signals of
equal amplitude".
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 4MHz5
7-14
3. Set the IF bandwidth to 30 kHz by pressing:

4BW5
4. Set one source to a frequency of 300 MHz and an amplitude of

87 dBV (020 dBm).
5. Set the second source to a frequency of 300.1 MHz and an
amplitude of 37 dBV (070 dBm).
6. Set the 300 MHz signal to the reference level by pressing:
4MKR !5
More 1 of 3
MARKER
REF LVL
If a 30 kHz lter is used, the 60 dB bandwidth will be 450 kHz.

Since the half-bandwidth (225 kHz) is wider than the frequency
separation, the signals will not be resolved. Refer to Figure 7-14.
(To determine resolution capability for intermediate values of
amplitude level dierences, consider the lter skirts between the
3 dB and 60 dB points to be approximately straight. In this case,
we simply used the 60 dB value.)
Figure 7-14. Signal resolution with a 30 kHz IF bandwidth.
7-15
7. To resolve the two signals reduce the IF bandwidth by pressing:

4BW5
If a 10 kHz lter with a typical shape factor of 15:1 is used,
the lter will have a bandwidth of 150 kHz at the 60 dB point.
The half-bandwidth (75 kHz) is narrower than the frequency
separation, so the input signals will be resolved. Refer to
Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15. Signal resolution with a 10 kHz IF bandwidth.
7-16
Increasing the frequency readout resolution
The marker counter increases the resolution and accuracy of

frequency readout. When using the marker count function, if the
bandwidth to span ratio is too small (less than 0.01), the Reduce Span
message appears on the display. If there is another, larger signal (even
o the display), the count will be for the larger signal.
The following example increases the resolution and accuracy of the
frequency readout on the signal of interest.
1. Set the analyzer to a known state by connecting CAL OUT to INPUT
50
and by pressing:
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 4MHz5
2. Place a marker on the signal of interest by pressing:
4MKR !5
3. Turn the marker counter on by pressing:
4MKR5
More 1 of 3
MK COUNT ON OFF ON
The message COUNTER will be displayed as well as the frequency

and amplitude of the marker.
7-17
4. Increase the counter resolution by pressing:

More 2 of 3
CNT RES AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 4kHz5
The marker counter readout is displayed in the upper-right corner

of the screen. The resolution can be set from 1 Hz to 100 kHz.
Figure 7-16. Using the marker counter.
5. The marker counter remains on until turned o. Turn o the

marker counter by pressing:
4MKR5
More 1 of 3
MK COUNT ON OFF OFF
or
4MKR5
MKR 1 ON OFF OFF
7-18
Decreasing the frequency span
Using the marker track function, you can quickly decrease the span
while keeping the signal at center frequency.
This example examines a carrier signal in a 200 kHz span.
50
and by pressing:
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 700 4MHz5
4MKR!5
MARKER
HIGH
2. Move the signal to the center of the screen by pressing:

4MKR5
More 1 of 3
MK TRACK ON OFF ON
Because the marker track function automatically maintains the

signal at the center of the screen, you can reduce the span quickly
for a closer look. If the signal drifts o of the screen as you
decrease the span, use a wider frequency span.
3. Decrease the span by pressing:
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 4MHz5
The span decreases in steps as automatic zoom is completed. Refer
to Figure 7-17. You can also use the knob or step keys to decrease
the span.
Figure 7-17. After zooming in on the signal.
7-19
4. Turn o the marker track function by pressing:

4MKR5
More 1 of 3
MK TRACK ON OFF OFF
Peaking signal amplitude with preselector peak

PRESEL PEAK works only above 2.9 GHz, so it only applies to
Note
the HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM, and HP 8596EM.
The preselector peak function automatically adjusts the input lter

tracking above 2.9 GHz to peak the signal at the active marker. Using
preselector peak prior to measuring a signal yields the most accurate
amplitude reading at the specied frequency.
1. To maximize the peak response of the high frequency input lter
and adjust the tracking, tune the marker to a signal and press:
4AMPLITUDE5
More 1 of 3
PRESEL PEAK
Note
PRESEL PEAK maximizes the peak response of the signal of interest,

but may degrade the frequency response at other frequencies. Use
PRESEL DEFAULT or 4PRESET5 to clear preselector-peak values before
measuring a signal at another frequency.
PRESEL DEFAULT provides the best atness for a full single-band and
for viewing several signals simultaneously.

50
and by pressing:
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
START FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3.0 4GHz5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3.5 4GHz5
4MKR!5
MARKER
7-20
HIGH
3. Peak the amplitude response by pressing:

4AMPLITUDE5
More 1 of 3
PRESEL PEAK
The message peaking is displayed while the routine is working.
Figure 7-18. Peaking signal amplitude using preselector peak.
7-21
Tracking unstable signals
The marker track function is useful for tracking unstable signals that
drift with time. The maximum hold and minimum hold functions are
useful for displaying modulated signals which appear unstable, but
have an envelope that contains the information-bearing portion of
the signal. MK TRACK ON OFF may be used to track these unstable
signals. Use 4MKR!5, MARKER ! HIGH to place a marker on the
highest signal on the display. Pressing MK TRACK ON OFF ON will
bring that signal to the center frequency of the graticule and adjust
the center frequency every sweep to bring the selected signal back
to the center. SPAN ZOOM is a quick way to perform the 4MKR!5,
MARKER ! HIGH , 4MKR5, MK TRACK ON OFF , 4SPAN5 key sequence.
Note the primary function of the marker track function is to track
unstable signals, not to track a signal as the center frequency of the
analyzer is changed. If you choose to use the marker track function
when changing center frequency, check to ensure the signal found by
the tracking function is the correct signal.
Using the marker track function
In this example you will use the marker track function to keep a
drifting signal in the center of the display and monitor its change.
This example requires a modulated signal. An acceptable signal can
be easily found by connecting an antenna to the analyzer input and
tuning to the FM broadcast band (88 to 108 MHz).
1. Connect an antenna to the analyzer input.
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 104.9 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 20 4MHz5
4BW5
Note
Use a dierent signal frequency if no FM signal is available at

104.9 MHz in your area.
3. Adjust the reference level so the signal is within two divisions of
the top of the display by pressing:
4AMPLITUDE5
REF LVL
Adjust the reference level so the signal is within two divisions of

the top of the display.
4. Turn autoranging on by pressing:
AUTORANG ON OFF ON
7-22
5. Set the span by pressing:

4SPAN5
SPAN ZOOM : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 500 4kHz5
Notice the signal has remained in the center of the display.
Note
If the signal you selected drifts too quickly for the analyzer to keep
up with, increase the span.
6. The signal frequency drift can be read from the screen if both the
marker track and marker delta functions are active. Press:
4MKR5
MARKER 1
More 1 of 3
MK TRACK ON OFF ON
The marker readout indicates the change in frequency and

amplitude as the signal drifts. Refer to Figure 7-19.
Figure 7-19. Using marker tracking to track an unstable signal.
The analyzer can measure the short-term and long-term stability

of a source. The maximum amplitude level and the frequency
drift of an input signal trace can be displayed and held by using
the maximum-hold function. The minimum amplitude level can be
displayed by using minimum hold (available for trace C only).
You can use the maximum-hold and minimum-hold functions if,
for example, you want to determine how much of the frequency
spectrum an FM signal occupies.
7-23
Using maximum-hold and minimum-hold
In this example you will use the maximum-hold and minimum-hold

functions to monitor the envelope of an FM signal.
1. Connect an antenna to the analyzer input.
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 20 4MHz5
4AMPLITUDE5
AUTORANG ON OFF ON (Toggles on and o.)
4BW5
IF BW AUTO MAN MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4kHz5
3. Determine the signal peak by pressing:

4MKR!5
MARKER
HIGH
Adjust the reference level (under 4AMPLITUDE5) so the signal is

within two divisions of the top of the display.
4. Adjust the span by pressing:
4SPAN5
SPAN ZOOM : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 500 4kHz5
Notice the signal has remained in the center of the display.
5. Turn o the marker track function by pressing:
4MKR5
More 1 of 3
MK TRACK ON OFF OFF
7-24
6. Measure the excursion of the signal by pressing:

4TRACE5
MAX HOLD A
As the signal varies, maximum hold maintains the maximum

responses of the input signal, as shown in Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20. Viewing an unstable signal using Max Hold A.
Annotation on the left side of the screen indicates the trace mode.
For example, MA SB SC indicates trace A is in maximum-hold
mode, trace B and trace C are in store-blank mode.
7. Select trace B by pressing:
4TRACE5
TRACE A B C B
8. Place trace B in clear-write mode by pressing:

CLEAR WRITE B
Trace B displays the current measurement results as it sweeps.

Trace A remains in maximum-hold mode, showing the frequency
shift of the signal.
9. Select trace C by pressing:
TRACE A B C C
7-25
10. Display the minimum amplitude of the signal by pressing:

MIN HOLD C
Figure 7-21. Viewing an unstable signal using Max and Min Hold.
7-26
Comparing signals using delta markers
Using the analyzer, you can easily compare frequency and amplitude
dierences between signals, such as radio or television signal spectra.
The delta marker function lets you compare two signals when both
appear on the screen at one time or when only one appears on the
screen.
Measuring dierences between two signals
In this example you will measure the dierences between two signals
on the same display screen.
50
and by pressing:
4PRESET5
The calibrator signal and its harmonics appear on the display.
2. Place a marker at the highest peak on the display by pressing:
4MKR!5
MARKER
HIGH
Figure 7-22. Placing a marker on the CAL OUT signal.
3. Activate a second marker at the position of the rst marker by

pressing:
4MKR5
MARKER 1
4. Move the second marker to another signal peak using the step keys
or the knob or by pressing:
4MKR!5
NEXT PK RIGHT
7-27
5. The amplitude and frequency dierence between the markers

is displayed in the active function block and in the Marker Box.
Figure 7-23. Using the marker delta function.
Measuring dierences between signals on screen and o

screen
In this example you will measure the frequency and amplitude

dierence between two signals that do not appear on the screen at
the same time. (This technique is useful for harmonic distortion tests
when narrow span and narrow bandwidth are necessary to measure
the low-level harmonics.)
50
and by pressing:
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4MHz5
2. Place a marker on the peak by pressing:
4MKR!5
MARKER
7-28
HIGH
3. Identify the position of the rst marker by pressing:

4MKR5
MARKER 1
4. Set the center frequency by pressing:

4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 600 4MHz5
The rst marker remains on the screen at the amplitude of the rst
signal peak.
Note
Changing the reference level changes the marker delta amplitude

readout.
The annotation in the upper-right corner of the screen indicates the
amplitude and frequency dierence between the two markers. Refer
to Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24. Frequency and amplitude dierences.
7-29
Measuring low-level signals
Analyzer sensitivity is the ability to measure low-level signals. It is

limited by the noise generated inside the analyzer. The analyzer input
attenuator and bandwidth settings aect the sensitivity by changing
the signal-to-noise ratio. The attenuator aects the level of a signal
passing through the instrument, whereas the bandwidth aects the
level of internal noise without aecting the signal. In the rst two
examples in this section, the attenuator and bandwidth settings are
adjusted to view low-level signals.
If, after adjusting the attenuation and IF bandwidth, a signal
is still near the noise, visibility can be improved by using the
averaging-bandwidth and video-averaging functions, as demonstrated
in the following examples.
Reducing input attenuation
If a signal is very close to the noise oor, reducing input attenuation

brings the signal out of the noise. In this example, reducing the
attenuation to 0 dB maximizes signal power in the analyzer.
Note
The total power of all input signals at the analyzer input must not
exceed the maximum power level for the analyzer.
1. Connect an antenna to the analyzer input, then press:
4PRESET5
2. Reduce the frequency range to view a low-level signal of interest.
For example, to reduce the frequency span to 20 MHz press:
4FREQUENCY5
START FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 88 4MHz5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 108 4MHz5
4BW5
3. Place a marker on the low-level signal of interest by pressing:
4MKR5
Use the knob to position the marker at the signal's peak.
4. Place the signal at center frequency by pressing:
4MKR !5
MARKER
7-30
CF
5. Reduce the span to 1 MHz by pressing:

4SPAN5
Use the step-down key (4+5) to reduce the span. Refer to
Figure 7-25.
6. Reduce the amplitude by pressing:
4AMPLITUDE5
4+5, 4+5
Figure 7-25. Low-level signal.
7. Press:
ATTEN AUTO MAN
Press the step-up key (4*5) twice to select 30 dB attenuation.

Increasing the attenuation moves the noise oor closer to the
signal.
A \#" mark appears next to the "ATN" annotation at the side of the
display, indicating the attenuation is no longer coupled to other
analyzer settings.
7-31
8. To see the signal more clearly, press:

0 4dB5
Zero attenuation makes the signal more visible. (To protect the
input mixer, 0 dB RF attenuation can be selected only with the
data keys.)
Note
Figure 7-26. Using 0 dB attenuation.
When using an HP 85420E Option 1EM RF lter section, the RF

overload indicator may appear on screen if your ambient environment
contains a large signal which falls within the bandwidth of the
front-end lter section. If this occurs, increase the input attenuation
as needed to turn o the indicator after you have completed this
example.
9. Before connecting other signals to the analyzer input, increase the
RF attenuation to protect the input mixer by pressing:
ATTEN AUTO MAN AUTO, or
4AUTO COUPLE5
AUTO ALL
7-32
Reducing IF bandwidth
In this example the IF bandwidth will be reduced to view low-level

signals.
1. As in the previous example, connect an antenna to the analyzer
input. Set the analyzer to view a low-level signal.
2. Press:
4BW5
IF BW AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4kHz5
The low-level signal appears more clearly because the noise level is
reduced. Refer to Figure 7-27.
Figure 7-27. Decreasing IF bandwidth.
A \#" mark appears next to the "IF BW" annotation at the lower-left
portion of the screen, indicating the resolution bandwidth is
uncoupled.
As the IF bandwidth is reduced, the sweep time is increased to
maintain analyzer calibration.
7-33
Reducing averaging bandwidth
In this example you will use the averaging lter control to observe
low-level narrow-band signals close to the noise oor. The averaging
lter is a post-detection low-pass lter that smooths the displayed
trace. When signal responses near the noise level of the analyzer are
visually masked by the noise, the averaging lter can be narrowed to
smooth this noise and improve the visibility of the signal. (Reducing
averaging bandwidth requires a slower sweep time to keep the
analyzer calibrated.)
Using the averaging-bandwidth function, measure the amplitude of a
low-level signal.
1. As in the previous examples, connect an antenna to the analyzer
input. Set the analyzer to view a low-level signal.
2. Reduce the IF bandwidth by pressing:
4BW5
IF BW AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 30 4kHz5
3. Reduce the averaging bandwidth by pressing:

AVG BW AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 4Hz5
This improves the display of the signal by smoothing the noise,

allowing better measurement of the signal amplitude.
A \#" mark also appears next to the "AVG BW" annotation at the
left-bottom of the screen, indicating that the averaging bandwidth
is not coupled to the IF bandwidth.
7-34
Instrument preset conditions couple the averaging bandwidth

to the IF bandwidth so that the averaging bandwidth is equal
to or wider than the IF bandwidth. If the averaging bandwidth
is uncoupled when averaging bandwidth is the active function,
pressing AVG BW AUTO MAN AUTO recouples the averaging
bandwidth. Refer to Figure 7-28.
Note
Narrow averaging bandwidths mask pulse noise levels.
Figure 7-28. Decreasing averaging bandwidth.
Using video averaging
In this example a signal level very close to the noise oor will be
made more visible using video averaging.
Video averaging is a digital process in which each trace point is
averaged with the previous trace-point average. Selecting video
averaging changes the detection mode from peak to sample. The
result is a sudden drop in the displayed noise level. The sample mode
displays the instantaneous value of the signal at the end of the time
or frequency interval represented by each display point, rather than
the value of the peak during the interval. Sample mode is not used to
measure signal amplitudes accurately because it may not nd the true
peak of the signal.
Note
The time required to construct a full trace that is averaged to

the desired degree is approximately the same when using either
the averaging-bandwidth or the video-averaging technique. The
averaging-bandwidth technique completes the averaging as a slow
sweep is taken, whereas the video-averaging technique takes many
sweeps to complete the average. Characteristics of the signal being
measured, such as drift and duty cycle, determine which technique is
appropriate.
7-35
Video averaging improves the display of low-level signals in wide

bandwidths by averaging the signal and the noise. As the analyzer
takes sweeps, you can watch video averaging smooth the trace.
4BW5
AVG BW AUTO MAN AUTO
2. Connect an antenna to INPUT 50

of the analyzer and position a
low-level signal on the screen.
3. Initiate the video averaging routine by pressing:
4TRACE5
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
VID AVG ON OFF ON
As the averaging routine smooths the trace, low-level signals

become more visible. "VIDEO AVG 100" appears in the active
function block.
The number represents the number of samples (or sweeps) taken to
complete the averaging routine.
4. Set the number of samples by pressing:
VID AVG ON OFF : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 25 4ENTER5
Figure 7-29. Using the video averaging function.
7-36
During averaging, the current sample appears at the left side of

the graticule. Changes in active functions settings, such as the
center frequency or reference level, will restart the sampling. The
sampling will also restart if video averaging is turned o and then
on again.
Once the set number of sweeps has been completed, the analyzer
continues to provide a running average based on this set number.
5. Turn video averaging o and on again by pressing:
VID AVG ON OFF OFF
VID AVG ON OFF ON
The number of samples equals the number of sweeps in the
averaging routine.
7-37
Testing for distortion using the linearity check
The linearity check function can be used to test for compression of

low-level signals or for the presence of internally-generated distortion
due to high-level input signals. This function simplies the process of
determining if the displayed signals are suitable for measurement.
Additional input attenuation is switched in while you monitor the
value of the marker located on the signal in question. When using an
RF lter section, this feature complements the RF overload function,
which indicates when an overload might be present. It allows you to
decide if the signal causing the overload is aecting the measurement
of another signal.
Measuring small signals in the presence of a large ambient

signal
Analyzer overload due to large signals is one problem encountered

when making measurements on an open site. When scanning over
a frequency range which contains both a large ambient signal and
a low-level DUT emission, the large signal may trigger the analyzer
overload indicator when the analyzer sensitivity is set to view the
small signal. While the analyzer is in overload as it scans through
the large signal, it may not be in overload as it scans through the
small signal. The presence or absence of the overload depends on the
frequency spacing between the two signals relative to the analyzer
input lter bandwidth. If the analyzer is not in overload as it scans
through the small signal, the measured value of that signal will be
correct even though the analyzer display indicates an overload has
occurred. The Linearity Check function can be used to determine if
the analyzer is in overload under these conditions.
1. Connect two signal generators to the input of the analyzer as
shown in Figure 7-30. Set one signal to 300 MHz, 92 dBV
(015 dBm) and the other to 305 MHz, 27 dBV (080 dBm).
Increase the amplitude of the 305 MHz signal if it is masked by the
noise level of the 300 MHz source.
7-38
Figure 7-30. Set-up for obtaining two signals.

4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 305 4MHz5

4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 20 4MHz5
AMPLITUDE5
ATTEN AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 4dB5
Note the IF OVERLOAD message on the display due to the 300 MHz
signal.
3. To view and mark the 305 MHz signal, press:
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4MHz5
4MKR !5
MARKER
MKR5
HIGH
MARKER 1
Note the uctuations in the delta marker amplitude displayed

in the active function area. When the signal is near the noise
oor, the noise contributions will cause uctuation in the marker
value. This could be interpreted as overload induced error when
LINEARITY CHECK is activated.
4. To reduce the uctuation, decrease the averaging bandwidth by

pressing:
4BW5
AVG BW AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 4kHz5
Note the absolute level of the marker delta readout and the
reduced range of the uctuation.
7-39
5. Activate linearity check by pressing:

4AMPLITUDE5
LIN CHCK ON OFF ON
If the delta marker amplitude and uctuation changes by more
than 1 dB, the analyzer is in compression. In this example, the
delta marker readings remain the same and a valid measurement
can be made because the 305 MHz signal is not being aected by
the 300 MHz signal.
Figure 7-31. Using linearity check to detect compression.
7-40
Using linearity check. The Linearity Check function can be used to
Note
determine if a signal displayed in the presence of a high level ambient

is an actual emission or an internally generated distortion product.
When the Linearity Check function is activated, the level of the
distortion product will change but the level of an actual input signal
will not.
1. Connect two signal generators to the input of the analyzer as
shown in Figure 7-32. Set one signal to 300 MHz, 107 dBV
(0 dBm) and the other to 305 MHz, 65 dBV (042 dBm). Increase
the amplitude of the 305 MHz signal if it is masked by the noise
level of the 300 MHz source.
These levels were intentionally chosen to overdrive the analyzer and
generate third order distortion products.
Figure 7-32. Set-up for obtaining two signals.

4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5

4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 20 4MHz5
AMPLITUDE5, 4+5
ATTEN AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 4dB5
Note the IF OVERLOAD message.
7-41
Figure 7-33. Generating third order distortion products.
3. Use the knob to place the marker on the 295 MHz signal. Center
the signal on the display and decrease the span by pressing:
4MKR !5
MARKER ! CF
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4MHz5
4. Reduce the noise induced uctuations by pressing:

4BW5
AVG BW AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 4kHz5
5. Observe the marker delta amplitude as you press:

4MKR5
MARKER 1
6. Active the Linearity Check function by pressing:

4AMPLITUDE5
LIN CHCK ON OFF ON
Observe the drop in the measured signal.
7-42
Figure 7-34.
Using linearity check to identify distortion products.
7-43
Demodulating and listening to an AM or FM signal
The functions available using the 4DEMOD5 key allow you to

demodulate and hear signal information displayed on the EMC
analyzer. Simply place a marker on a signal of interest, activate AM or
FM demodulation, and then listen.
1. Connect an antenna to INPUT 50
of the analyzer.
2. Select a frequency range on the analyzer, such as the range for
FM radio broadcasts. For example, the frequency range for FM
broadcasts in the United States is 88 MHz to 108 MHz. Press:
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
START FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 88 4MHz5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 108 4MHz5
3. Place a marker on the signal of interest by pressing:
4MKR5
Use the step keys or knob to moving the marker to a signal of
interest.
4. Turn demodulation on by pressing:
4DEMOD5
DEMOD ON OFF ON
DEMOD AM FM FM
Use the front-panel volume control to control the speaker's
volume.
5. The signal at the marker is demodulated for the duration of the
dwell time. Use the step keys, knob, or data keys to change the
dwell time. To change the dwell time to two seconds, press:
DWELL TIME , 4*5, 4*5
6. The peak search functions can be used to move the marker to

other signals of interest. Press 4MKR !5 to access NEXT PEAK ,
NEXT PK RIGHT , or NEXT PK LEFT .
7. The signal at the marker can be continuously demodulated when

the frequency scan is turned o by pressing:
4TEST5
FRQ SCAN ON OFF OFF
8. To adjust FM sensitivity to better demodulate wideband or

narrowband FM signals, adjust the FM Gain by pressing:
4DEMOD5
FM GAIN
The default value is 100 kHz per volt.
7-44
Using the analyzer in zero frequency span
The EMC analyzer operates as a xed-tuned analyzer in zero span.

The zero span mode can be used to recover modulation on a carrier
signal.
Center frequency in the swept-tuned mode becomes the tuned
frequency in zero span. The horizontal axis of the screen becomes
calibrated in time, rather than frequency. Markers display amplitude
and time values.
The following functions establish a clear display of the video
waveform.
Trigger stabilizes the waveform trace on the display by triggering on
the modulation envelope. If the signal's modulation is stable, video
trigger synchronizes the sweep with the demodulated waveform.
Linear mode should be used in amplitude modulation (AM)
measurements to avoid distortion caused by the logarithmic
amplier when demodulating signals.
Sweep time adjusts the full sweep time from 20 ms (20 s in zero
span with Option 101), to 100 s. The sweep time readout refers to
the full 10-division graticule. Divide this value by 10 to determine
sweep time per division.
Resolution and video bandwidth are selected according to the signal
bandwidth.
Each of the coupled function values remains at its current value when
zero span is activated. Video bandwidth is coupled to resolution
bandwidth. Sweep time is not coupled to any other function.
Note
Capability for measuring AM or FM demodulation is not available

if your EMC analyzer has option 703. Refer to \Demodulating and
Listening to an AM or FM Signal" in Chapter 8 for more information.
Example: View the modulation waveform of an AM signal in the time
domain.
1. To obtain an AM signal, you can either connect an antenna to the
EMC analyzer input and tune to a commercial AM broadcast station
or you can connect a source to the EMC analyzer input and set the
percent modulation of the source. (If a headset is used with the
VIDEO OUT connector, the EMC analyzer will operate as a radio.)
2. First, center and zoom in on the signal in the frequency domain.
Refer to \Decreasing the Frequency Span Using the Marker Track
Function." Be sure to turn o the marker track function, since
the marker track function must be o for zero span. Refer to
Figure 7-35.
7-45
Figure 7-35. Viewing an AM signal.
3. To demodulate the AM, press:

4BW5
Increase the resolution bandwidth to include both sidebands of the
signal within the passband of the EMC analyzer.
4. Next, position the signal peak near the reference level and select a
linear voltage display by pressing:
4AMPLITUDE5
5. Change the reference level, then press:
SCALE LOG LIN LIN
7-46
6. To select zero span, either press:

4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 4Hz5
or press:
ZERO SPAN
Figure 7-36. Measuring modulation in zero span.
If the modulation is a steady tone (for example, from a signal

generator), use video trigger to trigger on the waveform and
stabilize the display. Adjust the sweep time to change the
horizontal scale.
Use markers and delta markers to measure time parameters of the
waveform.
7-47
Measuring signals near band boundaries using harmonic lock

This application should only be performed using an HP 8593EM,
Note
HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM.
When measuring signals at or near a band crossing, use the

lowest band having a specied upper frequency limit that will
include the signal of interest. Refer to HP 8590 EM Series EMC
Analyzer Verication Guide for your instrument for harmonic band
specications. Using harmonic lock, and choosing the lowest possible
band to analyze a signal, ensures the best specied measurement
accuracy.
To lock onto a specic harmonic, press:
4FREQUENCY5
More 1 of 2
Band Lock
BND LOCK ON OFF ON
or select a band (refer to HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer

Verication Guide for your instrument for band specications).
After setting the harmonic lock, only center frequencies and spans
within the frequency range of the harmonic band may be entered.
The span is automatically reduced to accommodate a center frequency
specied near the end of the band range.
Example:
1. Connect 100 MHz COMB OUT to the EMC analyzer input. The
HP 8595EM does not have a 100 MHz COMB OUT signal, so it
cannot be used for this measurement example. (An external source
must be substituted.)
2. Press 4PRESET5 and then the following keys:
4AUX/USER5
COMB GEN ON OFF ON
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 350 4MHz5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6.6 4GHz5
More 1 of 2
Band Lock
BND LOCK ON OFF ON
3. Place a marker on the farthest peak to the left by using the 4MKR5
key and the knob.
7-48
4. Press:
MARKER 1
MKR !5
NEXT PK RIGHT , NEXT PK RIGHT
to show the frequency and amplitude dierence between the two

comb teeth.
You will see three comb teeth on your display. The EMC analyzer
is locked in band 2 and will not allow multiband sweeps. Refer to
Figure 7-37.
Figure 7-37. Using harmonic lock.
5. To see a multiband sweep, press the following keys:

4MKR5
More 1 of 3
MARKER ALL OFF
FREQUENCY5
More 1 of 2
Band Lock
BND LOCK ON OFF OFF
7-49
6. Place a marker on the farthest peak to the left by pressing 4MKR5

and adjusting the knob.
7. Press:
MARKER 1
MKR !5
Use NEXT PK RIGHT to place a marker on the farthest peak to the

right. The marker readout displays the frequency and amplitude
dierence between the two comb teeth. Refer to Figure 7-38.
Note
The comb frequencies have a 100 MHz spacing.
Figure 7-38. Harmonic locking o.
7-50
Localized Susceptability Testing

Conguring systems for localized susceptability testing
A typical setup for localized susceptability testing is shown in

Figure 7-39. The setup shown uses the HP 84100EM Preproduction
Evaluation system.
Figure 7-39. Localized susceptability measurements test setup.
Caution
The HP 8447F preamplier will only accept a 107 dBV input. The
HP 8591EM's tracking generator can output 127 dBV, so be sure you
know the output of the tracking generator before connecting it to
the input of the HP 8447F. To prevent the amplier from going into
gain compression, the best, or safest input is approximately 92 dBV.
A signal greater than this will not improve the amplier's output and
can cause gain compression.
Caution
When using an HP 8593EM, HP 8594EM, HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM

EMC analyzer, delete the HP 8447F Option H64.
The HP 8593EM, HP 8594EM, HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM tracking
generator can output 97 dBV, so be sure you know the output of the
tracking generator before connecting it to the input of the HP 8447F.
To prevent the amplier from going into gain compression, the best, or
safest input is approximately 92 dBV. A signal greater than this will
not improve the amplier's output and can cause gain compression.
When not using the preamplier with the HP 8593EM, HP 8594EM,
HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM EMC analyzers, set SCR PWR (source
power) to +2.75 dB.
7-51
Equipment list
EMC analyzer : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8591EM Option 010

HP 8593EM Option 010
HP 11945A close-eld test set : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11940A
HP 11941A
preamplier (use with HP 8591EM only) : : : : : : HP 8447F Option H64
Caution
The maximum safe input power to the HP 11940 and HP 11941 probes
is +30 dBV (1 W).
Making localized susceptability measurements
The following steps set up the tracking generator portion of the EMC
analyzer.
Setting up the tracking generator
1. To set the tracking generator to a known level without turning the

it on, press:
4PRESET5
4AUX/USER5
Track Gen
SCR PWR ON OFF
The source power becomes the active function, SCR PWR is

displayed in inverse video, but the source power has not been
turned on. A typical display in shown in Figure 7-40.
Figure 7-40. Setting up the tracking generator.
7-52
Tuning the tracking generator
The next step reguires tuning the tracking generator to the frequency
of interest. The frequency must be within the frequency range of the
probe being used. In the following steps an HP 11941A close-eld
probe with a frequency range of 9 kHz to 30 MHz is used to look at a
narrow frequency range of about 10 MHz to 30 MHz.
2. To tune the analyzer for the desired range, press:
4SETUP5
030
150 kHz
FREQUENCY5
MHz
START FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4MHz5
The tracking generator is now sweeping that range.
Turning the tracking generator on

3. To set the source power, press:
4AUX/USER5
Track Gen
SCR PWR ON OFF : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 92 4+dBV5
The tracking generator is on. Notice the SCR PWR function has
toggled to ON. A typical display is shown in Figure 7-41.
Figure 7-41. Turning the tracking generator on.
4. Use the probe to check the circuit under test for any disruptions in
the DUT's normal operation.
7-53
8
Making Other Measurements
What you'll nd in this section
This section demonstrates EMC analyzer measurement techniques

with examples of typical applications; each application focuses on
dierent features. The measurement procedures covered in this
section are listed below.
Stimulus-response measurements
Making a re ection calibration and measurement
Measuring amplitude modulation using FFT
3 dB and 6 dB bandwidth measurements
99% power bandwidth measurements
Percent AM modulation measurements
Amplitude and frequency dierence measurements
Third order measurements
Using the HP 85420E Option 1EM RF lter section
Learning about the analyzer's analog+ display mode
Triggering on a selected line of a video picture eld (Options 101
and 102, or Option 301 only).
To nd descriptions of specic EMC analyzer functions refer to
Chapter 17.
8-1
Stimulus-response measurements
What are stimulus-response measurements?
Stimulus-response measurements require a source to stimulate

a device under test (DUT), an EMC analyzer to analyze the
frequency-response characteristics of the DUT, and, for return-loss
measurements, a directional coupler. Characterization of a DUT
can be made in terms of its transmission or re ection parameters.
Examples of transmission measurements include atness and insertion
loss. An example of a re ection measurement is return loss.
An EMC analyzer combined with a tracking generator forms a
stimulus-response measurement system. Using the tracking generator
as the swept source operation is analogous to a single-channel scalar
network analyzer. A narrow-band system has a wide dynamic
measurement range, but the tracking generator's output frequency
must be made to precisely track the EMC analyzer's input frequency.
This wide dynamic range will be illustrated in the following example.
Figure 8-1 shows the block diagram of an EMC analyzer and tracking
generator system.
Figure 8-1.
EMC analyzer/tracking generator system block diagram.
Using the EMC analyzer with the internal tracking generator
The procedure below describes how to use the built-in tracking

generator system of the EMC analyzer to measure the rejection
of a low-pass lter, which is a type of transmission measurement.
Illustrated in this example are the functions in the tracking-generator
menu, such as adjusting the tracking-generator output power, source
calibration, and normalization.
8-2
Stepping through the measurement
There are four basic steps in performing a stimulus-response

measurement, whether it be a transmission or re ection
measurement: set up the EMC analyzer settings, calibrate, normalize,
and measure.
1. If necessary, perform the self-calibration routine for the tracking
generator described in Chapter 2.
2. To measure the rejection of a bandpass lter, connect the
equipment as shown in Figure 8-2. This example uses a bandpass
lter with a center frequency of 145.4 MHz as the DUT.
Figure 8-2. Transmission measurement test setup.
3. Set the EMC analyzer to a known state by pressing:

4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
START FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 4MHz5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 250 4MHz5

AMPLITUDE5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 102 4+dBV5
4. Activate the tracking generator and turn the power on by
pressing:
4AUX/USER5
Track Gen
SRC PWR ON OFF ON
Caution
Note
Excessive signal input may damage the DUT. Do not exceed the
maximum power that the device under test can tolerate.
To reduce ripples caused by source return loss, use 10 dB or greater
tracking generator output attenuation. Tracking generator output
attenuation is normally a function of the source power selected.
However, the output attenuation may be controlled by using
SRC ATN MAN AUTO .
8-3
Figure 8-3. Tracking-generator output power activated.
5. Put the sweep time of the EMC analyzer into stimulus-response

auto-coupled mode by pressing:
More 1 of 2
SWP CPLG SR SA SR
Note
Auto-coupled sweep times are usually much faster for

swept-response measurements than for EMC analyzer
measurements.
In the stimulus-response mode, the Q (reactance versus resistance) of
the DUT can determine the fastest rate at which the EMC analyzer
can be swept. To determine whether the EMC analyzer is sweeping
too fast, slow the sweep time and note whether there is a frequency
or amplitude shift of the trace. Continue to slow the sweep time until
there is no longer a frequency or amplitude shift.
6. Decrease the resolution bandwidth to increase sensitivity, and
narrow the averaging bandwidth to smooth the noise by pressing:
4BW5
IF BW AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4kHz5
8-4
7. To make a transmission measurement accurately, the frequency

response of the test system must be known. To measure the
frequency response of the test system, connect the cable but not
the DUT from the tracking generator output to the EMC analyzer
input.
To store the frequency response of the test system in trace B,
press:
4TRACE5
Trace A B C B
CLEAR WRITE B
BLANK B
8. To normalize, reconnect the DUT to the EMC analyzer and press:

4TRACE5
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
NORMLIZE ON OFF ON
Activate the display line by pressing:

NORMLIZE POSITION
The display line marks the normalized reference position, or the

position where 0 dB insertion loss (transmission measurements)
or 0 dB return loss (re ection measurements) will normally
reside. Using the knob results in a change in the position of the
normalized trace, within the range of the graticule. Set the level
so it is one graticule below the top of the display.
Normalization eliminates the frequency response error of the test
system. When normalization is on, trace math is being performed
on the active trace. The trace math performed is trace A minus
trace B plus the display line, with the result placed into trace A.
Remember that trace A contained the measurement trace, trace
B contained the stored calibration trace, and DL (display line)
represents the normalized reference position. Note that the units
of the reference level, dB, re ect this relative measurement.
8-5
9. Measure the insertion loss of the lter at a given frequency (for

example, 145.4 MHz) by pressing:
4MKR5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 145.4 4MHz5
The marker readout displays the rejection of the lter at
145.4 MHz (refer to Figure 8-4).
Figure 8-4. Normalized trace.
10. Measure the rejection of the lter relative to the passband by

pressing:
4MKR5
MARKER 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 30 4MHz5
8-6
The Marker 1 amplitude readout displays the rejection at a

30 MHz frequency oset refer to Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5. Measuring the rejection of the lter.
8-7
Tracking generator unleveled condition
When using the tracking generator, the message TG UNLVL may

appear. The TG UNLVL message indicates that the tracking generator
source power ( SRC PWR ON OFF ) could not be maintained at the
user-selected level during some portion of the sweep. If the unleveled
condition exists at the beginning of the sweep, the message will
be displayed immediately. If the unleveled condition occurs after
the sweep begins, the message will be displayed after the sweep is
completed. A momentary unleveled condition may not be detected
when the sweep time is small. The message will be cleared after a
sweep is completed with no unleveled conditions.
The unleveled condition may be caused by any of the following:
Start frequency is too low or the stop frequency is too high. The
unleveled condition is likely to occur if the true frequency range
exceeds the tracking generator frequency specication (especially
the low frequency specication). The true frequency range being
swept may be signicantly dierent than the start or stop frequency
annotations indicate, depending on other EMC analyzer settings,
especially the span (refer to Chapter 17 for more instrument). For
better frequency accuracy, use a narrower span.
Tracking peak may be required (use TRACKING PEAK ).
Source attenuation may be set incorrectly (select

SRC ATN MAN AUTO (AUTO) for optimum setting).
The source power may be set too high or too low, use
SRC PWR ON OFF to reset it.
The source power sweep may be set too high, resulting in an

unleveled condition at the end of the sweep. Use PWR SWP ON OFF
to decrease the amplitude.
8-8
Making re ection calibration measurements
Typically, the calibration standard for re ection measurements is a

short circuit connected at the reference plane (the point at which the
test device will be connected). Refer to Figure 8-6. A short circuit
has a re ection coecient of 1 (0 dB return loss); it thus re ects all
incident power and provides a convenient 0 dB reference.
Figure 8-6. Re ection measurement short calibration test setup.

Example: Measure the return loss of a lter.
The following procedure is written for making a re ection

measurement using a coupler or directional bridge, instead of the test
set.
Note
Re ection calibration
The EMC analyzer center frequency and span for this measurement
can easily be set up using the transmission measurement setup. Tune
the EMC analyzer so that the passband of the lter comprises a
majority of the display, then proceed with the steps outlined below.
1. Connect the DUT to the output port of a directional bridge or
coupler. Terminate the unconnected port of the DUT.
2. Connect the tracking generator output of the EMC analyzer to the
input port of a directional bridge or coupler.
3. Connect the EMC analyzer INPUT to the coupled port of a
directional bridge or coupler.
8-9
4. Adjust the EMC analyzer for measurement conditions or settings.

Turn on the tracking generator and set the amplitude level by
pressing:
4AUX/USER5
Track Gen
SRC PWR ON OFF ON
Set center frequency, span, and other settings.

5. Replace the DUT with a short circuit.
6. Normalize the trace by performing the following functions:
a. To display the reference trace in B, press:
4TRACE5
TRACE A B C B
CLEAR WRITE B
b. To store the reference trace in B, press:

BLANK B
c. To activate the trace A minus trace B function, and display the

results in trace A for each sweep, press:
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
NORMLIZE ON OFF ON
The normalized trace or at line represents 0 dB return loss.
Measuring the return loss
Note
If possible, use a coupler or bridge with the correct test port

connector for both calibrating and measuring. Any adapter between
the test port and DUT degrades coupler/bridge directivity and system
source match. Ideally, you should use the same adapter for the
calibration and the measurement. Be sure to terminate the second
port of a two-port device.
7. After calibrating the system with the above procedure, reconnect
the lter in place of the short circuit without changing any EMC
analyzer settings.
8-10
8. Use the marker to read return loss. Press 4MKR5 and position the
marker with the knob to read the return loss at that frequency.
Figure 8-7. Measuring the return loss of the lter.
8-11
Measuring amplitude modulation with the fast Fourier transform function
The fast Fourier transform (FFT) function of the EMC analyzer allows
measurements of amplitude modulation (AM). The FFT function
transforms demodulated AM data from the time domain (zero span) to
the frequency domain. The FFT function calculates the magnitude of
each frequency block of time-domain samples of the input signal. It
is commonly used to measure AM at rates that cannot be measured
in the normal frequency domain. The FFT is a post-detection fast
Fourier transform function and cannot be used to resolve continuous
wave or carrier signals.
The FFT function requires a specic EMC analyzer conguration.
An AM signal is demodulated in the time domain by widening the
resolution bandwidth to include the signal sidebands within the
passband of the EMC analyzer. Then the scan is turned o so the
tuning is centered on the AM carrier.
When 4AUX/USER5, More 1 of 3 , FFT MEAS is pressed, the function
sets sample-detection mode and takes a sweep to obtain a sample
of the input signal. Then the EMC analyzer executes a series of
computations on the time data to produce the frequency-domain
results.
Note
After the FFT function is used, the markers are still in FFT mode for
use in evaluating data. Turn o the markers before attempting to use
the markers in the normal fashion.
Measuring the sidebands on a signal
1. Connect a signal generator to the EMC analyzer input on the front

panel. Adjust the signal generator to produce an AM signal at
10 MHz. (For example, set the modulation rate to 60 Hz with a
30% modulation level.)
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 4MHz5
3. Set the IF bandwidth to 3 kHz by pressing:
4BW5
IF BW AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 4kHz5
The IF bandwidth should be about 10 times greater than the
highest modulation frequency of interest. (In this example, the
fourth harmonic of 60 Hz is 240 Hz.)
8-12
4. Set the averaging bandwidth to 1 kHz by pressing:

The averaging bandwidth should be about twice that of the

highest modulation frequency of interest. If the averaging
bandwidth is too large, \alias" signals may appear in the FFT
when signals greater than the highest modulation frequency of
interest are present.
5. Change the amplitude scale to linear by pressing:
4AMPLITUDE5
SCALE LOG LIN LIN
6. Change the reference level to place the signal peak within the top
two divisions of the display by pressing:
REF LVL
Use the step keys or knob to adjust the signal. The signal must be
below the reference level.
7. Turn frequency scan o by pressing:
4TEST5
FRQ SCAN ON OFF OFF
8. Refer to Figure 8-8, which shows maximum modulation frequency

(fm) in Hertz versus sweep time (Ts ) in seconds. Set the sweep
time less than Ts (man) for the maximum modulation frequency
(fm) including the harmonics of the signal. The upper curve
relates the sweep time to the maximum modulation frequency
that can be observed (that is, the modulation frequency
represented by the right edge of the graticule). The lower curve
represents the modulation frequency one division from the left
side of the graticule.
8-13
Figure 8-8.
Maximum modulation frequency versus sweep time.
Set the sweep time so it falls in the shaded area between the
two lines. Refer to Figure 8-8. Set it closer to the bottom line
to avoid the eects of aliasing. Note the upper line (marked fm
AT 10th DIVISION) represents sampling at exactly the Nyquist
rate. Some aliasing may be seen when a value for sweep time is
close to the upper line. (Frequencies greater than the maximum
modulation frequency for a specic sweep time will not be
displayed accurately.)
For example, set the sweep time according to the gure (for a
right edge graticule limit of 250 Hz, select 800 ms) by pressing:
4SWEEP/TRIG5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 800 4ms5
9. To save the current EMC analyzer settings in instrument state 2,
press:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Save Internal
INTRNL : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2
STATE
If you wish to repeat the measurement retrieve the EMC analyzer

settings by pressing:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Recall Internal
STATE : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2
INTERNAL
Note
8-14
If you want to prevent the EMC analyzer from taking a sweep before
executing the FFT function, place trace A in the view mode.
10. To perform a fast Fourier transform, press:

4AUX/USER5
More 1 of 3
FFT MEAS
When the transform is complete the frequency-domain data is

displayed.
11. A marker is placed on the carrier at the 0 Hz reference (at the left
edge of the display). To determine the frequency and amplitude
dierence from the carrier, press:
4MKR5
MARKER 1
Use the knob to move the marker to the modulation.
Figure 8-9. Using the FFT function.
The results of the FFT function are displayed on the EMC

analyzer screen. The carrier is displayed at the left edge of
the screen. The modulation sidebands and any distortion is
displayed along the horizontal axis. The left edge of the graticule
represents 0 Hz relative to the carrier. The right edge of the
graticule represents the maximum FFT frequency calculated. In
Figure 8-9 the maximum FFT frequency is 200 divided by the
sweep time (250 Hz). The amplitude relationships between the
carrier, sidebands, and distortion components are the same as they
would be if displayed using swept-tuned operation in log mode at
10 dB per division.
Note
The annotation describes the settings before the FFT (linear mode,
center frequency 300 MHz, span 0 Hz), and the marker annotation
describes the settings after the FFT (log mode, signal at 60 Hz,
maximum frequency is 250 Hz).
8-15
12. Turn o the markers by pressing:

4MKR5
MARKER 1 ON OFF OFF
Note
If the markers are not turned o after using the FFT function they
will not work correctly when used with other settings.
Repeating the test.
13. To repeat the test, clear the screen data by pressing:

4TRACE5
CLEAR WRITE A
14. Recall the instrument state by pressing:

4SAVE/RECALL5
Recall Internal
STATE : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2
INTERNAL
15. Continue the measurement from list item 10.
8-16
Measuring 3 dB and 6 dB bandwidth
The EMC analyzer allows you to measure the 3 dB or 6 dB bandwidth

of a lter by pressing a single button. A delta marker measurement
is performed on the largest on screen signal and the bandwidth is
displayed in the active function area.
4PRESET5
.
3. Set the frequency and span by pressing:
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 4MHz5
4. Perform a 3 dB bandwidth measurement by pressing:
4AUX/USER5
More 1 of 3
3 dB POINTS
5. Perform a 6 dB bandwidth measurement by pressing:

6 dB POINTS
The value is displayed in the active function block.
Figure 8-10. Using the 6 dB points function.
8-17
Measuring 99% power bandwidth
The EMC analyzer allows you to measure the power bandwidth of a

signal by pressing a single button. The result is displayed in the active
function area.
1. Tune the EMC analyzer so only the signal of interest is displayed.
4PRESET5
.
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 4MHz5
5. Measure the 99% power bandwidth by pressing:
4AUX/USER5
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
99% PWR BW
The value is given in the active function block.
Figure 8-11. Using the 99% pwr BW function.
8-18
Measuring percent AM modulation
Percent amplitude measurement can be measured quickly and easily

by pressing a single key.
1. Connect a source capable of amplitude modulation to the EMC
analyzer. Tune the source to 10 MHz and 80 dBV (027 dBm). Set
the modulation frequency to 10 kHz with a 30% modulation level.
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 4kHz5
4BW5
IF BW AUTO MAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 4kHz5
Note the corner signal and the sidebands.
3. Measure the percent amplitude modulation by pressing:
4AUX/USER5
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
% AM
Note
The percent of amplitude modulation is displayed in the active

function block.
The IF bandwidth must be set so the sidebands are displayed and the
maximum amplitude excursion between displayed signals must be
greater than the value set under Peak Excursion (default 6 dB). The
sidebands are assumed to be entirely from amplitude modulation. At
least one sideband must be displayed; if not, the measurement stops
and 0% AM is displayed in the active area.
Figure 8-12. Using the % AM function.

8-19
Measuring amplitude and frequency dierence
Amplitude and frequency dierence measurements between two

signals can be made using the one-button Delta Meas and Pk-Pk
functions. The Delta Meas function compares the two largest on
screen signals and displays the dierence in the active function area.
The Pk-Pk function compares the largest and smallest on screen signal
(or noise) and displays the dierence in the active function area.
A single measurement is made each time a button is pressed. The
markers may be turned o after a measurement is made by pressing:
4MKR5
MARKER 1 ON OFF OFF

4PRESET5
.
3. Set the stop frequency by pressing:
4FREQUENCY5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 700 4MHz5
4. Measure the dierence between the two highest peaks by pressing:

4AUX/USER5
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
DELTA MEAS
Figure 8-13. Using the Delta Meas function.
8-20
5. To measure the dierence between the highest peak and the noise
oor, press:
4AUX/USER5
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
PK-PK MEAS
Figure 8-14. Using the Pk-Pk function.
8-21
Making third order measurements
Two-tone, third order intermodulation distortion is a common problem

in many electronic systems. When two signals are present in a system,
they can mix with any generated second harmonics and create third
order intermodulation distortion products. Third order product
frequency and amplitude dierences can be easily measured using the
one-button 3rd Ord Meas function.
Figure 8-15. Setup for making third order measurements.
1. Connect two sources to the EMC analyzer through an amplier

with the appropriate frequency range. Refer to Figure 8-15. Set
one source to 300 MHz and 80 dBV (027 dBm) and the other
source to 301 MHz and 80 dBV (027 dBm).
Caution
You may need to vary the source powers and/or frequencies,

depending on the available test amplier. Use sucient input
attenuation or suciently small signals to prevent damage to the
input of the EMC analyzer.
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5

4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4MHz5
4. Adjust the EMC analyzer so at least one of the fundamental signals

and a third-order product is displayed.
8-22
5. Measure the amplitude and frequency dierences by pressing:

4AUX/USER5
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
3rd ORD MEAS
Figure 8-16. Using 3rd Ord Meas function.
8-23
Using the RF Filter Section
HP 85420E Option 1EM only

Set up the analyzer as described in \Preparing the EMC Analyzer" in
Chapter 1 and \Preparing the RF Filter Section" in Chapter 1.
The RF section provides lters to prevent RF overload in the
presence of high ambient radiated emissions and some conducted
measurements. The RF lter section automatically switches lter
paths and tracks changes in center frequency and span. It also
provides a built-in preamplier, an RF overload indicator, and
additional autoranging capabilities.
The RF lter section has two RF inputs:
Input 1
used for low frequency conducted measurements
Input 2
provides ltering up to 2.9 Ghz for radiated emissions
measurements. It also has a bypass path which
provides no preselection up to 12.8 Ghz
Note
All calibrations must be performed with the RF lter section

disconnected.
1. Verify there is no input to the RF lter section and press:

4PRESET5
2. View the calibrator signal by pressing:
More 1 of 5
More 2 of 5
More 3 of 5
More 4 of 5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
INPUT
VIEW CAL ON OFF ON
Figure 8-17. Viewing the calibrator signal through the RF lter section.
8-24
Note
From this menu, the preselected input and bypass input are available.
3. Add 12 dB of amplication to the signal by turning the preamplier
on by pressing:
Previous Menu
PREAMP ON OFF ON
Note the change in the signal level.
Figure 8-18. Turning the preamplier on.
4. To sweep outside the range of the selected input, press:

4FREQUENCY5
More 1 of 2
INPT LCK ON OFF OFF
8-25
Learning about the analog+ display mode (option 101 only)
The analog+ display mode combines traditional analog display

performance with digital display benets. Analog+ display mode gives
the EMC analyzer the look and feel of older analog displays, such as
the HP 8558B, but it has the added benet of features common to
digital displays. Display features include:
Hard-copy output directly to a printer
Complete marker functionality such as noise readout
Screen annotation functions such as title, linear and log scales, and
graticule
Negative peak detector (included with Option 101)
The analog+ display mode is only available on EMC analyzers
with Option 101. (It is also available with Option 301 which is a
combination of Options 101 and 102.) Option 101 also includes
a negative peak detector, useful for video modulator balance
adjustments and intermodulation distortion measurements.
The analog+ display mode can be used to view interfering
intermodulation products on a live television channel. It can be used
to set the residual carrier level and check the linearity of a video
modulator. Refer to Product Note 8590-3, HP part number 5091-2480,
for more information about these measurements.
Figure 8-19. Analog+ display mode.
8-26
Example: Use the analog+ display mode to look at the calibrator
signal.
1. Connect the CAL OUT signal to the EMC analyzer INPUT 50
.
Press:
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5
START FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 4GHz5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1.5 4GHz5
2. Press 4DISPLAY5 and ANALOG+ ON OFF (ON) to turn on the analog+
display mode. Use the knob, step keys, or the data entry keys to
change the DOT DENSITY.
3. Press 4MKR5 to activate a marker and use the knob to move it.
4. Press 4DISPLAY5. Then press ANALOG+ ON OFF to underline OFF to
turn the analog+ display o.
Note
Limit lines can be used to test data on an analog+ display, but they
cannot be displayed.
8-27
Triggering on a selected line of a video picture eld

This application should only be performed using an HP 8591EM,
Note
HP 8593EM, HP 8594EM, HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM with Option 301

(Options 101 and 102 combined).
With Option 301, you can trigger on a TV picture carrier signal. This
example enables you to view a test signal transmitted during vertical
retrace when the TV screen is blanked.
1. Press 4PRESET5.
2. Set the frequency of a picture carrier signal to center frequency.
3. Press 4SWEEP/TRIG5, Trigger and TV TRIG . If the EMC analyzer
is in a nonzero span, TV TRIG sets the amplitude scale to linear,
places a marker on the signal peak, moves the marker to the
reference level, changes the detector to sample, sets the sweep
time to 100 s, sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz, and sets
the span to 0 Hz. The TV line number is the active function. The
preset function sets the EMC analyzer to trigger on an odd eld of
a video format and TV line number 17.
The sweep time of 100 s allows you to view two TV lines, line 17
and part of line 18. The multiburst is on TV line number 17, and
the composite is on TV line number 18.
Figure 8-20. Triggering on an odd eld of a video format.
8-28
4. Press TV TRIG EVEN FLD to trigger on an even eld of a video

format.
Figure 8-21. Triggering on an even eld of a video format.
The default video format is NTSC. Press TV Standard , then

PAL-M , PAL , or SECAM-L to select a dierent video format. For
non-interlaced video formats, press TV TRIG VERT INT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Note
The video format selection ( NTSC , PAL-M , PAL , or SECAM-L )

automatically selects the video modulation (negative or positive).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
8-29
9
Limit Lines
This chapter contains procedures for creating, editing, viewing,

saving, and recalling a limit line.
Note
Limit lines provide an easy way to compare trace data to a set of

amplitude and frequency parameters while the analyzer is sweeping
the measurement range.
Two limit lines with margins can be displayed on the EMC analyzer.
These limit lines can be used to visually determine whether displayed
signals meet the appropriate limits. Margins are set relative to each
of the limit lines, and are useful when taking into account any
uncertainties that can exist in the entire measurement system.
If you wish to provide a margin of safety when testing to a limit,
you may set a margin below the required limit. When the limit-test
function is activated, the EMC analyzer automatically indicates
onscreen whether or not a displayed signal passes or fails a displayed
limit line or margin.
When limit testing is activated, the analyzer automatically tests to
either the limit-line or the margin, whichever is lowest. Failures are
indicated both onscreen and over the HP-IB bus. When performing
limit testing with two limit lines and their associated margins, the
analyzer automatically tests to the lowest of the four.
Limit lines are constructed from a table of frequency and amplitude
coordinate pairs. Limit-line segments are created by connecting
these points. Everything except the segment length is dened by the
entry for its beginning point. There are several ways of entering
the frequency/amplitude pairs. These are described in the following
section.
Limit lines can be created and edited from the front panel or remotely
via HP-IB or RS-232. Limit lines in a trace format can only be created
using remote commands or a downloadable program. Refer to the
LIMIHI and LIMILO commands in the HP 8590 EM Series EMC
Analyzer Quick Reference Guide for more information.
Limit Lines
9-1
Note
The Setups, Limit Lines, and Correction Factors card provides several
predetermined limit lines. Refer to Appendix B for a complete listing.
Using EMC Limit Lines

Creating, editing, or viewing a limit line
This example shows how to create and activate an upper limit line for
the 300 MHz OUTPUT signal.
1. Set the instrument to a known state by pressing:
4PRESET5
2. Select EMC analyzer mode by pressing:
4MODE5
EMC ANALYZER
3. Connect INPUT 50
to CAL OUT to display the 300 MHz calibrator
signal and its harmonics.
4. Set the center frequency and span by pressing:
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 500 4MHz5
4ENTER5 (to disable the active function area)
5. To access the limit-line menus, press:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Limit Lines
9-2
Limit Lines
Note
Limit line structure in EMC analyzer mode is dierent then spectrum

analyzer mode and are not interchangeable. When an attempt is made
to use a limit line that was created in spectrum-analyzer mode, the
message, SA Limits not allowed in RCVR mode., will be displayed.
6. To remove the limit lines, press:
Limit 1
DELETE LIMIT , DELETE LIMIT
Previous Menu
Limit 2
DELETE LIMIT , DELETE LIMIT
Previous Menu
After pressing DELETE LIMIT once, the message:

\If you are sure, press key again to purge data"
will appear. Pressing DELETE LIMITS a second time purges the
limit-line table. The 4PRESET5 key turns limit-line testing o (if it is
on), but does not clear an existing limit-line table.
Note
You can create limit lines using either logarithmic or linear frequency
and amplitude scales. The choice depends upon the limit line that you
want to create.
7. To select the linear frequency and logarithmic amplitude scales,
press:
Limit 1
EDIT LIMIT
Select Type
Select Axis
FREQ SCL LOG LIN LIN
AMPL SCL LOG LIN LOG
Previous Menu , Previous Menu
Note
When the frequency is entered, amplitude selection automatically

becomes the active function. When the amplitude is entered, the type
selection automatically becomes the active function. When the type
is entered, frequency selection automatically becomes the active
function. This speeds up data entry when you want to enter several
coordinates.
8. To enter the rst coordinate, press:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 75 4MHz5
SELECT AMPLITUD : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 47 4+dBV5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
POINT
Limit Lines
9-3
Note
The segment type determines how the coordinate point of the

current line segment is connected to the coordinate point of the
next line segment. The segment type determines whether the line
segment is horizontal, sloped, or a single point.
To specify the segment type, press:
Select Type
SLOPE , FLAT , or POINT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Previous Menu
The coordinates for the second point must be entered before the
rst limit-line segment is displayed.
When entering coordinates, the frequency, amplitude and type elds
will be listed with asterisks (***) until new values are entered. The
new coordinate will be listed last until the frequency, amplitude,
and type selections have been entered. Once a frequency,
amplitude, and type selection have been entered, the coordinate
will be sorted into the limit-line table according to its frequency.
9. To enter the second coordinate, press:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FLAT
10. Set remaining limit-line coordinates of 250 MHz with a slope of

47 dBV/m, 400 MHz with a slope of 87 dBV/m, and 500 MHz
with a slope of 97 dBV/m, by pressing:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 250 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 400 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 500 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE
Note
A total of thirty points can be specied for each limit line. The
onscreen indicator displays the number of remaining memory
locations.
11. When all coordinates are entered, press:
EDIT DONE
9-4
Limit Lines
12. To turn limit testing on, press:

LIMIT 1 ON OFF ON
LMT TEST ON OFF ON
Figure 9-1. Completed limit-line.
13. Disconnect CAL OUT from INPUT 50

.
The message \PASS LIMIT" is displayed because no signal exceeds
the limit line.
14. Reconnect CAL OUT to INPUT 50
.
Editing an existing limit line
1. If you wish to add or modify segments in an existing table, press:

4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Limit Lines
Limit 1
EDIT LIMIT
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 250 4MHz5
SELECT AMPLITUD : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 57 4+dBV5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 400 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE
Limit Lines
9-5
Figure 9-2. Editing an existing limit-line table.
2. To change the amplitude of segment number six from 57 dBV/m to

102 dBV/m, select the segment to be edited by pressing:
SELECT SEGMENT
3. Use the step keys, number keys, or the knob to select row number
six. Enter the new value by pressing:
4. To delete segment number six, press:

Previous Menu
More 1 of 2
SELECT SEGMENT
5. Use the step keys, number keys, or the knob to select segment
number six and then, press:
DELETE SEGMENT
6. When you nish editing the limit-line table, press:

More 2 of 2
EDIT DONE
9-6
Limit Lines
Dening a limit margin
To set a 03 dB limit-line margin, press:

MARGIN 1 ON OFF ON : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 4dB5
Note
Figure 9-3. Signal failing the limit line margin.
If the margin is displayed, limit-line testing is applied to the

margin not the actual limit line. The limit and margin displays are
independent. Limit-line testing must have either, or both, limit or
margin displays ON.
In linear amplitude displays, limit margins cannot be displayed for
limit lines positioned more than 12 dB above the current reference
level.
Activating limit-line testing
When you are done editing, on/o functions of the limit test become
available.
To turn limit-line testing on, press:
LMT TEST ON OFF ON
The analyzer can perform limit-line testing only if a limit is displayed.
When limit-line testing is activated, the analyzer automatically tests
to either the limit-line or the margin, whichever is lowest. Failures
are indicated both onscreen and over the HP-IB bus. When limit-line
testing using two limit lines and their associated margins, the analyzer
automatically tests to either the limit-lines or the margins, whichever
of the four is lowest.
Limit Lines
9-7
Saving or recalling limit-line tables

Saving a limit-line table
1. Insert a card in the card reader.

2. To save the current limit-line table, press:
4SAVE/RECALL5
3. To enter a prex, press:
Change Prefix
4. To clear an existing prex, press:

YZ_# Spc Clear
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Clear
5. Enter the prex \DEMO" by pressing:

ABCDEF , D
ABCDEF , E
MNOPQR , M
MNOPQR , O
The message \PREFIX=DEMO" is displayed on the screen.
6. To save the current limit-line table to the card, press:
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
More 1 of 2
EDIT DONE
Save Card
LIMITS
Note
CARD
7. The register number is the active function. Enter register number

one by pressing:
1 4ENTER5
The limit-line data is saved to a card.
The SAVE LIMITS function, located under the 4SETUP5 key, can also
be used to save limit-line data. It is accessed by pressing:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Limit Lines
SAVE LIMITS
The desired mass storage device and the prex cannot be changed.
They must be preset to the desired state before using this function.
Only the register number can be entered.
9-8
Limit Lines
Recalling a limit-line table
1. To recall limit-line tables from the card, press:

4SAVE/RECALL5
Recall Card
RECALL LIMITS
2. Use the step keys or knob to scroll through the displayed menu.
When the desired le is highlighted, press:
LOAD FILE
Note
When a limit line is saved, the following information is stored:

Limit 1 data, including the limit-line and margin information
Limit 2 data, including the limit-line and margin information
LIMIT 1 ON OFF status
LIMIT 2 ON OFF status
MARGIN 1 ON OFF status
MARGIN 2 ON OFF status
LIMIT TEST 1 ON OFF status
LIMIT TEST 2 ON OFF status
Viewing the card catalog
If you wish to see a list of the les on a card you may use the catalog
card function.
1. Insert a card into the card reader.
2. To view the catalog of limit-line les on the card, press:
CATALOG CARD
Note the name of the desired le. The name will be

\lprefix_register number".) The limit-line information you
saved earlier will be displayed as, \lDEMO_1". Refer to Chapter 12
for more information on saving and recalling, and outputting data.
3. When you are nished viewing the catalog, press:
EXIT CATALOG
Limit Lines
9-9
Using Spectrum Analyzer Limit Lines

Creating, editing or viewing a limit line
This example shows how to create an upper limit line for the 300 MHz
OUTPUT signal and activate testing.
1. Set the instrument to a known state by pressing:
4PRESET5
2. Verify the mode selected is spectrum analyzer by pressing:
4MODE5
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
3. Connect INPUT 50
to CAL OUT to display the 300 MHz calibrator
signal and its harmonics.
4. Set the center frequency and span by pressing:
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 500 4MHz5
4ENTER5 (to disable the active function area)
5. To access the limit-line menus, press:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Limit Lines
Edit Limit
9-10
Limit Lines
Selecting limit-line parameters
1. The limits, frequency or time, function requires the limit-line

parameters be entered as either frequency or time. Though
coordinates of frequency and amplitude are used most often,
limit-line data can also be entered in terms of time and amplitude.
Frequency is the default selection. If TIME is selected, START
TIME will replace START FREQ in the edit limit menus.
Clear existing limits and select frequency by pressing:
LIMITS FRQ TIME , TIME (Clears existing limits.)
LIMITS FRQ TIME FRQ
2. To edit or create an upper limit line, press:

EDIT UPPER
Note
Limit line structure in spectrum analyzer mode is dierent then EMC

analyzer mode and are not interchangeable. When an attempt is made
to use a limit line that was created in spectrum-analysis mode, the
message, RCVR Limits not allowed in SA mode. will be displayed.
3. To remove this limit line, press:
More 1 of 2
PURGE LIMITS , PURGE LIMITS
EDIT UPPER
After pressing PURGE LIMITS once, the message

will appear. Pressing PURGE LIMITS a second time purges the
limit-line table. 4PRESET5 turns limit-line testing o (if it is on), but
does not clear an existing limit-line table.
4. To remove the error message, press:
4ENTER5
Note
The table defaults to xed parameters. The middle of the table

displayed onscreen should be labeled Limits=FIXED. If it is labeled
Limits=RELATIVE, press:
More 1 of 2
LIMITS FIX REL FIX
The limits, xed or relative, function determines whether or not

the limit line is set relative to the analyzer's center frequency and
reference-level settings.
When time parameters are used, the relative format only aects the
amplitude part of the coordinate pairs. The time parameters are
always xed, beginning at the left edge of the graticule.
Limit Lines
9-11
Selecting the amplitude scale
1. To select the amplitude scale, press:

More 2 of 2
Select Type
Select Axis
AMPL SCL LOG LIN LOG
Previous Menu , Previous Menu
Note
When entering coordinates, frequency, amplitude, and type elds will

be listed with asterisks (***) until new values are entered. The new
coordinate will be listed last until the frequency, amplitude, and type
selections have been entered. Once a frequency, amplitude, and type
selection have been entered, the coordinate will be sorted into the
limit-line table according to its frequency.
2. Set the beginning or the rst limit-line segment to 50 MHz, with an
amplitude of 47 dBV/m by pressing:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FLAT
Note
The coordinates for the second point must be entered before the rst
limit-line segment will be displayed.
3. Set the beginning of the second limit-line segment to 250 MHz with
a slope of 47 dBV/m by pressing:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 250 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE
Note
Table entries can be edited if you make a mistake. To edit an existing

segment, select the segment. Select the frequency, or amplitude of
the column to be edited.
4. Set the third limit-line segment to 400 MHz with an amplitude of
92 dBV/m by pressing:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 400 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE
9-12
Limit Lines
5. Set the fourth limit-line segment to 600 MHz with an amplitude of

92 dBV/m by pressing:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 600 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE
Note
Segments can be dened even if they are out of the display range.
6. After all the segments have been entered, press:
More 1 of 2
EDIT DONE
7. To turn limit testing on, press:

LMT TEST ON OFF ON
The message \FAIL UPPER" is displayed because the calibration
signal exceeds the limit line.
Note
When on, the limit-test function tests to the dened limits, even if
they are not displayed.
Figure 9-4. Signal exceeding the limit line.
8. Disconnect CAL OUT from INPUT 50

.
The message \PASS LIMIT" is displayed because no signal exceeds
the limit line.
Limit Lines
9-13
Selecting the limit-line table format
You can use any of the following keys to create or edit a limit-line
table:
EDIT UPPER
EDIT LOWER
EDIT UP/LOW
EDIT MID/DELT
Each of the edit softkeys represents a dierent kind of limit-line table

format. The choice depends on whether you want only an upper limit
line, only a lower limit line, or both an upper and a lower limit line. If
both an upper and a lower limit line are desired, the characteristics
of the desired limit lines will determine whether you select the
EDIT UP/LOW or EDIT MID/DELT function.
The four limit-line table formats are described below:
EDIT UPPER
Accesses the upper limit-line table format. One
amplitude component (representing an upper
limit-line segment) is specied for each frequency
(or time) component.
Accesses the lower limit-line table. One amplitude
EDIT LOWER
component (representing a lower limit-line
segment) is specied for each frequency (or time)
component.
Accesses the upper/lower limit-line table format.
EDIT UP/LOW
Two amplitude components (one each for the upper
and lower limit-line segments) can be specied for
each frequency or time component.
EDIT MID/DELT Accesses the mid/delta limit-line table format.
Two amplitude components (one representing a
mid-amplitude value, one representing a deviation
or delta (positive and negative values) from either
side of this value) is specied for frequency
component. If no deviation is entered, the
deviation defaults to zero.
Note
9-14
Limit Lines
When editing a limit line table you may use a format dierent than
the one used when creating it.
Frequency or amplitude values that are not within the analyzer's
maximum range will be modied.
Activating limit-line testing

When EDIT DONE is pressed, the LMT TEST ON OFF and
LMT DISP Y N AUTO functions become available.
To turn limit-line testing on, press:
LMT TEST ON OFF ON
Note
If LMT DISP Y N AUTO N, the limit line is not displayed. If

LMT DISP Y N AUTO Y, the limit line is displayed.
Pressing LMT DISP Y N AUTO AUTO sets the limit line display to
match the limit-line test function. When AUTO is selected, the limit
lines are only displayed when LMT TEST ON OFF ON is selected.
For information on selecting segment types and saving or recalling

limit-line tables, refer to the appropriate sections earlier in this
chapter.
Limit Lines
9-15
10
Amplitude Correction Factors
The EMC analyzer allows three types of amplitude-correction factors

to be applied to the input signals.
Antenna Factors Conversion factors relating eld strength to
measured voltage.
Cable Factors
Conversion factors to correct for cable insertion
loss.
Other Factors
Correction factors to account for the eects of any
other two-port device placed between the antenna
and the analyzer.
Note
A fourth type of amplitude-correction factor, called User Factors, is

provided for backward capability with the A, B, C, D, E, and L-series.
It is found under the 4CAL5 key. The methods described below also
apply to User Factors.
Note
Several typical amplitude correction factor les are supplied on the

Setups, Limit Lines, and Correction Factors card. Refer to Appendix B
for a complete listing.
Creating, editing, or viewing the amplitude-correction tables
In this example, an antenna amplitude-correction factor will be

created.
1. Preset the analyzer to a known state by pressing:
4PRESET5
4SETUP5
01
200 MHz
FREQUENCY5
GHz
START FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 4GHz5
10-1
Note
The EMC analyzer must be calibrated in order to use amplitude

correction. If \CORR" is not displayed on the screen, you should
perform a calibration. Refer to Chapter 3 for more information.
2. To create, edit, or view the amplitude-correction factors for
antennas, press:
4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Correctn Factors
Antenna Factors
Note
Creating, editing, and viewing the antenna, cable and other

amplitude-correction tables follow identical procedures. If you wish to
create a cable or other amplitude-correction table, select Cable Factors
or Other Factors instead of Antenna Factors.
To delete any existing antenna amplitude-correction factors, press:
EDIT ANTENNA
More 1 of 2
DELETE FACTORS , DELETE FACTORS
(Press only once if the table is empty.)
More 2 of 2
Note
After pressing DELETE FACTORS once, the message

will appear. Pressing DELETE FACTORS a second time deletes the
antenna amplitude-correction factors.
When the frequency is entered, amplitude selection automatically
becomes the active function. When the amplitude is entered,
the correction point is incremented, and the frequency selection
automatically becomes the active function. This speeds up data
entry when you want to enter several coordinates.
3. To select an antenna amplitude-correction factor of 0 dB at

300 MHz, press:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
SELECT AMPLITUD : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 4dB5
4. Continue to add correction factors of 20 dB at 400 MHz and 0 dB
at 5 GHz by using the following key sequence:
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 400 4MHz5
SELECT AMPLITUD : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 20 4dB5
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4GHz5
SELECT AMPLITUD : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 4dB5
10-2
Note
A total of 80 correction points can be specied for each data

set. They can be distributed among the three categories in any
combination, however, the data sets can contain no more than a total
of 80 unique frequency values.
When antenna, cable, and other points are specied at the same
frequency, the data is stored as one point. For example, if you
specify:
an antenna point at 300 MHz, 19 dB
a cable point at 300 MHz, 03 dB
an other point at 300 MHz, 010 dB
then:
19 dB + (03 dB) + (010 dB) = 6 dB
and the nal correction factor of 6 dB is stored in a single memory
location. In this case, it would be possible for the total number of
actual points to exceed eighty. The onscreen indicator displays the
number of remaining memory locations.
The amplitude-correction factor applied to the lowest selected
frequency is also applied to all frequencies below the lowest selected
frequency. The amplitude-correction factor applied to the highest
selected frequency is also applied to all frequencies above the highest
selected frequency.
5. To convert the amplitude values to antenna eld-strength units,
press:
More 1 of 2
Antenna Units
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
V/m
The analyzer will now display amplitude units as V/m antenna

eld-strength units.
10-3
6. To select a correction based on a logarithmic frequency scale,

press:
Previous Menu
FREQ SCL LOG LIN LOG
More 2 of 2
EDIT DONE
Note
Figure 10-1.
Conversion factors dened with a log frequency scale.
Logarithmic frequency scale corrections are linearly interpolated

between correction points with respect to the logarithm of the
frequency. These correction points become straight lines on a
log-frequency scale. The interpolation is computed as:
y(f ) =
yi+1 0 yi
log(f 0 fi ) + yi
fi+1 0 fi
Linear frequency scale corrections are interpolated along straight

lines, connecting adjacent points on a linear-frequency scale. The
interpolation is computed as:
y(f ) =
10-4
yi+1 0 yi
(f 0 fi ) + yi
fi+1 0 fi
7. To select a correction based on a linear frequency scale, press:

EDIT ANTENNA
More 1 of 2
More 2 of 2
EDIT DONE
Figure 10-2.
Conversion factors dened with a linear frequency scale.
8. To add an additional frequency coordinate at 500 MHz and 0 dB,

press:
EDIT ANTENNA
SELECT FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 500 4MHz5
SELECT AMPLITUD : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 4dB5
10-5
Note
When entering coordinates, the frequency and amplitude elds will

be listed with asterisks (***) until new values are entered. The new
coordinate will be listed last until both the frequency and amplitude
values have been entered. Once a frequency and an amplitude
value have been entered, the coordinate will be sorted into the
amplitude-correction table according to its frequency.
9. To edit the third row of antenna amplitude-correction factors,
press:
SELECT POINT
Use the arrow keys or the knob to select point three.

10. To change the amplitude coordinate to 018 dB, press:
SELECT AMPLITUD : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 18 40dBV5
EDIT DONE
11. The amplitude-correction information can be stored to a memory

card by pressing:
SAVE ANTENNA 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 4ENTER5
The antenna amplitude-correction data has been saved on a card.
Activating amplitude correction
To turn amplitude corrections on, press:

4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Correctn Factors
CORRECTN ON OFF ON
Note
When amplitude correction is turned o, all of the three possible

correction factors (antenna, cable and other) are disabled. When
amplitude-correction factors are turned on, only the correction factors
you turned on will be enabled. For example, if you have selected:
ANTENNA ON OFF ON
CABLE ON OFF ON
OTHER ON OFF OFF
then all amplitude-correction factors will be disabled when the
amplitude correction is turned o. When amplitude correction is
turned on, only the antenna and cable amplitude-correction factors
will be enabled.
10-6
Saving or recalling
1. To save or recall the amplitude-correction factors, press:

4SETUP5
More 1 of 4
Correctn Factors
Antenna Factors , Cable Factors , or Other Factors
SAVE ANTENNA or RECALL ANTENNA
or
or
SAVE CABLE or RECALL CABLE

SAVE OTHER or RECALL OTHER
Note
The SAVE softkeys save the current amplitude-correction factors to a

card. The amplitude-correction factors can only be saved to a card,
not internal memory.
2. To save the correction factors, press:
SAVE ANTENNA , SAVE CABLE , or SAVE OTHER
3. To save the information, press:

A register number 4ENTER5
The data has been saved to a card as nDEMO_X, for antenna
correction factors, cDEMO_X for cable correction factors, and
oDEMO_X for other correction factors.
4. To recall amplitude-correction factors from the card, press:
RECALL ANTENNA , RECALL CABLE , or RECALL OTHER
5. Use the step keys to highlight the desired le, and then press:
LOAD FILE
10-7
11
Windows
Windows display mode splits the instrument display into two

frequency or time displays.
When windows is rst turned on, the top (overview) window contains
an inactive copy of the normal display. The lower (applications)
window is active and displays a subset of the frequency span of the
overview window. The span of the applications window is indicated
on the overview window by a pair of vertical lines called zone
markers. The zone markers indicate the portion of the overview
window that is displayed in the applications window. To look at
dierent portions of the overview window, move the zone markers
using the ZONE CENTER and ZONE SPAN softkeys.
The instrument state of the active window can be changed without
aecting the state of the inactive window. The state of the active
window will be used as the state of the instrument for sweeping and
updating trace data.
For the purpose of this example, use the windows display mode to
view the 300 MHz calibrator signal.
4PRESET5
.
Windows
11-1
3. To view additional harmonic signals set the analyzer stop

frequency to 1.8 GHz by pressing:
4FREQUENCY5
STOP FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1.8 4GHz5
Figure 11-1. 300 MHz calibrator signal with harmonics.
4. Activate the windows function by pressing:

4ON5
The active window is outlined with a bold line.
Figure 11-2. Windows display mode on.
11-2
Windows
5. Move the zone markers to the rst signal to the right of the
current zone by pressing:
ZONE PK RIGHT
The zone is centered around the new signal.
Figure 11-3.
Zone markers moved to the right of the current span.
6. Move the zone markers to the rst signal to the left of the zone by
pressing:
ZONE PK LEFT
The zone is centered around the new signal.
Windows
11-3
7. Increase the zone span to include three signals by pressing:

ZONE SPAN
* * * *
4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Figure 11-4. Zone span increased to include three signals.
8. View a full-sized display of the applications window by pressing:

4ZOOM5
Figure 11-5. Full-sized display of the applications window.
11-4
Windows
9. View and activate a full-sized display of the overview window by

pressing:
4NEXT5
The applications window is now active.
Figure 11-6. Full-sized display of the overview window.
Windows
11-5
10. Return to the windows display mode by pressing:

4ZOOM5
11. Return to normal display mode of operation by pressing:
WINDOWS OFF
Figure 11-7. Windows display mode o.
Note
11-6
Windows
12. To turn on the windows format again with the current display as
the new overview window, press:
4ON5
A new applications window will be generated based on the zone in
the overview window.
Markers can be used in both windows, but they must be turned on in
each window. The current limit lines and amplitude-correction factors
are common to both windows.
12
Saving, Recalling, and Outputting Data
This chapter describes how to save and recall instrument setups,

signal lists, states, traces, display images, limit-line tables, and
amplitude-correction factors using both cards and the internal
instrument memory.
A card provides additional memory for saving instrument setup, signal
lists, traces, display images, limit-lines tables, amplitude-correction
factors, states, and download personalities (DLPs). The data is easily
retrievable without the need for an external controller.
The process of saving and recalling data from the card is similar to
saving and recalling data from the internal memory. There are some
important dierences. For example, data is stored in internal memory
as an item; on the card, data is stored as a logical interchange le
(LIF).
12-1
Using a Card
Formatting the card
Note
Use an Epson 40-pin RAM card, such as the 08591-10008, supplied

with the instrument. If this is a new card, it must be formatted
before use. The card can be formatted on the EMC analyzer, using the
following procedure.
Before formatting your card, make sure that the card does not contain
any valuable data by pressing the following keys to catalog the card.
4CONFIG5
More 1 of 3
Card Config
CATALOG CARD
Existing data on the card will be displayed if the card has been
formatted. If the card has not been formatted, the following message
will be displayed:
INVALID CARD:DIRECTORY
Insert the card with its arrow facing the card-insertion slot and format
the card by pressing:
4CONFIG5
More 1 of 3
Card Config
FORMAT CARD
The message, If you are sure, press key again to purge data
appears on the screen. Continue by pressing:
FORMAT CARD
Filenames
A lename consists of a:
le type descriptor (automatically supplied)
prex (optional)
register number (required)
A lename is dened as:
file type descriptor + prefix register_number for example,
\tPREFIX_3"
The lename cannot exceed eight characters. The le type descriptor

is a single character preceeding the prex such as, \t", for a trace.
Available operations
12-2
Table 12-1 lists the save and recall operations available using internal
memory or the card.
Refer to Table 12-4, at the end of this section, for a summary of
functions that can be saved to and recalled from internal memory.
Table 12-1. Internal Memory and Card Operations

Mass
Storage
Device
Data Stored
Stored with a
As Prex?
Internal Memory Item
No
Restriction
on Register
Number
1 to 8 for states,
0 to MAX REG #
for traces and
limit lines
Types of Data
That Can
Be Stored1
States
Traces
Limit-line tables
Catalog
Functions
Available
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CATALOG ALL
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CATALOG REGISTER
CATALOG VARIABLS
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CATALOG PREFIX
DELETE FILE
LOAD FILE 2
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Card
File
Yes
Prex + register # Setups

Lists
8 character
State
Trace
Limit-line tables
Antenna correction
Cable correction
Other correction
User correction
Downloadable program
Display images
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CATALOG CARD
! CARD
! CARD
LIST ! CARD
ANTENNA ! CARD
CABLE ! CARD
OTHER ! CARD
DISPLAY ! CARD
Trace ! Card
ALL DLP ! CARD
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
SETUP
LIMITS
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
DELETE FILE
LOAD FILE
1 Species types of data that can be stored by using normal front-panel operation.
2 When cataloging internal memory, LOAD FILE is available for CATALOG REGISTER
Entering a prex
only.
Card data can be stored and recalled using a prex. A prex allows
you to give a custom name to your le. The prex can be from one to
seven characters long. The longer the prex, the shorter the register
number must be. The total length of the prex and register number
cannot exceed eight characters. The prex can be any character;
however, the underscore must not be the rst character of the prex.
12-3
1. Enter the prex \TEST", by using the following key sequences:

4SAVE/RECALL5
Change Prefix
STUVWX , T
NNNNN
ABCDEF , E
NNNNN
STUVWX , S
NNNNN
STUVWX , T
NNNNN
or
CONFIG5
Change Prefix
STUVWX , T
NNNNN
ABCDEF , E
NNNNN
STUVWX , S
NNNNN
STUVWX , T
Note
NNNNN
If you make a mistake, press 4BK SP5 to erase the incorrect character.
2. To change a prex, clear the existing prex and then enter a new
prex. Clear an existing prex by pressing:
4CONFIG5
Change Prefix
YZ_# Spc Clr
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Clear
or
Use 4BK SP5 to erase the existing prex.
Saving a trace
12-4

4PRESET5
.
5. Enter a screen title by pressing:

4DISPLAY5
Change Title
STUVWX , S
NNNNN
ABCDEF , A
NNNNN
STUVWX , V
NNNNN
ABCDEF , E
NNNNN
YZ_# Spc Clr
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Space
STUVWX , T
NNNNN
ABCDEF , E
NNNNN
STUVWX , S
NNNNN
STUVWX , T
NNNNN
6. Enter the prex \TRACE", by using the following key sequences:

4SAVE/RECALL5
Change Prefix
STUVWX , T
NNNNN
MNOPQR , R
NNNNN
ABCDEF , A
NNNNN
ABCDEF , C
NNNNN
ABCDEF , E
Note
NNNNN
If you do not specify a prex, the trace will be saved with the le
name \t_(register #)".
7. Save the trace to card by pressing:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Save Card
More 1 of 3
Trace
CARD
TRACE A
8. REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed on the screen. Use the

numeric keypad to enter register number 5 by pressing:
5 4ENTER5
The trace data has now been saved to the card.
12-5
Recalling a trace
9. Recall the trace by pressing:

4SAVE/RECALL5
Recall Card
More 1 of 3
RECALL TRACE
Use the step keys or knob to highlight \tTRACE_5",

and then press:
LOAD FILE
The recalled trace data is displayed as trace B.

10. Reset the display by pressing:
4SPAN5 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 4MHz5
Note
Recalled trace data includes the instrument state.

The following items can be saved and recalled:
Save
Setup
List
Limits
Antenna
Cable
Other
User
Display
Trace
State
DLP
Recall
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Table 12-2 and Table 12-3 list the operations, their lenames, register
ranges and key sequences for saving and recalling data with the
HP 8590 EM series.
12-6
Table 12-2. Save Functions Using a Card

Operation
Screen
Title
Available?
File Name
Register Range
Key Sequence
save antenna
No
[n (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
ANTENNA ! CARD (register #) 4ENTER5
save cable
No
[c (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
More 1 of 3
CABLE ! CARD (register #) 4ENTER5
save display image
Yes1
[i (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
More 1 of 3
DISPLAY
save downloadable program
No
CARD (register #) 4ENTER5
[d (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
More 1 of 3
ALL DLP
save limits
No
CARD
[l (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
LIMITS
save list
No
[g (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
LIST ! CARD (register #) 4ENTER5
save other
No
[o (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
More 1 of 3
OTHER
save setup
Yes
[e (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
SETUP
1 The screen title is part of the display image, but is an image only. It is not recalled as a title.
12-7
Table 12-2. Save Functions Using a Card (continued)

Operation
save state
Screen
Title
Available?
No
File Name
Register Range
Key Sequence
[s (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
STATE
save trace
Yes
[t (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4SAVE/RECALL 5

8 characters
Save Card
More 1 of 3
Trace ! CARD
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
TRACE A , TRACE B ,
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
TRACE C , or LIMIT LINES

(register #) 4ENTER5
save user ampcor
No
[a (current prex) (register #)] Prex + register # 4CAL5

8 characters
More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
More 3 of 4
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Amp Cor
SAVE AMP COR

(register #) 4ENTER5
12-8
Table 12-3. Recall Functions Using a Card

Operation
Screen
Title
Available?
File Name
Key Sequence
recall antenna
No
[n (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
RECALL ANTENNA
Highlight desired lename.
LOAD FILE
recall cable
No
[c (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
More 1 of 3
RECALL CABLE
LOAD FILE
recall display
Yes1
[i (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
More 1 of 3
RECALL DISPLAY
LOAD FILE
recall downloadable program (DLP)
No
[d (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
More 1 of 3
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
RECALL DLP
LOAD FILE
recall limits
No
[l (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
RECALL LIMITS
LOAD FILE
recall list
No
[g (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
RECALL LIST
LOAD FILE
1 The screen title is part of the display image, but is an image only. It is not recalled as a title.
12-9
Table 12-3.
Recall Functions Using a Card (continued)
Operation
recall other
Screen
Title
Available?
No
File Name
Key Sequence
[o (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
More 1 of 3
RECALL OTHER
LOAD FILE
recall setup
Yes
[e (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
RECALL SETUP
LOAD FILE
recall state
No
[s (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
More 1 of 3
More 2 of 3
RECALL STATE
LOAD FILE
recall trace
Yes
[t (desired lename)] 4SAVE/RECALL5

Recall Card
More 1 of 3
RECALL TRACE
LOAD FILE
recall user ampcor
No
[a (desired lename)] 4CAL5

More 1 of 4
More 2 of 4
More 3 of 4
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Amp Cor
RECALL AMP COR
12-10
Saving and Recalling Data from Internal Memory
This section explains how to save and recall state, trace, and limit
line data to and from internal memory. The Save/Recall menu can be
used to store up to eight states, several traces and limit-line tables in
internal memory.
Saving state data saves the instrument settings, but not the trace
data. Saving trace data saves the trace data and the state data.
Limit-line data is stored in trace registers, but state and trace data
are not recalled with the limit-line data. States, traces, and limit-line
tables are saved in internal memory even if the instrument is turned
o or 4PRESET5 is pressed.
Refer to Table 12-4 for a summary of saving and recalling data to and
from internal memory.
Saving a state

4PRESET5
.
3. View the 300 MHz calibrator signal by pressing:
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 4MHz5
SPAN5
SPAN : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Save this instrument state by pressing:

4SAVE/RECALL5
5. Select internal memory as the mass storage device by pressing:
Save Internal
6. Save data in register 5 by pressing:
INTRNL : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4ENTER5
STATE
The message \State saved" is displayed.
Recalling a state

4PRESET5
2. Recall the 300 MHz calibrator signal from internal memory by
pressing:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Recall Internal (to select internal)
INTERNAL ! STATE : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4ENTER5
The message \State recalled" is displayed.
12-11
Note
Register 9 is a special register which can aid in recovering from

inadvertent loss of line power (power failure). Pressing:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Recall Internal
STATE : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 9 4ENTER5
INTERNAL
This places the instrument in the state that existed just prior to the
loss of power. The POWER ON LAST function (under the 4CONFIG5 key)
can be set to do this automatically.
Saving a trace
Saving trace data is very similar to saving state data. Saving trace
data saves both the trace data and the state data.
4PRESET5
2. Set up the trace data to be stored and press:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Save Internal
Trace
Intrnl
TRACE A : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4ENTER5
REGISTER # and MAX REG # = are displayed on the screen. The

Number after MAX REG # = indicates the maximum register number
that can be entered for trace storage in internal memory.
Recalling a trace
1. Recall data from a trace by pressing:

4SAVE/RECALL5
Recall Internal
Internal
Trace
TRACE A : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 4ENTER5
The recalled trace is placed in the view mode and the instrument
state changed to the state that was recalled.
12-12
Protecting Internal Data from Being Overwritten
Protect all the internal state, trace, and limit line data from being
overwritten by pressing:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Save Internal
SAV LOCK ON OFF ON
Table 12-4 summarizes the functions when saving and recalling data to
and from internal memory.
Table 12-4.
Summary of Save and Recall Operations, Internal Memory
Operation
save state
Screen
Title
Available?
No
Register
Range
1 to 81
Key Sequence
4SAVE/RECALL5
! Internal
STATE ! INTRNL (register number) 4ENTER5
Save
recall state
No
1 to 81
4SAVE/RECALL5
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Recall
Internal
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
INTERNAL
save trace
Yes
STATE (register number) 4ENTER5
0 to MAX REG # 4SAVE/RECALL5

Save ! Internal
Trace
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Intrnl
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
TRACE A , TRACE B , or TRACE C

(register number) 4ENTER5
recall trace
Yes

Recall ! Internal
Internal ! Trace
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
save limit-line
table
recall limit-line
table
Yes2
No
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
TRACE A , TRACE B , or TRACE C (register number) 4ENTER5

Save ! Internal
Trace ! Intrnl
LIMIT LINES (register number) 4ENTER5
Recall ! Internal
Internal ! Trace
LIMIT LINES (register number) 4ENTER5
1 Registers 1 through 8 are available for the user to save a state. State register 0 contains the current state of
the instrument, register 9 contains the previous state of the instrument.
2 The screen title is displayed when cataloging the trace registers with
is not recalled with the limit-line tables.
CATALOG REGISTER . The screen title
12-13
How to Output Data
Note
Conguring a printer
At any time, the screen information can be sent to a printer or plotter

by pressing 4COPY5.
Data collected in the signal list can also be printed or plotted in a
report. The report can consist of any of the following elements:
the user comments (annotations)
a tabular list of the data
a plot of the data in the list, on either a linear or logarithmic
frequency axis with the limit lines that are currently displayed
a listing of the instrument setup parameters, including limit-line and
amplitude-correction les
The report may be congured using any, or all, of the elements listed
above. The graph can also be saved to a card.
Only the graph can be sent to a plotter.
The EMC analyzer supports a variety of printers. The analyzer
must be congured correctly to operate with a specic printer type.
Conguration options include:
printer type
address of the printer
menu printing enabled
The conguration information is used when printing with either the
4COPY5 key or the OUTPUT REPORT softkey (located on the 4OUTPUT5
key menu).
The following procedure congures the receiver to print to an
HP ThinkJet printer.
1. Access the printer conguration menu by pressing:
4CONFIG5
2. Congure the analyzer for the type of printer you wish to use. For
example, to use an HP ThinkJet printer, press:
Print Config
Set B&W Printer
HP B&W Printer
3. Set the HP-IB address of the printer. Enter the last two numbers
of the address assigned to the printer. For example, if the printer
address is 1, enter 01 by pressing:
Print Config
Prn Port Config
PRINTER ADDRESS : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 01 4ENTER5
12-14
Conguring and generating a report
Use a list similar to the one created in the \Using the

measure-at-marker function" in Chapter 4 for this procedure.
1. Access the report denition menu by pressing:
4OUTPUT5
Define Report
2. Verify that all report denitions are set to ON by selecting the

following softkey settings:
ANNOTATN ON OFF ON
LOG ON OFF ON
LIN ON OFF ON
LIST ON OFF ON
SETTINGS ON OFF ON
Note
The ANNOTATN ON OFF function in the Display menu does not turn
user annotation on and o. It is used to turn onscreen annotation,
such as the instrument settings, marker box, title line, softkeys, on
and o.
3. To modify the list, press:
Previous Menu
Define List
The display of the data in the list can be tailored to meet your
needs. You can:
Select which of the measured detectors to print to the list.
Display the dierences between a data point and the limit lines
for any of the detectors.
Elect to indicate which of the list entries have been \marked"
(for more information, refer to Chapter 2).
Print the current correction factors used.
12-15
4. To modify which detector values are printed to the screen, press:

SHOW DET PK QP AV
The detectors that will be displayed are underlined (defaults are

PK and QP). Press the softkey repeatedly to view the detector
combinations available.
5. To display the numerical dierence between a specic detector
reading and limit line 1, press:
SHOW 1 1 PK QP AV
The detectors that will be displayed are underlined. Press the

softkey repeatedly to view the detector combinations available.
6. To display the numerical dierence between a specic detector
reading and limit line 2, press:
SHOW 1 2 PK QP AV
The detectors that are currently detected are underlined. Press

the softkey repeatedly to view the detector combinations
available.
7. To display the total current correction factor used for the data
point displayed, press:
SHOW COR ON OFF ON
8. To display the \mark" in the report, press:

SHOW MRK ON OFF ON
Note
When the maximum number of columns exceeds the maximum

number of characters available across a page in portrait orientation,
the analyzer will print the data in landscape orientation. Some
printers, including the HP ThinkJet, HP DeskJet, Epson MX80 and
Epson LQ570 do not support landscape orientation. Check your
printer documentation for information. The maximum number of
columns that can be printed in portrait mode is nine.
9. To return to the top level OUTPUT menu,press:
Previous Menu
10. To add user notes to the report, press:

EDIT ANNOTATN
Annotation is entered using the HP 1405B, option ABA external

keyboard. The maximum number of ASCII characters allowed in
the annotation is 1024. For more information on connecting and
using the keyboard, refer to Chapter 13.
12-16
11. To clear any existing annotation, press:

CLEAR ANNOTATN
CLEAR ANNOTATN
12. When you nish entering notes, press:

EXIT EDIT
13. Verify the printer is connected to the analyzer, then output the
report by pressing:
OUTPUT REPORT
14. To halt the operation at any time during the output cycle, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Abort
The analyzer will nish any graphs currently in process before

aborting the output cycle.
12-17
13
Additional Features
This chapter describes additional capabilities of the analyzer, including

the:
Spectrum analyzer emulation
Demodulator
Tracking generator
You will also learn:
How to install and use an external keyboard
How to enter annotation, programming command and screen titles
Spectrum Analyzer Emulation
The EMC analyzer can be congured to emulate spectrum analyzer

operation. When in spectrum analysis mode:
IF bandwidths are coupled to span. (In analyzer mode, the IF
bandwidth is selected based on center frequency.)
The default marker operation is MARKER SPAN, not MARKER
TUNE.
Limit lines operate dierently. Refer to Chapter 9 for more
information.
The screen is annotated dierently.
Many automated EMC functions are not available.
To select spectrum analyzer mode, press:
4MODE5
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Additional Features
13-1
Demodulator (all except option 703)
Demodulator control includes:

DEMOD
Directly accesses the softkey menus that include
AM and FM demodulation, FM gain, dwell time,
and squelch level.
VOLUME
Adjusts the audio level of the internal speaker.
REAR PANEL PHONEJACK
Provides an audio output for using headphones.
The following list describes each of the menu selections on the
Demodulator menu.
DEMOD ON OFF
Turns the demodulator on and o (default is o).
Selects the demodulator mode (default is AM).
DEMOD AM FM
SPEAKER ON OFF
SQUELCH
FM GAIN
DWELL TIME
Tracking Generator
Turns the internal speaker on and o.

Sets the level of signal required to activate the
audio amplier.
Changes the sensitivity of the FM discriminator.
The sensitivity can be modied to attain
sucient audio output for a specic voltage
setting when demodulating narrowband and
broadband FM signals.
Sets the length of time the demodulator is on at
the marker when scanning a frequency range
greater than 0 Hz.
The tracking generator is a frequency source that automatically tracks

the analyzer's tuned input frequency. This source is useful when
characterizing two-port devices, such as lters, ampliers, and cables.
To access the tracking generator menus, press:
4AUX/USER5
Track Gen
When SCR PWR ON OFF is rst pressed, the current setting of the
output power level is indicated in the active function block, however
power is not turned on. To activate the tracking generator, press
SCR PWR ON OFF a second time or change the output power level
using the numeric keypad, step keys, or knob. (A terminator key is
required when using the keypad.)
13-2
Additional Features
Note
The PWR SWP ON OFF and SRC ATN MAN AUTO functions operate the
same way as the SCR PWR ON OFF function.
The following list describes each of the menu selections on the

Tracking Generator menu.
Turns the source power on and o and sets
SCR PWR ON OFF
the source power level (default is 97 dBV).
Use the numeric keys, step keys or knob to set
the desired source power level.
Aligns the tracking generator output
TRACKING PEAK
frequency to the tuned frequency of the
analyzer. The alignment is most critical when
using narrow IF bandwidths (30 kHz). This
operation should be performed the rst time
the tracking generator is used with narrow IF
bandwidths each day or when changing the IF
bandwidths.
MAN TRK ADJUST
Enables manual alignment of the tracking
generator output frequency to the tuned
frequency of the analyzer. The alignment
is most critical when using narrow IF
bandwidths (30 kHz). Use the numeric keys,
step keys or knob to adjust the alignment.
Varies the output power of the tracking
PWR SWP ON OFF
generator over the span (default is o (0 dB),
maximum is 15 dB). This feature is useful
when measuring the compression of an
amplier. The source power sweep amplitude
deviation can be adjusted using the numeric
keys, step keys, or knob.
The built-in attenuator is used to optimize
SRC ATN MAN AUTO
the power level of the tracking generator
output. In the automatic (default) mode the
attenuator is auto-coupled to the output. In
the manual mode the power level can be
adjusted using the numeric keys, step keys, or
knob (maximum is 56 dB).
Accesses the second Tracking Generator menu
More 1 of 2
level.
Additional Features
13-3
SCR PWR STP SIZE
SCR PWR OFFSET
ALC INT EXT
ALC MTR EXT XTAL
SWP CPLG SR SA
Previous Menu
More 2 of 2
Sets the step size value for the step keys

(default is 10 dB).
Osets the value of the displayed source
power level (default is 0 dB). This function
can be used to account for the gain or loss of
a DUT.
The tracking generator is leveled internally
(default). When done manually an external
signal can be connected to the ALC INPUT.
HP 8591EM only. The tracking generator
is leveled internally (default). When done
manually an external signal can be connected
to the ALC INPUT.
Changes sweep time (default is \no delay") in
stimulus-response mode to account for the
response time of a DUT. This is useful when
testing devices such as lters.
Accesses the 4AUX/USER5 menu.
Accesses the rst Tracking Generator menu
level.
External Keyboard
External keyboard features
The HP C1405B keyboard is an IBM AT compatible keyboard that can

be connected to the external keyboard connector on the rear panel of
the EMC analyzer. The external keyboard allows a convenient way to
enter screen titles and remote programming commands directly into
the EMC analyzer or to access the softkey functions.
The function keys of the external keyboard control the EMC analyzer
as follows:
13-4
Additional Features
Table 13-8. External Keyboard Functions

Key
Description
F1|F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
4ESC5
4PRINT SCREEN5
4PAUSE5
Softkeys 1 through 6 (respectively) of the current EMC analyzer menu.

Enter prex mode.
Enter remote commands mode.
Accesses the 4FREQUENCY5 menu.
Accesses the 4SPAN5 menu.
Accesses the 4AMPLITUDE5 menu.
Retrieves the present screen title for editing.
Accesses the enter title mode.
Copies the EMC analyzer screen display to the active copy device.
Accesses the DLP Editor and redenes F7|F12.
Additional Features
13-5
Table 13-8. External Keyboard Functions (continued)

Key
Description
Deletes the character over the cursor.

Toggles between the insert and replace mode at the cursor.
Erases the previous character to the left of the cursor.
Clears the keyboard line.
Clears to end of line.
46 5
Moves the cursor to the left.
475
Moves the cursor to the right.
49 5
Moves from later items to earlier items in the recall buer.
48 5
Moves from earlier items to later items in the recall buer.
4CTRL5-4 C 5*
End-of-text.
4CTRL5-4 J 5*
Line feed.
4CTRL5-4 M 5*
Carriage return.
4CTRL5-4 N 5*
Turns on inverse video.
4CTRL5-4 O 5*
Turns enhancements (inverse video, underlining) o.
4CTRL5-4 P 5*
Turns on underlining.
4CTRL5-4 [ 5 *
Escape.
*The dash between keys indicates that both keys should be pressed at the same time.
DELETE5
4INSERT5
4BACKSPACE5
4ALT5-4DELETE5*
4CTRL5-4DELETE5*
4
The external keyboard operation with the EMC analyzer is similar to

its operation with a computer except for the following:
SCROLL LOCK and NUM LOCK are xed and cannot be changed.
Pressing 4NUM LOCK5 displays the keyboard mode on the EMC analyzer
screen. The EMC analyzer will not recognize the control characters or
function keys.
The keyboard supports a 244 character recall buer. The longest
single item is limited to 243 characters; subsequent characters are
ignored. Using the 4*5 or 4+5 keys of the external keyboard to recall
an item does not change the buer contents. Recalling an item and
then pressing the 4ENTER5 key does not store a new copy of the item in
the recall buer. If an item is recalled and then modied, a new copy
will be made in the recall buer. Adding new data into the keyboard
line deletes the oldest data automatically.
When in command mode, the active line will append a semicolon to
the keyboard entry if the line does not end with a semicolon and it is
fewer than 243 characters long.
13-6
Additional Features
Installation
CAUTION
To install the external keyboard (HP 1405B option ABA):

1. Press 4LINE5 to turn o power to the analyzer.
Turn o the analyzer before connecting an external keyboard to the
analyzer. Failure to do so may result in loss of factory calibration
data.
Static discharges of greater than 3 kV to metallic portions of the
connector housing on the keyboard during operation may cause the
instrument to reset.
Plug the keyboard into the EXT KEYBOARD input located on the rear
panel of the EMC analyzer.
Press 4LINE5 to turn on power to the EMC analyzer.
The external keyboard is now ready to be used.
Using the template
The External Keyboard Template (HP part number 5182-1204),

displays the functions available when using the external keyboard.
The external keyboard has two modes of operation:
Annotation Editor
This mode is used to enter or edit
annotation.
Keyboard Entry
This mode is used to enter or edit the
command line, title line, or prex.
Figure 13-1. External keyboard template.
Additional Features
13-7
This section provides a brief description of the template features.

1
EDITOR (4Esc5) is used to select the keyboard entry destination
to be the title.
2
The onscreen softkeys can be accessed by pressing the
appropriate function key (4F15 through 4F65).
3
4F75 is used to select the keyboard entry destination to be the
prex.
4
4f85 is used to select the keyboard entry destination to be the
command line.
5
SETUP (4F95) duplicates the front-panel 4SETUP5 key.
6
TEST (4F105) duplicates the front-panel 4TEST5 key.
7
OUTPUT (4F115) duplicates the front-panel 4OUTPUT5 key.
8
Recall Current Title ! Keyboard Entry Line (4F125) moves the
currently displayed title to the keyboard entry line so it can be
edited.
9
The function of the 4Print Screen5 key is determined by the
current operating mode. In keyboard entry mode it duplicates
the front-panel 4COPY5 key. In editor mode it prints the
annotation.
10 The Exit ! EDITOR/Exit ! Keyboard Entry (4Pause5) toggles
between the two operating modes.
13-8
Additional Features
Entering data using the external keyboard

Entering annotation
The external keyboard can be used to enter explanatory text.

Annotation can be:
displayed on the analyzer screen to provide additonal information
printed separately, or as part of a report
stored with the signal list and recalled for future reference
1. Select the Annotation Editor by pressing:
Exit ! EDITOR , (4Pause5)
Note
When the Annotation Editor is selected using the external keyboard,

annotation is automatically turned on.
Annotation editing can also be turned on from the front panel by
pressing:
4OUTPUT5
EDIT ANNOTATN
2. To clear any existing annotation:

On the front panel, press:
4OUTPUT5
On the external keyboard, press:
EDIT ANNOTATN (4F55)
CLEAR ANNOTATN (4F15)
EXIT EDIT (4F65)
3. Use the external keyboard to enter the following message:

This is an annotation editor. It can be used to
record information about the measurement.
Note
The Home, End, Insert, Delete, and arrow keys are available. The
backspace (4 5) key can also be used.
4. To print the annotation, press:
Print Annotation (4Print Screen5)
For information on saving a signal list and its annotation, refer to
Chapter 5, List-Based Measurements.
5. When you are nished with the annotation, press
Exit ! Keyboard Entry (4Pause5).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Additional Features
13-9
Entering programming commands
Remote programming commands can be entered using the external

keyboard. Refer to HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer Quick Reference
Guide for a complete list of the remote programming commands.
1. Select the Command function by pressing:
4F85
The on-screen message, \Keyboard Entry ! Command" ashes on
the screen.
2. Set the center frequency to 300 MHz and the span to 2 MHz by
using the external keyboard to enter:
CF300MZ; 4Enter5
SP2MZ; 4Enter5
Note
When editing the keyboard entry line the down-arrow key (4+5) can be
used to recall previously entered lines.
Entering a screen title
1. Select the Title function by pressing:

4Esc5
The on-screen message Keyboard Entry ! Title ashes on the
screen.
2. Use the external keyboard to enter:
This is a title.
When you are nished entering the prex, press 4Enter5. The new
title will move from the Keyboard Entry line to the Title line.
3. To edit an existing Title line move the current title to the Keyboard
Entry line by pressing:
Recall Current Title ! Keyboard Entry Line (4F125)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Use the external keyboard to change the title to read:

This Is a New Title
When you are nished entering the title, press 4Enter5. The title will
move from the Keyboard Entry line to the Title line.
13-10
Additional Features
Entering a prex
1. Select the Prex function by pressing:

4F75
The on-screen message Keyboard Entry ! Prefix ashes on the
screen.
2. Use the external keyboard to enter:
JOY
When you are nished entering the prex, press 4Enter5.

To view the new prex, press:
4SAVE/RECALL5
Change Prefix
The message \Prefix = JOY" is displayed in the active function

area of the screen.
3. When you are nished viewing the prex, press:
More 1 of 2
EDIT DONE
Additional Features
13-11
14
EMC Analyzer Error Messages
The EMC analyzer can generate various messages that appear on its
screen during operation to indicate a problem.
There are three types of messages: hardware error messages (H),
user-created error messages (U), and informational messages (M).
Hardware error messages indicate the EMC analyzer hardware is
probably broken.
User-created error messages appear when the EMC analyzer is used
incorrectly. They are usually generated during remote operation
(entering programming commands using either a controller or the
external keyboard).
Informational messages provide information indicating the EMC
analyzer's progress within a specic procedure.
The messages are listed in alphabetical order on the following pages;
each message is dened, and its type is indicated by an (H), (U), or
(M).
LOCK OFF
Indicates slow YTO tuning. This message may appear if the EMC
analyzer is using default correction factors. If this message appears
constantly, perform the CAL FREQ routine to try to eliminate
this message. LOCK OFF appears brie y during the CAL FREQ
routine, during instrument preset, or when the frequency value is
changed; this is normal and does not indicate a problem. (U) and
(H)
ADC-2V FAIL
Indicates a hardware failure. (H)

ADC-GND FAIL
Indicates a hardware failure. (H)

ADC-TIME FAIL
Indicates a hardware failure. (H) and (U)

CAL:
During the self-calibration routine, messages may appear on the

display to indicate how the calibration routines are progressing. For
example, sweep, freq, span, MC delay, FM coil, and atten can
appear on the EMC analyzer display. LOCK OFF appears brie y
during the CAL FREQ self-calibration routine; this is normal and
does not indicate a problem. (M)
14-1
CAL:
: done Press CAL STORE to save
Indicates that the self-calibration routine is nished and that you

should press CAL STORE . (M)
CAL: cannot execute CALAMP enter: 0 dB PREAMP GAIN
The preamplier gain should be set to 0 dB before the CAL

AMPTD routine is performed. The preamplier gain is set by using
EXTERNAL PREAMPG . This message also sets SRQ 110. (U)
CAL: DATA NOT STORED CAL AMP NEEDED
The correction factors are corrupt and cannot be stored. You need
to perform the CAL AMPTD or the CAL FREQ & AMPTD routine
before trying to store the correction factors. This message also sets
SRQ 110. (U)
CAL: FM SPAN SENS FAIL
The EMC analyzer could not set up span sensitivity of the FM coil.
(H)
CAL: GAIN FAIL
Indicates the signal amplitude is too low during the CAL AMPTD
routine. This message also sets SRQ 110. (H)
Cal harmonic >= 5.7 GHz NOT found
Indicates that the CAL YTF routine for an HP 8595EM cannot nd a

harmonic of the 300 MHz calibration signal. If this happens, ensure
that the CAL OUT connector is connected to the EMC analyzer
input, perform the CAL FREQ & AMPTD routine, and then perform
the CAL YTF routine again. (U) and (H)
CAL: MAIN COIL SENSE FAIL
The EMC analyzer could not set up span sensitivity of the main
coil. If this message appears, press 4FREQUENCY5, 037, 4Hz5, 4CAL5,
More 1 of 4 , More 2 of 4 , DEFAULT CAL DATA , and perform
the CAL FREQ routine again. (H)
CAL: NBW 200 Hz notch amp failed
Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct

shape for the calibration routine. (H)
CAL: NBW 200 Hz notch failed

shape for the calibration routine. (H)
CAL: NBW 200 Hz width failed

bandwidth for the calibration routine. (H)
CAL: NBW gain failed
Indicates that one of the resolution bandwidths is not the correct

amplitude for the calibration routine. (H)
CAL: NBW width failed
Indicates that one of the resolution bandwidths is not the correct

width for the calibration routine. (H)
CAL: PASSCODE NEEDED
Indicates that the function cannot be accessed without the pass

code. For the DEFAULT CAL DATA function, enter the passcode by
pressing 4FREQUENCY5, 037, 4Hz5. (M)
14-2
CAL: RES BW AMPL FAIL
The relative insertion loss of the resolution bandwidth is incorrect.

This message also sets SRQ 110. (H)
CAL SIGNAL NOT FOUND
Indicates the calibration signal (CAL OUT) cannot be found. Check

that the CAL OUT and the EMC analyzer input connectors are
connected with an appropriate cable. If the calibration signal
is connected to the EMC analyzer input but cannot be found,
press 4FREQUENCY5, 037, 4Hz5, 4CAL5, More 1 of 4 , More 2 of 4 ,
DEFAULT CAL DATA . If the calibration signal still cannot be found,
press 4FREQUENCY5, 037, 4Hz5 and perform the CAL FREQ or CAL
FREQ & AMPTD self-calibration routines. This message also sets
SRQ 110. (U) and (H)
CAL: SPAN SENS FAIL
The self-calibration span sensitivity routine failed. This message

also sets SRQ 110. (H)
CAL: USING DEFAULT DATA
Indicates that the calibration data is corrupt and the default

correction factors are being used. Interruption of the
self-calibration routines or an error can cause this problem. (M)
CAL YTF FAILED
Indicates that the CAL YTF routine could not be successfully

completed. If this message appears, ensure that the CAL OUT
connector (for the HP 8595EM) or 100 MHz COMB OUT connector
(for the HP 8593EM or HP 8596EM) is connected to the EMC
analyzer input, then perform the CAL YTF routine again. (U) and
(H)
CAL: ZERO FAIL
The EMC analyzer could not set up the tuning sensitivity of the
main coil. If this message appears, press 4FREQUENCY5, 037, 4Hz5,
4CAL5, More 1 of 4 , More 2 of 4 , DEFAULT CAL DATA , and
perform the CAL FREQ routine again. (H)
Cannot BYPASS Input 1
An attempt was made to execute the BYPASS command while the

signal path is routed through INPUT 1 of the RF lter section. Only
INPUT 2 of the RF lter section can be bypassed. Requires the
HP 85420E Option 1EM RF Filter section.
Cannot engage phase lock with current CAL FREQ data
Indicates that the CAL FREQ routine needs to be performed before

phase locking can be turned on. (U)
Comb harmonic at
GHz NOT found
Indicates that the CAL YTF routine for the EMC analyzer cannot
nd a harmonic of the comb generator at frequency displayed. If
this happens, ensure that the 100 MHz COMB OUT connector (for
an HP 8593EM or HP 8596EM) or the CAL OUT connector (for
an HP 8595EM) is connected to the EMC analyzer input with a
low-loss, short cable before the CAL YTF routine is performed. (U)
and (H)
14-3
COMB SIGNAL NOT FOUND
The comb signal cannot be found. Check that 100 MHz COMB OUT
is connected to the EMC analyzer input. The comb generator is
available with the HP 8593EM or HP 8596EM only. (U) and (H)
CMD ERR:
The specied programming command is not recognized by the EMC

analyzer. Press ANNOTATN ON OFF to clear. (U)
CONF TEST FAIL
Indicates that the condence test failed. If this happens, ensure
that the CAL OUT connector is connected to the EMC analyzer
input, perform the CAL FREQ & AMPTD routine, and then perform
the condence test again. This message also sets SRQ 110. (H) and
(U)
EMPTY DLP MEM
Indicates that the user-dened items (user-dened functions,

user-dened variables, user-dened traces, user-dened softkeys)
and any personalities (for example, the HP 85712B EMC
measurement Personality) in the EMC analyzer's memory have been
deleted. If the message is continuously displayed at power up, it
may indicate a hardware failure. See the EMC analyzer's Service
Guide for more information. (U)
FAIL:
An error was discovered during the power-up check. The 4-digit by

10-digit code indicates the type of error. Error codes are described
in the EMC analyzer's service guide. (H)
File type incompatible
Indicates that the selected le is not a display image le. The le

name for a display image le is always preceded by an \i." (U)
FREQ UNCAL
If the FREQ UNCAL message appears constantly, it indicates a

YTO-tuning error. If this message appears constantly, perform the
CAL FREQ routine. FREQ UNCAL appears brie y during the CAL
FREQ routine; this is normal and does not indicate a problem. (U)
and (H) (U) and (H)
Function not available in current Mode
Indicates that the function that you have selected can only be used
with the EMC analyzer or spectrum analyzer mode. You can use the
4MODE5 key to select the EMC analyzer or spectrum analyzer mode.
(U)
Function not available with analog display
Indicates that the function that you have selected is not compatible
with the Analog+ display mode. To use the function, you must rst
turn o the Analog+ display mode with ANALOG+ ON OFF . (U)
INTERNAL LOCKED
The EMC analyzer's internal trace and state registers have

been locked. To unlock the trace or state registers, press
SAV LOCK ON OFF so that OFF is underlined. For remote
operation, use PSTATE OFF. (U)
14-4
INVALID ACTDEF:
The specied ACTDEF name is not valid. See the ACTDEF

programming command. (U)
INVALID AMPCOR: FREQ
For the AMPCOR command, the frequency data must be entered in

increasing order. See the description for the AMPCOR programming
command for more information. (U)
INVALID BLOCK FORMAT: IF STATEMENT
An invalid block format appeared within the IF statement. See the

description for the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF programming command
for more information. (U)
INVALID CARD
Indicates one of the following conditions: the memory card is

write-protected (check the position of the switch on the memory
card), the memory card is a read-only memory (ROM) card, or a
memory card has not been inserted. (U)
INVALID CARD: BAD MEDIA
Indicates the formatting routine ( FORMAT CARD ) for the memory

card could not be completed. See the description for INVALID
CARD above for more information about the possible causes of this
message. (U) and (H)
INVALID CARD: DATA ERROR
Indicates the data could not be retrieved from the memory card.
(U) and (H)
INVALID CARD: DIRECTORY
Indicates the memory card has not been formatted. (U)

INVALID CARD: NO CARD
Indicates a memory card has not been inserted. (U)

INVALID CARD: TYPE
Indicates one of the following conditions: the memory card is

write-protected (check the position of the switch on the memory
card), the memory card is a read-only memory (ROM) card, or a
memory card has not been inserted. (U)
INVALID CHECKSUM: USTATE
The user-dened state does not follow the expected format. (U)
INVALID COMPARE OPERATOR
An IF/THEN or REPEAT/UNTIL routine is improperly constructed.

Specically, the IF or UNTIL operands are incorrect. (U)
INVALID DET: FM or TV option only
Indicates that the selected detector cannot be used until the

appropriate option is installed in the EMC analyzer. (U)
INVALID ENTER FORMAT
The enter format is not valid. See the appropriate programming

command description to determine the correct format. (U)
INVALID <le name> NOT FOUND
Indicates that the specied le could not be loaded into EMC

analyzer memory or purged from memory because the le name
cannot be found. (U)
14-5
INVALID FILENAME
Indicates the specied le name is invalid. A le name is invalid if

there is no le name specied, if the rst letter of the le name
is not alphabetic, or if the specied le type does not match the
type of le. See the description SAVRCLW or STOR programming
command for more information. (U)
INVALID FILE: NO ROOM
Indicates that there is insucient space available on the memory

card to store the data. (U)
INVALID HP-IB ADRS/OPERATION
An HP-IB operation was aborted due to an incorrect address or

invalid operation. Check that there is only one controller (the EMC
analyzer) connected to the printer or plotter. (U)
INVALID HP-IB OPERATION REN TRUE
The HP-IB operation is not allowed. (This is usually caused by

trying to print or plot when a controller is on the interface bus with
the EMC analyzer.) To use the EMC analyzer print or plot functions,
you must disconnect any other controllers on the HP-IB. If you are
using programming commands to print or plot, you can use an HP
BASIC command instead of disconnecting the controller. (U)
INVALID ITEM:
Indicates an invalid parameter has been used in a programming

command. (U)
INVALID KEYLBL:
Indicates that the specied key label contains too many characters.
A key label is limited to 8 printable characters per label line. (U)
INVALID KEYNAME:
The specied key name is not allowed. (The key name may have
con icted with a EMC analyzer programming command.) To avoid
this problem, use an underscore as the second character in the key
name, or avoid beginning the key name with the following pairs of
letters: LB, OA, OL, TA, TB, TR, MA, MF, TS, OT, and DR. (U)
INVALID OUTPUT FORMAT
The output format is not valid. See the appropriate programming

command description to determine the correct format. (U)
INVALID RANGE: Stop < Start
Indicates that the rst trace element specied for a range of trace
elements is larger that ending trace element. When specifying
a trace range the starting element must be less than the ending
element. For example, TRA[2,300] is legal but TRA[300,2] is not.
(U)
INVALID REGISTER NUMBER
The specied trace register number is invalid. (U)

INVALID REPEAT MEM OVFL
Memory over ow occurred due to a REPEAT routine. This can

occur if there is not enough EMC analyzer memory for the REPEAT
UNTIL declaration, or if the REPEAT UNTIL declaration exceeds
2047 characters. (U)
14-6
INVALID REPEAT NEST LEVEL
The nesting level in the REPEAT routine is improperly constructed.

This can occur if too many REPEAT routines are nested. When
used within a downloadable program (DLP), the maximum number
of REPEAT UNTIL statements that can be nested is 20. (U)
INVALID RS-232 ADRS/OPERATION
An RS-232 operation was aborted due to an invalid operation. (U)

INVALID SAVE REG
Data has not been saved in the specied state or trace register, or
the data is corrupt. (U)
INVALID SCRMOVE
Indicates the EMC analyzer may have a hardware failure. See the
EMC analyzer's service guide (option 915) for more information. (H)
INVALID START INDEX
Indicates that the rst trace element specied for a range of trace
elements is not within the trace range of the specied trace. (U)
INVALID STOP INDEX
Indicates that the ending trace element specied for a range of

trace elements is not within the trace range of the specied trace.
(U)
INVALID STORE DEST:
The specied destination eld is invalid. (U)

INVALID TRACE:
The specied trace is invalid. (U)

INVALID TRACENAME:
Indicates the specied trace could not be saved because the trace
name is not allowed. To avoid this problem, use an underscore as
the second character in the trace name, or avoid beginning the
trace name with the following pairs of letters: LB, OA, OL, TA, TB,
TR, MA, MF, TS, OT, and DR. (U)
INVALID VALUE PARAMETER:
The specied value parameter is invalid. (U)

INVALID VARDEF:
The specied variable name is not allowed. To avoid this problem,

use an underscore as the second character in the variable label,
or avoid beginning the variable label with the following pairs of
letters: LB, OA, OL, TA, TB, TR, MA, MF, TS, OT, and DR. (U)
INVALID WINDOW TYPE:
The specied window is invalid. See the description for the

TWNDOW programming command. (U)
LOST SIGNAL
For the HP 8593EM or HP 8596EM, this message indicates that the

cable from the 100 MHz COMB OUT connector to the EMC analyzer
input is defective or has become disconnected during the CAL YTF
routine. For the HP 8595EM, this message indicates that the cable
from the CAL OUT connector is defective or has been disconnected
during the CAL YTF routine. Be sure to use a short, low-loss cable
to connect the signal to the EMC analyzer input when performing
the CAL YTF routine. (U)
14-7
LO UNLVL
Indicates that the EMC analyzer's local oscillator distribution

amplier is not functioning properly. (H)
Marker Count Reduce SPAN
Indicates the resolution bandwidth to span ratio is too small to

use the marker count function. Check the span and resolution
bandwidth settings. (U)
Marker Count Widen RES BW
Indicates that the current resolution bandwidth setting is too

narrow to use with the marker counter function. The marker
counter function can be in narrow resolution bandwidths
(bandwidths that are less than 1 kHz) with the following procedure:
1. Place the marker on the desired signal.
2. Increase the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz and verify the
marker is on the signal peak.
3. If the marker in on the signal peak, the marker count function
can be used in either the 1 kHz resolution bandwidth or the
original narrow resolution bandwidth setting. If the marker is
not on the signal peak, it should be moved to the signal peak
and the marker counter function should not be used with a
resolution bandwidth setting of less than 1 kHz. (U)
MEAS UNCAL
The measurement is uncalibrated. Check the sweep time, span, and

bandwidth settings, or press 4AUTO COUPLE5, AUTO ALL . (U)
MEMORY OVERFLOW:ERASE DLP MEM and reload
This message indicates that too many user-dened items (functions,
variables, key denitions), or downloadable programs have been
loaded into EMC analyzer memory. If this message appears,
use ERASE DLP MEM and then load the user-dened item or
downloadable program into EMC analyzer memory. (U)
No card found
Indicates that the memory card is not inserted. (U)

No points dened
Indicates the specied limit line or amplitude correction function

cannot be performed because no limit line segments or amplitude
correction factors have been dened. (U)
OVEN COLD
Indicates that the EMC analyzer has been powered up for less than
5 minutes. (The actual temperature of the precision frequency oven
is not measured.) (Option 004 only.) (M)
PARAMETER ERROR:
The specied parameter is not recognized by the EMC analyzer. See

the appropriate programming command description to determine
the correct parameters. (U)
PASSCODE NEEDED
Indicates that the function cannot be accessed without the pass

code. (U)
POS-PK FAIL
Indicates the positive-peak detector has failed. (H)

14-8
RCVR Limits not allowed in SA mode
This error is encountered when an attempt is made to enable

limit-line display, limit-margin display, or limit testing of limits
dened in EMC analyzer mode when the instrument is operating
in Signal Analysis mode. To correct the problem, either purge the
limits or switch to Receiver mode. (U)
REF UNLOCK
Indicates that the frequency reference is not locked to the external

reference input. Check that the 10 MHz REF OUT connector is
connected to the EXT REF IN connector, or, when using an external
reference, that an external 10 MHz reference source of sucient
amplitude is connect to the EXT REF IN connector. (U) and (H)
Required option not installed
Some EMC analyzer functions require that an option be installed

in the EMC analyzer. See the description for the function in
the HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer User's Guide for more
information about which option is required. (U)
RES-BW NOISE FAIL
Indicates the noise oor level is incorrect at the indicated

bandwidth. (H)
RES-BW SHAPE FAIL
Indicates the 3 dB bandwidth is not within specications. (H)

RF Filter Section Absent
This message is displayed if the bypass command is executed when

the RF lter section is not connected to, or is not communicating
with, the EMC analyzer. (U) and (H)
RFFS Error: COMMAND
The RF lter section has received a command that it does not

recognize. Assure that there is no cable connected to the RF
lter section Service Bus interface. If the condition persists, and
there is no cable connected to the RF lter section Service Bus
interface, contact your HP representative. Requires the HP 85420E
Option 1EM RF Filter section. (U)
RFFS Error: HARDWARE
The RF lter section has experienced a hardware failure. If

the condition persists after presetting the instrument or cycling
power, contact your HP representative. Requires the HP 85420E
Option 1EM RF Filter section. (H)
RFFS Error: TIMEOUT
Communication failure between the EMC analyzer; and the RF

lter section. Check power to the RF lter section and check
that the AUX interface cable is properly connected between both
instruments. Requires the HP 85420E Option 1EM RF Filter section.
(U) (H)
RFFS Service Bus Active
This message appears in the active function area of the EMC

analyzer; display when an external controller communicates with
the RF lter section via the RF lter section Service Bus interface.
Requires the HP 85420E Option 1EM RF Filter section. (H)
14-9
RF PRESEL ERROR
Indicates that the preselector peak routine cannot be performed.

Requires the HP 85420E Option 1EM RF Filter section. (H)
RF PRESEL TIMEOUT
Indicates that the preselector peak routine cannot be performed.

Requires the HP 85420E Option 1EM RF Filter section.(H)
SA Limits not allowed in RCVR mode
This error is encountered when an attempt is made to enable

limit-line display, limit-margin display, or limit testing of limits
dened in Spectrum Analyzer mode when the instrument is
operating in EMC Analyzer mode. To correct the problem, either
delete the limits or switch to Spectrum Analyzer mode. (U)
SAMPLE FAIL
Indicates the sample detector has failed. (H)

SETUP ERROR
Indicates that the span, channel bandwidth, or channel spacing are

not set correctly for the adjacent channel power or channel power
measurement. (U)
Signal Not Found
Indicates the PEAK ZOOM routine did not nd a valid signal. (U)
SMPLR UNLCK
Indicates that the sampling oscillator circuitry is not functioning

properly. If this message appears, check that the external frequency
reference is correctly connected to the EXT REF INPUT. (U) and (H)
SOFTKEY OVFL
Softkey nesting exceeds the maximum number of levels. (U)

SRQ
The specied service request is active. Service requests are a form

of informational message and are explained in Appendix A of the
HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer User's Guide. (M)
STEP GAIN/ATTN FAIL
Indicates the step gain has failed. (H)

Stop at marker not available with negative detection
Indicates that the marker counter cannot be used when negative

peak detection is selected. To use the marker counter, turn o
negative peak detection with DETECTOR PK SP NG . (U)
TABLE FULL
Indicates the upper or lower table of limit lines contains the

maximum number of entries allowed. Additional entries to the
table are ignored. (U)
TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND
Indicates the tracking generator output signal cannot be found.

Check that the tracking generator output (RF OUT 50
or RF OUT
75
) is connected to the EMC analyzer input connector with an
appropriate cable. (U)
TG UNLVL
This message can indicate the following: that the source power is
set higher or lower than the EMC analyzer can provide, that the
14-10
frequency span extends beyond the specied frequency range of

the tracking generator, or that the calibration data for the tracking
generator is incorrect. See \Stimulus-Response Measurements", in
Chapter 8, for more information. (U)
Trace A is not available
Indicates that trace A is in the store-blank mode and cannot be

used for limit-line testing. Use CLEAR WRITE A or VIEW A to
change trace A from the store-blank mode to the clear write mode,
and then turn on limit-line testing. (U)
UNDF KEY
The softkey number is not recognized by the EMC analyzer. (U)

USING DEFAULTS self cal needed
Indicates that the current correction factors are the default

correction factors and that the CAL FREQ & AMPTD routine needs
to be performed. For the HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM, or HP 8596EM,
CAL YTF routine needs to be performed also. (U)
VID-BW FAIL
Indicates the video bandwidths have failed. (H)

YTF is not available
The YTF is only available for the HP 8593EM, HP 8595EM, and

HP 8596EM. (U)
14-11
Nonrecoverable System Errors
Certain situations can create error conditions from which the main
processor cannot recover. In the event that the processor detects a
nonrecoverable error, the instrument will be initialized, the display
will be blanked, and special error messages will be written to the
display.
The following is a sample nonrecoverable system error message
display.
System Error 4, HP 859XEM, SN 4
09:15:20 FEB 8, 1995, Rev: 950208
SR: 0000
PC: 00FFB370
D0: 00000000
A0: 00FFB238
D1: 00000000
A1: 00FF803E
D2: 00FFB238
A2: 00FF803C
D3: 00FF803E
A3: 00FFB2FE
D4: 00008E7D
A4: 00FFB2F4
D5: 00FF80E8
A5: 00FC6948
D6: 00FFB39A
A6: FFFFFFFE
D7: 00FFB392
A7: 00FF6F1E
WARNING: Cong Settings Defaulted

Press COPY to print error report and
advise your local HP representative
Press PRESET to resume operation
00FF6F1E:
00FF6F22:
00FF6F26:
00FF6F2A:
00FF6F2E:
00FF6F32:
00FF6F36:
00FF6F3A:
00FF6F3E:
00FF6F42:
00FF6F46:
00FF6F4A:
00FF6F4E:
00FF6F52:
00FF6F56:
00FF6F5A:
00009300
00000000
00000000
00FF803E
000031B1
0004065E
0004EDE8
00FF8000
00FF88AE
00FF87E0
00FFB03C
000C9AEA
00FF8890
040800FF
000900FF
B23A0000
When a nonrecoverable error message is displayed, the instrument

will only respond to the front-panel COPY and PRESET keys. If you
have a printer congured and connected to the instrument, and if
no remote controller is currently connected to the I/O port through
which the printer is connected, you can generate a hardcopy of the
diagnostic part of the error message by pressing the front-panel COPY
key.
In order to resume instrument operation following a nonrecoverable
system error, press the front-panel PRESET key. The instrument will
resume operation from its preset state.
14-12
Among the conditions which can contribute to the occurrence of a

nonrecoverable system error are:
Hardware failure of the main processor
Hardware failure of system memory available to the main processor
Errors in the primary system control program
Attempted execution of unsupported system commands
Nonrecoverable system errors may occur when attempting to load an
improper le type into the machine. For example, loading a le with
an incorrect format into a limit line or amplitude correction table may
generate this error.
If nonrecoverable system errors occur regularly, contact your HP
representative.
14-13
15
Customer Support
Your EMC analyzer is built to provide dependable service.

It is unlikely that you will experience a problem. However,
Hewlett-Packard's worldwide sales and service organization is ready
to provide the support you need.
If You Have a Problem
Before calling Hewlett-Packard or returning the EMC analyzer for

service, please make the checks listed in \Check the Basics" later in
this chapter. If you still have a problem, please read the warranty
printed at the front of this manual. If your EMC analyzer is covered
by a separate maintenance agreement, please be familiar with its
terms.
Hewlett-Packard oers several maintenance plans to service your
EMC analyzer after warranty expiration. Call your HP Sales and
Service Oce for full details.
If you want to service the EMC analyzer yourself after warranty
expiration, contact your HP Sales and Service Oce to obtain the
most current test and maintenance information.
Calling HP Sales and Service Oces
Sales and service oces are located around the world to provide
complete support for your EMC analyzer. To obtain servicing
information or to order replacement parts, contact the nearest
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service oce listed in Table 15-1. In any
correspondence or telephone conversations, refer to the EMC analyzer
by its model number and full serial number. With this information,
the HP representative can quickly determine whether your unit is still
within its warranty period.
Customer Support
15-1
Check the Basics
In general, a problem can be caused by a hardware failure, a software

error, or a user error. Often problems may be solved by repeating
what was being done when the problem occurred. A few minutes
spent in performing these simple checks may eliminate time spent
waiting for instrument repair.
If your EMC analyzer does not turn on
Verify the EMC analyzer is plugged into the proper ac power source.
Verify the line socket has power.
Verify the rear-panel voltage selector switches are set correctly.
Verify the line fuses are good.
Verify the EMC analyzer is turned on.
If the HP 8590 EM series used with an HP 85420E option 1EM does not seem to
be working
HP 85420E option 1EM only
Verify the ac power to the EMC analyzer as described above.

Verify the rear-panel auxiliary interface cable is properly
connected.
Verify the rear-panel sweep ramp and high sweep cables are
properly connected.
If the EMC analyzer cannot communicate via HP-IB
Verify the proper HP-IB address has been set.

Verify there are no equipment address con icts.
Verify the other equipment and cables are connected properly and
operating correctly.
Verify the HP-IB cable is connected to the EMC analyzer.
Verication of proper operation
Verify the test being performed and the expected results are within
the specications and capabilities of the EMC analyzer.
Check operation by performing the operation verication
procedures in the HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer Verication
Guide. Record all results in the operation verication test record.
15-2
Customer Support
If the HP 8590 EM series used with an HP 85420E option 1EM does not power
o
HP 85420E option 1EM only
Verify the service power switch on the HP 8590 EM series used

with an HP 85420E option 1EM is set to normal mode.
Error messages
Check the EMC analyzer display for error messages. Refer to

Chapter 14 of this manual.
Additional Support Services

CompuServe
CompuServe, the worldwide electronic information utility, provides

technical information and support for EMC instrumentation and
communication with other EMC users.
With a CompuServe account and a modem-equipped computer, simply
type GO HPSYS and select the EMC system section to get information
on documentation, application notes, product notes, service notes,
software, rmware revision listings, data sheets, and more.
If you are not a member of CompuServe and would like to join,
call CompuServe and take advantage of the Free Introductory
Membership. The membership includes the following:
An introductory usage credit to CompuServe.
A private User ID and Password.
A complimentary subscription to CompuServe's monthly computing
publication, CompuServe Magazine.
To take advantage of the CompuServe Free Introductory Membership
oer, call one of the telephone numbers below and ask for
Representative Number 999.
Customer Support
15-3
Country
Argentina
Australia
Canada
Chile
Germany
Hong Kong
Israel
Japan
Korea
New Zealand
South Africa
Switzerland
Taiwan
United Kingdom
United States
Venezuela
Elsewhere
FAX support line
Note
Toll-Free
|
008-023-158
|
|
0130 86 4643
|
|
0120-22-1200
080-022-7400
0800-441-082
|
155 31 79
|
0800 289458
800-848-8990
|
|
Direct
(+54) 01-372-7883
(+61) 2-410-4555
(+1) 614-457-8650
(+56) 2-696-8807
(+49) (+89) 66 55 0-222
(+852) 867-0102
(+972) 3-290466
(+81) 3-5471-5806
(+82) 2-569-5400
|
(+27) 12-841-2530
|
(+886) 2-515-7035
(+44) (+272) 255111
(+1) 614-457-8650
(+58) 2-793-2984
(+1) 614-457-8650
A fax sheet is provided at the end of this chapter as a method in

which to directly contact the HP EMC support team in the event
of a problem. The fax cover sheet provides the EMC support team
with information about your company, the product, and a detailed
description about the problem.
All items on the fax cover sheet must be completed in order to
expedite your response. Any incomplete item may delay your

response.
Simply copy the fax cover sheet, ll out the requested information,
include any additional information sheets, and fax the sheet(s) to
HP EMC Support at (707) 577-4200. Depending on the complexity of
the problem, you should receive a response back within a few days.
15-4
Customer Support
Returning the EMC Analyzer for Service
Use the information in this section if it is necessary to return the EMC

analyzer to Hewlett-Packard.
Package the EMC analyzer for shipment
Use the following steps to package the HP 8590 EM series for

shipment to Hewlett-Packard for service:
1. Fill in a service tag (available at the end of this chapter) and attach
it to the instrument. Please be as specic as possible about the
nature of the problem. Send a copy of any or all of the following
information:
Any error messages that appeared on the EMC analyzer display.
A completed operation verication test record located at the end
of Chapter 2 in this manual.
Any other specic data on the performance of the EMC analyzer.
CAUTION
Damage to the EMC analyzer can result from using packaging

materials other than those specied. Never use styrene pellets in
any shape as packaging materials. They do not adequately cushion
the instrument or prevent it from shifting in the carton. Styrene
pellets cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by
lodging in the fan.
2. Use the original packaging materials or strong shipping containers
that are made of double-walled, corrugated cardboard with 159 kg
(350 lb) bursting strength. The cartons must be both large enough
and strong enough and allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of
the instrument for packing material.
3. Protect the front panel with cardboard.
4. Surround the instrument with at least 3 to 4 inches of packing
material, or enough to prevent the instrument from moving in
the carton. If packing foam is not available, the best alternative
is SD-240 Air CapTM from Sealed Air Corporation (Commerce, CA
90001). Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet covered with 1-1/4 inch
air-lled bubbles. Use the pink Air Cap to reduce static electricity.
Wrap the instrument several times in the material to both protect
the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton.
5. Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive
tape.
6. Mark the shipping container \FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE" to
ensure careful handling.
7. Retain copies of all shipping papers.
Customer Support
15-5
Table 15-1. Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Oces

US FIELD OPERATIONS
Customer Information
Hewlett-Packard Company
19320 Pruneridge Avenue
Cupertino, CA 95014, USA
(800) 752-0900
California, Northern
Hewlett-Packard Co.
301 E. Evelyn
Mountain View, CA 94041
(415) 694-2000
California, Southern
Colorado
Georgia
Illinois
Hewlett-Packard Co.
24 Inverness Place, East
Englewood, CO 80112
(303) 649-5000
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2000 South Park Place
Atlanta, GA 30339
(404) 955-1500
New Jersey
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1421 South Manhattan Ave.
Fullerton, CA 92631
(714) 999-6700
Texas
120 W. Century Road

Paramus, NJ 07653
(201)599-5000
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5201 Tollview Drive
Rolling Meadows, IL 60008
(708) 255-9800
930 E. Campbell Rd.

Richardson, TX 75081
(214) 231-6101
EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS

Headquarters
Hewlett-Packard S.A.
150, Route du Nant-d'Avril
1217 Meyrin 2/Geneva
Switzerland
(41 22) 780.8111
Great Britain
France
Hewlett-Packard France
1 Avenue Du Canada
Zone D'Activite De Courtaboeuf
F-91947 Les Ulis Cedex
France
(33 1) 69 82 60 60
Germany
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Berner Strasse 117
6000 Frankfurt 56
West Germany
(49 69) 500006-0
Hewlett-Packard Ltd
Eskdale Road, Winnersh Triangle
Wokingham, Berkshire RF11 5DZ
England
(44 734) 696622
INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS

Headquarters
Australia
Canada
China
Japan
Singapore
Hewlett-Packard Company
3495 Deer Creek Rd.
Palo Alto, California 94304-1316
(415) 857-5027
China Hewlett-Packard Co.

38 Bei San Huan X1 Road
Shuang Yu Shu
Hai Dian District
Beijing, China
(86 1) 256-6888
Taiwan
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan
8th Floor, H-P Building
337 Fu Hsing North Road
Taipei, Taiwan
(886 2) 712-0404
15-6
Customer Support
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.

31-41 Joseph Street
Blackburn, Victoria 3130
(61 3) 895-2895
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
1-27-15 Yabe, Sagamihara
Kanagawa 229, Japan
(81 427) 59-1311
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.

17500 South Service Road
Trans-Canada Highway
Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8
Canada
(514) 697-4232
Hewlett-Packard Singapore (Pte.) Ltd
1150 Depot Road
Singapore 0410
(65) 273-7388
Customer Support
15-7
16
Key Menus
This chapter contains the key menu diagrams for the HP 8590 EM
series. Each diagram is arranged alphabetically according to the
front-panel key name.
Some of the softkeys in the key menus are model or option specic
and may not appear on your EMC analyzer.
Key Menus
16-1
16-2
Key Menus
Key Menus
16-3
16-4
Key Menus
Key Menus
16-5
16-6
Key Menus
Key Menus
16-7
16-8
Key Menus
Key Menus
16-9
16-10
Key Menus
Key Menus
16-11
16-12
Key Menus
Key Menus
16-13
16-14
Key Menus
Key Menus
16-15
17
Key Dictionary
This chapter describes functions and controls of the instrument.

The front-panel keys and softkey functions are listed alphabetically,
followed by a complete and detailed description.
Brief descriptions for service functions have also been included in this
chapter. However, for more detailed descriptions and information
about the use of each function, refer to the respective service guide
for your instrument. A listing of all service calibration and service
diagnostic functions has been provided in the following \Service
Functions" section.
All softkeys and their relationship to the front-panel keys are shown
in Chapter 16, \Key Menus".
Key Dictionary
17-1
Service Functions
Two types of functions are available for service use only:

Service calibration functions.
Service diagnostic functions.
These service functions are designed for service use only. However,
brief descriptions for each function are provided in this chapter.
Service calibration functions

Service Cal accesses the following service calibration softkeys:
CAL MXR
CAL TIMEBASE
EDIT FLATNESS
EDIT PA FLATNESS
EXECUTE TITLE
EXIT
Flatness Data
IDNUM
INIT FLT
SET ATTN ERROR
STOR PWR ON UNITS
STORE FLATNESS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service diagnostic functions

Service Diag accesses the following diagnostic softkeys:
LOCK ON OFF
+10V REF DETECTOR
010V REF DETECTOR
2v REF DETECTOR
COARSE TUNE DAC
DACS
DISPLAY CAL DATA
Display Sys Data
DROOP
FINE TUNE DAC
FM COIL DRIVE
FM GAIN
FM OFFSET
FM SPAN
FREQ DIAG
FRQ DISC NORM OFF
GND REF DETECTOR
IF GAINS
MAIN COIL DR
MAIN SPAN
MIXER BIAS DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
17-2
Key Dictionary
PRESEL DAC
QP DET ON OFF
QP GAIN ON OFF
QPD OFFSET
QPD RST ON OFF
STP GAIN ZERO
SWEEP RAMP
SWEEP TIME DAC
X FINE TUNE DAC
YTF DRIVER
YTF SPAN
YTF TUNE COARSE
YTF TUNE FINE
Key Dictionary
17-3
Key Functions
% AM
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that determines the percent of amplitude modulation of

the largest displayed signal and its two sidebands. The sidebands
are assumed to be entirely from amplitude modulation. If there are
dierences in the sideband amplitude, the larger value is used. The
measurement runs continuously, reexecuting at the end of each
sweep.
All three signal must be displayed. The frequency spacing of the
sideband signals must be the same within the span accuracy of the
measurement. All of the signals must be greater than the peak
excursion above the threshold. The amplitude scale may be either
linear or logarithmic.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
AUXnUSER5 1 of 3 2 of 3 % AM
LOCK
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ON OFF

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Softkey that turns o phase locking on the instrument. The counter

is turned o so frequency correction is no longer done at the start of
each sweep. Turning the phase locking o increases measurement
speed, but it decreases frequency accuracy. This is a service
diagnostic function and is for service use.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
A/m
More 1 . . .
More 4
33333333333333333333333
Softkey that selects A/m as the transducer conversion units for the
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
SETUP5 1 of 4 Factors
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Antenna
Units
33333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
A/m
Related Programming Command

XUNITS
17-4
Key Dictionary
LOCK
ON OFF
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
V/m
Softkey that selects V/m as the transducer conversion units for the
Key Path
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

Antenna
Units
33333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
V/m
XUNITS
0-2.9 Gz
BAND 0
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

HP 8593EM, 8595EM, or 8596EM only.
Softkey that locks onto harmonic Band 0. Once 0-2.9 Gz BAND 0

has been pressed, only frequencies and spans that fall within this
frequency band may be entered. The span is reduced automatically to
accommodate a center frequency specied near the end of the band
range.
If a start frequency is entered that is outside of the current band
boundaries, it will be set to the nearest band edge instead. If a start
frequency that is greater than the current stop frequency is entered,
the (possibly modied) start frequency is used for both the start and
the stop frequency; therefore, the span will be set to zero. If the start
and stop frequencies specify too large a span, they will be modied.
If a stop frequency is entered that is outside of the current band
boundaries, it will be set to the nearest band edge instead. If a stop
frequency that is less than the current start frequency is entered, the
(possibly modied) stop frequency will be used for both the start and
stop frequency; therefore, the span will be set to zero.
The span will be modied if necessary to get the center frequency
specied without crossing the band edges. The span will be limited
as necessary to keep the start and stop frequencies within the band
edges without changing the center frequency. The maximum span
allowed is 2.904 GHz.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Band
0-2.9 Gz
FREQUENCY5 1 of 2 Lock BAND 0
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

HNLOCK
Key Dictionary
17-5
2.75-6.5
BAND 1

Softkey that locks onto harmonic band 1. Harmonic band 1 is

preselected and has a specied tuning range of 2.75 GHz to 6.5 GHz.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4FREQUENCY5 1 of 2
Band
Lock
2.75-6.5
BAND 1
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

HNLOCK
2v REF
DETECTOR

Softkey that displays the output of the 2 V reference produced on the

A16 processor/video assembly as a horizontal line at the top graticule.
This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
3 dB
POINTS

More 1
2v REF
DETECTOR
33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that initiates an automatic 3 dB bandwidth measurement on

the highest peak displayed on screen.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
3 dB
AUX/USER5 1 of 3 POINTS
3rd ORD
MEAS
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Softkey that initiates an automatic frequency and amplitude

measurement on a third-order product. At least one of the
fundamental tones and the third-order product must be displayed on
the screen.
Key Path
More
More
3rd ORD
AUX/USER5 1 of 3 2 of 3 MEAS
17-6
Key Dictionary
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
6.0-12.8
BAND 2

HP 8593EM or 8596EM only.

preselected and has a specied tuning range of 6.0 to 12.8 GHz.
Key Path
More
4FREQUENCY5 1 of 2
Band
Lock
6.0-12.8
BAND 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

HNLOCK
6 dB
POINTS

Softkey that initiates an automatic 6 dB bandwidth measurement on

the highest peak displayed on the screen.
Key Path
More
1 of 3
AUX/USER
9 kHz
0150 kHz
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
6 dB
POINTS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Softkey that presets the instrument to the predened settings:

Start frequency:
Stop frequency:
I.F. bandwidth:
Reference level:
Attenuation:
9 kHz
150 kHz
200 Hz
70 dBV
10 dB
Key Path
9 kHz
SETUP5 0150 kHz
333333333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-7
9 kHz
EMI BW

Softkey that allows a 6 dB intermediate frequency bandwidth of

9 kHz. This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic
interference (EMI) measurements.
Key Path
9 kHz
BW5 EMI BW
33333333333333333333333

IFBW, RB
+10V REF
DETECTOR

Softkey that displays the output of the +10 V reference from the
analog interface circuit board as a horizontal line at the top of the
graticule. This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use
only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
-10V REF
DETECTOR

More 1 . . .
More 3
+10V REF
DETECTOR
33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that displays the output of the 010 V reference from the
analog circuit board as a horizontal line at the bottom graticule. This
is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
12.4-19
BAND 3

More 1 . . .
-10V REF
DETECTOR
33333333333333333333333333333

preselected and has a specied tuning range of 12.4 to 19 GHz.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Band
12.4-19
FREQUENCY5 1 of 2 Lock BAND 31
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

HNLOCK
Key Dictionary
More 3
HP 8593EM only.
Key Path
17-8
19.1-22
BAND 4

HP 8593EM only.

preselected and has a specied tuning range of 19.1 to 22 GHz.
Key Path
More
4FREQUENCY5 1 of 2
Band
Lock
19.1-22
BAND 4
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

HNLOCK
30 MHz
0300 MHz
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Softkey that presets the EMC analyzer to the predened settings:

Start frequency:
Stop frequency:
I.F. bandwidth:
Reference level:
Attenuation:
30 MHz
300 MHz
120 kHz
80 dBV
10 dB
Key Path
30 MHz
SETUP5 0300 MHz
99% PWR
BW

333333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that initiates an automatic measurement of the 99% power

bandwidth of the largest signal displayed on the screen.
Key Path
More
More
99% PWR
AUX/USER5 1 of 3 2 of 3 BW
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

PWRBW
Key Dictionary
17-9
120 kHz
EMI BW

Softkey that allows a 6 dB intermeditate frequency bandwidth of

120 kHz. This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic
Key Path
120 kHz
BW5 EMI BW
33333333333333333333333333

IFBW, RB
150 kHz
030 MHz
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Start frequency:
Stop frequency:
I.F. bandwidth:
Reference level:
Attenuation:
150 kHz
30 MHz
9 kHz
75 dBV
10 dB
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SETUP5
200 Hz
EMI BW

150 kHz
030 MHz
333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that allows a 6 dB intermeditate frequency bandwidth of

200 Hz. This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic
Key Path
BW5
200 Hz
EMI BW
33333333333333333333333

IFBW, RB
17-10
Key Dictionary
200 MHz
01 GHz

Start frequency:
Stop frequency:
I.F. bandwidth:
Reference level:
Attenuation:
200 MHz
1 GHz
120 kHz
80 dBV
10 dB
Key Path
200 MHz
SETUP5 01 GHz
A <--> B
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that exchanges the contents of the trace A register with the
trace B register and puts trace A in view mode.
Key Path
More
More
TRACE5 1 of 4 2 of 4
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
A <--> B
AXB
Key Dictionary
17-11
A0B ! A
ON OFF
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Softkey that when ON is underlined, subtracts the data in trace B

from the measured data in trace A. A minus sign (0) appears between
the trace A status and the trace B status in the screen annotation
while the function is active.
To deactivate this function, press A 0 B ! A ON OFF so that OFF
is underlined. The A0B ! A and B0DL ! B functions are math
functions. Unlike operations on dBm units, math functions operate
on measurement units. Measurement units are used to format trace
data for data within the graticule limits. The displayed amplitude of
each element falls on one of 8000 vertical points with the value of
8000 being equal to the reference level. For log scale data, each point
is equal to 0.01 dB. The peak of a signal equal to 010 dBm, or one
division below the reference level, is equal to 7000 measurement units
(8000 0 1000 = 7000). In linear mode, each point has a resolution of
[reference level in volts/8000].
For example, if trace A contains amplitude values of 010 dBm and
trace B contains amplitude values of 040 dBm, the result of the
A 0 B ! A function would be 010.004 dBm if dBm units were used.
Since measurement units are used for the A 0 B ! A function, the
result of A 0 B ! A is 050 dBm (010 dBm = 7000 measurement
units, 040 dBm = 4000 measurement units; the result is 3000
measurement units, which is equal to 050 dBm).
Key Path
A0B
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
TRACE5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

AMB
! C
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that copies trace A into trace C.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
TRACE5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 A ! C
17-12
Key Dictionary
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
ABCDEF
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that accesses the softkey menu for selecting screen title or
prex characters A through F.
Key Access
CAL5, 4CONFIG5, 4DISPLAY5, 4SAVE/RECALL5, or 4SETUP5

TITLE, PREFX
Abort
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that exits the Auto Measure function or discontinues output.
Key Path
More
More
AUTO-
TEST5 1 of 3 2 of 3 MEASURE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Abort
OUTPUT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
OUTPUT5 REPORT Abort
ADD TO
LIST

33333333333333333333333
Not available in Spectrum Analyzer mode.
Softkey that adds a signal to the internal signal list. The signal added
is either for the last MEASURE AT MKR result or the measurement at
the marker position after a stepped measurement.
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode only.
ADD TO
TEST5 LIST
33333333333333333333333
More
More
4TEST5 1 of 3 2 of 3
MEAS
STEPPED
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STOP
ADD TO
LIST
33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
MEAS
TEST5 1 of 3 2 of 3 STEPPED
FREQ
STEP
ADD TO
LIST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

SIGADD
Key Dictionary
17-13
ALC
INT EXT

HP 8593EM, 8594EM, 8595EM, or 8596EM with Option 010 only.
Softkey that activates internal (INT) leveling or external (EXT)

leveling.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
AUX/USER5
More
Track Gen 1 of 2
ALC
INT EXT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SRCALC
ALC MTR
INT XTAL

HP 8591EM with Option 010 only.
Softkey that activates the automatic leveling control (ALC) function

for internal (INT) leveling or external (XTAL or MTR) leveling. The
external leveling input (located on the rear panel of the spectrum
analyzer) can be used with a power meter or crystal that has a
positive or negative voltage output. See HP 8590 EM Series EMC
Analyzer Verication Guide for the leveling input characteristics.
External leveling increases the amplitude accuracy by improving the
eective source match. The meter (MTR) position narrows ALC loop
bandwidth so a power meter can be used.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Track
AUX/USER5 Gen
ALC
TEST
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

More
1 of 2
ALC MTR
INT XTAL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that breaks the leveling loop of the automatic leveling control
in the tracking generator. This is a service diagnostic function and is
for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
17-14
Key Dictionary
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DACS
ALL DLP
! CARD

Softkey that saves all downloadable programs and key denitions that
are in analyzer memory onto the memory card.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
More
ALL DLP
SAVE/RECALL5 Card 1 of 3 ! CARD
Amp Cor
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that stores or recalls the current user amplitude-correction

factors on the memory card and allows editing.
Key Path
More
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 Amp Cor
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AMPCOR
AMP COR
ON OFF
Softkey that turns the current amplitude-correction factors on or o.

Key Path
AMP COR
More
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 Amp Cor ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
33333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
Key Dictionary
17-15
AMPL SCL
LOG LIN

Softkey that species whether the limit line is derived from a

logarithmic or linear amplitude axis. Underline LIN to set the
amplitude axis to linear or LOG to set the amplitude axis to
logarithmic.
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
DISPLAY5
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Select
Axis
AMPL SCL
LOG LIN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
AMPL SCL
LOG LIN
Select
Type
...
EDIT
LIMIT
Select
Type
Select
Axis
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
33333333333333333333333333333
Spectrum Analyzer mode.

DISPLAY
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit . . .
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Select
Type
Limit
Lines
AMPL SCL
LOG LIN
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
AMPL SCL
LOG LIN
Select
Axis
Edit
Limit . . .
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Select
Type
Select
Axis
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
33333333333333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Either Limit 1 or Limit 2 can be used to complete the key path.
y Any of the following can be used to complete the key path:

EDIT UPPER , EDIT LOWER , EDIT UP/LOW , or EDIT MID/DELT .

LIMIAMPSCL
4AMPLITUDE5
17-16
Key Dictionary
Hardkey that activates the reference level function and accesses the
amplitude menu. The softkeys accessed when you press 4AMPLITUDE5
change reference level, input attenuation, vertical scale, mixer level,
amplitude units, input impedance, and amplitude oset. Pressing
4AMPLITUDE5 accesses the preselector peaking and preselector default
functions also.
Amptd
Units

Softkey that accesses a menu to select the desired amplitude units.

Amplitude units can be selected by pressing, dBm , dBmV , dBV ,
Volts , or Watts .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Key Path
More
Amptd
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 Units
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AUNITS
ANALOG+
ON OFF

Does not operate if SWEEP LOG is selected. Requires Option 101 or

301.
Softkey that turns on the analog+ display mode.
Key Path
ANALOG+
DISPLAY5 ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333

ANLGPLUS
ANALYZER
ADDRESS

Softkey changes to BAUD RATE for Option 043.
Softkey that allows you to set the HP-IB address of the instrument.
The address is set to 18 by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
CONFIG5 1 of 3
ANALYZER
ADDRESS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-17
ANNOTATN
ON OFF

As accessed from 4DISPLAY5.
Softkey that turns the screen annotation on or o. However, softkey

annotation will remain on the screen. The screen annotation may not
be required for prints or plots, or during remote operation. Refer to
the HOLD softkey description regarding softkey annotation.
As accessed from 4OUTPUT5.
Softkey that turns on or o the generation of a tabular listing of
the screen annotation. The listing will be sent to the printer when
OUTPUT REPORT is executed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Key Path
More
ANNOTATN
DISPLAY5 1 of 2 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
OUTPUT5
Define
Report
ANNOTATN
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
ANNOT (Display version)
ANTENNA
! CARD

Softkey that saves the current antenna amplitude-correction factors

to a card. To save antenna data press, ANTENNA ! CARD . REGISTER
# and PREFIX= are displayed on the screen. Use the data keys to
enter the desired register number then press 4ENTER5. The message
Saving to :FILENAME is displayed. The antenna data has now been
saved to a card.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
ANTENNA
SAVE/RECALL5 Card ! CARD
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

STOR
17-18
Key Dictionary
Antenna
Factors

Softkey that accesses a menu to turn on, recall, edit, or save antenna
amplitude-correction factors. Antenna factors are conversion factors
relating eld strength to measured voltage.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
ANTENNA
ON OFF
Softkey that turns on or o antenna amplitude-correction factors.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
ANTENNA
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
AMPCOR
Antenna
Units

Available only when EDIT ANTENNA is selected.
Softkey that accesses a menu of the transducer conversion units

for the antenna-correction factors. This species the units of the
physical attribute to which an antenna actually responds and which
will be indicated on the display for reference level, display line level,
threshold level, and marker readouts.
Key Path
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

Antenna
Units
33333333333333333333333333

XUNITS
Key Dictionary
17-19
APND
CAT ITEM

Softkey that starts the DLP editor function and allows the highlighted
item from the catalog of instrument memory to be added to the
end of the item that is currently in the DLP editor memory of the
instrument. If the item to be added will not t in the available
memory space, it will not be appended.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
...
Editor
SAVE/RECALL5
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
33333333333333333333333333333
Recall
Internal
APND
CAT ITEM
...
Editor
APND
CAT ITEM
33333333333333333333333333333
Any of the following can be used to complete the key path:

CATALOG ALL , CATALOG PREFIX , or CATALOG VARIABLS .
ATTEN
AUTO MAN

Softkey that sets the input attenuation in 10 dB increments. The

instrument input attenuator, which is normally coupled (linked) to
the reference level control, reduces the power level of the input
signal at the input mixer. The attenuator is recoupled when AUTO is
underlined.
Key Path
ATTEN
AMPLITUDE5 AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333
AUTO COUPLE5
CAUTION
ATTEN
AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333
To prevent damage to the input mixer, the power level at the input
mixer must not exceed +30 dBm. To prevent signal compression,
power at the input to the input mixer must be kept below
010 dBm.
To protect the mixer from possible damage, 0 dB RF attenuation (no
input power reduction to the mixer) can be selected only from the
data keys.

AT
17-20
Key Dictionary
AUTO
ALL

Softkey that couples the following functions:

intermeditate frequency bandwidth
average video bandwidth
attenuation
sweep time
center-frequency step
average video bandwidth
average-video-bandwidth to intermediate-frequency-bandwidth
ratio.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
AUTO COUPLE5
AUTO
ALL
33333333333333333
AUTO
AUTO CAL
ON OFF

Softkey that turns the automatic calibration feature of the EMC

analyzer on or o.
Key Path
Cal At
CAL5 Time
AUTO CAL
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

AUTOCAL
Key Dictionary
17-21
4AUTO COUPLE5
Hardkey that accesses the softkey menu of functions that can be

coupled. (Coupled functions are functions that are linked: if one
function is changed, the other function is changed.) The functions
that can be auto-coupled are listed below:
Intermediate frequency bandwidth couples to span center
frequency in EMC analyzer mode and to span in spectrum analyzer
mode.
Average video bandwidth couples to intermeditate frequency
bandwidth when the instrument has a average-video-bandwidth to
intermediate-frequency-bandwidth ratio of 0.3.
Sweep time couples to span, intermeditate frequency bandwidth,
and average video bandwidth.
RF attenuation couples to reference level.
Center frequency step size couples to 10% of span.
During normal operation, the sweep time, intermeditate frequency
bandwidth, and average video bandwidth are coupled to yield
optimum performance. If any of these functions becomes uncoupled
(that is, is manually set), a \#" will appear next to the screen
annotation representing the function on the screen.
If one or more function(s) is manually set so that the amplitude or
frequency becomes uncalibrated, MEAS UNCAL appears on the top
right-side of the graticule.
Recouple a single function by pressing the function label (to activate
the function), and pressing the function again so that AUTO is
underlined.
Pressing 4AUTO COUPLE5, AUTO ALL couples all coupled functions
listed.
AUTOMEASURE

Softkey that nds all signals on the display and makes an EMI
measurement using specied detectors. Each signal is tuned to in
sequence, the span is reduced in steps to zero span, and a maximum
of three detectors are measured. The detectors used are selected
using DETECTOR PK QP AV . Measurement time is determined by
selecting AV DWELL TIME , PK DWELL TIME , or QP DWELL TIME .
After each signal is measured it is added to the signal list. If a limit
margin is on, only signals above the margin are measured and added
to the list.
Key Path
More
More
AUTO-
TEST5 1 of 3 2 of 3 MEASURE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

MEASALLSIGS
17-22
Key Dictionary
AUTOEXEC
ON OFF

Softkey that enables and disables the automatic loading and execution
of the le "eAUTOEXEC". When enabled, the instrument, upon a
power-up sequence, will search the card for an "eAUTOEXEC" le and
if found will load and execute it.
Key Path
More
More
More
AUTOEXEC
SETUP5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

AUTOEXEC
AUTORANG
ON OFF

Softkey that turns the current state of the auto-range function on

or o. When on, the auto-range function automatically adjusts RF
attenuation or reference level (IF step-gain) in response to either an
IF or RF overload condition detected during the previous sweep.
Auto range requires overload detection capability. IF overload
detection is standard in the HP 8590 EM Series (except Option 703).
For RF overload detection, an HP 85420E Option 1EM RF lter section
is required. The lter section can not be set to bypass.
When on, auto range automatically enables overload detection. When
disabled, auto range does not disable over load detection.
Key Path
AUTORANG
AMPLITUDE5 ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333
More
More
AUTORANG
SETUP5 1 of 4 2 of 4 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

ARNG
AUX B
Softkey that displays the voltage level present at an unused input

to the test point MUX circuitry located on the A7 analog interface
assembly. This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use
only.
Key Path
More
More
1 of 4 2 of 4
CAL
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
AUX B
Key Dictionary
17-23
Aux Conn
Control

Not available when used with HP 85420E Option 1EM RF lter

section.
Softkey that accesses the menu used to control the auxiliary

outputs and input. The auxiliary outputs are controlled by pressing
CNTL A 0 1 , CNTL B 0 1 , CNTL C 0 1 , and CNTL D 0 1 . The
status of the auxiliary input (control line I), can be displayed on the
screen with DISPLAY CNTL I .
Key Path
Aux Conn
AUX/USER5 Control
4AUX/USER5
33333333333333333333333333333
Hardkey that accesses the User Menu and the menu containing
FFT MEAS , 3 dB POINTS , 6 dB POINTS , 99% PWR PW , % AM ,
3rd ORD MEAS , DELTA MEAS , and PK-PK MEAS . If no keys have
been dened in the user menu, No User Menu is displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AV DWELL
TIME

Softkey that sets the measurement time when the average detector
is measured. This key is used in conjunction with MEASURE AT MKR ,
Re-measure , AUTO-MEASURE , and MEAS STEPPED .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Measure
Detector
AV DWELL
TIME
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

MEASTIMEAVG
17-24
Key Dictionary
AVG BW
AUTO MAN

Softkey that species the averaging bandwidth, which is a

post-detection, low-pass lter. The average video bandwidth is
normally coupled to the intermediate frequency bandwidth. Selecting
MAN uncouples the average video bandwidth from intermediate
frequency bandwidth (it does nothing to the sweeptime and span
coupling). Selecting AUTO recouples average video bandwidth to the
intermediate frequency bandwidth.
Frequency values other than the values in the 1, 3, 10 sequence are
rounded to the nearest permissible value.
Key Path
AUTO COUPLE5
AVG BW
AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333
AVG BW
BW5 AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333

AVBW, VB
AVG
ON OFF

Not available with Option 703.
Softkey that toggles the average detector on and o. When on,

the instrument is placed in linear amplitude detection, the average
detector is turned on, and the system settings are optimized to
accurately measure average amplitude.
Key Path
AVG
DET5 ON OFF
33333333333333333333333

SWITCHAVG, SWITCHQPD
Key Dictionary
17-25
AV/IF
BW RATIO

Softkey that determines the automatic setting of average video

bandwidth by multiplying the parameter by the intermeditate
frequency bandwidth. Ratio values other than the values in the 1, 3,
10 sequence are rounded to the nearest permissible value.
Key Path
More
AV/IF
BW5 1 of 2 BW RATIO
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

VBR
! C
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that moves trace B into trace C, then stops updating trace C
by placing it in the view mode. Trace B is unchanged by BTC. Trace B
must contain a complete sweep of measurement information.
Key Path
More
More
More
TRACE5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 B ! C
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

BTC
B <--> C
Softkey that exchanges the contents of trace B with trace C and puts
trace B in view mode.
Key Path
More
More
More
4TRACE5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
B <--> C

BXC
17-26
Key Dictionary
B0DL
! B
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that subtracts the display line from trace B and places the
result in trace B. The B0DL ! B function is a math operation. Refer
to the A0B ! A ON OFF softkey description for information about
math operations.
Key Path
More
More
More
4TRACE5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
B0DL
BML
Band
Lock
Softkey that accesses the harmonic band menu and the band lock
function. Selecting a harmonic band causes the instrument to lock
onto the specied harmonic band and automatically select the settings
shown in Table 17-1.

Table 17-1.
Center Frequency and Span Settings for Harmonic Bands
Softkey
Center
Frequency
Span
0-2.9 Gz BAND 0
1.45 GHz
2.865 GHz
4.638 GHz
3.6 GHz
2.75-6.5 BAND 1
6.0-12.8 BAND 2 *
9.4 GHz
6.8 GHz
12.4-19.4 BAND 3 y
15.9 GHz
7 GHz
20.55 GHz
2.9 GHz
19.1-22 BAND 4 y
* Not available with the HP 8595EM.
y Not available with the HP 8595EM or HP 8596EM.
Description
Low-pass ltered, rst harmonic mixing.
Preselected, rst harmonic mixing.
Preselected, second harmonic mixing.
Preselected, third harmonic mixing.
Preselected, fourth harmonic mixing.
BND LOCK ON OFF locks the instrument onto a selected frequency

band (local oscillator harmonic number). When only one frequency
band is being swept the corresponding softkey will be underlined,
even if band lock is o.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4FREQUENCY5 1 of 2
Band
Lock
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333

HNLOCK
Key Dictionary
17-27
BAUD
RATE
Softkey that allows you to set the data transmission speed.

Note
The RS-232 interface is only available with Option 043.
Key Path
More
BAUD
RATE
CONFIG5 1 of 3
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333
BAUDRATE
BINARY
SPAN

HP 8591EM only.
Softkey that displays the output of the span DAC that is located on
the A7 analog interface assembly. This is a service diagnostic function
and is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
BLANK A
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1
More 2
Softkey that stores the amplitude data for trace A and removes it
from the screen. The trace A register will not be updated as the
instrument sweeps.
TRACE5 BLANK A
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE
LIN GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333
BLANK A
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
SAVE
LOG GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333

BLANK
Key Dictionary
33333333333333333333333
Changes to B or C when TRACE B or C is selected, respectively.
Key Path
17-28
BINARY
SPAN
BLANK A
BLANK B
Softkey that stores the amplitude data for trace B and removes it
from the screen. The trace B register will not be updated as the
instrument sweeps.
Key Path
TRACE
TRACE5 A B C B BLANK B
33333333333333333333

BLANK
BLANK C
Softkey that stores the amplitude data for trace C and removes it
from the screen. The trace C register will not be updated as the
instrument sweeps.
Key Path
TRACE
TRACE5 A B C C BLANK C
33333333333333333333
BLANK
BLANK
CARD
Softkey that deletes all the les from the memory card.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4CONFIG5 1 of 3
Card
Config
BLANK
CARD
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

FORMAT
Key Dictionary
17-29
BND LOCK
ON OFF

Note
Softkey that when ON is underlined, the instrument is locked to the

lowest frequency band (local oscillator harmonic number) containing
the correct center frequency. Start and stop frequencies will be
changed if necessary. Executing a band lock limits the tuning range to
the selected harmonic number. Selecting the softkeys for either band
0 or band 1 turns on the band lock function automatically.
If the start frequency is well within a lower band, turning band lock
o will result in a multiband sweep. If a specic band had been
selected prior to changing to a multiband sweep, the softkey label of
the selected band will no longer be underlined indicating that it is not
selected. Sweep of a single band is indicated if the softkey label of
the selected band is underlined.
Before changing the frequency range to another harmonic band,
unlock the band by pressing BND LOCK ON OFF so that OFF is
underlined.
Key Path
More
4FREQUENCY5 1 of 2
Band
Lock
BND LOCK
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

HNLOCK, HNUNLK
4BW5
Hardkey that activates the intermediate frequency bandwidth

function and accesses the softkeys that control the bandwidth
functions: 120 kHz EMI BW , 9 kHz EMI BW , 200 Hz EMI BW ,
IF BW AUTO MAN , AVG BW AUTO MAN , AV/IF BW RATIO , and
VID AVG ON OFF . (Also refer to the IF BW AUTO MAN softkey
description.)
17-30
Key Dictionary
CABLE
! CARD
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Softkey that saves cable amplitude-correction data to a card. To

save cable data press, CABLE ! CARD . REGISTER # and PREFIX=
are displayed on the screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired
register number then press 4ENTER5. The message Saving to
:FILENAME is displayed. The cable data has now been saved to a card.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save More
Card 1 of 3
CABLE
! CARD
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333
STOR
Cable
Factors

Softkey that accesses a menu to turn on, recall, edit, or save cable
amplitude-correction factors. Cable factors are conversion factors
used to correct for cable insertion loss.
Key Path
More
Correctn
Cable
Factors
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
CABLE
ON OFF
Softkey that turns on or o cable amplitude correction factors.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Cable
Factors
CABLE
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
4CAL5
Hardkey that accesses menus used for the self-calibration,

service-diagnostics, and service-calibration functions.
Key Dictionary
17-31
CAL
AMPTD
Softkey that initiates the amplitude correction routine.

Key Path
CAL
CAL5 AMPTD
33333333333333333333

CAL
Cal
At Time

Softkey that accesses a menu to set the time of an automatic

calibration.
Key Path
Cal
CAL5 At Time
33333333333333333333333333

CAL
CAL
CISPR BW

Softkey that performs the portion of the amplitude calibration where

the CISPR 6 dB bandwidths are calibrated.
Key Path
More
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
CAL
CISPR BW
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

CAL
CAL
FETCH

Softkey that retrieves stored self-calibration correction factors from

the last calibration saved using CAL STORE .
Key Path
More
CAL5 1 of 4
CAL
FETCH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

CAL
17-32
Key Dictionary
CAL
FREQ
Softkey that initiates the frequency correction routine.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
CAL
CAL5 FREQ
33333333333333333

CAL
CAL FREQ
& AMPTD
Softkey that initiates frequency and amplitude correction routines.

Key Path
CAL FREQ
CAL5 & AMPTD
33333333333333333333333333333
CAL
CAL
MXR
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

HP 8593M, 8595EM, or 8596EM only.
Softkey that adjusts the bias-current DAC setting for the optimum
displayed-signal amplitude using the 300 MHz CAL OUT signal. This is
a service calibration function and is for service use only.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Cal
CAL
MXR
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333

CAL
Key Dictionary
17-33
CAL
STORE

Softkey that stores the correction factors from the last calibration.
The stored correction factors are automatically retrieved when the
instrument is turned on. If correction factors are not stored, they
will be retained only until the instrument is turned o. Refer to the
description for the CAL FETCH softkey.
Key Path
CAL
CAL5 STORE
33333333333333333333

CAL
CAL
TIMEBASE

Softkey that changes the setting of the 10 MHz reference (standard

timebase) DAC that is located on the A25 counter lock assembly. This
is a service calibration function and is for service use only.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Cal
CAL
TIMEBASE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
CAL
TRK GEN

Option 010 only.
Softkey that performs absolute amplitude, and vernier self-calibration

routines. The instrument should be amplitude calibrated by pressing
CAL AMPTD prior to using the CAL TRK GEN function. Connect the
tracking generator output to the instrument input before pressing
CAL TRK GEN .
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
CAL
TRK GEN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

CAL
17-34
Key Dictionary
CAL
YTF
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Softkey that generates the best slope and oset adjustment to

calibrate the YIG-tuned lter (YTF) for each harmonic band. The
self-calibration routine, CAL ALL should be performed before running
the CAL YTF routine.
For the HP 8593EM and HP 8596EM, connect the COMB OUT to INPUT
50
prior to pressing CAL YTF . For the HP 8595EM, connect CAL OUT
to INPUT 50
prior to pressing CAL YTF .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
CAL
YTF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333
CAL
Card
Config

Softkey that accesses a menu to format a card in LIF format.

Card Config also accesses the Catalog Card and Protect functions.
Key Path
More
CONFIG5 1 of 3
CATALOG
ALL

Card
Config
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Softkey that catalogs all the programs and variables stored in

instrument memory. Press CATALOG REGISTER to catalog states,
traces, and limit-line tables, saved in instrument memory.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
CATALOG
ALL
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Internal
Catalog
Internal
CATALOG
ALL
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

CAT
Key Dictionary
17-35
CATALOG
CARD

Softkey that catalogs the card. Existing data on the card will be
displayed if the card has been formatted. If the card has not been
formatted, the following message will be displayed:
When cataloging a card, you can specify the type of information to be
cataloged.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4CONFIG5 1 of 3
Card
Config
CATALOG
CARD
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

Save
CATALOG
SAVE/RECALL5 Card CARD
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Card
CATALOG
CARD
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

CAT
Catalog
Internal

Softkey that accesses a menu of cataloging functions for

instrument memory: CATALOG ALL , CATALOG REGISTER ,
CATALOG VARIABLS , and CATALOG PREFIX . Each catalog function
displays catalog information. The catalog contains information about
the data stored in internal memory. Refer to Figure 17-1.
Figure 17-1. Internal memory catalog information.
17-36
Key Dictionary
The screen includes the following information:

Name of the catalog source.
Bytes of internal memory used.
Total bytes of internal memory available.
Bytes used by item.
Name of item.
Unlike saving to the card, data is saved as an item in internal memory.
Use the step keys or knob to view dierent sections of the directory,
then press LOAD FILE to select a le. The selected le is highlighted
in inverse video.
Each of the catalog softkey functions access the menu that has the
DELETE FILE function. Use DELETE FILE to delete the item from
internal memory.
Pressing CATALOG REGISTER allows access to the LOAD FILE
function. Use LOAD FILE to load a state or trace from internal
memory. Do not use LOAD FILE to load limit-line table and
amplitude-correction factor items.
Also refer to the CATALOG ALL and CATALOG VARIABLS softkey
descriptions.
Key Path
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Recall
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

CAT
Key Dictionary
17-37
CATALOG
PREFIX

Softkey that catalogs all of the saved data, that has the specied
prex, that is either on the card or in internal memory. The entire
prex does not have to be specied. For example, if you want to
catalog all the les beginning with the prex S, specify S as the prex,
using the change prex function, then select CATALOG PREFIX .
Prexed items can be saved in internal memory by either loading in
from a card or using remote programming commands to dene them.
Key Path
Save
Catalog
SAVE/RECALL5 Internal Internal
CATALOG
PREFIX
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

Recall
Catalog
CATALOG
PREFIX
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save More
More
Card 1 of 3 2 of 3
CATALOG
PREFIX
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
CATALOG
REGISTER

More
More
1 of 3 2 of 3
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that displays the status of state and trace registers in internal
memory. States 1 through 8 are displayed with the center frequency
(denoted by CF) and span (denoted by SP). The status of trace
registers 0 to the maximum number of traces is displayed also. If
a trace, limit-line table, or amplitude correction factors have been
saved in the trace register, the screen title (denoted by \TR:") is
displayed, otherwise UNUSED is displayed. If the screen title length
allows, or if no title is saved with the trace, the time and date are
displayed. To load the contents of the state or trace register into
internal memory, use the knob or step keys to select the register and
press LOAD FILE . The DELETE FILE key can be used to delete a
state or trace register from internal memory.
Note
CATALOG
PREFIX
Do not use LOAD FILE to load the contents of a trace register

containing limit-line tables or amplitude-correction factors.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
CATALOG
REGISTER
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

Recall
Catalog
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Related Programming Commands

CAT
17-38
Key Dictionary
CATALOG
REGISTER
CATALOG
VARIABLS

Note
Softkey that catalogs all of the variables saved in internal

memory. Variables can be saved in internal memory by loading in a
downloadable program from the card or dening a function using
remote programming commands (VARDEF or TRDEF).
Variables beginning with an underscore are used by the instrument
rmware. Modifying these is not recommended and may give
unexpected results.
Key Path
Save
Catalog
Internal
CATALOG
VARIABLS
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal
CATALOG
VARIABLS
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

CAT
CENTER
FREQ

Softkey that activates the center-frequency function to allow the

selection of frequency that will be at the center of the screen.
Key Path
CENTER
FREQUENCY5 FREQ
33333333333333333333333

CF
Key Dictionary
17-39
CF STEP
AUTO MAN

Softkey that changes the step size for the center frequency function.
Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function
is activated, the step keys change center frequency by the step-size
value. The step size function is useful for nding harmonics and
sidebands beyond the current frequency span of the instrument.
When auto-coupled, the center frequency step size is set to one
graticule (10 percent of the span).
Key Path
CF STEP
AUTO COUPLE5 AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333
FREQUENCY5
CF STEP
AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333
SS
17-40
Key Dictionary
Change
Prefix

Softkey that allows you to enter a prex that can be used for saving
and recalling data to and from the card, and for cataloging by
the prex. The prex can be from one to seven characters long.
The longer the prex, the shorter the register number must be.
The total length of the prex and register number cannot exceed
eight characters. The prex can be any character; however, the
underscore should not be the rst character of the prex. Pressing
Change Prefix accesses a menu containing the letters of the
alphabet, the underscore symbol ( ), the number symbol (#), a space,
and the clear function. To select a character, press the softkey that
displays the group of characters that contains the desired character.
The softkey menu changes to allow you to select an individual
character. If you make a mistake, press 4BK SP5 to space back over the
incorrect character. Additional characters are available by pressing
More 1 of 2 . Numbers may be selected with the data keys.
A prex can be cleared with the clear function. Press or 4DISPLAY5,
More 1 of 2 or 4CONFIG5, Change Prefix , YZ_# Spc Clear ,
Clear to clear the current prex. The current prex is blanked by
pressing DEFAULT CONFIG .
Key Path
Change
CONFIG5 Prefix
33333333333333333333333
More
1 of 2
DISPLAY
Change
Prefix
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Change
SAVE/RECALL5 Prefix
33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
Catalog
Internal
Change
Prefix
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Recall
Catalog
Internal
Change
Prefix
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

PREFX
Key Dictionary
17-41
Change
Title

Softkey that allows you to write a 53-character screen title across

the top of the screen. Pressing Change Title accesses the
softkey menus that contain the available characters and symbols. A
programming command can be entered in the screen title area. It can
then be executed from the front panel by pressing EXECUTE TITLE .
The screen title will remain on the screen until either
Change Title is pressed again or a trace is recalled that was saved
with a screen title. A screen title can also be cleared by using the
clear function. Press 4DISPLAY5, Change Title , YZ_# Spc Clear ,
Clear to clear the current screen title.
Pressing Change Title accesses a menu containing the letters

of the alphabet, the underscore symbol ( ), the number symbol
(#), a space, and the Clear softkey. To select a character, press
the softkey that displays the group of characters that contains the
desired character. The softkey menu changes to allow you to select
an individual character. If you make a mistake, press 4BK SP5 to space
back over the incorrect character. Additional characters are available
by pressing More 1 of 2 . Numbers may be selected by using the
data keys.
Key Path
More
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Amp Cor
Change
Title
33333333333333333333333
Change
DISPLAY5 Title
33333333333333333333333

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Change
Title
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Limit
Change
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Title
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

TITLE
CLEAR
ANNOTATN
Softkey that clears the annotation editor of all text.

Key Path
EDIT
OUTPUT5 ANNOTATN
17-42
Key Dictionary
CLEAR
ANNOTATN
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
CLEAR
MARK
Softkey that clears the mark from a signal on the signal list.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Signal
Marking
CLEAR
MARK
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

SIGUNMARK
Key Dictionary
17-43
CLEAR
WRITE A

Softkey that erases any data previously stored in trace A and

continuously displays any signals during the sweep of the instrument.
This function is activated at power on and by pressing 4PRESET5.
Changing the trace mode of trace C to clear write or minimum hold
can change the trace mode of trace A. If trace A is in clear-write
mode or maximum-hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write
or minimum hold, the trace mode of trace A is changed to store blank.
The following table shows the trace mode of trace A before and after
changing trace C to clear-write or minimum-hold trace mode.
Trace Mode of Trace A Trace Mode of Trace A
After
Before
Clear write
Maximum hold
View
Store blank
Store blank
View
Changing the trace mode of trace A to clear write or maximum hold

can change the trace mode of trace C. If trace C is in clear-write mode
when trace A is changed to clear write or minimum hold, the trace
mode of trace C is changed to minimum hold.
Trace Mode of Trace C Trace Mode of Trace C
Before
After
Clear write
Minimum hold
View
Minimum hold
Minimum hold
View
Key Path
TRACE5
CLEAR
WRITE A
33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
SAVE
LIN GRAPH
CLEAR
WRITE A
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE
LOG GRAPH
CLEAR
WRITE A
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

CLRW
17-44
Key Dictionary
CLEAR
WRITE B

Softkey that erases any data previously stored in trace B and

can change the trace mode of trace B. If trace B is in clear-write mode
or maximum-hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or
minimum hold, the trace mode of trace B is changed to store blank.
The following table shows the trace mode of trace B before and after
changing trace C to clear-write or minimum-hold trace mode.
Trace Mode of Trace B Trace Mode of Trace B
After
Before
Clear write
Maximum hold
View
Store blank
Store blank
View
Changing the trace mode of trace B to clear write or maximum hold

can change the trace mode of trace C. If trace C is in clear-write mode
when trace B is changed to clear write or minimum hold, the trace
mode of trace C is changed to minimum hold.
Trace Mode of Trace C Trace Mode of Trace C
Before
After
Clear write
Minimum hold
View
Minimum hold
Minimum hold
View
Key Path
TRACE5
33333333333333333333
33333333333333333333333333
TRACE
CLEAR
A B C B WRITE B
CLRW
Key Dictionary
17-45
CLEAR
WRITE C

Softkey that erases any data previously stored in trace C and

can change the trace mode of trace A or trace B. If trace A or trace
B is in clear-write mode or maximum-hold mode when trace C is
changed to clear write or minimum hold, the trace mode of trace A or
trace B is changed to store blank.
The following table shows the trace mode of trace A or trace B before
and after changing trace C to clear-write or minimum-hold trace
mode.
Trace Mode of Trace A or B Trace Mode of Trace A or B
Before
After
Clear write
Maximum hold
View
Store blank
Store blank
View
If you want to use trace A or trace B in the clear write or maximum

hold mode and do not want trace C to blank it, use minimum hold or
view trace mode for trace C.
Key Path
TRACE5
33333333333333333333
33333333333333333333333333
TRACE
CLEAR
A B C C WRITE C

CLRW
CLR ALL
MARKS
Softkey that clears all signals in the signal list.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
EDIT
Signal
TEST5 1 of 3 LIST Marking
CLR ALL
MARKS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SIGUNMARK
17-46
Key Dictionary
CNTL A
0 1

Not available when used with an HP 85420E Option 1EM RF lter

section.
Softkey that makes the auxiliary-interface control line A output high

or low (TTL). This line can be used to control any external drive that
takes a TTL input.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
AUX/USER5
Aux Conn
Control
CNTL A
0 1
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

CNTLA
CNTL B
0 1


section.
Softkey that makes the auxiliary-interface control line B output high

takes a TTL input.
Key Path
Aux Conn
AUX/USER5 Control
CNTL B
0 1
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

CNTLB
CNTL C
0 1


section.
Softkey that makes the auxiliary-interface control line C output high

takes a TTL input.
Key Path
Aux Conn
AUX/USER5 Control
CNTL C
0 1
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

CNTLC
Key Dictionary
17-47
CNTL D
0 1


section.
Softkey that makes the auxiliary-interface control line D output high

takes a TTL input.
Key Path
AUX/USER5
Aux Conn
Control
CNTL D
0 1
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

CNTLD
CNT RES
AUTO MAN

Softkey that sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter.

When AUTO is underlined, the marker counter resolution is set to
6 kHz. When MAN is underlined, the marker counter resolution can
be set manually from 1 Hz to 100 kHz.
Key Path
More
More
CNT RES
MKR5 1 of 3 2 of 3 AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

MKFCR
COARSE
TUNE DAC

Softkey that displays the analog output of the YTO coarse-tune

DAC located on the A7 analog interface assembly. This is a service
diagnostic function and is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
17-48
Key Dictionary
More 1
More 2
COARSE
TUNE DAC
33333333333333333333333333333
COMB GEN
ON OFF

HP 8593EM or HP 8596EM only.
Softkey that turns the internal comb generator on or o.
Key Path
AUX/USER5
COMB GEN
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333

COMB
COMPLMNT
MARKS

Softkey that complements all marked signals in the signal list. For
example, if all the even numbered signals in the signal list are
marked, pressing COMPLMNT MARKS , with mark all odd numbered
signals instead.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Signal
Marking
Selectv
Mark
COMPLMNT
MARKS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
SIGMARK
CONF TEST
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that initiates a variety of tests to check the major functions

of the analyzer. The condence test function checks that the video
bandwidths change, the noise oor level decreases as the resolution
bandwidth narrows, the step gains switch, and the 3 dB bandwidths
of the resolution bandwidths are correctly set.
Key Path
More
CAL5 1 of 4 CONF TEST
33333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-49
4CONFIG5
17-50
Key Dictionary
Hardkey that accesses the menu used for printer and plotter
congurations, time and date display functions, changing the current
prex, card conguration functions, disposing of user-dened
variables and programs from internal memory, changing the
instrument address or the baud rate, displaying the installed options
on screen, and changing the format of the MONITOR output. Pressing
4CONFIG5 after the instrument has been placed in the remote mode
places the instrument in the local mode and enables front-panel
control. During remote operation, an R appears in the lower-left
corner of the screen indicating remote mode. Pressing 4CONFIG5
removes the R annotation from the lower-left corner.
4COPY5
Hardkey that initiates an output of the screen data, without an

external controller, to a previously specied graphics printer or
plotter.
The printer or plotter must have already been selected using 4CONFIG5
and either Plot Config (for a plotter) or Print Config (for a
printer).
1. To obtain a print, press:
4CONFIG5
COPY DEV PRNT PLT PRNT
Print Config
Prn Port Config
For HP-IB, use PRINTER ADDRESS to change the HP-IB address of

the printer, if necessary. Press:
4CONFIG5
Print Config
Prn Port Config
PRN PORT HPIB PAR HPIB
PRINTER ADDRESS
For RS-232, use BAUD RATE to change the baud rate of the
analyzer, if necessary. Press:
4CONFIG5
Print Config
Prn Port Config
PRN PORT SER PAR SER
BAUD RATE
2. If the analyzer is connected to an HP PaintJet printer and you

want a color printout, press:
Set Colr Printer
PAINTJET PRINTER
3. If the analyzer is connected to an HP PaintJet printer and you

want a black and white printout, press:
Set B&W Printer
HP B&W PRINTER
Key Dictionary
17-51
Table 17-2.
Setting of HP ThinkJet Printer Mode Switches
Switch Setting
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
down
down
up
down
down
up
down
down
Comments
Printer performs a carriage return only.
Printer performs a line feed only.
Sets the printer to skip paper perforations
Sets the printer for a paper length of 11 inches.
Sets the printer to HP MODE.
Sets the printer to USASCII.
4. If you want the softkey labels to be printed with the analyzer

display printout when using 4COPY5, press:
PRT MENU ON OFF ON
5. To begin the process, press:

4COPY5
6. The process will begin. The screen remains frozen (no further
sweeps taken) until the data transfer to the printer is complete.
The analyzer works with many Hewlett-Packard printers.
17-52
Key Dictionary
1. The plotting process is similar to the printing process. To begin a

plot, press:
4CONFIG5
Plot Config
2. To obtain a plot, press:

4CONFIG5
COPY DEV PRNT PLT PLT
Plot Config
Plt Port Config
For HP-IB, use PLOTTER ADDRESS to change the HP-IB address for
the plotter, if necessary. Press:
4CONFIG5
Plot Config
Plt Port Config
PLT PORT HPIB PAR HPIB
PLOTTER ADDRESS
For RS-232, use BAUD RATE to change the baud rate of the
analyzer, if necessary. Press:
4CONFIG5
Plot Config
Plt Port Config
PLT PORT SER PAR SER
BAUD RATE
With PLTS/PG 1 2 4 , you can choose a full-page, half-page,

or quarter-page plot. Press PLTS/PG 1 2 4 to underline the
number of plots per page desired. If two or four plots per page are
chosen, a softkey function is displayed that allows you to select
the location of the plotter output on the paper. If two plots per
page are selected, PLT _ _LOC _ _ is displayed. If four plots per
page are selected, PLT _ _LOC _ _ is displayed. Press the softkey
until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the softkey
label. The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically
represent the position of the page where the plotter output will be
located.
Note
The HP 7470A Plotter does not support two plots per page output.
If you use an HP 7470A Plotter with an HP 8590 EM Series EMC
analyzer, you can select one or four plots per page, but not two plots
per page.
Key Dictionary
17-53
For a multipen plotter, the pens of the plotter draw the dierent
components of the screen as follows:
Pen
Number
Description
Draws the annotation and graticule.
Draws trace A.
Draws trace B.
Draws trace C and the display line.
Draws user-generated graphics and the lower limit line.
Draws the upper limit line.
3. To plot, press:
Previous Menu
COPY DEV PRNT PLT PLT

COPY5
Printing is usually faster than plotting, but plotting provides higher
resolution output. The analyzer works with plotters such as the
HP 7440A.
Figure 17-2 shows the rear view of a typical printer/analyzer
conguration.
Note
Figure 17-2. Connecting a printer to the analyzer.
Printing and plotting require an optional interface. Generally,

analyzers with an HP-IB interface set the plotter address to 5 and
the printer address to 1. Analyzers with an RS-232 interface must
have the baud rate set to match the baud rate of the printer or plotter
being used.

PLOT, PRINT
17-54
Key Dictionary
COPY DEV
PRNT PLT

Softkey that changes between a printer and plotter. For

example, if you have been printing and want to do a plot, press
COPY DEV PRNT PLT to underline PLT before pressing 4COPY5.
Key Path
COPY DEV
CONFIG5 PRNT PLT
COPY
SCREEN

33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that sends a copy of the current display to the printer

specied by Printer Type . This is the same as the 4COPY5 key.
Key Path
OUTPUT5
COPY
SCREEN
33333333333333333333333

PLOT, PRINT
CORRECT
ON OFF
Softkey that controls use of some correction factors. When ON is

underlined, correction factors are used and CORR appears on the left
hand-side of the display. When OFF is underlined, correction factors
are not used. Turning the correction factors o degrades amplitude
accuracy.
Note
Correction factors must be on for the instrument to meet its specied

performance.

Key Path
More
CAL5 1 of 4
CORRECT
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

CAL
Key Dictionary
17-55
Correctn
Factors

Softkey that accesses a menu of correction factors used to create,

edit, and view antenna, cable, and other amplitude-correction factors.
Key Path
More
Correctn
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
CORRECTN
ON OFF

Softkey that turns antenna, cable, or other amplitude-correction

factors on or o.
Key Path
More
Correctn
CORRECTN
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

CORREK
COUPLE
AC DC

CAUTION
HP 8594EM, 8595EM or 8596EM only.
Softkey that species alternating-current (AC) or direct-current (DC)

coupling at the instrument input. Selecting ac coupling blocks any
dc voltage at the instrument input; however, the ac coupling also
decreases the frequency range of the instrument. The input coupling
is set to ac by an instrument preset.
Amplitude specications apply only when coupling is set to DC.
Do not use dc coupling if there is any dc voltage at the instrument
input.
Key Path
More
More
1 of 3 2 of 3
AMPLITUDE
COUPLE
AC DC
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

COUPLE
17-56
Key Dictionary
CRT HORZ
POSITION

Softkey that changes the horizontal position of the signal. Press

CAL STORE if you want to use this position permanently, so that it is
not lost when the power is turned o.
Key Path
More
CAL5 1 or 4
CRT VERT
POSITION

CRT HORZ
POSITION
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that changes the vertical position of the signal. Press

CAL STORE if you want to use this position permanently, so that it is
not lost when the power is turned o.
Key Path
More
CAL5 1 or 4
DACS
CRT VERT
POSITION
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that changes the DAC numbers of the span, DAC YTO
coarse-tune, DAC YTO ne-tune, and YTO FM tune DAC located on the
A7 analog interface assembly. This is a service diagnostic function and
is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
DATEMODE
MDY DMY

Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DACS
Softkey that changes the display of the date from a month-day-year

format to a day-month-year format. It is set to a month-day-year
format by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Time
DATEMODE
CONFIG5 Date MDY DMY
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

DATEMODE
Key Dictionary
17-57
dBm
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that changes the amplitude units to dBm for the current
setting (logarithmic or linear).
Key Path
More
Amptd
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 Units dBm
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AUNITS
dBmV
Softkey that changes the amplitude units to dBmV for the current
Key Path
More
Amptd
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 Units dBmV
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AUNITS
dBV
Softkey that changes the amplitude units to dBV for the current
Key Path
More
4AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3
Amptd
Units
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
dBV

AUNITS
17-58
Key Dictionary
DEFAULT
CAL DATA

Softkey that accesses the factory-default correction factors. A

special pass code is required for use. If the message Self cal needed
appears when DEFAULT CAL DATA is pressed, the CAL FREQ and
CAL AMP routines need to be run. CAL ALL must be run to ensure
specications. (If the maximum frequency of interest is higher than 3
GHz, the CAL YTF routine must also be run.) The calibration results
must then be saved by pressing CAL STORE .
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
DEFAULT
CAL DATA
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
CAL
DEFAULT
CONFIG

Softkey that resets the instrument conguration to the state

it was in when it was originally shipped from the factory then
performs an instrument preset. Refer to Table 17-3 for the default
user-conguration values set by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG .
Table 17-3. Default Conguration Values

Conguration
Default Value
Analyzer address
Copy device
CRT position (Horizontal and Vertical)
Printer address
Plotter address
Baud rate
External preamp
Save lock (internal states or traces)
Printer
Print menu
Plots per page
Time/date display
Date mode
Prex
Analyzer state at power on
18
printer
10, 48
1
5
1200
0 dB
O
black and white printer
on
1
on
month-day-year format
(blank)
instrument preset
Key Path
More
4CONFIG5 1 of 3
DEFAULT
CONFIG
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-59
DEFAULT
SYNC

Softkey that restores the factory default values of the horizontal

and vertical synchronization constants for the rear panel MONITOR
output.
Key Path
More
More
DEFAULT
CONFIG5 1 of 3 2 of 3 SYNC
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SYNCMODE
Define
List

Softkey that accesses a menu that species what elements of a table

are output to the printer when OUTPUT REPORT is executed. If any
of the elements are set to on, they will be included as part of the list
portion of the report.
Key Path
OUTPUT
Define
List
33333333333333333333333

TBLDEF
Define
Report

Softkey that accesses a menu which species what elements of a

report are output to the printer or the plotter. If any of the elements
are set to on, they will be sent to the printer followed by a form feed.
Only LOG ON OFF and LIN ON OFF can be used when outputting to a
plotter. The report is generated by OUTPUT REPORT .
Key Path
Define
OUTPUT5 Report
33333333333333333333333

RPTDEF
17-60
Key Dictionary
DELETE
ALL SIGS
Softkey that deletes all signals from the signal list.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Delete
Signals
DELETE
ALL SIGS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGDEL
DELETE
FACTORS

Softkey that deletes all antenna, cable, or other amplitude-correction

factors.
Key Path
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

DELETE
FACTORS
33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Cable
Factors
EDIT
More
CABLE 1 of 2
DELETE
FACTORS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Other
Factors
EDIT
More
OTHER 1 of 2
DELETE
FACTORS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
DELETE
FILE

Softkey that deletes an item from internal memory or a le from the

card. Use the step keys to view dierent sections of the directory
and use the knob to select the le or item to delete. Pressing
DELETE FILE causes a message to appear on the screen: If you are
sure, press key again to purge data. Press DELETE FILE again if
you want to delete the memory item.
Note
Deleting items beginning with an underscore from the instrument is

not recommended and may have unexpected results. Items beginning
with an underscore are used by the instrument.
Key Path
SAVE/RECALL5
Save or
Recall Card
33333333333333333333333333333333333333
...
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL
Save or
More
Recall Card 1 of 3
33333333333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
DELETE
FILE
33333333333333333333333
DELETE
. . . y FILE
33333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-61
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save/Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal
... x
33333333333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
DELETE
FILE
33333333333333333333333
RECALL
DELETE
FILE
SETUP5 SETUP
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Correctn
Factors
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
DELETE
FILE
... k
33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Limit
RECALL
DELETE
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines LIMITS FILE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save/Rcl
More
TEST5 1 of 3 List
RECALL
LIST
DELETE
FILE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

Limit
RECALL
DELETE
DISPLAY5 Lines LIMITS FILE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Recall: CATALOG CARD , RECALL SETUP , RECALL LIST ,
RECALL LIMITS , or RECALL ANTENNA , or
Save: CATALOG CARD , SETUP ! CARD LIST

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
LIMITS ! CARD , ANTENNA ! CARD .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CARD ,

Recall: RECALL CABLE , RECALL OTHER , RECALL DISPLAY ,

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
RECALL DLP , RECALL TRACE or
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Save: CABLE ! CARD , OTHER ! CARD ,
DISPLAY
CARD , Trace
CARD , ALL DLP
CARD
x Any of the following can be used to complete the key path:

CATALOG ALL , CATALOG REGISTER , CATALOG VARIABLS ,

or CATALOG PREFIX .
k Any of the following groups of softkeys can be used to complete the key path:
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Antenna Factors EDIT ANTENNA , or Cable Factors EDIT CABLE ,

or Other Factors EDIT OTHER .

PURGE
17-62
Key Dictionary
DELETE
LIMIT

Softkey that deletes the selected limit-line table.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
DELETE
LIMIT
33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
...
DELETE
LIMIT
33333333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

LIMIDEL
DELETE
MARKED

Softkey that deletes all marked signals from the signal list. Signals
can be marked using MARK ALL SIGNALS , MARK SIGNAL , and
Selectv Mark .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Delete
Signals
DELETE
MARKED
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
TEST5 1 of 3
Signal
Marking
Selectv
Mark
DELETE
MARKED
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

SIGDEL, SIGMARK
Key Dictionary
17-63
DELETE
POINT

Softkey that deletes an amplitude-correction factor that was

previously selected by SELECT POINT .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
Amp
EDIT
DELETE
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 Cor AMP COR POINT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
DELETE
POINT
EDIT
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Cable
Factors
EDIT
More
CABLE 1 of 2
DELETE
POINT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Other
Factors
DELETE
SEGMENT

EDIT
More
OTHER 1 of 2
DELETE
POINT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Softkey that deletes the limit-line entry for the selected segment
number. Use the knob or step keys to highlight the segment number
to be deleted, then press DELETE SEGMENT .
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode.
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
More
LIMIT 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
DELETE
SEGMENT
...
EDIT
More
LIMIT 1 of 2
DELETE
SEGMENT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
...
More
1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
DELETE
SEGMENT
Edit
Limit . . .
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
More
1 of 2
DELETE
SEGMENT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

SEGDEL
17-64
Key Dictionary
DELETE
SIGNAL

Softkey that deletes the signal located at the cursor from the signal
list.
Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Delete
Signals
DELETE
SIGNAL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

SIGDEL, SIGPOS
Delete
Signals

Softkey that accesses a menu which deletes one or more signals from
the signal list.
Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Delete
Signals
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
SIGDEL
DELTA
MEAS

Softkey that accesses the 4MKR5 menu. Refer to 4MKR5 for more
information.
Key Path
More
More
4AUX/USER5 1 of 3 2 of 3
DELTA
MEAS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
4DEMOD5
Hardkey that directly accesses the menu that selects AM or FM

demodulation, FM gain, dwell time, and squelch levels.
Key Dictionary
17-65
DEMOD
AM FM

Softkey that allows selection of amplitude (AM) or frequency (FM)

demodulation.
Activating AM detection turns o FM demodulation (if it is on).
When the frequency span is greater than 0 Hz, a 30 kHz intermediate
frequency bandwidth is used during demodulation, regardless of the
screen annotation.
Turning FM demodulation on turns o AM demodulation (if it is on).
When the frequency span is greater than 0 Hz, a 100 kHz bandwidth
is used during the demodulation, regardless of the screen annotation.
When the span is equal to 0 Hz, the displayed bandwidth is used.
Key Path
DEMOD
DEMOD5 AM FM
33333333333333333333

DEMOD
DEMOD
ON OFF

Softkey that turns the AM or FM demodulation on and o. If the

instrument is in a nonzero span, a marker is placed at center screen
if an onscreen marker is not already present. The marker pause is
changed to equal the current dwell time value. Demodulation takes
place on any signal that is indicated by the marker position during the
marker pause. There is no change to the display during marker pause,
but the demodulation signal is present on the AUX VIDEO OUT. Also
refer to the SPEAKER ON OFF softkey description.
Pressing DEMOD ON OFF selects the sample peak detector for

AM demodulation, the FMV detector for FM demodulation. If the
instrument is in zero span, demodulation is done continuously, with or
without an onscreen marker.
Key Path
DEMOD
DEMOD5 ON OFF
33333333333333333333333

DEMOD
17-66
Key Dictionary
DESKJET
310/550C
Softkey that selects the HP DeskJet 310 or 550C for color printing.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Print
Set Colr
CONFIG5 Config Printer
DESKJET
540
DESKJET
310/550C
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that selects the HP DeskJet 540 for color printing.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Print
Set Colr
4DET5
DETECTOR
PK QP AV

DESKJET
540
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Hardkey that accesses a menu for selecting the quasi-peak, average,

peak, sample and negative detection.
Softkey that turns automatic measuring on or o for the peak,

quasi-peak, and average detectors. Underline the desired detector or
detectors by pressing DETECTOR PK QP AV .
Key Path
More
Measure
SETUP5 1 of 4 Detector
DETECTOR
PK QP AV
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Remeasure
DETECTOR
PK QP AV
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

AUTOAVG, AUTOQPD
Key Dictionary
17-67
DETECTOR
PK SP NG

Option 101 and 103 only.
Softkey that selects either positive peak detection or sample

detection. When sample detection is selected, "SMPL" appears in the
upper-right corner of the screen. In sample mode, the instantaneous
signal value at the present display point is placed in memory. Sample
detection is activated automatically for noise level markers, during
video averaging, and for FFT measurements.
When positive peak detection is selected, "PEAK" appears in the
upper-right corner of the screen. Positive peak detection obtains the
maximum video signal between the last display point and the present
display point and stores this value in the trace memory address.
Positive peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing
4PRESET5.
Key Path
More
More
DETECTOR
PK SP NG
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
DET5
DETECTOR
PK SP NG
33333333333333333333333333333

DET
DETECTOR
SMP PK

Softkey that selects between positive peak detection and sample

detection. When sample detection is selected, "SMPL" appears in the
upper-left corner of the screen. In sample mode, the instantaneous
signal value at the present display point is placed in memory. Sample
detection is activated automatically for noise level markers, during
video averaging, and for FFT measurements.
When positive peak detection is selected, "PEAK" appears in the
upper-left corner of the screen. Postive peak detection obtains the
maximum video signal between the last display point and the present
display point and stores this value in the trace memory address.
Positive peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing
4PRESET5.
Key Path
DET5
DETECTOR
SMP PK
33333333333333333333333333333
More
More
DETECTOR
SMP PK
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

DET
17-68
Key Dictionary
4DISPLAY5
DISPLAY
! CARD

Hardkey that activates the display line, hold, and threshold functions.
It controls the display of the graticule and screen annotation, and
provides for title and prex entries.
Softkey that saves display images to a card. To save display images

press, DISPLAY ! CARD . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed on
the screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired register number
then press 4ENTER5. The display image is saved to a card.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
More
DISPLAY
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

STOR
DISPLAY
CAL DATA

Softkey that displays the current correction-factor data generated by

the frequency and amplitude self-calibration routines. This is a service
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
DISPLAY
CAL DATA
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
DISPLAY
CNTL I


section.
Softkey that displays the status of the auxiliary connector input

(control line I) onscreen (high = 1 or low = 0, in TTL).
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Aux Conn
AUX/USER5 Control
DISPLAY
CNTL I
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

CNTLI
Key Dictionary
17-69
Dispose
User Mem

Note
Softkey that accesses a menu to dispose of all the user programs and
variables that are in internal memory.
Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables
from internal memory.
Using DISPOSE USER MEM may change the printer or plotter

conguration. Pressing DISPOSE USER MEM sets the printer output
to print a black and white print by selecting COLOR MONOCHRM , sets
the copy device to print when COPY DEV PRNT PLT has PRNT
underlined, and sets the print menu to on when PRT MENU ON OFF
has ON underlined. Use Print Config to change any of these
functions.
Key Path
More
CONFIG5 1 of 3
Dispose
User Mem
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
DISPOSE
DROOP
Softkey that disables the reset of the peak detector on the

A16 processor/video assembly after each analog-to-digital conversion.
This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
17-70
Key Dictionary
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More 1 . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 3
DROOP
DSP LINE
ON OFF

After selecting this softkey, pressing any digit, 0 through 9, brings up

the appropriate amplitude terminator menu.
Softkey that activates an adjustable horizontal line that is used as a

visual reference line. The line, which can be used for trace arithmetic,
has amplitude values that correspond to its vertical position when
compared to the reference level. The value of the display line appears
in the active function block and on the left side of the screen. The
display line can be adjusted using the step keys, knob, or data keys.
To deactivate the display line, press DSP LINE ON OFF so that OFF
is underlined. (Also refer to the VIDEO softkey description.)
Key Path
DSP LINE
ON OFF
DISPLAY
33333333333333333333333333333
More
More
DSP LINE
MKR !5 1 of 3 2 of 3 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
DL
DWELL
TIME

Softkey that sets the dwell time for marker pause, during which
demodulation can take place in nonzero span sweeps. The dwell time
can be set from 2 milliseconds to 100 seconds.
Key Path
DEMOD5
DWELL
TIME
33333333333333333333

MKPAUSE
EDIT
AMP COR

Softkey that allows you to edit the current amplitude-correction

factors table.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
Amp
Cor
EDIT
AMP COR
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
Key Dictionary
17-71
EDIT
ANNOTATN

Softkey that accesses the annotation editor. The annotation editor

allows entry of up to 1500 characters of text using an external
keyboard. The annotation text can be stored to a card or printed
using OUTPUT REPORT .
Key Path
EDIT
OUTPUT5 ANNOTATN
33333333333333333333333333333

EDITANNOT
EDIT
ANTENNA

Softkey that accesses a menu used to edit antenna amplitudecorrection factors.
Key Path
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Correctn
Factors
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
ANTENNA
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
EDIT
CABLE

Softkey that accesses a menu used to edit cable amplitude-correction

factors.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Cable
Factors
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AMPCOR
17-72
Key Dictionary
EDIT
CABLE
EDIT
CAT ITEM

Softkey that starts the DLP editor function and loads the highlighted
item from the catalog of instrument memory to be displayed and
edited. It copies the item into the instruments internal DLP editor
memory which is a 2500 byte memory buer. If an item is edited, the
new edited version will not be overwritten in the internal memory
until it is processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey.
Key Path
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
...
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Editor
SAVE/RECALL5
33333333333333333333333333333
Recall
Internal
EDIT
CAT ITEM
Catalog
Internal
...
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Editor
EDIT
CAT ITEM
33333333333333333333333333333

CATALOG ALL , CATALOG VARIABLS , or CATALOG PREFIX .
EDIT
DONE

Softkey that can be accessed through the amplitude-correction, menu

the limit-line menu, and the change prex menu. When accessed
from the amplitude-correction menu, the amplitude-correction factors
table is erased from the screen and the amplitude-correction menu
is restored onscreen. When accessed from the limit-line menu, the
limit-line table is erased from the screen and the limit-line menu is
restored onscreen. Use EDIT DONE when all the amplitude-correction
factors have been entered.
When accessed from the change prex menu, EDIT DONE erases
the prex from the screen and restores the previous menu. Use
EDIT DONE when prex characters have all been entered.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
Amp
Cor
EDIT
AMP COR
EDIT
DONE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Change
More
EDIT
CONFIG5 Prefix 1 of 2 DONE
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Change
More
EDIT
DISPLAY5 1 of 2 Prefix 1 of 2 DONE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
Change More
Prefix 1 of 2
EDIT
DONE
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Recall
Catalog
Internal
Change More
Prefix 1 of 2
EDIT
DONE
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Change More
Prefix 1 of 2
EDIT
DONE
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-73
EMC Analyzer mode.

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
EDIT
DONE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Change
More
EDIT
More
DISPLAY5 1 of 2 Prefix 1 of 2 DONE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
...
EDIT
LIMIT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Correctn
Factors
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
EDIT
DONE
... y
EDIT
DONE
33333333333333333

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
. . . x 1 of 2 DONE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
EDIT
More
Edit
Limit
... x
More
1 of 2
EDIT
DONE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
y Any of the following groups of softkeys can be used to complete the key path:
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Antenna Factors EDIT ANTENNA , or Cable Factors EDIT CABLE ,

or Other Factors EDIT OTHER .
x Any of the following can be used to complete the key path:

EDIT
FLATNESS

Softkey that allows atness-correction constants to be viewed or

modied. This is a service calibration function and is for service use
only.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
17-74
Key Dictionary
Service
Cal
Flatness
Data
EDIT
FLATNESS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
EDIT
LAST

Softkey that starts the DLP editor function and allows the most recent
item that was being edited, in the DLP editor buer, to be accessed
again. The item will not be in the user memory of the instrument
until it is processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey. The DLP editor
memory remains intact when the instrument is preset and when it is
powered o.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
...
Editor
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
EDIT
LAST
33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
...
Editor
EDIT
LAST
33333333333333333

Edit
Limit

Spectrum Analyzer mode only.
Softkey that allows you to edit the current limit-line tables by

accessing Edit Upper , Edit Lower , Edit Up/Low , and
Edit Mid/Delt . Use PURGE LIMITS under any of the above edit
menus to dispose of the current limit-line table.
Key Path
Limit
Edit
DISPLAY5 Lines Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
More
Limit
Edit
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-75
EDIT
LIMIT

Softkey that allows you to edit the current limit-line tables for limit
line 1 or limit line 2. Use DELETE LIMITS under this menu to dispose
of the current limit-line table.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
33333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIST

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
...
EDIT
LIMIT
33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Softkey that accesses a menu to edit signal list functions for marking,
remeasuring and deleting signals.
Key Path
More
EDIT
TEST5 1 of 3 LIST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333

SIGLIST
17-76
Key Dictionary
EDIT
LOWER

Softkey that allows you to view or edit the lower limit-line table.
Up to 30 entries are allowed for the lower limit-line table. With the
lower limit-line table format, the coordinates for the lower limit-line
are specied, but none are specied for the upper limit line. Even
if upper limit-line values exist or the values had been entered as
an upper and lower limit-line table, the lower limit-line values are
treated as a separate table from the upper limit-line values. The
lower limit-line entries can have independent frequency (or time) and
amplitude coordinates from upper limit-line table entries.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
EDIT
LOWER
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Limit
Edit
EDIT
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit LOWER
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
LIMIMODE
Key Dictionary
17-77
EDIT
MID/DELT

Softkey that allows you to view or edit the upper and lower limit-line
tables simultaneously. These tables are edited by entering a middle
amplitude value and an amplitude deviation. Up to 30 entries are
allowed for the upper and lower limit-line tables. Like the upper and
lower limit-line table format, the mid/delta limit-line table format
provides a means of specifying the upper and lower limit lines at the
same time. Unlike the upper and lower table format, the amplitude
values are specied as a middle amplitude value with a delta (the
upper and lower limit lines are drawn equal positive and negative
distance from the middle amplitude).
With the mid/delta format the frequency (or time), and the middle
amplitude plus the delta comprise the upper limit line; the frequency
(or time), and the middle amplitude minus the delta comprise the
lower limit line. The dierence between the mid/delta and the
upper/lower format is the way the amplitude values are entered;
the frequency (time) coordinate begins a segment regardless of the
format chosen. The mid/delta format can be used if the upper and
lower limit lines are symmetrical with respect to the amplitude axis.
An upper and lower amplitude component are specied for every
frequency (or time) component.
Key Path
Limit
Edit
EDIT
DISPLAY5 Lines Limit MID/DELT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
Limit
Edit
EDIT
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit MID/DELT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

LIMIMODE
EDIT
OTHER

Softkey that accesses the ampcor editor to edit correction factors for
devices other than antennas and cables.
Key Path
More
Correctn
Other
Factors
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AMPCOR
17-78
Key Dictionary
EDIT
OTHER
EDIT
UP/LOW

Softkey that allows you to view or edit the upper and lower limit-line
tables simultaneously. Up to 30 entries are allowed for the upper
and lower limit-line tables. With the upper and lower limit-line table
format, the upper and lower limit-lines can be entered at the same
time.
With the upper and lower limit-line format, the frequency (or time),
upper amplitude, and lower amplitude are specied. The frequency
(or time) and upper amplitude value comprise the coordinate point
for the upper limit line, the frequency (or time) and lower amplitude
value comprise the coordinate point for the lower limit line. It is not
necessary to specify both an upper and lower amplitude component
for every frequency (or time) component.
Key Path
Limit
Edit
EDIT
DISPLAY5 Lines Limit UP/LOW
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
EDIT
UP/LOW
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
LIMIMODE
EDIT
UPPER

Softkey that allows you to view or edit the upper limit-line table.
Up to 30 entries are allowed for the upper limit-line table. With the
upper limit-line table format, the coordinates of the upper limit line
are specied, but none are specied for the lower limit line. Even
if lower limit-line values exist or the values had been entered as
an upper and lower limit-line table, the upper limit-line values are
treated as a separate table from the lower limit-line values. The
upper limit-line entries can have independent frequency (or time) and
amplitude coordinates from lower limit-line table entries.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
EDIT
UPPER
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Limit
Edit
EDIT
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit UPPPER
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

LIMIMODE
Key Dictionary
17-79
EDIT
UPR LWR

Softkey that selects upper or lower limit-line tables. It switches to the

limit-line table that is not currently being edited.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
...
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
EDIT
UPR LWR
33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
...
EDIT
UPR LWR
33333333333333333333333333
Either EDIT UPPER or EDIT LOWER can be used to complete the key path.

LIMIMODE
Editor
Softkey that accesses the menu of downloadable program (DLP) editor

softkeys. Programming commands can be used to write a program to
control the instrument. The built-in DLP editor uses the instrument
rather than an external computer to create, view, or edit programs.
These programs can then be sent to the command parser of the
instrument, which is similar to outputting them to the instrument
from an external computer.
Key Path
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
...
Editor
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save/Recall
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
...
Editor
Any of the following can be used to complete the key path.

EMC
ANALYZER

17-80
Key Dictionary
Softkey that allows the EMC analyzer mode only to be preset.

Table 17-4 lists the conditions aected by the preset EMC analyzer
function.
Table 17-4. Preset EMC Analyzer Conditions

A0B!A
Annotation and graticule
Attenuation
Average video bandwidth
AV/IFBW ratio
Center frequency
Center frequency step size
Coupled functions
Coupling
Detector
Display line
Frequency oset
Harmonic lock
IF Bandwidth
Limit-line testing
Marker counter
Marker counter resolution
Markers
Reference level
Reference level oset
Reference level position
Scale
Span
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
State registers 1|8
Sweep
Sweep time
Threshold
Trace A
Trace B
Trace C
Trace math
Trace registers
Trigger
Video averaging
o
on
coupled
300 kHz (coupled)
0.3
600 MHz
100 MHz
all set to AUTO
AC
positive peak
o
0 Hz
o
120 kHz (coupled)
o
o
6 kHz (auto-coupled)
o
92 dBV in power-on units
0 dB
top (8th graticule)
log 10dB/div
800 MHz
200 MHz
1.0 GHz
unaected
continuous
2.70 s (auto-coupled)
o
clear write
store-blank
store-blank
cleared
unaected
free
o
Key Path
EMC
MODE5 ANALYZER
33333333333333333333333333333

INSTTYPE
Key Dictionary
17-81
4ENTER5
EP LQ570
SML LRG

Hardkey that enters a numerical value that has been entered from the
front panel using the keypad, knob, or step up/down keys.
Softkey that species EPSON LQ570 as the printer connected to the

output port.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Print
Set B&W
EP LQ570
CONFIG5 Config Printer SML LRG
EP MX80
SML LRG

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that species EPSON MX80 as the printer connected to the

output port.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Print
Set B&W
EP MX80
CONFIG5 Config Printer SML LRG
ERASE
DLP MEM

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that allows you to dispose of the DLPs, all traces dened by
TRDEF, and all VARDEF variables in memory.
Key Path
More
CONFIG5 1 of 3
Dispose
User Mem
ERASE
DLP MEM
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

DISPOSE
ERASE
MEM CARD

Softkey that allows you to dispose of any data or programs stored on

the memory card by formatting it. This is the same as FORMAT CARD .
Key Path
More
CONFIG5 1 of 3
Dispose
User Mem
ERASE
MEM CARD
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

FORMAT
17-82
Key Dictionary
ERASE
STATEALL

Changes to MEM LOCKED when SAVE LOCK is on.
Softkey that allows you to purge all the user state registers 1
through 9.
Key Path
More
4CONFIG5 1 of 3
Dispose
User Mem
ERASE
STATEALL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
ERASE
TRACEALL

Changes to MEM LOCKED when SAVE LOCK is on.
Softkey that disposes of any or all user-dened traces.
Key Path
More
CONFIG5 1 of 3
EXECUTE
TITLE

Dispose
User Mem
ERASE
TRACEALL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that executes a programming command displayed in the

screen title area of the instrument. The Change Title function
can be used to print programming commands in the screen title area
of the display. The commands can then be executed from the front
panel of the instrument, without an external computer, by pressing
the EXECUTE TITLE softkey.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
EXIT
Service
Cal
EXECUTE
TITLE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that exits the EDIT FLATNESS menu. This is a service

calibration function and is designed for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Cal
Flatness
Data
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More
EXIT
Key Dictionary
17-83
EXIT
CATALOG

Softkey that returns the instrument to the state it was in before the
current catalog function was invoked. It clears the catalog display
and returns to a normal display.
Key Path
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Card
...
33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Card
33333333333333333
EXIT
CATALOG
33333333333333333333333333
...
EXIT
CATALOG
33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall More
Card
1 of 3
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
EXIT
CATALOG
... y
33333333333333333333333333
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
EXIT
CATALOG
33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
CATALOG
EXIT
CATALOG
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Recall/Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
CATALOG
CARD
33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
... x
SAVE/RECALL5
17-84
Key Dictionary
EXIT
CATALOG
Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
EXIT
CATALOG
33333333333333333333333333
... x
EXIT
CATALOG
33333333333333333333333333
EMC Analyzer mode.

Limit
RECALL
EXIT
DISPLAY5 Lines LIMITS CATALOG
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Limit
More
RECALL
EXIT
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines LIMITS CATALOG
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

RECALL
SETUP5 SETUP
EXIT
CATALOG
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
RECALL
LIST
EXIT
CATALOG
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Any of the following can be used to complete the key path.

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CATALOG CARD , RECALL SETUP , RECALL LIST , RECALL LIMITS
or RECALL ANTENNA .
y Any of the following can be used to complete the key path.

RECALL CABLE , RECALL OTHER , or RECALL TRACE .
x Any of the following can be used to complete the key path.

CATALOG ALL , CATALOG VARIABLS , CATALOG PREFIX , or
CATALOG REGISTER .
EXIT
EDIT
Softkey that exits the annotation editor.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
EDIT
OUTPUT5 ANNOTATN
EXIT
EDIT
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

EXITANNOT
Key Dictionary
17-85
EXIT
GRAPH

Softkey that exits the SAVE LIN GRAPH or SAVE LOG GRAPH report
graph functions.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
SAVE
LIN GRAPH
EXIT
GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
SAVE
LOG GRAPH
EXIT
GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

SIGGRAPH
EXIT
MEASURE
Softkey that exits the MEAS STEPPED menu.

Key Path
More
More
MEAS
EXIT
MEASURE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

More
More
MEAS
STEPPED
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
STOP
EXIT
MEASURE
33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
MEAS
EXIT
SHOW
FREQ
STEP
EXIT
MEASURE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that exits the SHW INST CONFIG function.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
CONFIG5 1 of 3
SHW INST
CONFIG
EXIT
SHOW
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

HAVE, ID, REF, SER
17-86
Key Dictionary
EXTERNAL
Softkey that activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep
to start when an external voltage (connected to EXT TRIG INPUT on
the rear panel) passes through approximately 1.5 volts. The external
trigger signal must be a 0 V to +5 V TTL signal.
Key Path
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
EXTERNAL
TM
EXTERNAL
PREAMPG

Softkey that adds a positive or negative preamplier gain value,

which is subtracted from the displayed signal. EXTERNAL PREAMPG
is similar to the REF LVL OFFSET ; however, with the
EXTERNAL PREAMPG , the attenuation may be changed depending
on the preamplier gain entered. A preamplier gain oset is
used for measurements that require an external preamplier or
long cables. The oset is subtracted from the amplitude readout
so that the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the
input of the preamplier. The preamplier gain oset is displayed
at the top right hand-side of the screen and is removed by entering
zero. The preamplier gain oset is entered using the data keys.
Press CAL STORE if you want the instrument to use the current
preamplier gain oset when power is turned on. Preamplier
gain oset is set to zero when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed. The
preamplier gain value is not aected by an instrument preset.
Key Path
More
EXTERNAL
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 PREAMPG
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

PREAMPG
Key Dictionary
17-87
FAST STP
ON OFF

Softkey that determines how stepped measurements are made. When

OFF is selected, the MEAS STEPPED softkey performs a stepped
measurement between the specied start and stop frequencies in
increments set by the FREQ STEP softkey measuring all the selected
detectors to the full accuracy of the instrument. When ON is selected
and a limit margin is on ( MARGIN # ON OFF ), only the steps where
the peak amplitude exceeds the limit margin are measured using the
selected detectors. Using this softkey under normal conditions results
in faster measurements due to the limited number of signals being
measured.
Key Path
More
More
FAST STP
TEST5 1 of 3 2 of 3 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

More
More
FAST STP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

LOGSWPSPEED
FFT MEAS
This softkey is only available when LIN is selected for the

SWEEP LOG LIN softkey.
Softkey that activates a discrete fast Fourier transform based on the

current setup. For additional information refer to Chapter 8.
Key Path
More
AUX/USER5 1 of 3 FFT MEAS
33333333333333333333

FFT
FINE
TUNE DAC

Softkey that displays the output of the YTO ne-tune DAC, which
is produced on the A7 analog interface assembly. This is a service
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
17-88
Key Dictionary
More 1 . . .
More 3
FINE
TUNE DAC
33333333333333333333333333333
FLAT
Softkey that draws a zero-slope line between the coordinate point of

the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment,
producing limit-line values equal in amplitude for all frequencies
between the two points. If the amplitude values of the two segments
dier, the limit line \steps" to the frequency value of the second
segment.
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode.
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
FLAT
Limit
More
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines . . .
Select
Type
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
Select
Type
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FLAT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

DISPLAY
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
... y
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Select
Type
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit . . .
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FLAT
33333333333333333333333
Select
Type
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FLAT
33333333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

Flatness
Data

Softkey that accesses a menu used to view or edit the atnesscorrection constants. This is a service calibration function and is for
service use only.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
FM COIL
DRIVE

Service
Cal
Flatness
Data
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that displays the output of the FM coil driver produced on the
A7 analog interface assembly. This is a service diagnostic function and
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More 1
FM COIL
DRIVE
33333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-89
FM
GAIN

Softkey that adjusts the FM deviation display. The center graticule

represents zero deviation. The top graticule is the positive deviation
set by FM GAIN. The bottom graticule is the negative deviation set by
FM GAIN. The range for FM gain is from 3 kHz to 1.175 MHz. The
default value is 100 kHz. This is a service calibration function and is
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More 1 . . .
More 4
FM
GAIN
33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
DEMOD5
FM
GAIN
33333333333333333

FMGAIN
FM
OFFSET

Softkey that adjusts the horizontal trace for center-screen with no

modulation on the carrier. This is a service diagnostic function and is
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
FM SPAN
More 1 . . .
More 4
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
33333333333333333333333
Softkey that displays the FM SPAN signal from the span dividers
on the A7 Analog Interface assembly. This is a service diagnostic
function and is for service use only.
Key Path
17-90
FM
OFFSET
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More 1
FM
SPAN
33333333333333333
FORMAT
CARD

Softkey that formats a card in logical interchange (LIF) format. This is

the same as ERASE MEM CARD . The memory card is formatted with
the volume label \HP859X".
Key Path
More
CONFIG5 1 of 3
Card
Config
FORMAT
CARD
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
FORMAT
FREE RUN
Softkey that activates the trigger condition to start the next sweep as
soon as possible after the last sweep.
Key Path
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
FREE RUN
TM
FREQ
DIAG

Softkey that displays, in real-time, frequency diagnostic information

for the local oscillator section. This is a service diagnostic function
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More 1 . . .
More 4
FREQ
DIAG
33333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-91
FREQ
OFFSET

Softkey that inputs a frequency oset value that is added to the

frequency readout, to account for frequency conversions external to
the instrument. Oset entries are added to all frequency readouts
including marker, start frequency, and stop frequency. Entering an
oset does not aect the trace. Osets are not added to the span.
Frequency osets are entered using the data keys.
When a frequency oset is entered, its value is displayed on the top
left side of the screen. To eliminate an oset, press FREQ OFFSET
and 0 4ENTER5. Pressing 4PRESET5 also sets the oset to zero.
Key Path
More
FREQ
FREQUENCY5 1 of 2 OFFSET
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

FOFFSET
17-92
Key Dictionary
FREQ SCL
LOG LIN

Softkey that species whether the limit line is derived from a

logarithmic or linear frequency axis. Underline LIN to set the
frequency axis to linear or LOG to set the frequency axis to
logarithmic.
Key Path
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

FREQ SCL
LOG LIN
33333333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Correctn
Factors
Cable
Factors
EDIT
More
CABLE 1 of 2
FREQ SCL
LOG LIN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Other
Factors
EDIT
More
OTHER 1 of 2
FREQ SCL
LOG LIN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
EMC Analyzer mode.

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Select
Axis
FREQ SCL
LOG LIN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
FREQ SCL
LOG LIN
Select
Type
...
EDIT
LIMIT
Select
Type
Select
Axis
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
33333333333333333333333333333

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit . . .
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Select
Type
Limit
Lines
FREQ SCL
LOG LIN
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
FREQ SCL
LOG LIN
Select
Axis
Edit
Limit . . .
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

Select
Type
Select
Axis
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
33333333333333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF


LIMIFRQSCL
Key Dictionary
17-93
FREQ
STEP

Softkey that sets the size of the frequency step for stepped
measurements.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
FREQ
SETUP5 1 of 4 2 of 4 STEP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
MEAS
STEPPED
FREQ
STEP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
MEAS
STEPPED
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
4FREQUENCY5
Note
FRQ DISC
NORM OFF

STOP
FREQ
STEP
33333333333333333
Hardkey that activates the center-frequency or start-frequency

function and accesses a menu of other frequency functions. The
center frequency or start frequency value appears below the graticule
on the screen.
Although the instrument allows entry of frequencies greater than
the specied frequency range, using frequencies greater than the
frequency span of the instrument is not recommended.
When changing both the center frequency and the span, change the
frequency rst since the span can be limited by the frequency value.
Softkey that indicates the status of the frequency discriminator as a

function of LO span. This is a service diagnostic function and is for
service use only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
17-94
Key Dictionary
More 1 . . .
More 4
FRQ DISC
NORM OFF
33333333333333333333333333333
FRQ SCAN
ON OFF

Softkey that reduces the signal span at the marker to zero span by
performing an automatic zoom. When FREQ SCAN ON OFF is o, the
instrument is restored to its previous setting with the exception of the
marker which is placed at the same frequency as the zero scan (span)
frequency.
Key Path
TEST5
FRQ SCAN
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333
RECZOOM
FULL
SPAN

Softkey that changes the instrument span to full span. The span can
be limited if harmonic band lock ( BND LOCK ON OFF ) is set to ON.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
FULL
SPAN5 SPAN
33333333333333333
FS
Gauss
Softkey that selects gauss as the transducer conversion units for the
Key Path
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
RECALL
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

Antenna
Units
33333333333333333333333333
Gauss

XUNITS
Key Dictionary
17-95
GHIJKL
Softkey that accesses the menu used for selecting screen title or prex
characters G through L.
Key Access

TITLE, PREFX
GND REF
DETECTOR

Softkey that displays the output of the analog-ground reference

produced on the A16 processor/video assembly. This is a service
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
GRAT
ON OFF

More 1
GND REF
DETECTOR
33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that turns the screen graticule on and o. This is helpful

when alternative graphics are drawn on the screen through a remote
controller and during plotting, when a graticule is not required.
Key Path
More
GRAT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
GRAT
HOLD
Softkey that deactivates the active function and blanks the active
function text from the display. No data can be accidentally entered
using the knob, step keys, or data keys. Activating another function
will turn o the hold function.
Key Path
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISPLAY5 HOLD

HD
17-96
Key Dictionary
HP B&W
PRINTER

Softkey that selects a black and white printer. Use this function if you
have a black and white HP printer, or if you are using a color printer,
but want to print in black and white.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Print
Set B&W
HP B&W
CONFIG5 Config Printer PRINTER
HP B&W
DJ540

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that selects a black and white printer. Use this function if you
have a black and white HP DeskJet 540 printer.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Print
Set B&W
HP B&W
CONFIG5 Config Printer DJ540
IDNUM
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Softkey that is used when the instrument is powered on the rst time.
It inputs the instrument model number and option information. This
is a service calibration function and is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
IF BW
AUTO MAN

Service
Cal
Flatness
Data
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
IDNUM
Softkey that species the intermediate frequency bandwidth. When

MAN is underlined, the coupling between center frequency (EMC
analyzer mode) or span (spectrum analyzer mode) and intermediate
frequency bandwidth is disabled. When AUTO is underlined, coupling
is reestablished.
Key Path
IF BW
AUTO COUPLE5 AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333
BW5
IF BW
AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333

IFBW, RB
Key Dictionary
17-97
IF GAINS
Softkey that displays the gain setting of the following: RF Atten, 3rd
Conv DAC, 21.4 Gain, Cal Atten, Lin Gain, and NBW Sgain. This is a
service calibration function and is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
INIT FLT
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
IF GAINS
INIT FLT 22 GHz: HP 8593EM only.

INIT FLT 26.5 GHz: HP 8593EM Option 026 and 027 only.
Softkey that is used when the instrument is powered on the rst time.
It sets the defaults for instrument atness including the start and stop
frequencies and the step size. All of the correction values are set to
zero. This is a service calibration function and is for service use only.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Cal
Flatness
Data
INIT
FLT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333
INPT LCK
ON OFF

Only available when used with an HP 85420E Option 1EM RF lter

section.
Softkey that limits tuning to values within the currently selected

input path. For example, when input lock is on, and a stop frequency
is selected out of the range of the currently selected input path, the
actual stop frequency used will be the highest possible value allowed
by the selected input path.
Key Path
More
INPT LCK
FREQUENCY5 1 of 2 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
RFLINLK
17-98
Key Dictionary
Input

section.
Softkey that accesses a menu that allows switching Input 1, Input 2,

Input 2 (bypass) or the 300 MHz calibrator signal so that it is routed to
the RF input of the instrument.
Key Path
More
More
More
More
4SETUP5 1 of 5 2 of 5 3 of 5 4 of 5
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
INPUT 1
9k-50M

Input

section.
Softkey that species the 9 kHz to 50 MHz input path (INPUT 1) as

the signal routing path of the HP 8590 EM series used with an HP
85420E Option 1EM.
Key Path
More
More
More
More
4SETUP5 1 of 5 2 of 5 3 of 5 4 of 5
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Input
INPUT 1
9k-50M
33333333333333333333333333
RFIN
INPUT 2
20M-2.9G


section.
Softkey that species the 20 MHz to 2.9 GHz input path (INPUT 2) as
the signal routing path of the HP 8590 EM series used with an HP
85420E Option 1EM.
Key Path
More
More
More
More
4SETUP5 1 of 5 2 of 5 3 of 5 4 of 5
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Input
INPUT 2
20M-2.9G
33333333333333333333333333333

RFIN
Key Dictionary
17-99
INPUT 2
BYPASS


section.
Softkey that species the bypass input path (INPUT 2) as the signal
routing path of the HP 8590 EM series used with an HP 85420E
Option 1EM.
Key Path
More
More
More
More
4SETUP5 1 of 5 2 of 5 3 of 5 4 of 5
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Input
INPUT 2
BYPASS
33333333333333333333333333

BYPASS, RFIN
INPUT Z
50
75

Softkey that sets the input impedance for voltage-to-power

conversions. The impedance you select is for computational purposes
only, since the actual impedance of 50
is set by internal hardware.
The preset value can be changed by using a service function. Select
the computational input impedance by pressing INPUT Z 50
75
or by entering 50 or 75 using the data keys.

Key Path
More
More
INPUT Z
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 2 of 3 50
75
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

INZ
INTERNAL
! STATE

Softkey that recalls the saved instrument state from the selected state
register. To recall a state, press INTERNAL ! STATE and use the data
keys to enter a state register number (valid state register numbers
are 1 through 9). State register 9 contains a previous state; state
register 0 contains the current state. If windows are being used, the
instrument state can only be recalled into the active window.
Key Path
Recall
INTERNAL
SAVE/RECALL5 Internal ! STATE
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

RCLS
17-100
Key Dictionary
Internal
! Trace

Softkey that accesses a menu that allows you to either; select the
trace in which the trace data is to be recalled (trace A, trace B, or
trace C), or recall the current limit-line tables. When recalling a trace,
select the trace in which the trace data is to be recalled, enter the
trace register number, and press 4ENTER5. If windows are being used,
only the trace of the active window can be recalled.
When recalling a limit-line table, press LIMIT LINES , enter the trace
register number, and press 4ENTER5. Valid trace register numbers are
0 through the maximum register number. The maximum register
number is the number displayed after MAX REG # = during a save or
recall operation. If a screen title is present, it is recalled with the
trace data (but not with the limit-line table). If the screen title does
not exceed 34 characters, the time and date when the data was stored
will also be displayed. INVALID SAVEREG is displayed if data has not
been stored in the trace register.
Key Path
Recall
Internal
! Trace
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

RCLT
LAST
SPAN

Softkey that changes the frequency span of the instrument to the

previous span setting.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
LAST
SPAN5 SPAN
33333333333333333

LSPAN
Key Dictionary
17-101
Limit 1
Softkey that accesses the menu for displaying, testing, deleting, and
editing of limit 1 and its corresponding margin.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333
Limit 1
More
Limit
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit 1
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

LIMINUM
LIMIT 1
ON OFF

Softkey that displays limit line 1 when ON is underlined.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333
Limit 1
LIMIT 1
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Limit 1
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
LIMIT 1
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333

LIMILINESTA
Limit 2
Softkey that accesses a menu for displaying, testing, deleting, and

editing of limit 2 and its corresponding margin.
Key Path
Limit
DISPLAY5 Lines Limit 2
33333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Limit 2

LIMINUM
17-102
Key Dictionary
LIMIT 2
ON OFF

Softkey that displays limit line 2 when ON is underlined.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333
Limit 2
LIMIT 2
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Limit 2
LIMIT 2
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333
LIMILINESTA
Limit
Lines
Softkey that accesses the limit-line menus.

Key Path
Limit
DISPLAY5 Lines
33333333333333333333
More
Limit
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-103
LIMIT
LINES

Softkey that saves or recalls limit-line tables in a trace register to or

from a card or internal memory.
When accessed by 4SAVE/RECALL5, the current limit-line table is
stored to a trace register in internal memory or on a card. To save
a limit-line table press, LIMIT LINES . REGISTER # and PREFIX=
register number then press 4ENTER5. The limit-line table is then saved
to a card.
When accessed by 4SAVE/RECALL5, the limit-line table will be recalled
from a trace register in internal memory. To recall a limit-line table
press, LIMIT LINES , use the step keys or knob to highlight the
desired le then press LOAD FILE .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL
Recall
Internal
Internal
! Trace
LIMIT
LINES
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
Trace
LIMIT
SAVE/RECALL5 Internal ! Intrnl LINES
33333333333333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
More
Trace
LIMIT
SAVE/RECALL5 Card 1 of 3 !CARD LINES
LIMITS
! CARD

33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Softkey that saves the current limit-line data to a card. To save a limit
line press, LIMITS ! CARD . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed
on the screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired register number
then press 4ENTER5. The limit line is then saved to a card.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
LIMITS
33333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

STOR
17-104
Key Dictionary
LIMITS
FIX REL

Softkey that allows you to choose xed or relative type of limit lines.
The xed (FIX) type uses the current limit line as a reference with
xed frequency and amplitude values. The relative (REL) setting
causes the current limit-line value to be relative to the displayed
center frequency and reference-level amplitude values. When limit
lines are specied with time, rather than frequency, the relative
setting only aects the amplitude values. The current amplitude
values will be relative to the displayed reference-level amplitude, but
the time values will always start at the left edge of the graticule.
As an example, assume you have a frequency limit line. If the
limit line is specied as xed, entering a limit-line segment with a
frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit-line segment at
300 MHz. If the same limit-line table is specied as relative, it is
displayed relative to the center frequency and reference level of the
instrument. If the center frequency is at 1.2 GHz, a relative limit-line
segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz will display the
limit-line segment at 1.5 GHz. If the amplitude component of the
relative limit-line segment is 010 dB, then 010 dB is added to the
reference level value to obtain the amplitude of the given component
(reference level oset included).
RELATIVE is displayed in the limit-line table when the limit-line type
is relative; FIXED is displayed when limit-line type is xed.
A limit line entered as xed may be changed to relative, and one
entered as relative may be changed to xed. When changing between
xed and relative limit-lines, the frequency and amplitude values in
the limit-line table change so that the limit line remains in the same
position for the current frequency and amplitude settings of the
instrument. If a time and amplitude limit line is used, the amplitude
values change but the time values remain the same.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
...
More
1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
LIMITS
FIX REL
...
More
1 of 2
LIMITS
FIX REL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333


LIMIREL
Key Dictionary
17-105
LIMITS
FRQ TIME

Softkey that selects whether limit lines will be entered using

frequency or sweep time to dene the segments. Limit lines can be
created by the user to test trace data. They can be specied as a table
of limit-line segments of amplitude versus frequency, or of amplitude
versus time. Time values are evaluated with respect to the EMC
analyzer sweep time. A time value of zero corresponds to the start of
the sweep, which is the left edge of the graticule.
Switching the limit line denition between frequency and time
will erase the current limit-line table. The message If you
are sure, press key again to purge data will appear. Press
LIMITS FRQ TIME again to purge the limit-line table and switch
between frequency and time.
Key Path
Limit
Edit
LIMITS
DISPLAY5 Lines Limit FRQ TIME
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
Limit
Edit
LIMITS
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit FRQ TIME
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

LIMIFT
LIN CHCK
ON OFF

Softkey that determines whether a given signal is undergoing

compression by adding (ON) or removing (OFF) additional RF
attenuation.
Key Path
LIN CHCK
AMPLITUDE5 ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333
More
More
LIN CHCK
TEST5 1 of 3 2 of 3 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

LINCHK
17-106
Key Dictionary
LIN
ON OFF

Softkey that turns on or o the generation of a linear graph of the

signal list. The linear graph is sent to the printer or plotter when
OUTPUT REPORT is executed.
Key Path
Define
LIN
OUTPUT5 Report ON OFF
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

RPTDEF
4LINE5
LINE
Hardkey that powers up the instrument.
to be synchronized with the next cycle of the line voltage.
Key Path
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
LINE
TM
LIST
! CARD

Softkey that saves the current signal list to a card. To save a signal
list press, LIST ! CARD . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed on
the screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired register number
then press 4ENTER5. The signal list is then saved to a card.
Key Path
Save
LIST
33333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

STOR
Key Dictionary
17-107
LIST
ON OFF

Softkey that enables or disables the generation of a tabular listing of

a signal list. The listing is sent to a printer when OUTPUT REPORT is
executed.
Key Path
Define
LIST
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
RPTDEF
LMT DISP
Y N AUTO

Softkey that displays any portion of the limit lines that are currently
within the display boundary of the EMC analyzer. If Y (yes) is
underlined the limit lines are displayed. If N (no) is underlined they
are not displayed. If AUTO is underlined, the display of the limit
lines is dependent on the limit test function. The limit lines will be
displayed while the limit test function is turned on, otherwise they
will be turned o.
Key Path
Limit
LMT DISP
DISPLAY5 Lines Y N AUTO
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
Limit
LMT DISP
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Y N AUTO
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

LIMIDISP
17-108
Key Dictionary
LMT TEST
ON OFF

Softkey that turns the limit-line testing and (if LMT DISP AUTO
is selected) turns the display of the limit lines on and o. When
limit-line testing is enabled, every measurement sweep of trace A is
compared to the limit lines.
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode.
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
LMT TEST
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
...
LMT TEST
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

Limit
LMT TEST
DISPLAY5 Lines ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
LMT TEST
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

LIMIFAIL, LIMITEST
Key Dictionary
17-109
LOAD
FILE

Softkey that loads a le from the card or a register into instrument

memory.
Use the step keys or knob to view sections of the directory, then press
LOAD FILE to select the highlighted le or register.
Note
Use of the LOAD FILE softkey is not recommended for recalling

limit-line tables or amplitude-correction factors stored in internal
memory.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
CATALOG
LOAD
FILE
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
CATALOG
CARD
LOAD
FILE
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
CATALOG
REGISTER
LOAD
FILE
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Recall
Catalog
CATALOG
REGISTER
LOAD
FILE
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SETUP5
RECALL
SETUP
LOAD
FILE
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Correctn
Factor
... x
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
LOAD
FILE
33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
RECALL
LIST
LOAD
FILE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

CATALOG CARD , RECALL SETUP , RECALL LIST , RECALL LIMITS ,
or RECALL ANTENNA .

RECALL CABLE , RECALL OTHER , or RECALL TRACE .
x Any of the following groups of softkeys can be used to complete the key path:
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Antenna Factors RECALL ANTENNA , or Cable Factors RECALL CABLE ,

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
or Other Factors RECALL OTHER .
17-110
Key Dictionary
EMC Analyzer mode.

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Limit
RECALL
LOAD
DISPLAY5 Lines LIMITS FILE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Limit
RECALL
LOAD
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines LIMITS FILE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

LOAD
(LOCAL)
Pressing 4CONFIG5 (LOCAL) after the instrument has been placed in the
remote mode places the instrument in the local mode and enables
front-panel control. During remote operation, \R" appears in the
lower-left corner of the screen indicating remote and talk. A \T" or
\L" may appear during remote operation, indicating talk or listen.
Pressing the 4CONFIG5 key removes the \R" symbol in the lower-left
corner.
LOG
ON OFF
Softkey that turns on or o the generation of a logarithmic graph of

the signal list. The logarithmic graph is sent to the printer or plotter
when OUTPUT REPORT is executed.

Key Path
Define
LOG
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

RPTDEF
Key Dictionary
17-111
LOGF SPD
STD FAST

Note
This softkey is only available when LOG is selected for the

Softkey that selects between optimizing the frequency accuracy or

minimizing the scan time. When \STD" is selected the frequency
accuracy of the sweep is optimized. When \FAST" is selected the scan
time of the sweep is minimized.
Selecting the LOGF SPD STD FAST function has an eect on the
minimum sweep time selected by the SWP TIME AUTO MAN function.
The minimum sweep time is less than or equal to the minimum sweep
time when SWP TIME AUTO MAN (AUTO) is selected.
Key Path
More
LOGF SPD
FREQUENCY5 1 of 2 STD FAST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
LOGF SPD
SWEEP/TRIG5 STD FAST
33333333333333333333333333333

LOGSWEEPSPD
MAIN
COIL DR

Softkey that displays the output produced by the main-coil driver on

the A7 analog interface assembly. This is a service diagnostic function
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
MAIN
SPAN

More 1
MAIN
COIL DR
33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that displays the main-coil-span signal, MC SPAN, from the

span dividers on the A7 analog interface assembly. This is a service
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
17-112
Key Dictionary
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More 1
More 2
MAIN
SPAN
33333333333333333
MAN TRK
ADJUST

Softkey that allows the user to adjust the frequency of the

tracking-generator oscillator manually using the step keys or knob.
The tracking adjust is tuned to maximize the amplitude of the trace.
Tracking error occurs when the output frequency of the tracking
generator is not exactly matched to the input frequency of the
instrument. The resulting mixing product from the instrument input
mixer is not at the center of the IF bandwidth. Any tracking errors
may be compensated for by manually adjusting the oscillator of the
tracking generator, or by performing an automatic tracking routine,
which is initiated by pressing TRACKING PEAK .
Key Path
MAN TRK
AUX/USER5 Track Gen ADJUST
33333333333333333333333333

SRCTK
MARGIN 1
ON OFF

Softkey that sets the amplitude (in negative decibels) and display state
for limit margin 1. The limit margin is a xed amplitude relative to
the limit line.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333
Limit 1
MARGIN 1
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Limit 1
MARGIN 1
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333

LIMIMARGAMP, LIMIMARGSTA
Key Dictionary
17-113
MARGIN 2
ON OFF

Softkey that sets the amplitude (in negative decibels) and display state
for limit margin 2. The limit margin is a xed amplitude relative to
the limit line.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333
Limit 2
MARGIN 2
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Limit 2
MARGIN 2
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333

LIMIMARGAMP, LIMIMARGSTA
MARK ALL
DUPLICAT

Softkey that marks all identical signals in the signal list. Duplicate
signals are those whose frequencies are too close to each other to be
resolved as distinct signals.
Key Path
More
EDIT
Signal
Selectv
Mark
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGMARK
MARK ALL
SIGNALS
Softkey that marks all signals in the signal list.

Key Path
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Signal
Marking
MARK ALL
SIGNALS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGMARK
17-114
Key Dictionary
MARK ALL
DUPLICAT
MARK LWR
DUPLICAT

Softkey that marks all duplicate signals in the list that are lower in
peak amplitude. Duplicate signals are those whose frequencies are too
close to each other to be resolved as distinct signals.
Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Signal
Marking
Selectv
Mark
MARK LWR
DUPLICAT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGMARK
MARK
SIGNAL
Softkey that marks the highlighted signal in the signal list.

Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Signal
Marking
MARK
SIGNAL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
SIGMARK
MARK TO
END

Softkey that marks all signals, after the highlighted signal, to the end
of the list.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Signal
Marking
Selectv
Mark
MARK TO
END
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
SIGMARK
Key Dictionary
17-115
MARKER
Softkey that activates a single marker on the result of a stepped

measurement. Use the knob, step keys and data keys to position the
marker. When a measurement point is selected with the marker, the
frequency and the selected detectors (peak, quasi-peak, and average
detectors) are displayed in the marker box.
Key Path
More
More
MEAS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TEST5 1 of 3 2 of 3 STEPPED STOP MARKER
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More
More
MEAS
STEPPED
FREQ
STEP MARKER
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

MKN
MARKER #
ON OFF

Softkey that turns the selected marker on or o. One of the four

markers must rst be selected by the SELECT 1 2 3 4 key, otherwise
marker 1, or the last selected marker, will be turned on or o. When
a new marker is turned on by pressing MARKER # ON OFF , the
MK TRACE AUTO ABC function always switches to AUTO and the
marker is put on the trace that is selected by the AUTO mode.
Key Path
MKR5
MARKER 1
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333

MKACTV
17-116
Key Dictionary
MARKER 1
Note
Softkey that activates a second marker at the position of the rst

marker. (If no marker is present, two markers appear at the center
of the display.) The amplitude and frequency of the rst marker is
xed, and the second marker is under your control. Annotation in
the active function block and in the upper-right corner of the screen
indicates the frequency and amplitude dierences between the two
markers. The display mode must not be changed between log and
linear while using a delta marker.
If there are already four markers when MARKER 1 is pressed, a
nonactive marker disappears, the active marker becomes a reference
marker, and the delta marker becomes the active marker.
Key Path
MKR5 MARKER 1
More
More
MKR !5 1 of 3 2 of 3 MARKER 1
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
MKD
MARKER
1 SPAN

Softkey that sets the start and stop frequencies to the values of the
delta markers. The start and stop frequencies will not be set if the
delta marker is o.
Key Path
MKR !
More
More
1 of 3 2 of 3
MARKER
1 SPAN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

MKSP
MARKER
! CF

Softkey that changes the instrument settings so that the frequency at

the marker becomes the center frequency.
Key Path
MARKER
MKR !5 ! CF
33333333333333333333333

MKCF
Key Dictionary
17-117
MARKER
!CF STEP
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Softkey that changes the center-frequency step size to match

the value of the active marker. Press 4FREQUENCY5 then
CF STEP AUTO MAN to view the step size. If marker delta is active,
the step size will be set to the frequency dierence between the
markers.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
MARKER
MKR !5 1 of 3 !CF STEP
33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333

MKSS
MARKER
! HIGH

Softkey that automatically places a marker on the highest amplitude

of a trace and displays the marker's amplitude and frequency.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
MKR !5
MARKER
! HIGH
3333333333333333333333333

MKPK
MARKER
!MINIMUM

Softkey that moves the active marker to the minimum detected

amplitude value.
Key Path
MKR !
More
1 of 3
MARKER
!MINIMUM
33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333

MKMIN
17-118
Key Dictionary
MARKER
!PK-PK

Softkey that nds and displays the frequency and amplitude

dierences between the highest and lowest trace points. Pressing
MARKER !PK-PK performs the routine similar to pressing the
following keys: 4MKR !5, More 1 of 3 , and MARKER!MINIMUM .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
MARKER
MKR !5 1 of 3 !PK-PK
33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

MKPK
MARKER
!REF LVL

Softkey that changes the instrument settings so that the amplitude at

the active marker becomes the reference level.
Key Path
More
MARKER
MKR !5 1 of 3 !REF LVL
33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333
MKRL
MARKER
! START
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Softkey that changes the start frequency so that it is equal to the

frequency of the active marker. This moves the active marker to the
left edge of the display.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
MRK !
More
More
1 of 3 2 of 3
MARKER
! START
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-119
MARKER
! STOP

Softkey that changes the stop frequency so that it is equal to the

frequency of the active marker. This moves the active marker to the
right edge of the display.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
MRK !5 1 of 3 2 of 3
MARKER
! STOP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

MKSTOP
MARKER
ALL OFF

Softkey that turns o all of the markers, including markers used for
marker track and demodulation. Marker annotation is also removed.
Key Path
More
MKR5 1 of 3
MARKER
ALL OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
MKOFF
MARKER
AMPTD

Softkey that keeps the active marker at the requested amplitude on

the screen. Once activated, the marker remains at the amplitude
selected by the step keys, knob, or data keys, even if the signal
frequency is changed. The marker will be placed on the signal
furthest left at that amplitude. If no signal exists at that amplitude, it
will be placed above the highest signal amplitude (or below the lowest
trace element if it is below all trace elements). When marker delta is
active in addition to marker amplitude, the behavior of the active
marker is useful for measuring signal bandwidths. For example, place
a marker 20 dB below the peak of a signal, press MARKER AMPTD .
The marker readout shows the 20 dB bandwidth.
Key Path
MKR5
MARKER
AMPTD
33333333333333333333333

MKA, MKTYPE
17-120
Key Dictionary
MARKER
NORMAL

Softkey that activates a single frequency marker at the center

frequency on the active trace if an onscreen marker is not already
displayed. If there is an onscreen marker before the MARKER
NORMAL function is enabled, a frequency marker is enabled at
the position of the rst marker. Use the data controls to position
the marker. Annotation in the active function block and in the
upper-right corner indicates the frequency and amplitude of
the marker. The marker stays on the trace at the horizontal
screen position where it was left unless MK TRACK ON OFF ,
MARKER AMPTD , or a \marker to" softkey function (such as
MARKER ! CF , MARKER !REF LVL , MARKER !CF STEP ,
MARKER 1 SPAN , or MARKER !MINIMUM ) is selected. Pressing
MARKER NORMAL turns o the marker-delta function.
Key Path
MARKER
MKR5 NORMAL
33333333333333333333333
MKN
Key Dictionary
17-121
MARKER
TUNE SPN

Softkey that modies the behavior of the marker positioning

functionality of the instrument when accessed through the data keys,
knob, or stepkeys.
When MARKER TUNE SPN is activated and TUNE is underlined:
Data key input, positions frequency and time markers at the

specied numeric frequency input, tuning the instrument to the
specied frequency if necessary. Numeric key-pad input terminators
are \Hz, kHz, MHz, or GHz".
Knob input, repositions the marker position as a function of
frequency, tuning the instrument to its specied frequency if the
knob input places the marker position beyond the limits of the
current span.
Step-key input:
Zero-span, steps the marker to the edge of the display and
retunes the instrument on succeeding step-key presses.
Non-zero span, positions the marker at the next peak left (4+5) or
next peak right (4*5) by one half of the intermediate frequency
bandwidth. If no signals exist, the marker is positioned at the left
edge (4+5) or the right edge (4*5) of the display. If the marker is
already at the edge of the display, subsequent steps retune the
instrument by a step equal to the size of the current span.
Key Path
MARKER
TEST5 TUNE SPN
33333333333333333333333333333

RCVRMRKR
17-122
Key Dictionary
MAX
HOLD A

Softkey that maintains the maximum level for each trace point of
trace A and updates each trace point if a new maximum level is
detected in successive sweeps.
Key Path
MAX
TRACE5 HOLD A
33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE LIN
GRAPH
MAX
HOLD A
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE LOG
GRAPH
MAX
HOLD A
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

MXMH
MAX
HOLD B

Softkey that maintains the maximum level for each trace point of
trace B and updates each trace point if a new maximum level is
detected in successive sweeps.
Key Path
MAX
TRACE5 HOLD B
33333333333333333333333
MXMH
MAX/MIN
ON OFF

Softkey causes the analyzer to put trace B into max-hold mode

and trace C into min-hold (trace A is active). When used with
MAX/MIN VIEW , this function lets you discriminate between
narrowband and broadband signals. Turning on this function turns o
NORM A/B ON OFF .
Key Path
More
TRACE5 1 of 4
MAX/MIN
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

MAXMIN
Key Dictionary
17-123
MAX/MIN
VIEW

Only available when MAX/MIN is on.
Softkey that allows the user to view MAX/MIN ON OFF function. All
traces stop sweeping and the maximum and the minimum signals are
displayed on the CRT.
Key Path
More
TRACE5 1 of 4
MAX/MIN
VIEW
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

MAXMIN
MAX MXR
LVL

Softkey that lets you change the maximum input mixer level in 10 dB
steps from 010 dBm to 0100 dBm. The mixer level is equal to the
reference level minus the attenuator setting. As the reference level
changes, the input attenuator setting is changed to keep the power
levels less than the selected level at the input mixer. Pressing 4PRESET5
resets the maximum input mixer level to 010 dBm.
Key Path
More
MAX MXR
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 LVL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
ML
MEAS
SNG CONT

Softkey that sets the stepped measurements for either single or

continuous sweep mode.
Key Path
More
More
MEAS
STEPPED
MEAS
SNG CONT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

More
More
MEAS
STEPPED
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STOP
MEAS
SNG CONT
33333333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
MEAS
STEPPED
FREQ
STEP
MEAS
SNG CONT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SNGLS, CONTS
17-124
Key Dictionary
MEAS
STEPPED

Softkey that initiates a stepped measurement. The stepped

measurement is taken between the specied start and stop
frequencies in conjunction with the selected step size ( FREQ STEP ),
step type ( STEP LOG LIN ), and step mode ( MEAS SNG CONT ).
Key Path
More
More
MEAS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
MEASURE
AT MKR
EMC Analyzer only.
Note
When the selected bandwidth is a non-CISPR bandwidth the message,

Softkey that makes a measurement, using specied detectors, with the

marker position as the measurement frequency.
Non-CISPR bandwidth being used, press CONTINUE to resume or
press USE CISPR to change, is displayed.
Key Path
MEASURE
TEST5 AT MKR
33333333333333333333333333

MEASSIG
Measure
Detector

Softkey that accesses a menu to select automatic measuring or the

measurement time of the specied detectors.
Key Path
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Measure
Detector
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-125
MEM
LOCKED

Softkey available only when SAV LOCK ON OFF is on.
Softkey that locks all the current internal state and trace registers
against further data storage. With the state and trace memory locked,
the STATE ! INTRNL and Trace ! Intrnl softkey functions are
no longer accessible; MEM LOCKED is displayed instead. Pressing
DEFAULT CONFIG or 4PRESET5 sets SAV LOCK ON OFF to OFF.
Note
When SAVE LOCK ON OFF is set to ON, none of the state registers
can be overwritten, including state register nine. The instrument
automatically updates state register nine with the last state unless the
save lock function is on.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
4CONFIG5 1 of 3
Dispose
User Mem
MEM
LOCKED
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save/Recall
MEM
LOCKED
33333333333333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

PSTATE
MIN
HOLD C
Softkey that updates trace C with the minimum level detected.

Key Path
MIN
TRACE5 HOLD C
33333333333333333333333

MINH
MIXER
BIAS DAC

Softkey that displays the output of the mixer-bias DAC from the
rst-converter driver on the A7 analog interface assembly. This is a
service diagnostic function and is for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
17-126
Key Dictionary
More 1 . . .
More 5
MIXER
BIAS DAC
33333333333333333333333333333
MK COUNT
ON OFF

Softkey that turns on the marker counter when ON is underlined.

If no marker is active before MK COUNT ON OFF is pressed, a
marker is activated at center screen. Press MK COUNT ON OFF
(so that OFF is underlined), to turn the marker counter o. Press
CNT RES AUTO MAN to change the marker counter resolution to an
uncoupled value.
An asterick (*) may appear in the upper right of the display along
with the message Marker Count. The ratio of the intermeditate
frequency bandwidth to span must be greater than 0.01 for the
marker count function to work properly. Reduce Span appears on
screen if the bandwidth to span ratio is less than 0.01. The function
will count the largest signal in a 300 Hz bandwidth even if a narrower
bandwidth setting is used.
Key Path
More
MKR5 1 of 3
MK COUNT
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
MKFC
MK NOISE
ON OFF

Softkey that reads out the average noise level, referenced to a

1 Hz noise power bandwidth, at the marker position. If no marker
is present, a marker appears at the center of the screen. The
root-mean-square noise level, normalized to a 1 Hz noise power
bandwidth, is read out. The sample detector is activated.
Key Path
More
More
4MKR5 1 of 3 2 of 3
MK NOISE
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

MKNOISE
Key Dictionary
17-127
MK PAUSE
ON OFF

Softkey that stops the instrument sweep at the marker position

for the duration of the dwell time. The dwell time can be set from
2 milliseconds to 100 seconds.
Key Path
More
More
MK PAUSE
MKR5 1 of 3 2 of 3 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

MKPAUSE
4MKR5
Hardkey that accesses the marker control softkeys which select the
type and number of markers and turn them on and o. Markers
are diamond-shaped characters that identify points of traces and
allow the traces to be manipulated and controlled on the screen.
During manual operation, four markers may appear on the display
simultaneously; only one can be controlled at a time. The marker that
is controlled is called the \active" marker. Pressing 4MKR5 activates
the MARKER NORMAL softkey.
4MKR
!5
Hardkey that accesses a menu of marker-to-functions such as:
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
MARKER
HIGH
MARKER
CF
MARKER
REF LVL
MARKER
CF STEP
MARKER
MINIMUM
MARKER
START
MARKER
STOP
MARKER
PK-PK
MARKER 1
MARKER 1 SPAN
NEXT PEAK
NEXT PK LEFT
NEXT PK RIGHT
17-128
Key Dictionary
MK READ
F T I P

Softkey that selects the marker readout to be displayed in signal

frequency, sweep time, the inverse of the sweep time, or the period
which is the inverse of the frequency. When the instrument is in zero
span the frequency type readout cannot be selected.
Key Path
More
MKR5 1 of 3
MK READ
F T I P
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

MKREAD
MK TRACE
AUTO ABC

Softkey that assigns a marker to a trace. Pressing

MK TRACE AUTO ABC will activate a marker on trace A if
there are no markers turned on. If a marker is currently active, press
MK TRACE AUTO ABC until A, B, or C are underlined. The active
marker will be moved to the selected trace.
Selecting the auto mode will move the marker to the trace that is
automatically selected. The selection order is to rst look for a trace
in the clear-write mode, in trace A, then trace B, then trace C. If
no traces are currently being written, it will select a trace in the
view-store mode, again in the order of trace A, B, then C.
Key Path
More
1 of 3
MKR
MK TRACE
AUTO ABC
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

MKTRACE
Key Dictionary
17-129
MK TRACK
ON OFF

Softkey that moves the signal that is nearest to the active marker
to the center of the screen and keeps the signal there. MKR-TRK
or CNTR-TRK appears in the upper-right corner of the display. An
asterick (*) may appear in the upper-right corner of the display while
the instrument is verifying that it has the correct signal.
Pressing MK TRACK ON OFF , 4PRESET5, MARKER NORMAL , or
MARKER ALL OFF turns o the marker-track function.
When marker track is on and the span is reduced, an automatic zoom
is performed: the span is reduced in steps so that the signal remains
at the center of the screen. If the span is zero, marker track cannot
be activated.
Key Path
More
MKR5 1 of 3
MK TRACK
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
MKTRACK
MNOPQR
Softkey that accesses a menu for selecting screen title or prex

characters M through R.
Key Access

TITLE, PREFX
4MODE5
Hardkey that accesses the menu for selecting EMC ANALYZER or

SPECTRUM ANALYZER modes of operation.

MODE, INSTTYPE
17-130
Key Dictionary
NEW
EDIT

Softkey that starts the DLP editor function, clearing the DLP editor
memory to create a new item in the 2500 byte DLP editor memory.
The item will not be in the user memory of the instrument until it is
processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey. The DLP editor memory buer
remains intact when the instrument is preset and when it is powered
o.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
...
Editor
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
NEW
EDIT
33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
...
Editor
NEW
EDIT
33333333333333333

4NEXT5
Hardkey that selects the upper or lower window as the active

window. When the windows display mode is activated, there will
be two windows displayed on the screen. Only one of the windows
is active (the active window will have a highlighted line around the
graticule). Pressing 4NEXT5 consecutively, will toggle between the two
windows.
WINNEXT
NEXT
PAGE

Softkey that displays the next page of the instrument setup. For
example, if you are currently viewing page 2 of the instrument setup
pressing NEXT PAGE will display page 3 of the instrument setup.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
SHOW
NEXT
SETUP5 1 of 4 SETUP PAGE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333

SHOWSETUP
Key Dictionary
17-131
NEXT
PEAK

Softkey that moves the active marker to the next signal peak of
higher amplitude. The signal peak must exceed the threshold value.
(Also refer to the PEAK EXCURSN and THRESHLD ON OFF softkey
descriptions.)
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
MKR !5
NEXT
PEAK
33333333333333333

MKPK
NEXT PK
LEFT

Softkey that moves the marker to the next peak left of the current
marker. The signal peak must exceed the threshold value. If there
is no peak to the left, the marker will not move. (Also refer to the
THRESHLD ON OFF softkey description.)
Key Path
NEXT PK
MKR !5 LEFT
33333333333333333333333333

MKPK
NEXT PK
RIGHT

Softkey that moves the marker to the next peak right of the current
marker. The signal peak must exceed the threshold value. If there is
no peak to the right, the marker will not move. (Also refer to the
THRESHLD ON OFF softkey description.)
Key Path
NEXT PK
MKR !5 RIGHT
33333333333333333333333333

MKPK
17-132
Key Dictionary
NO
CONVERSN

Softkey that species that no conversion units are used for the
Key Path
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Antenna
Units
NO
CONVERSN
33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
XUNITS
No User
Menus

Softkey that is displayed if no user menus have been dened by the

user.
Key Path
User
No User
AUX/USER5 Menus Menus
NORM A/B
ON OFF

33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that subtracts trace B from trace A and adds the result to
the display line. The result is displayed in trace A. The trace data is
normalized with respect to the display line even if the value of the
display line is changed. This function is executed on all subsequent
sweeps until it is turned o. A minus sign (0) appears between the
trace A status and the trace B status in the screen annotation while
the function is active. To turn o the normalize function, press
NORM A/B ON OFF so that OFF is underlined.
The normalize function is useful for applying correction data to a
trace. For example, store a measurement sweep of the response of a
system in trace B. Trace A can be used to measure the response of
the system after a device is added. Set NORM A/B ON OFF to ON to
subtract the system response from the response of the device under
test, to characterize the response of a device under test.
Key Path
More
TRACE5 1 of 4
NORM A/B
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

AMBPL
Key Dictionary
17-133
NORMLIZE
ON OFF

Softkey that subtracts trace B from trace A and adds the result to
the display line. The result is displayed in trace A. The trace data is
normalized with respect to the display line even if the value of the
display line is changed. This function is executed on all subsequent
sweeps until it is turned o. A minus sign (0) appears between the
trace A status and the trace B status in the screen annotation while
the function is active. To turn o the normalize function, press
NORMLIZE ON OFF so that OFF is underlined.
The normalize function is useful for applying correction data to a
trace. For example, store a measurement sweep of the response of a
system in trace B. Trace A can be used to measure the response of
the system after a device is added. Set NORMLIZE ON OFF to ON to
subtract the system response from the response of the device under
test, to characterize the response of a device under test.
Key Path
More
More
4TRACE5 1 of 4 2 of 4
NORMLIZE
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

AMBPL
NORMLIZE
POSITION

Softkey that displays the display line and makes the display line
function active. The trace data is normalized with respect to the
display line even if the value of the display line is changed.
Key Path
More
More
1 of 4 2 of 4
TRACE
NORMLIZE
POSITION
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

DL
NTSC
Softkey that allows you to trigger on the NTSC video format. Pressing
this softkey alters the TV line number that the instrument triggers on
internally.
Key Path
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
17-134
Key Dictionary
TV TRIG
TV
Standard
33333333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NTSC
WINDOWS 4ON5
Hardkey that activates the windows display mode and accesses the
menu of window zone functions. The windows display function splits
the screen into two separate displays. Only one of these displays is
active at a time. The currently active window will have a highlighted
line around the graticule. The WINDOWS 4NEXT5 key will switch the
active display between the upper and lower windows. The instrument
state of the active window can be changed without aecting the state
of the inactive window. The complete annotation is not displayed for
each window because of space limitations.
When the windows display mode is rst turned on, the top window
will contain an inactive copy of the previous full display. The lower
window will be active and will display a subset of the frequency
span of the upper window. The displayed span, or zone, of the lower
window will be indicated on the upper window by two vertical lines
called zone markers. The zone can be moved and changed using the
zone keys which are accessed by pressing the WINDOWS 4ON5 key.
Changing the span or center frequency of the lower window will
change the corresponding zone markers on the upper window.
Most functions can be used from within the windows display mode.
Some functions, like editing limit lines and showing the options,
require a full-sized display. They will temporarily exit the windows
display format. When the function is nished the instrument will
return to a windows display. Other functions will permanently exit
the windows display and it will be necessary to restart the windows
display mode by pressing WINDOWS 4ON5. Refer to Table 17-5.
Limit lines can be displayed and tested within the windows display
mode. Viewing and testing must be turned on independently in each
window. The current limit lines will be common to both windows.
4SAVE/RECALL5 does not save the windows display mode. If the
windows display mode is being used, the save state function saves
the state of the currently active window. The recall state function
recalls the stored state into the currently active window. Refer to the
STATE ! INTRNL softkey description for more information about
saving the display.
Table 17-5.
Functions Which Exit The Windows Display Format
Function
Description
Calibration Functions self-calibration routines

Dispose User Memory deletes user's items from instrument memory
Instrument Preset
returns instrument to preset state

WINON
Key Dictionary
17-135
OTHER
! CARD

Softkey that saves other two-port amplitude-correction factors

to a card. To save other amplitude-correction factors press,
OTHER ! CARD . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed on the
screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired register number then
press 4ENTER5. The other two-port amplitude-correction data is then
saved to a card.
Key Path
Save
More
OTHER
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

STOR
Other
Factors

Softkey that accesses a menu to turn on, recall, edit, or save other
amplitude-correction factors for any two-port device, excluding
antenna and cable factors, placed between the antenna and the
instrument.
Key Path
More
1 of 4
SETUP
Correctn
Factors
Other
Factors
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
OTHER
ON OFF

Softkey that turns on or o other two-port amplitude-correction

factors, excluding antenna and cable factors, placed between the
antenna and the instrument.
Key Path
More
Correctn
Other
Factors
OTHER
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
4OUTPUT5
17-136
Key Dictionary
Hardkey that accesses a menu to output reports to a plotter or a

printer, or send a copy of the current display to the printer.
OUTPUT
REPORT

Softkey that outputs a report to the specied printer, or graphs to a

plotter.
Key Path
OUTPUT
OUTPUT5 REPORT
OVLD
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333
Softkey that enables or disables RF and IF overload status.

Key Path
More
More
OVLD
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
OVLD
PAINTJET
PRINTER

Softkey that selects a color print. For use with an HP PaintJet printer
only.
Key Path
Print
Set Colr
PAL
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
PAINTJET
PRINTER
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that allows you to trigger on the PAL video format. Pressing
this softkey alters the TV line number that the instrument triggers on
internally.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
TV TRIG
TV
Standard
33333333333333333333333333333
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PAL
Key Dictionary
17-137
PAL0M
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Softkey that allows you to trigger on the PAL0M video format.

Pressing this softkey alters the TV line number that the instrument
triggers on internally.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
PEAK
EXCURSN

Note
TV TRIG
TV
Standard
33333333333333333333333333333
PAL0M
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Softkey that sets the minimum amplitude variation of signals that the
marker can identify as a peak. If a value of 10 dB is selected, the
marker moves only to peaks that rise and fall more than 10 dB above
the threshold line (or the noise oor of the display). Pressing 4PRESET5
or turning on power resets the excursion to 6 dB, and the threshold to
70 dB below the reference level.
When a peak has a lump on its skirt that is the peak-excursion value
above the threshold, the lump is considered a peak in its own right
only if it has a peak excursion drop on both sides. Two peaks that are
so close that only a valley divides them are not dierentiated if the
valley is not the peak-excursion value deep.
When the peak excursion value is less than 6 dB, the marker-peaking
functions may not recognize signals less than 6 dB above the noise
oor. To correct this, when measuring signals near the noise oor, the
excursion value can be reduced even further. To prevent the marker
from identifying noise as signals, reduce the noise oor variance to a
value less than the peak-excursion value by reducing the averaging
(video) bandwidth or by using video averaging.
Key Path
MKR !5
More
1 of 3
PEAK
EXCURSN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
PEAK
ON5 EXCURSN
33333333333333333333333333

MKPX
17-138
Key Dictionary
PK DWELL
TIME

Softkey that sets the measurement time when the peak detector is
measured. This key is used in conjunction with MEASURE AT MKR ,
Key Path
More
Measure
SETUP5 1 of 4 Detector
PK DWELL
TIME
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

MEASTIMEPK
PK-PK
MEAS

Softkey that initiates an automatic measurement of the frequency and

amplitude dierences of the highest and lowest signals displayed on
the screen. Pressing PK-PK MEAS performs a routine that is similar to
MARKER 1 and then moving the second marker to the lowest detected
signal.
Key Path
More
More
PK-PK
AUX/USER5 1 of 3 2 of 3 MEAS
Plot
Config

33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Softkey that accesses the menu used to address the plotter and to
select plotter options. Refer to the 4COPY5 key for more information.
Key Path
Plot
CONFIG5 Config
PLOTTER
ADDRESS

33333333333333333333333
Softkey that changes the HP-IB address of the plotter. The plotter
address is set to 5 when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed.
Key Path
CONFIG5
Plot
Config
Plt Port
Config
PLOTTER
ADDRESS
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

PLOTADRS
Key Dictionary
17-139
PLT!LJT
ON OFF
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Softkey that allows you to plot a full-page, half-page, or quarter-page

output to an HP LaserJet printer.
Key Path
PLT!LJT
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Plot
CONFIG5 Config ON OFF
PLT_ _
LOC_ _

33333333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333
Only active when PLTS/PG 2 or 4 is selected.
Softkey that selects the position of the plotter output.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
CONFIG5
PLT MENU
ON OFF

Plot
Config
PLT__
LOC__
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Softkey that allows the softkey labels to be plotted along with

the display. This function operates when the 4COPY5 key is used
in a plot conguration. The plot menu function is set to on when
DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed.
Key Path
Plot
PLT MENU
Plt Port
Config

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that accesses the menus used to select plotter options. See
the 4COPY5 key for more information.
Key Path
Plot
Plt Port
CONFIG5 Config Config
PLT PORT
HPIB PAR

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that allows you to select between HP-IB and parallel plotter
ports.
Key Path
Plot
Plt Port
17-140
Key Dictionary
PLT PORT
HPIB PAR
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
PLT PORT
SER PAR

Softkey that allows you to select between serial and parallel plotter
ports. The BAUD RATE softkey appears in this menu only when serial
is selected.
Key Path
Plot
Plt Port
PLTS/PG
1 2 4

PLT PORT
SER PAR
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that allows you to choose a full-page, half-page, or

quarter-page plot. Press PLTS/PG 1 2 4 to underline the number of
plots per page desired. If two or four plots per page are chosen, a
softkey function is displayed that allows you to select the location of
the plotter output on the paper. If two plots per page are selected,
[ ] LOC _ _ is displayed. If four plots per page are selected,
[] _LOC _ _ is displayed. Press the softkey until the rectangular
marker is in the desired section of the softkey label. The upper and
lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent the position
of the page where the plotter output will be located.
Note
The HP 7470A plotter does not support two plots per page output,
you can select one or four plots per page.
Key Path
Plot
PLTS/PG
CONFIG5 Config 1 2 4
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-141
POINT
Softkey that species a limit value for one coordinate point, so that
a point segment species a limit value for a single frequency. (For
spectrum analyzer mode only, the point segment can specify a limit
value for time also.) The point segment type is generally used as the
last segment in the limit-line table. However, if the last segment
in the table is not of the point segment type, an implicit point is
automatically added at the right-hand side of the screen.
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode.
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
POINT
Limit
More
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Select
Type
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
Select
Type
POINT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

DISPLAY
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
... y
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Select
Type
33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
POINT
... y
Select
Type
33333333333333333333333
POINT
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

17-142
Key Dictionary
POWER ON
IP LAST

Softkey that determines the state of the instrument when the

instrument is powered on. If the POWER ON function is set to IP, the
state of the instrument is the same as it is after 4PRESET5 is pressed,
when the instrument is powered on. If the POWER ON function is set
to LAST, then the state that the instrument was left in when it was
powered o is recalled.
The setting (IP or LAST) of the POWER ON function is not changed by
pressing 4PRESET5. Use the POWER ON IP LAST softkey function to
change the setting of the instrument state which is recalled at power
on. Limit lines are not recalled when the instrument is powered up.
Note
If you have a downloadable program or \personality" installed in

internal memory, the following changes apply to the operation
of the POWER ON function: When using a downloadable
program or personality, the last state of the personality is not
recalled. We recommend that if you are using a downloadable
program or personality, you set POWER ON IP LAST to IP. If
POWER ON IP LAST is set to LAST, you must press 4PRESET5
whenever you power on the instrument.
Key Path
More
More
4CONFIG5 1 of 3 2 of 3
POWER ON
IP LAST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
More
More
POWER ON
SETUP5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 IP LAST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

POWERON
Key Dictionary
17-143
PREAMP
ON OFF


section.
Softkey that switches the system preamplier in and out of the input
path.
When the preamplier is on:
The HP 8590 EM series used with an HP 85420E Option 1EM adds
12 dB of gain to the path of either INPUT 1 (9 kHz to 50 MHz) or
INPUT 2 (20 MHz to 2.9 GHz).
When the HP 85420E Option 1EM is present in the system, the
following input path selections set the preamplier as follows:
INPUT 1 (9 kHz to 50 Mhz): PREAMP ON
INPUT 2 (20 MHz to 2.9 GHz): PREAMP OFF
INPUT 2 bypass: PREAMP OFF
Key Path
More
More
More
More
4SETUP5 1 of 5 2 of 5 3 of 5 4 of 5
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Input
PREAMP
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333

PREAMP
PRESEL
DAC

Softkey that peaks the YTF preselector by allowing the user to

manually adjust the YTF ne-tune DAC. This is a service diagnostic
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
PRESEL
DEFAULT

More 1 . . .
More 5
PRESEL
DAC
33333333333333333333333
Softkey that enables default preselector data to allow maximum

frequency response without peaking the preselector. The CAL YTF
routine should be performed before pressing PRESEL DEFAULT .
Key Path
More
PRESEL
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 DEFAULT
17-144
Key Dictionary
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
PRESEL
PEAK

Softkey that optimally centers the preselector on a given signal

for the most accurate measurement of amplitude. The maximum
response found for the frequency at the marker determines the future
adjustment values that will be provided to the preselector.
Key Path
More
4AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3
PRESEL
PEAK
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

PP
4PRESET5
Note
Hardkey that provides a convenient starting point for making most

measurements. When in spectrum analyzer mode, pressing 4PRESET5
displays softkeys used for accessing the operating modes available for
your instrument. Refer to Table 17-6 and Table 17-7 for the conditions
established by pressing 4PRESET5.
The instrument preset function performs a processor test, but does
not aect CAL data. Pressing 4PRESET5 clears both the input and
output buers, but does not clear trace B. The amplitude values of
trace C are set to the reference level. Amplitude-correction factors
are turned o. Limit-line testing is turned o, but the limit-line tables
remain in internal memory. The status byte is set to 0. Instrument
preset aects all operating modes. (Refer to the key description for
4MODE5 for more information about other operating modes.)
Turning the instrument on performs an instrument preset. Turning
on the instrument also fetches CAL data; completes a processor test;
clears trace B, trace C, and both the input and output buers; turns
o amplitude correction factors; turns o limit-line testing; and sets
the status byte to 0. The last state of the instrument (before it was
switched o) is recalled, unless instrument preset has been set by the
power on function.

IP
Key Dictionary
17-145
Table 17-6. Preset for EMC Analyzer Conditions

A0B!A
Amplitude correction factors
Amplitude units
display
Attenuation
Average bandwidth
AV/IFBW ratio
Center frequency
CF step size
Coupled functions
Coupling
Detector
Display line level
Frequency oset
Intermediate frequency
bandwidth
Limit-line testing
Log scale
Marker counter
Markers
Mixer level
Operating mode
Preselector peak
Reference level
Span
SRQ mask
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
State registers 1|8
Sweep
Threshold level
Title
Trace A
Trace B
Trace C
Trace registers
Trigger
Video averaging
17-146
Key Dictionary
o
o
default values
on
10 dB (auto-coupled)
1 MHz (auto-coupled)
0.3
600 MHz
100 MHz
all set to AUTO
AC
positive peak
2.5 graticule divisions below reference
level, display o
0 Hz
120 kHz (auto-coupled)
o
10 dB/division
o
auto-coupled
o
010 dBm
EMC analyzer
reset
0 dB
top (8th) graticule
800 MHz
octal 50
200 MHz
1 GHz.
unaected
continuous
at baseline, display o
cleared
clear-write
store-blank
store-blank, at reference level
unaected
free run
o
Table 17-7. Preset Spectrum Analyzer Conditions

A0B!A
Amplitude correction factors
Amplitude units
display
Attenuation
Average bandwidth
AV/IFBW ratio
Bandwidth
Center frequency
CF step size
Coupled functions
Coupling
Detector
Display line level
Frequency oset
Limit-line testing
LIMIHI and LIMILO
Log scale
Marker counter
Markers
Mixer level
Operating mode
Preselector peak
Reference level
Resolution bandwidth
Span
SRQ mask
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
State registers 1|8
Sweep
Threshold level
Title
Trace A
Trace B
Trace C
Trace registers
Trigger
Video averaging
Video bandwidth
o
o
default values
on
10 dB (auto-coupled)
1 MHz (auto-coupled)
0.3
3 MHz
900 MHz for 8591EM, 12.38 GHz for
8593EM, 1.45 GHz for 8594EM, 3.25 GHz
for 8595EM, 6.4 GHz for 8596EM
100 MHz
all set to AUTO
AC
positive peak
2.5 graticule divisions below reference
level, display o
0 Hz
o
cleared
10 dB/division
o
auto-coupled
o
010 dBm
spectrum analyzer
reset
0 dB
top (8th) graticule
3 MHz (auto coupled)
1.8 GHz for 8591EM, 19.25 GHz for
8593EM, 2.9 GHz for 8594EM, 6.5 GHz
for 8595EM, 12.8 GH for 8596EM
octal 50
0 Hz (except 2.75 GHz for 8593EM
1.86 GHz for 8591EM, 22 GHz for
8593EM, 2.9 GHz for 8594EM, 6.5 GHz
for 8595EM, 12.8 GHz for 8596EM
unaected
continuous
one graticule above baseline, display o
cleared
clear-write
store-blank
store-blank, at reference level
unaected
free run
o
3 MHz
Key Dictionary
17-147
Print
Config

Softkey that accesses a menu used to address the printer, select a

black and white print or a color print (a color print requires either
an HP PaintJet, HP DeskJet 500C, HP DeskJet 540C, or HP DeskJet
550C printer), and reset the printer. Refer to the 4COPY5 key for more
information.
Key Path
Print
CONFIG5 Config
PRINTER
ADDRESS

33333333333333333333333
Softkey that changes the HP-IB address of the printer. The printer
address is set to 1 by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG .
Key Path
Print
Prn Port
PRINTER
ADDRESS
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

PRNTADRS
PRINTER
SETUP

Softkey that resets the printer, sets the printer to 60 lines per page,
and skips line perforations. This function enables you to obtain up to
two printouts per page. The printer paper should be at the top of the
form before using this function.
Key Path
Print
PRINTER
CONFIG5 Config SETUP
Prn Port
Config

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that accesses the menus used to select printer options. See
the 4COPY5 key for more information.
Key Path
Print
Prn Port
17-148
Key Dictionary
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
PRN PORT
HPIB PAR

Not available for Option 043.
Softkey that allows you to select between HP-IB and parallel printer
ports.
Key Path
CONFIG5
PRN PORT
SER PAR

Print
Config
Prn Port
Config
PRN PORT
HPIB PAR
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Option 043 only.
Softkey that allows you to select between serial and parallel printer
ports. The BAUD RATE softkey appears in this menu only when serial
is selected.
Key Path
CONFIG5
PRT MENU
ON OFF

Print
Config
Prn Port
Config
PRN PORT
SER PAR
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that allows the softkey labels to be printed along with the
display. This function operates when the 4COPY5 key is used in a
print conguration. The print menu function is set to ON when
DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed.
Key Path
Print
PRT MENU
pTesla
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that selects pTesla as the transducer conversion units for the
Key Path
More
Correctn
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
More
ANTENNA 1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

Antenna
Units
33333333333333333333333333
pTesla

XUNITS
Key Dictionary
17-149
PURGE
AMP COR

Softkey that clears the current user amplitude-correction factors

table.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
Amp
EDIT
PURGE
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 Cor AMP COR AMP COR
PURGE
LIMITS

33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that clears the current limit-line table from internal memory.
Pressing PURGE LIMITS displays the message: If you are sure,
press key again to purge data. Press PURGE LIMITS again if you
wish to clear the current limit-line table. Press SAVE LIMIT to save
the current limit-line table, and then press PURGE LIMITS to clear the
current limit-line table.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
...
More
1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
PURGE
LIMITS
...
More
1 of 2
PURGE
LIMITS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333


LIMIDEL
17-150
Key Dictionary
PWR SWP
ON OFF

This softkey is only available when LIN is selected for the

Softkey that activates (ON) or deactivates (OFF) the power-sweep

function, which sweeps the output power of the tracking
generator over the selected power-sweep range. The value of the
power-sweep range is displayed in the active-function block when
PWR SWP ON OFF is turned on. The available power-sweep range is
a function of the source attenuator setting: For power sweeps, press
SRC ATN MAN AUTO until (MAN) is underlined so the instrument
source attenuator is manually set (decoupled).
For a given source attenuation setting, the maximum specied
power-sweep range is shown in Table 17-8.
Table 17-8.
Tracking Generator Power Sweep Range Attenuator Power Sweep
Setting
Range
01 to 010
010.1 to 018
018.1 to 026
026.1 to 034
034.1 to 042
042.1 to 050
050.1 to 058
058.1 to 066
0 dB
8 dB
16 dB
24 dB
32 dB
40 dB
48 dB
56 dB
The output power of the tracking generator is swept with the sweep
voltage of the instrument. The output power is always swept from
the source power setting to a higher power setting (negative source
power sweep values are not allowed). Refer to the calibration guide
for your instrument for more information regarding source power and
source attenuation relationships.
Power-sweep measurements are particularly useful in making gain
compression measurements or output power versus frequency
measurements.
Key Path
PWR SWP
AUX/USER5 Track Gen ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333

SRCPSWP
Key Dictionary
17-151
QP/AVG
10X OFF

Softkey that turns o the linear 10X gain stage in the quasi-peak
and average detector signal path. Either the average or quasi-peak
detector must be the active detector.
Key Path
DET5
QP/AVG
10X OFF
33333333333333333333333333

QPGAIN
QP DET
ON OFF

Softkey that turns the quasi-peak detector on and o. This is a

Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
QP DWELL
TIME

More 1 . . .
QP DET
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Measure
Detector
QP DWELL
TIME
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

MEASTIMEQPD
Key Dictionary
More 6
Softkey that sets the measurement time when the quasi-peak detector
is measured. This key is used in conjunction with MEASURE AT MKR ,
Key Path
17-152
QP GAIN
ON OFF

Softkey that amplies the video signal ten times (20 dB). This is a
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More 1 . . .
More 6
QP GAIN
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333

QPGAIN
QP
ON OFF

Softkey that turns on and o the quasi-peak detector as the active

detector. Because of the slow charge and discharge time constants of
the quasi-peak detector, it is best to use in xed-tuned (zero span) or
narrow spans.
Key Path
QP
DET5 ON OFF
33333333333333333333333
SWITCHQPD, SWITCHAVG
QPD
OFFSET

Softkey that sets the oset of the quasi-peak detector. This is a

Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More 1 . . .
More 6
QPD
OFFSET
33333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-153
QPD RST
ON OFF

Softkey that discharges and resets the quasi-peak detector. This is a

Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
RECALL
AMP COR

More 1 . . .
More 6
QPD RST
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that recalls a user amplitude-correction factors table from the

memory card.
Key Path
More
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
Amp
Cor
RECALL
AMP COR
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR, LOAD
RECALL
ANTENNA

Softkey that recalls antenna-correction factors from a card. To recall

antenna-correction data press, RECALL ANTENNA use the step keys or
knob to highlight the desired le, then press LOAD FILE .
Key Path
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
RECALL
ANTENNA
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Correctn
Factors
Antenna
Factors
RECALL
ANTENNA
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

AMPCOR, LOAD
17-154
Key Dictionary
RECALL
CABLE

Softkey that recalls cable-correction factors from a card. To recall

cable factors press, RECALL CABLE use the step keys or knob to
highlight the desired le, then press LOAD FILE .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
More
1 of 3
RECALL
CABLE
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
1 of 4
SETUP
Correctn
Factors
Cable
Factors
RECALL
CABLE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

AMPCOR, LOAD
Recall
Card

Softkey that accesses a menu to recall instrument setups,

signals lists, states, traces, display images, limit-line tables, and
amplitude-correction factors from a card.
Key Path
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
RECALL
DISPLAY
33333333333333333333333
Softkey that recalls display images from a card.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
More
1 of 3
RECALL
DISPLAY
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
LOAD
RECALL
DLP
Softkey that recalls a downloadable program (DLP) from a card.

Key Path
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
More
1 of 3
RECALL
DLP
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

LOAD
Key Dictionary
17-155
Recall
Internal

Softkey that accesses a menu to recall states, traces, and limit-line

tables from internal memory.
Key Path
Recall
RECALL
LIMITS

33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that recalls limit-line tables from a card. To recall a limit-line

table press, RECALL LIMITS use the step keys or knob to highlight
the desired le, then press LOAD FILE .
Key Path
Limit
RECALL
DISPLAY5 Lines LIMITS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Recall
RECALL
LIMITS
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
Limit
RECALL
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines LIMITS
RECALL
LIST

33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Softkey that recalls signal lists from a card. To recall a signal list
press, RECALL LIST use the step keys or knob to highlight the
desired le, then press LOAD FILE .
Key Path
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Card
RECALL
LIST
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
RECALL
LIST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

LOAD
17-156
Key Dictionary
RECALL
OTHER

Softkey that recalls other two-port device factors from a card. To

recall other data press, RECALL OTHER use the step keys or knob to
Key Path
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
More
1 of 3
RECALL
OTHER
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
1 of 4
SETUP
Correctn
Factors
Other
Factors
RECALL
OTHER
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

AMPCOR, LOAD
RECALL
SETUP

Softkey that recalls instrument setups from a card. To recall an

instrument setup press, RECALL SETUP use the step keys or knob to
Instrument setups consist of instrument states, window states, limit
line denitions, and amplitude-correction denitions.
Key Path
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
RECALL
SETUP
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
RECALL
SETUP5 SETUP
33333333333333333333333

LOAD
RECALL
STATE

Softkey that recalls, into analyzer memory, a state saved on the

memory card.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL
Recall More
More
Card
1 of 3 2 of 3
RECALL
STATE
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

LOAD
Key Dictionary
17-157
RECALL
TRACE

Softkey that recalls traces from a card. To recall a trace press,

RECALL TRACE use the step keys or knob to highlight the desired le,
then press LOAD FILE .
Key Path
Recall
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
More
1 of 3
RECALL
TRACE
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

LOAD
REF LVL
Softkey that allows the reference level to be changed. This function

is activated when 4AMPLITUDE5 is pressed. The reference level is the
amplitude power or voltage represented by the top graticule line
on the screen. Changing the value of the reference level changes
the absolute amplitude level (in dBV) of the top graticule line. The
reference level can be changed using the data keys, knob, or step
keys.
Key Path
AMPLITUDE5 REF LVL

RL
17-158
Key Dictionary
REF LVL
OFFSET

Softkey that adds an oset value to the displayed reference level.

Osets are entered by using the data keys. Entering an oset
does not aect the trace or the attenuation value. Reference-level
osets are used when gain or loss occurs between a device
under test and the instrument input. Thus, the signal level
measured by the instrument is the level at the input of an external
amplitude-conversion device. When an amplitude oset is entered, its
value is displayed on the top left-side of the screen. To eliminate an
oset, press REF LVL OFFSET , 0 40dBm5 or 4+dBm5. Pressing 4PRESET5
also sets the oset to zero. Refer to also the EXTERNAL PREAMPG
softkey description.
Key Path
More
More
REF LVL
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 2 of 3 OFFSET
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
ROFFSET
REMEAS
ALL SIGS

Softkey that remeasures all signals in the signal list. To remeasure

each signal the algorithm spans down on the signal using the initial
frequency listed in the table. When zero span is reached, up to three
detectors can be used to measure the signal. These detectors are
selected using DETECTOR PK QP AV .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT ReLIST measure
REMEAS
ALL SIGS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
REMEASSIG
Key Dictionary
17-159
REMEAS
MARKED

Softkey that remeasures marked signals in the signal list. To

remeasure each signal the algorithm spans down on the signal using
the initial frequency listed in the table. When zero span is reached,
up to three detectors can be used to measure the signal. These
detectors are selected using DETECTOR PK QP AV .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
EDIT Re-
TEST5 1 of 3 LIST measure
REMEAS
MARKED
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

REMEASSIG
REMEAS
SIGNAL

Softkey that remeasures the signal specied in the signal list. To

remeasure each signal, the algorithm spans down on the signal using
the initial frequency listed in the table. When zero span is reached,
up to three detectors can be used to measure the signal. These
detectors are selected using DETECTOR PK QP AV .
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
EDIT Re-
REMEAS
SIGNAL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

REMEASSIG
Remeasure

Softkey that accesses a menu that remeasures one or more signals in

the signal list.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
EDIT Re-
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

REMEASSIG
17-160
Key Dictionary
RESTART
Softkey that restarts a stepped measurement. The stepped

measurement is taken between the specied start and stop
frequencies in conjunction with the selected step size ( FREQ STEP ),
step type ( STEP LOG LIN ) and step mode ( MEAS SNG CONT ).
Key Path
More
More
MEAS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
STOP
RESTART
MEAS
STEPPED
More
More
1 of 3 2 of 3
TEST
RPG
TITLE

FREQ
STEP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333
RESTART
Softkey that provides additional characters for the Change Title

function.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
Amp
Cor
Change More
Title 1 of 2
RPG
TITLE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Change
More
RPG
DISPLAY5 Title 1 of 2 TITLE
SAVE
AMP COR

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Softkey that saves the current user amplitude-correction factors table

to the current mass-storage device (memory or memory card).
Key Path
More
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
Amp
Cor
SAVE
AMP COR
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

STOR, AMPCOR
Key Dictionary
17-161
SAVE
ANTENNA

Softkey that saves antenna amplitude-correction data to a card. To

save antenna data press, SAVE ANTENNA . REGISTER # and PREFIX=
register number then press 4ENTER5. The antenna data is then saved to
a card.
Key Path
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Correctn
Factors
Antenna
Factors
SAVE
ANTENNA
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

STOR, AMPCOR
SAVE
AUTOEXEC

Softkey that stores the current instrument setup to the memory card
under the name \AUTOEXEC". When \AUTOEXEC ON" is enabled,
and the instrument is powered on with the card installed, that setting
is restored. The setup includes all traces, limit lines, correction factors
and window states.
Key Path
More
More
More
SETUP5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
SAVE
AUTOEXEC
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

STOR
SAVE
CABLE

Softkey that saves cable amplitude-correction data to a card. To

save cable data press, SAVE CABLE . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are
displayed on the screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired
register number then press 4ENTER5. The cable data is then saved to a
card.
Key Path
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Correctn
Factors
Cable
Factors
SAVE
CABLE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

STOR, AMPCOR
17-162
Key Dictionary
Save
Card

Softkey that accesses a menu to save instrument setups,

signals lists, states, traces, display images, limit-line tables, and
amplitude-correction factors to a card.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
SAVE/RECALL5 Card
33333333333333333

MSI
SAVE
EDIT

Softkey that passes the text from the DLP editor memory through the
parser to execute as instrument commands. If the text (commands)
is a valid user-dened function, it passes through the parser and into
the instrument user memory. It will replace an existing user dened
function of the same name.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal . . .
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Editor
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal . . .
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
SAVE
EDIT
33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Editor
SAVE
EDIT
33333333333333333

Save
Internal

Softkey that accesses a menu to save states, traces, and limit-line

tables to internal instrument memory.
Key Path
Save
33333333333333333333333333333

MSI
Key Dictionary
17-163
SAVE
LIMITS

Softkey that saves the current limit-line table to a card. To save a

limit-line table press, SAVE LIMITS . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are
displayed on the screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired
register number then press 4ENTER5. The limit-line table is then saved
to a card.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
SAVE
LIMITS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
Limit
SAVE
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines LIMITS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

STOR
SAVE LIN
GRAPH

Softkey that draws an EMI report graph on the display.

SAVE LIN GRAPH draws a full-screen graticule, linear frequency-axis
with limited annotation. Drop lines for peak amplitude signals with
cross-bars for quasi-peak and average amplitude readings are drawn
on the graticule. The quasi-peak cross-bar and the average cross-bar
are equal to or lower than the top of the drop line. The start and stop
frequencies are dened based on the frequencies in the signal list.
Key Path
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
SAVE LIN
GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGGRAPH, STOR
17-164
Key Dictionary
SAVE
LIST

CAUTION
Softkey that saves the current signal list to a card. To save a signal
list press, SAVE LIST . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed on the
screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired register number then
press 4ENTER5. The signal list is then saved to a card.
When saving internal data and signal lists are displayed, card warning
messages do not appear. Therefore it is recommended that you verify
that a le has been saved before clearing the data from your display.
For example, before saving signal list data, make sure that your
card is not write protected. To verify that the le was saved, press
RECALL LIST to catalog signal lists that have been saved to the card,
then check that the correct le was saved by inspecting the le name,
date, and time stamp.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE
LIST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333
STOR
SAVE LOG
GRAPH

Softkey that draws an EMI report graph on the display.

SAVE LOG GRAPH draws a full-screen graticule, logarithmic
frequency-axis with limited annotation. Drop lines for peak amplitude
signals with cross-bars for quasi-peak and average amplitude readings
are drawn on the graticule. The quasi-peak cross-bar and the average
cross-bar are equal to or lower than the top of the drop line. The start
and stop frequencies are dened based on the frequencies in the
signal list.
Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE LOG
GRAPH
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGGRAPH, STOR
Key Dictionary
17-165
SAVE
OTHER

Softkey that saves other two-port amplitude-correction factors to a

card. To save other amplitude-correction factors press, SAVE OTHER .
REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed on the screen. Use the data
keys to enter the desired register number then press 4ENTER5. Other
two-port amplitude-correction data is then saved to a card.
Key Path
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Correctn
Factors
Other
Factors
SAVE
OTHER
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AMPCOR, STOR
Save/Rcl
List

Softkey that accesses a menu used to save and recall signal lists.
Save/Rcl List also draws report graphs on the display.
Key Path
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
4SAVE/RECALL5
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Hardkey that accesses menus that allow you to store state data, trace
data, and limit-line tables in internal memory. The SAVE/RECALL
function also allows you to save or recall instrument setups, state
data, trace data, limit-line tables, amplitude-correction factors,
signal lists, and display images on the card. In addition, pressing
4SAVE/RECALL5 accesses the menus used to catalog the saved or recalled
data in internal memory or on the card.
Saving state data saves the instrument settings, but not the trace
data. Saving trace data saves both the trace data and the state data.
Display images can only be saved to or recalled from the card.
States and traces are saved in internal memory even if the instrument
is turned o or 4PRESET5 is pressed. Eight internal state registers and
many trace and limit-line registers are available for the user. The
Catalog Internal softkey is used to access the catalog functions.

SAVRCLF, MSI
17-166
Key Dictionary
SAVE
SETUP

Softkey that saves the current setup to a card. To save a setup press,
SAVE SETUP . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed on the screen.
Use the data keys to enter the desired register number then press
4ENTER5. The setup is then saved to a card.
Key Path
More
SAVE
SETUP5 1 of 4 SETUP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
STOR
SAV LOCK
ON OFF

Softkey that locks all the current internal state and trace registers
against further data storage, when ON is underlined. With the
state and trace memory locked, the STATE ! INTRNL and
Trace ! Intrnl softkey functions are no longer accessible;
the MEM LOCKED softkey function is displayed instead. Pressing
DEFAULT CONFIG or 4PRESET5 sets SAV LOCK ON OFF to OFF.
Note
When SAV LOCK ON OFF is set to ON, none of the state registers
can be overwritten, including state register nine. The instrument
automatically updates state register nine with the last state unless the
save lock function is on.
Key Path
Save
SAV LOCK
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

PSTATE
Key Dictionary
17-167
SCALE
LOG LIN

Softkey that scales the vertical graticule divisions in logarithmic

units when LOG is underlined. When LOG is the active function,
the logarithmic units per division can be changed. Values may
range from 0.1 to 20 dB per division. When LIN is underlined, the
vertical scale is in linear mode which has a range of 1 kW to 1 pW.
The reference-level value is set to the top of the screen and the
bottom graticule becomes zero volts. (Each division of the graticule is
one-eighth of the reference level in volts.)
Pressing SCALE LOG LIN always sets the units specied for the
current amplitude scale. Pressing 4PRESET5 or powering on the
instrument sets the default units.
Key Path
SCALE
AMPLITUDE5 LOG LIN
33333333333333333333333333

LG, LN
SECAM0L
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Available with Option 101 and 102 or Option 301 only.
Softkey that allows you to trigger on the SECAM0L video format.

Pressing this softkey alters the TV line number that the instrument
triggers on internally.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
SELECT
1 2 3 4

TV TRIG
TV
Standard
33333333333333333333333333333
SECAM0L
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Softkey that selects one of the four possible markers. A marker can
be turned on once it is selected. A marker that has already been
turned on will become active when it is selected. If a marker has
already been turned on and assigned to a specic trace it will become
active on that trace and the MK TRACE AUTO ABC softkey will have
the appropriate trace letter underlined.
Key Path
SELECT
MKR5 1 2 3 4
33333333333333333333333333

MKACT
17-168
Key Dictionary
SELECT
AMPLITUD

Softkey that enters either the amplitude value for the displayed
(upper or lower) limit-line segment or the amplitude value for the
current amplitude-correction point. Enter the amplitude value for
the selected frequency (or time, for spectrum analyzer mode only) by
using the data keys. Change an amplitude value by using the step
keys or the knob. Press 4BK SP5 to correct errors.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
Amp
Cor
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
EDIT
AMP COR
SELECT
AMPLITUD
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

Correctn
Factors
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
...
SELECT
AMPLITUD
33333333333333333333333333333
EMC Analyzer mode.

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
EDIT
LIMIT
... y
33333333333333333333
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
SELECT
AMPLITUD
EDIT
Limit
Lines
SELECT
. . . y LIMIT AMPLITUD
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
... x
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
SELECT
AMPLITUD
33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
... x
SELECT
AMPLITUD
33333333333333333333333333333
Any of the following group of softkeys can be used to complete the key path:
Antenna Factors , EDIT ANTENNA , or Cable Factors , EDIT CABLE
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
or Other Factors , EDIT OTHER .
y Either Limit
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
1 or Limit 2 can be used to complete the key path.
Either EDIT UPPER , or EDIT LOWER can be used to complete the key path.

AMPCOR, LIMSEG
Key Dictionary
17-169
Select
Axis

Softkey that accesses a menu which allows the selection of the

frequency and the amplitude scales for the limit line to be either
logarithmic or linear.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
33333333333333333333
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Limit
EDIT
Lines . . . * LIMIT
Select
Type
Select
Axis
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
*
SELECT
DLT AMPL

Limit
EDIT
Lines . . . * LIMIT
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Select
Type
Select
Axis
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Softkey that allows you to enter the delta amplitude value. The
middle amplitude value and the delta amplitude value create an upper
and lower limit-line segment. Enter the delta amplitude value for the
selected frequency or time by using the knob or data keys.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Limit
Edit
EDIT
SELECT
DISPLAY5 Lines Limit UP/LOW DLT AMPL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Limit
Edit
EDIT
SELECT
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit UP/LOW DLT AMPL
17-170
Key Dictionary
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
SELECT
FREQ

Note
Softkey that enters the frequency value for a limit-line segment or

for an amplitude-correction point. Enter the frequency value for the
frequency by using the data keys. Change the frequency value by
using the step keys or the knob. Press 4BK SP5 to correct errors.
A frequency coordinate must always be specied for either limit lines
or amplitude-correction factors.
Limit-line data is sorted in frequency order in the limit-line table. The
sorting occurs after you have entered the frequency and at least one
amplitude value.
For amplitude-correction factors, only two entries with the same
frequency are valid. Only the rst and last points of a series with the
same frequency values are used; the middle points are ignored.
Amplitude-correction data is sorted in the table by frequency. The
sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency
value via the front panel.
Key Path
More
More
More
Amp
Cor
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
EDIT
AMP COR
SELECT
FREQ
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Correctn
Factors
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
...
SELECT
FREQ
33333333333333333333333
EMC Analyzer mode.

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333
... y
EDIT
LIMIT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
SELECT
FREQ
... y
EDIT
LIMIT
SELECT
FREQ
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-171

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
... x
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
SELECT
FREQ
33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
... x
SELECT
FREQ
33333333333333333333333
Any of the following group of softkeys can be used to complete the key path:
Antenna Factors , EDIT ANTENNA , or Cable Factors , EDIT CABLE

or Other Factors , EDIT OTHER .
y Either Limit
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
1 or Limit 2 can be used to complete the key path.
Any of the following keys can be used to complete the key path:
EDIT UPPER , EDIT LOWER , EDIT UP/LOW or EDIT MID/DELT .

AMPCOR, LIMISEG
SELECT
FRM LIST

Only available when SIG LIST is on.
Softkey that controls the cursor position in the signal list.
Key Path
More
SELECT
TEST5 1 of 3 FRM LIST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
EDIT
SELECT
TEST5 1 of 3 LIST FRM LIST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

More
4TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Delete
Signals
SELECT
FRM LIST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
EDIT
Re-
TEST5 1 of 3 LIST Measure
SELECT
FRM LIST
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGPOS
17-172
Key Dictionary
SELECT
LWR AMPL

Softkey that enters the amplitude value for the lower limit-line
segment. Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequency or
time by using the knob or data keys. Press 4BK SP5 to correct errors.
Key Path
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
EDIT
UP/LOW
SELECT
LWR AMPL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
Limit
Edit
EDIT
SELECT
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit UP/LOW LWR AMPL
SELECT
MID AMPL

33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that enters the amplitude value for the middle of the
limit-line segment. Enter the amplitude value for the selected
frequency or time by using the knob or data keys. Press 4BK SP5 to
correct errors.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
EDIT
MID/DELT
SELECT
MID AMPL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Limit
Edit
EDIT
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit MID/DELT
SELECT
POINT

SELECT
MID AMPL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that creates or edits an amplitude-correction factor data

point. Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the
data keys, then press 4ENTER5. Press 4BK SP5 to correct errors.
Key Path
More
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
Amp
Cor
EDIT
AMP COR
SELECT
POINT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
1 of 4
SETUP
Correctn
Factors
Antenna
Factors
EDIT
ANTENNA
SELECT
POINT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Cable
Factors
EDIT
CABLE
SELECT
POINT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Correctn
Other
Factors
EDIT
OTHER
SELECT
POINT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

AMPCOR
Key Dictionary
17-173
SELECT
PREFIX

Softkey that allows you to select an already existing prex of a

cataloged le and changes the current prex to this selected prex.
This provides a convenient method for saving and recalling data to
and from the card and for cataloging by the prex. Use either the
knob or step keys to select the le.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Card
33333333333333333
... y
SELECT
PREFIX
33333333333333333333333
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Card
33333333333333333333333
... *
SELECT
PREFIX
33333333333333333333333
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
... x
SAVE/RECALL5
Recall
Internal
Catalog
Internal
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
SELECT
PREFIX
33333333333333333333333
... x
33333333333333333333333
RECALL
SETUP5 SETUP
SELECT
PREFIX
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Correctn
Factors
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
... k
SELECT
PREFIX
33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Limit
RECALL
SELECT
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines LIMITS PREFIX
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
17-174
Key Dictionary
RECALL
LIST
SELECT
PREFIX
SELECT
PREFIX
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
EMC Analyzer mode.

Limit
RECALL
SELECT
DISPLAY5 Lines LIMITS PREFIX
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
CATALOG CARD , RECALL SETUP , RECALL LIST , RECALL LIMITS ,
or RECALL ANTENNA .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CATALOG CARD , SETUP!CARD , LIST !CARD , LIMITS !CARD , or
ANTENNA !CARD .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CATALOG ALL , CATALOG REGISTER , CATALOG VARIABLS , or
CATALOG PREFIX .
k Any of the following group of softkeys can be used to complete the key path:
Antenna Factors , EDIT ANTENNA , or Cable Factors , EDIT CABLE , or
Other Factors , EDIT OTHER .
Key Dictionary
17-175
SELECT
SEGMENT

Softkey that creates or edits a limit-line segment. Limit lines are

created by entering frequency (or time) and amplitude values into
a limit-line table. The frequency (or time, for spectrum analyzer
mode only) and amplitude values specify a coordinate point from
which a limit-line segment is drawn. The coordinate point is the
lowest frequency or time point of the line segment. Limit lines
are constructed from left to right. To select a segment, press
SELECT SEGMENT , enter the segment number you wish to specify,
then press a units key.
Up to 30 segments can be specied per limit-line table.
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode.
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333
...
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333
DISPLAY5
33333333333333333333
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
...
EDIT
More
LIMIT 1 of 2
...
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
17-176
Key Dictionary
SELECT
SEGMENT
...
EDIT
LIMIT
SELECT
SEGMENT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
...
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Select
Type
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
SELECT
SEGMENT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
SELECT
SEGMENT
Limit
Lines
EDIT
LIMIT
EDIT
More
LIMIT 1 of 2
SELECT
SEGMENT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

...
EDIT
LIMIT
Select
Type
SELECT
SEGMENT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
... y
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
DISPLAY5
33333333333333333333333333
Limit
Lines
SELECT
SEGMENT
More
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
... y
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
... y
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
SELECT
SEGMENT
33333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
SELECT
. . . y 1 of 2 SEGMENT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
SELECT
SEGMENT
More
1 of 2
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
... y
Select
Type
SELECT
SEGMENT
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

SELECT
TIME

Note
Softkey that allows you to enter the time value for a limit-line
segment. The time value is with respect to the sweep time. A time
value of zero is the start of the sweep, which is the left edge of the
graticule. Enter the time value by using the data keys. Change the
time value by using the step keys or the knob.
Limit-line data is sorted in time order in the limit-line table. The
sorting occurs after you have entered the time and at least one
amplitude value.
Key Path
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
... *
SELECT
TIME
33333333333333333333333
Either EDIT UP/LOW or EDIT MID/DELT can be used to complete the key
path.
Key Dictionary
17-177
Select
Type

Softkey that accesses the menu used to select the limit-line type of
line. Press FLAT to select a at line, press SLOPE to select a sloped
line, or press POINT to select a point.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode.
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Select
Type
...
EDIT
LIMIT
Select
Type
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
... y
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Select
Type
33333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Select
Type
... y
33333333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
SELECT
UPR AMPL

Softkey that enters the amplitude value for the upper limit-line
segment. Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequency or
time by using the knob or data keys. Press 4BK SP5 to correct errors.
Key Path
Limit
Edit
EDIT
SELECT
DISPLAY5 Lines Limit UP/LOW UPR AMPL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
EDIT
UP/LOW
SELECT
UPR AMPL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
17-178
Key Dictionary
Selectv
Mark

Softkey that accesses a menu that marks one or more signals on the
signal list.
Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Signal
Marking
Selectv
Mark
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SIGMARK
Service
Cal

Softkey that accesses several service calibration functions. The

service calibration functions are designed for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag

Service
Cal
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that accesses several service diagnostic functions. The service

diagnostic functions are designed for service use only.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
SET ATTN
ERROR

Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that sets the calibration attenuator-error factors (this is

not the same as the input attenuator). This is a service calibration
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Cal
SET ATTN
ERROR
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-179
Set B&W
Printer

Softkey the accesses the softkeys for setting up black and white HP
and Epson compatible printers.
Key Path
Print
Set B&W
Set Colr
Printer

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that accesses the softkey for setting up the HP PaintJet and
HP DeskJet printers.
Key Path
Print
Set Colr
SET
DATE

33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that allows you to set the date of the real-time clock. To
enter the date in the YYMMDD format use the data keys then press
4ENTER5. Valid year (YY) values are 00 through 99. Valid month (MM)
values are from 01 to 12, and valid day values are from 01 to 31.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Time
SET
CONFIG5 Date DATE
33333333333333333 33333333333333333

SETDATE
SET
TIME

Softkey that allows you to set the time of the real-time clock. To
enter the time in 24 hour, HHMMSS format, use the data keys then
press 4ENTER5. Valid hour (HH) values are from 00 to 23. Valid minute
(MM) and second (SS) values are from 00 to 59.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Time
SET
CONFIG5 Date TIME
33333333333333333 33333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Cal At
CAL5 Time
SET
TIME
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333

CALTIME, SETTIME
17-180
Key Dictionary
SETTINGS
ON OFF

Softkey that turns on or o the generation of a tabular listing of

current instrument settings. The listing will be sent to the printer
when OUTPUT REPORT is executed.
Key Path
Define
SETTINGS
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

RPTDEF
4SETUP5
SETUP
! CARD

Hardkey that accesses softkey functions that control the EMC

analyzer or spectrum analyzer settings to be used in a measurement,
such as frequency range, antenna correction factors, and limit lines.
Softkey that stores the settings of the instrument to the card. This
includes: windows and the states associated with them, limit lines,
correction factors, and other settings.
Key Path
Save
SETUP
33333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

STOR
4SGL SWP5
Hardkey that initiates a sweep when in single-sweep mode.

TS
Key Dictionary
17-181
SHOW 1 1
PK QP AV

Softkey that species that any or all of the following are included
in the list portion of the report: peak detector delta from limit 1,
quasi-peak detector delta from limit 1, or average detector delta from
limit 1.
Key Path
Define
OUTPUT5 List
SHOW 1 1
PK QP AV
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

TBLDEF
SHOW 1 2
PK QP AV

Softkey that species that any or all of the following are included
in the list portion of the report: peak detector delta from limit 2,
quasi-peak detector delta from limit 2, or average detector delta from
limit 2.
Key Path
Define
OUTPUT5 List
SHOW 1 2
PK QP AV
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

TBLDEF
SHOW COR
ON OFF

Softkey that species the total correction factors are included as part
of the list portion of the report. The listing is sent to the printer upon
receipt of an OUTPUT REPORT .
Key Path
Define
OUTPUT5 List
SHOW COR
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

TBLDEF
17-182
Key Dictionary
SHOW DET
PK QP AV

Softkey that species that any or all of the following are included in
the list portion of the report: the peak detector, quasi-peak detector,
and the average detector. The listing is sent to the printer upon
receipt of an OUTPUT REPORT .
Key Path
Define
OUTPUT5 List
SHOW DET
PK QP AV
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

TBLDEF
SHOW MKR
ON OFF

Softkey that species signals that are marked in the signal list will be
included as part of the list portion of the report.
Key Path
OUTPUT5
Define
List
SHOW MKR
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

TBLDEF
SHOW
SETUP

Softkey that shows current settings of the instrument on the display.

SHOW SETUP consists of four pages of information, including existing
lenames, correction-factor data, limit-line data, frequency settings,
trace data, and so on. To access each succeeding page of information
press NEXT PAGE . To exit, press Previous Menu .
Key Path
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4
SHOW
SETUP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

SHOWSETUP
Key Dictionary
17-183
SHW INST
CONFIG

Softkey changes to EXIT SHOW when selected.
Softkey that displays information about the conguration of the

instrument including; model number, serial number, and the rmware
revision date. Also included are the specic devices installed; HP-IB
interface, RS-232 interface, tracking generator (TG), quasi-peak
detector (QPD), FM demodulator (Demod), precision frequency
reference (oven), narrow bandwidths (NBW), and additional
information about the analyzer.
Key Path
More
4CONFIG5 1 of 3
SHW INST
CONFIG
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

HAVE, ID, REF, SER
SIG LIST
ON OFF

Softkey that turns on or o the signal list viewing and editing

functions.
Key Path
More
SIG LIST
TEST5 1 of 3 ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGLIST
Signal
Marking

Softkey that accesses a menu to mark one or more signal on the signal
list.
Key Path
More
EDIT
Signal
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SIGMARK
17-184
Key Dictionary
SLOPE
Softkey that draws a straight line between the coordinate point of

the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment,
producing limit-line values for all frequencies between the two points.
Key Path
EMC Analyzer mode.
DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
...
33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
SLOPE
Limit
More
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
Select
Type
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
EDIT
LIMIT
Select
Type
SLOPE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

DISPLAY5
Limit
Lines
Edit
Limit
... y
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Select
Type
More
Limit
Edit
SETUP5 1 of 4 Lines Limit
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
33333333333333333333333
SLOPE
... y
Select
Type
33333333333333333333333
SLOPE
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

SORT BY
AVG AMP

Softkey that sorts the internal signal list by average amplitude. This
list is sorted in descending order.
Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Sort
Signals
SORT BY
AVG AMP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SIGSORT
Key Dictionary
17-185
SORT BY
DLTA LIM

This key is only active when VIEW 1 OFF is pressed rst.
Softkey that sorts the internal signal list by delta limits. The list will
be sorted in descending order.
Key Path
More
EDIT
Sort
TEST5 1 of 3 LIST Signals
SORT BY
DLTA LIM
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SIGSORT
SORT BY
FREQ

Softkey that sorts the internal signal list by the frequency of the
signals. The list will be sorted in ascending order.
Key Path
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Sort
Signals
SORT BY
FREQ
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SIGSORT
SORT BY
PK AMP

Softkey that sorts the internal signal list by peak amplitude. The list
will be sorted by descending order.
Key Path
More
EDIT
Sort
TEST5 1 of 3 LIST Signals
SORT BY
PK AMP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SIGSORT
17-186
Key Dictionary
SORT BY
QP AMP

Softkey that sorts the internal signal list by quasi-peak amplitude. The
list will be sorted by descending order.
Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Sort
Signals
SORT BY
QP AMP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SIGSORT
Sort
Signals

Softkey that accesses a menu to sort the internal signal list based on
the softkey selected. Softkeys available are:
SORT BY FREQ
SORT BY PK AMP
SORT BY QP AMP
SORT BY AVG AMP
SORT BY DLTA LIM
SORT BY DLTA LIM is only available when VIEW 1 OFF is pressed.

Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
EDIT
LIST
Sort
Signals
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SIGSORT
4SPAN5
or SPAN
Hardkey and softkey that activates the SPAN function and accesses
the frequency-span functions. Pressing SPAN allows the user
to change the frequency range symmetrically about the center
frequency. The frequency-span readout describes the total displayed
frequency range; to determine frequency span per horizontal graticule
division for linear sweeps, divide the frequency span by 10.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Key Path
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SPAN5 SPAN

SP
Key Dictionary
17-187
SPAN
ZOOM

Softkey that nds the highest signal peak onscreen. If a marker

is not already on the peak, it places a marker on it, turns on the
marker-track function, and activates the span function.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SPAN
SPAN5 ZOOM
33333333333333333

SPZOOM
SPEAKER
ON OFF

Softkey that turns the internal speaker on and o. The volume from
the speaker is controlled by the front-panel volume control knob and
FM GAIN (when using FM demodulation). There is no output from
the speaker unless demodulation is turned on. Pressing 4PRESET5 sets
SPEAKER ON OFF to ON.
Key Path
DEMOD5
SPEAKER
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333

SPEAKER
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER

Softkey that allows the spectrum analyzer mode only to be preset.

Refer to Table 17-7 for the preset signal analyzer conditions. Other
operating modes will not be aected.
Key Path
MODE5 SPECTRUM ANALYZER , when the instrument mode of operation
is EMC analyzer.

MODE, INSTTYPE
17-188
Key Dictionary
SQUELCH
Softkey that adjusts the squelch level. The squelch level mutes weak
signals and passes strong signals. The squelch level aects the audio
output only. If the internal speaker is on, audio signals are not output
unless the signal strength exceeds the squelch threshold. The squelch
level does not aect the rear-panel AUX VIDEO OUT signal. Squelch
level is indicated onscreen by the unitless numbers 0 to 100, with 0
being minimum squelch threshold (all signals are passed), and 100
being maximum squelch threshold (no signals are passed). The default
squelch value is 0.
Key Path
DEMOD5 SQUELCH

SQLCH
SRC ATN
MAN AUTO

Softkey that allows you to select between automatic and manual

adjustment of the tracking generator's switching attenuator. It can be
manually adjusted from 0 to 56 dB in 8 dB steps. When auto-coupled,
the SRC ATN function automatically adjusts the attenuator to
yield the source amplitude level specied by the SRC PWR ON OFF
softkey function. Set SRC ATN MAN AUTO so that MAN is underlined
(decoupled) for power sweeps greater than 8 dB.
Key Path
AUX/USER5 Track Gen
SRC ATN
MAN AUTO
33333333333333333333333333333
SRCAT
Key Dictionary
17-189
SRC PWR
OFFSET

Softkey that osets the displayed power of the tracking generator

(SRC). Oset values may range from 0327 dB to +327 dB.
Using the source-power-oset capability of the tracking generator
allows you to take system losses or gains into account, thereby
displaying the actual power delivered to the device under test.
Key Path
AUX/USER5
More
Track Gen 1 of 2
SRC PWR
OFFSET
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

SRCPOFS
SRC PWR
ON OFF

Softkey that activates (ON) or deactivates (OFF) the output power of

the tracking generator (SRC). The power level can then be adjusted
using the data keys, step keys, or knob.
Key Path
SRC PWR
AUX/USER5 Track Gen ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333

SRCPWR
SRC PWR
STP SIZE

Softkey that sets the step size of the source-power level,

source-power oset, and power-sweep range functions. The step size
may be values from 0327 dB to 327 dB. The default setting is one
vertical scale division.
Key Path
More
SRC PWR
AUX/USER5 Track Gen 1 of 2 STP SIZE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SRCPSTP
17-190
Key Dictionary
START
FREQ

Softkey that sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule. The
left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop
frequencies. When these frequencies are activated, their values are
displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span.
Key Path
START
FREQUENCY5 FREQ
33333333333333333333

FA
STATE
! CARD
Softkey that saves the current analyzer state on the memory card.

Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Save
More
More
STATE
SAVE/RECALL5 Card 1 of 3 2 of 3 ! CARD
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333
STOR
STATE
! INTRNL

Softkey changes to MEM LOCKED when SAV LOCK ON.
Softkey that saves the current instrument state in the selected state
register. To save the current state, press STATE ! INTRNL , and use
the data keys to enter a state register number (valid state register
numbers are 1 through 8). If windows are being used, only the state
of the active window will be saved.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
STATE
! INTRNL
33333333333333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333

SAVES
Key Dictionary
17-191
STEP
LOG LIN

Softkey that initiates a logarithmic or linear stepped measurement.

The stepped measurement is taken between the specied start
and stop frequencies in conjunction with the selected step size
( FREQ STEP ), and step mode ( MEAS SNG CONT ). The parameter
specied is multiplied by the intermediate frequency (resolution)
bandwidth to determine the actual step size.
Key Path
More
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4 2 of 4
STEP
LOG LIN
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
STOP
Softkey that stops a stepped measurement.
Key Path
More
More
MEAS
STEPPED
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
STOP
FREQ

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STOP
Softkey that sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule. The
left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop
frequencies. When these frequencies are activated, their values are
displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
FREQUENCY5
STOP
FREQ
33333333333333333

FB
STORE
FLATNESS

This key is only active when EDIT FLATNESS is pressed rst.
Softkey that stores amplitude versus frequency calibration factors.

This is a service calibration function and is for service use only.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
CAL5 1 of 4
More
2 of 4
Service
Cal
Flatness
Data
EDIT
FLATNESS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

STORE
FLATNESS
33333333333333333333333333333
17-192
Key Dictionary
STOR PWR
ON UNITS

Softkey that sets the default settings for the units used in the linear
and the logarithmic modes when the instrument is powered on.
The settings for the units can be changed during normal instrument
operation but they will return to the default settings when the
instrument is powered on again. This is a service calibration function.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
STP GAIN
ZERO

Service
Cal
STOR PWR
ON UNITS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that disables the two 20 dB step-gain ampliers on the A12
amplitude control assembly. This is a service diagnostic function and
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
STUVWX
Service
Diag
STP GAIN
ZERO
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that accesses the menu used for selecting screen title or prex
characters S through X.
Key Access

TITLE, PREFX
Key Dictionary
17-193
SWEEP
CONT SGL

Softkey that switches the instrument between continuous-sweep

mode and single-sweep mode. If the instrument is in single-sweep
mode, SGL is underlined. Press 4SINGLE5 to enable a sweep when in
single-sweep mode. When continuous-sweep mode is in use, one
sweep follows another as soon as it is triggered. Pressing 4PRESET5 and
turning the power on, selects continuous sweep.
Key Path
SWEEP
SWEEP/TRIG5 CONT SGL
33333333333333333333333333333
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
SWEEP
CONT SGL
33333333333333333333333333333

CONTS, SNGLS
SWEEP
LOG LIN

Does not operate if ANALOG+ is on.
Softkey that selects between a logarithmic and linear frequency axis.
Key Path
SWEEP
FREQUENCY5 LOG LIN
33333333333333333333333333
SWEEP
SWEEP/TRIG5 LOG LIN
33333333333333333333333333

SWEEPTYPE
SWEEP
RAMP

Softkey that displays the RAMP signal from the sweep-ramp generator
that is located on the A7 analog interface assembly. This is a service
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
17-194
Key Dictionary
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1
More 2
SWEEP
RAMP
33333333333333333333
SWEEP
TIME DAC

Softkey that displays the output of the sweep-time DAC (SWP_DAC)

from the sweep-ramp generator that is on the A7 analog interface
only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
4SWEEP/TRIG5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1
More 2
SWEEP
TIME DAC
33333333333333333333333333333
Hardkey that accesses the sweep-time menu and the sweep-time

softkey functions SWP TIME AUTO MAN and SWEEP CONT SGL . It also
accesses the trigger mode functions.
SNGLS, CONTS, TM
SWP CPLG
SR SA

Softkey that selects stimulus-response (SR) or EMC analyzer autocoupled sweep time. In stimulus-response mode, auto-coupled sweep
times are usually much faster for swept-response measurements.
Stimulus-response auto-coupled sweep times are typically valid in
stimulus-response measurements when the frequency span of the
instrument is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under
test.
Key Path
More
SWP CPLG
AUX/USER5 Track Gen 1 of 2 SR SA
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

MEASURE, SWPCPL
Key Dictionary
17-195
SWP TIME
AUTO MAN

Softkey that selects the length of time in which the instrument

sweeps the displayed frequency span. In all non-zero frequency spans,
the sweep time varies from 20 milliseconds to 100 seconds. In zero
frequency span, the fastest sweep time is 15 milliseconds. Reducing
the sweep time increases the rate of sweeps. The sweep time can be
changed using the step keys, the knob, or the data keys.
For Option 101 or Option 301 only: Option 101 provides sweep times
from 20 s to 20 ms in zero span.
Key Path
AUTO COUPLE5
SWP TIME
AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333
SWP TIME
SWEEP/TRIG5 AUTO MAN
33333333333333333333333333333
ST
SYNC NRM
NTSC

Softkey that changes the rear panel MONITOR output between normal
internal monitor horizontal and vertical synchronization constants or
the NTSC video compatible format. In the NTSC mode, the monitor
output is compatible with NTSC video cassette recorders.
The display will be compressed slightly when using the NTSC format
instead of the normal format. The NTSC format has less vertical
resolution than the display. The top and bottom of the display are
compressed slightly so that all of the information can be t into the
vertical resolution available with the NTSC format.
Key Path
More
More
SYNC NRM
CONFIG5 1 of 2 2 of 3 NTSC
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SYNCMODE
17-196
Key Dictionary
SYNC NRM
PAL

Softkey that changes the rear panel MONITOR output between normal
internal monitor horizontal and vertical synchronization constants
or the PAL video compatible format. In the PAL mode, the monitor
output is compatible with PAL video cassette recorders.
The display will be compressed slightly when using the PAL format
instead of the normal format. The PAL format has less vertical
resolution than the display. The top of the display is compressed
slightly so that all of the information can be t into the vertical
resolution available with the PAL format.
Key Path
More
More
4CONFIG5 1 of 2 2 of 3
SYNC NRM
PAL
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SYNCMODE
TABLE
ADDRESS

Softkey that sets the HP-IB address of an EMCO-compatible automatic

turntable.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
TABLE
SETUP5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4 ADDRESS
TABLE
CCW STOP

33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Softkey that starts or stops an EMCO-compatible turntable's rotation

in the counterclockwise direction.
Key Path
More
More
Tower/
TEST5 1 of 3 2 of 3 Turntbl
TABLE
CW STOP

TABLE
CCW STOP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that starts or stops an EMCO-compatible turntable's rotation

in the clockwise direction.
Key Path
More
More
Tower/
TABLE
CW STOP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-197
4TEST5
THRESHLD
ON OFF

Hardkey that provides control for measuring signals and manipulating

lists of measured signals.
Softkey that sets a lower boundary to the active trace. The threshold
line \clips" signals that appear below the line when this function is
on. The boundary is dened in amplitude units that correspond to its
vertical position when compared to the reference level.
The value of the threshold appears in the active-function block and
on the lower-left side of the screen. The threshold level does not
in uence the trace memory or marker position. The peaks found by
the markers must be at least the peak-excursion value above the
threshold level. The value of the threshold level can be changed using
the step keys, the knob, or the data keys. If a threshold is active,
press THRESHLD ON OFF until OFF is selected to turn the threshold
display o. The threshold value aects peak searching even when the
THRESHLD function is set to o.
Key Path
More
THRESHLD
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

TH
Time
Date

Softkey that accesses the menu used to set and display the real-time
clock.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Time
CONFIG5 Date
33333333333333333

TIMEDATE
17-198
Key Dictionary
TIMEDATE
ON OFF

Softkey that turns the display of the real-time clock on or o.

Pressing DEFAULT CONFIG sets TIMEDATE ON OFF to ON.
Key Path
Time
TIMEDATE
CONFIG5 Date ON OFF
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

TIMEDSP
TOWER
ADDRESS

Softkey that sets the HP-IB address of an EMCO-compatible

automated antenna position (tower).
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
More
More
4SETUP5 1 of 4 2 of 4 3 of 4
TOWER
ADDRESS
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
TOWER
DN STOP

Softkey that sends an EMCO-compatible automated tower down or

steps its descent.
Key Path
More
More
Tower/
Turntbl
TOWER
DN STOP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Tower/
Turntbl

Softkey that accesses a menu of functions for controlling

EMCO-compatible towers and turntables.
Key Path
More
More
Tower/
Turntbl
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
TOWER
UP STOP

Softkey that sends an EMCO-compatible automated tower up or steps

its ascent.
Key Path
More
More
Tower/
Turntbl
TOWER
UP STOP
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-199
TOWER
VERT HOR

Softkey that sets the antenna polarity to either verticle or horizontal,

using an EMCO-compatible automated tower. This function may
require multiple presses to calibrate.
Key Path
More
More
Tower/
TOWER
VERT HOR
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
4TRACE5
Hardkey that accesses the trace softkeys that store and manipulate
trace information. Each trace is comprised of a series of data points
that form a register where amplitude information is stored. The
instrument updates the information for any active trace with each
sweep. If two traces are being written to, they are updated on
alternating sweeps.
TRACE
A B C
Softkey that selects the menu used for trace A, trace B, or trace C
functions. Press TRACE A B C until the letter of the desired trace is
underlined.

Key Path
TRACE
TRACE5 A B C
TRACE A
33333333333333333333
Softkey that saves trace A data to a card. To save trace A data press,
Trace ! Card , TRACE A . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed
on the screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired register number.
Trace A data is then saved to a card.
Key Path
SAVE/RECALL
Recall
Internal
Internal
! Trace
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
TRACE A
Save
More
Trace
SAVE/RECALL5 Card 1 of 3 ! CARD TRACE A
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

Save
Trace
SAVE/RECALL5 Internal ! Intrnl TRACE A
33333333333333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333

SETC
17-200
Key Dictionary
TRACE B
Softkey that saves trace B data to a card. To save trace B data press,
Trace ! Card , TRACE B . REGISTER # and PREFIX= are displayed
on the screen. Use the data keys to enter the desired register number.
Trace B data is then saved to a card.
Key Path
Recall
Internal
! Trace
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
TRACE B
Save
More
Trace
SAVE/RECALL5 Card 1 of 3 ! CARD TRACE B
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Trace
! Intrnl
33333333333333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333
TRACE B

SETC
TRACE B
VW OFF

Softkey that allows viewing, (VW) or blanking, (OFF) trace B. This

softkey only appears when NORM A/B ON OFF is set to ON.
Key Path
More
TRACE5 1 of 4
TRACE B
VW OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
BLANK, VIEW
Key Dictionary
17-201
TRACE C
Softkey that saves trace C data to a card. To save trace C data press,
Trace ! Card , press, Trace ! Card , TRACE C . REGISTER # and
PREFIX= are displayed on the screen. Use the data keys to enter the
desired register number. Trace C data is then saved to a card.
Key Path
Recall
Internal
SAVE/RECALL5 Internal ! Trace
TRACE C
33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Save
More
Trace
SAVE/RECALL5 Card 1 of 3 ! CARD TRACE C
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Trace
! Intrnl
33333333333333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333
TRACE C

SETC
Trace
! Card

Softkey that accesses a menu to select the item to be stored on a card:

the trace to be saved (trace A, trace B, or trace C), or a limit-line
table.
Key Path
Save
More
Trace
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333

STOR
17-202
Key Dictionary
Trace
! Intrnl

Softkey changes to MEM LOCKED when SAV LOCK ON.
Softkey that accesses a menu to select the item to be stored in

internal memory: the trace to be saved (trace A, trace B, or trace
C), or a limit-line table. To save a trace, select the trace to be
saved, enter the trace-register number, and press 4ENTER5. To save a
limit-line table press, LIMIT LINES , enter the trace-register number,
then press 4ENTER5. Valid trace-register numbers are 0 through the
maximum register number. The maximum register number is the
number x displayed after MAX REG # = x during a save or recall
operation. If a screen title is present, it is saved with the trace data.
The time and date that the trace was stored is appended to the screen
title. If windows are being used, only the trace of the active window
will be saved.
Key Path
SAVE/RECALL5
Save
Internal
Trace
! Intrnl
33333333333333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333333333
SAVET
Track Gen
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Available with Option 010 only.
Softkey that accesses a menu that controls the built-in tracking

generator.
Key Path
AUX/USER5 Track Gen
Key Dictionary
17-203
TRACKING
PEAK

Note
Softkey that activates a routine to adjust the tracking adjustment for

the peak response of the tracking generator.
For tracking peak to function properly, the tracking generator must be
connected to the instrument.
Before making a stimulus-response measurement, care must be taken
to maximize the tracking adjustment of the tracking generator to
ensure maximum available dynamic range.
Key Path
AUX/USER5
Track
Gen
TRACKING
PEAK
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

SRCTKPK
Trigger
Softkey that accesses a menu for setting the trigger mode of the EMC
analyzer.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger

TM
TUNE
SLO FAST

Softkey that makes center frequency the active function and, when
FAST is underlined, increases the speed of the marker positioning and
center frequency tuning functionality of the knob and step keys.
For marker positioning, the knob changes the marker position by four
times the normal rate (FAST).
For center frequency, the knob tuning is eight times the normal rate.
(FAST)
Key Path
TUNE
TEST5 SLO FAST
33333333333333333333333333333

FASTMRKR
17-204
Key Dictionary
TV
LINE #

Available with Option 101 and 102 or 301 only.
Softkey that selects the line number of the video picture eld. The
values allowed are 1 to 1012.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
TV
TRIG
TV
LINE #
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333

TVLINE
TV
Standard

Softkey that allows the instrument to trigger on the standard video

formats; NTSC, PAL, PAL0M, or SECAM0L.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
TV
TRIG
TV
Standard
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
TVSTND
TV SYNC
NEG POS

Softkey that selects the polarity of the modulation of the video

format. NTSC uses the negative or positive modulation video format.
NTSC, PAL, PAL0M use negative modulation. SECAM0L uses positive
modulation.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
TV
TRIG
TV SYNC
NEG POS
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

TVSYNC
Key Dictionary
17-205
TV
TRIG

Softkey that provides sweep triggering on the selected line of a video

picture eld and accesses the softkey menu used to select the line
number of the video picture eld and the type of video picture frame.
When TV TRIG is pressed, the trigger mode is changed to TV trigger,
TV LINE # becomes the active function, and the softkey menu for
changing the TV line numbers and video eld trigger is accessed.
If the instrument is in non-zero span, the resolution bandwidth is
changed to 1 MHz, the frequency span is set to 0 Hz, the detector
mode is changed to sample, the sweep time is changed to 100 s, the
amplitude scale is changed to linear, a sweep is taken, and a marker is
placed on the signal peak.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
TV
TRIG
33333333333333333

TM
TV TRIG
EVEN FLD

Softkey that selects an even video eld of an interlaced video format

to trigger on.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
TV
TRIG
TV TRIG
EVEN FLD
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333

TVSFRM
17-206
Key Dictionary
TV TRIG
ODD FLD

Softkey that selects an odd video eld of an interlaced video format

to trigger on.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
TV
TRIG
TV TRIG
ODD FLD
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

TVSFRM
TV TRIG
VERT INT

Softkey that selects a vertical interval to trigger on. Triggering occurs

on the next pulse edge. If it triggers on an even eld, triggering will
not alternate between odd and even elds. If it triggers on an odd
eld, triggering will alternate between odd and even elds. The
vertical interval is used for non-interlaced video formats.
Key Path
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
TV
TRIG
TV TRIG
VERT INT
33333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
TVSFRM
User
Menus

Softkey that accesses a menu available for your use for user-dened
programs and key functions.
Key Path
AUX/USER5
User
Menus
33333333333333333333
Key Dictionary
17-207
VERIFY
TIMEBASE

Softkey that allows the time base digital-to-analog converter to be

changed to verify that the 10 MHz reference time base performs to
specication. Pressing 4PRESET5 resets the time base to its original
value. A pass code is required to access this function.
Key Path
More
More
CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
VID AVG
ON OFF

VERIFY
TIMEBASE
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that initiates a digital averaging routine that averages

displayed signals and noise. This function does not aect the sweep
time, bandwidth, or other analog characteristics of the instrument.
Annotation on the left side of the screen indicates the current
number of sweeps averaged. The default number of sweeps is 100.
Increasing the number of sweeps smooths the trace. To turn o the
video averaging function, press VID AVG ON OFF so that OFF is
underlined. The number of sweeps can be entered using the data
keys.
Key Path
More
4BW5 1 of 2
VID AVG
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
More
More
TRACE5 1 of 4 2 or 4
VID AVG
ON OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333

VAVG, CLRAVG
VIDEO
to start if the detected RF envelope voltage rises to a level set by the
display line. When VIDEO is pressed, the display line appears on the
screen. For example, connect the CAL OUT signal to the instrument
input, change the trigger mode to video, and lower the display line.
The instrument triggers when the display line reaches the noise oor.
Key Path
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SWEEP/TRIG5 Trigger
VIDEO

TM
17-208
Key Dictionary
VIEW 1
OFF

Only available when SIG LIST is on.
Softkey that accesses a menu to select which delta from the limit-line
table is viewed by the display signal list. Each time this softkey is
pressed, it changes sequentially as follows:
VIEW PK 1 LIM 1
VIEW PK 1 LIM 2
VIEW QP 1 LIM 1
VIEW QP 1 LIM 2
VIEW AVG 1 LIM 1
VIEW AVG 1 LIM 2
VIEW 1 OFF
Key Path
More
TEST5 1 of 3
VIEW 1
OFF
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333
SIGDLTAVIEW
VIEW A
Softkey that holds and displays the amplitude data that is in the
trace A register. The trace A register is not updated as the instrument
sweeps. If trace A is deactivated by pressing STORE BLANK A , the
stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW A .
Key Path
TRACE5 VIEW A
More
1 of 3
TEST
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE
LIN GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333
VIEW A
More
TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE
LOG GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333
VIEW A

VIEW
Key Dictionary
17-209
VIEW B
trace B register. The trace B register is not updated as the instrument
sweeps. If trace B is deactivated by pressing STORE BLANK B , the
stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW B .
Key Path
TRACE5 VIEW B
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE
LIN GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333
VIEW B
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
SAVE
LOG GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333
VIEW B

VIEW
VIEW C
trace C register. The trace C register is not updated as the instrument
sweeps. If trace C is deactivated by pressing STORE BLANK C , the
stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW C .
Key Path
TRACE5 VIEW C
More
Save/Rcl
TEST5 1 of 3 List
SAVE
LIN GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333
VIEW C
More
4TEST5 1 of 3
Save/Rcl
List
SAVE
LOG GRAPH
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333

VIEW
17-210
Key Dictionary
VIEW C
VIEW CAL
ON OFF


section.
Softkey that switches the 300 MHz calibrator signal so that it is routed
internally to the input of the instrument or externally to the 300 MHz
output of the instrument.
Key Path
More
More
More
More
4SETUP5 1 of 5 2 of 5 3 of 5 4 of 5
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333
Input
VIEW CAL
ON OFF
33333333333333333333333333333

CALSW
VIEW
PK QP AV

Softkey that toggles between the dierent detection modes, peak

(PK), quasi-peak (QP), and average (AV). This function is accessed
through the VIEW 1 OFF key when SIG LIST is ON.
Key Path
VIEW
DET5 PK QP AV
33333333333333333333333333333
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More
TEST5 1 of 3
VIEW 1
OFF
VIEW
PK QP AV
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333
DET
Volts
Softkey that changes the amplitude units to volts.
Key Path
More
Amptd
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 Units Volts
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AUNITS
Key Dictionary
17-211
Watts
Softkey that changes the amplitude units to watts.
Key Path
More
Amptd
AMPLITUDE5 1 of 3 Units Watts
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333

AUNITS
WINDOWS
OFF

Softkey that turns o the windows display mode and returns to the
normal full-sized display. The state of the last active window will
become the instrument state when the windows display is turned o.
Key Path
ON5 WINDOWS OFF

WINOFF
X FINE
TUNE DAC

Softkey that displays the output of the YTO extra-ne-tune DAC
(FM_TUNE) that is on the A7 analog interface assembly. This is a
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
YTF
DRIVER

More 1 . . .
More 3
X FINE
TUNE DAC
33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that displays the output of the sample-and-hold circuit in

the YTF span divider and driver located on the A7 analog interface
only.
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
17-212
Key Dictionary
More 1 . . .
More 5
YTF
DRIVER
33333333333333333333333
YTF
SPAN

HP 8593EM, 8595EM, or 8596EM only. This softkey changes to

BINARY SPAN for HP 8591EM.
Softkey that displays a trace of the voltage driving the YTF as it

sweeps through the displayed span. This is a service diagnostic
Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
YTF TUNE
COARSE

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
More 1
More 2
YTF
SPAN
33333333333333333
Softkey that displays the output produced by the YTF coarse-tune

Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
YTF TUNE
FINE

More 1 . . .
More 5
YTF TUNE
COARSE
33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that displays the output produced by the YTF ne-tune

Key Path
More
More
4CAL5 1 of 4 2 of 4
Service
Diag
33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333 33333333333333333333333333
YZ_# Spc
Clear

More 1 . . .
More 5
YTF TUNE
FINE
33333333333333333333333333333
Softkey that accesses the menu used for selecting the characters Y, Z,
underscore ( ), #, space, or for clearing the screen title.
Key Access

TITLE, PREFX
Key Dictionary
17-213
ZERO
SPAN

Softkey that changes the frequency span to zero and turns o marker
track if it is on.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ZERO
SPAN5 SPAN
33333333333333333

SP
ZONE
CENTER

Softkey that moves the zone markers in frequency without changing

the zone span. The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone
on the upper window. They correspond with the frequency range
displayed in the lower window. As the zone markers are moved the
center frequency of the lower window is changed but the lower
window will not be updated unless it is active.
The zone can be moved beyond the frequency range that is being
displayed in the upper window. Its movement is limited to the
frequency range of the instrument. The zone markers will be
displayed at the edges of the upper window when the zone is moved
beyond the displayed frequency range.
Key Path
ZONE
ON5 CENTER
33333333333333333333333

ZMKCNTR
17-214
Key Dictionary
ZONE
PK LEFT

Softkey that searches for the next frequency peak outside and to the
left of the zone markers on the upper window trace and then moves
the zone so that it is centered around the new peak. The zone span is
not changed. The center frequency of the lower window changes to
re ect the new zone center frequency. The lower window will not be
updated until it is made active. If no peak is found the zone will not
be moved. A signal must have a 6 dB peak excursion to be identied
as a peak signal. The denition of a peak excursion can be changed
by selecting PEAK EXCURSN while the upper window is active.
Pressing ZONE PK LEFT will have no eect if the upper window is

in zero span.
Key Path
ZONE
ON5 PK LEFT
33333333333333333333333333

ZMKPKNL
ZONE
PK RIGHT

Softkey that searches for the next frequency peak outside and to the
right of the zone markers on the upper window trace and then moves
the zone so that it is centered around the new peak. The zone span is
not changed. The center frequency of the lower window changes to
re ect the new zone center frequency. The lower window will not be
updated until it is made active. If no peak is found the zone will not
be moved. A signal must have a 6 dB peak excursion to be identied
as a peak signal. The denition of a peak excursion can be changing
by selecting PEAK EXCURSN while the upper window is active.
Pressing ZONE PK RIGHT will have no eect if the upper window is

in zero span.
Key Path
ZONE
ON5 PK RIGHT
33333333333333333333333333333

ZMKPKNR
Key Dictionary
17-215
ZONE
SPAN

Softkey that changes the span of the zone markers without changing
the center frequency. The zone markers are vertical lines marking
the zone on the upper window. They correspond with the frequency
range displayed in the lower window. As the zone markers are moved
the span of the lower window is changed but the lower window will
not be updated unless it is active.
The zone can be expanded beyond the frequency range that is
being displayed in the upper window. Its movement is limited to
the frequency range of the instrument. The zone markers will be
displayed at the edges of the upper window when the zone is moved
beyond the displayed frequency range.
Key Path
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ON5
ZONE
SPAN
33333333333333333

ZMKSPAN
4ZOOM5
Hardkey that switches between the split-screen windows display and

a full size display of the window that is currently active. Once the
ZOOM function is active the 4NEXT5 key can be used to switch between
the two windows while remaining zoomed (full sized).

WINZOOM
17-216
Key Dictionary
18
Options and Accessories
This chapter list the instruments, options and accessories available for
the HP 8590 EM series EMC analyzers.
EMC analyzer
Options
HP 8591EM
HP 8593EM
HP 8594EM
HP 8595EM
HP 8596EM
004
009
010
026
027
040
042
043
101
102
301
703
908
909
910
915
9 kHz to 1.8 GHz

9 kHz to 22 GHz (or 26.5 GHz)
9 kHz to 2.9 GHz
9 kHz to 6.5 GHz
9 kHz to 12.8 GHz
Precision frequency reference
LO output (except HP 8591EM)
Tracking generator (9 kHz to 2.9 GHz) (100 kHz to
1.8 GHz on HP 8591EM)
26 GHz frequency range (HP 8593EM only)
26 GHz frequency range, type N (HP 8593EM only)
Front panel cover
Soft case
RS-232 and parallel port
Fast time domain sweeps
AM/FM demod, TV sync
Combination of Options 101 and 102
Delete quasi-peak detector
Rack mount without handles
Rack mount with handles
Additional operating manuals
Support manuals
18-1
W30
W32
Transducers and accessories
Two year service contract

Two year calibration service
HP 11945A Opt E51

HP 11947A
HP 11955A
HP 11956A
HP 11966C
HP 11966D
HP 11966E
HP 11966L
HP 11966P
HP 11967C
HP 11967D
HP 11968C
HP 85420E Opt. 1EM
18-2
Probe kit (9 kHz to 1 GHz)

Transient limiter
Biconical antenna (typical cal data)
Log periodic antenna (typical cal data)
Biconical antenna (typical cal data)
Log periodic antenna (.2 to 1 GHz)
Ridged horn (1 to 18 GHz)
10 meter N cable
Broadband antenna (30 MHz to 1 GHz)
Line impedance stablization network (25 amp)
LISN (10 amp)
Tripod
RF lter section (except HP 8593EM)
A
SRQ
Service Requests
Note
This appendix describes the receiver service request (SRQ) capability.

A service request is an instrument output that tells the operator or
computer that a specic event has taken place in the instrument.
When writing programs, service requests can be used to interrupt
the computer program sequence, causing the program to branch to
a subroutine. For example, by using service requests, the computer
can perform other operations while the receiver is sweeping. When
the sweep is completed, the computer can service the receiver by
changing the receiver state or reading data from the memory.
Service requests do not work with computers that have an RS-232
interface. Not all service requests are available with some HP-IB
computers. Refer to the manuals supplied by your computer's
manufacturer.
When making a service request, the receiver places the I/O interface
SRQ line true and the receiver displays SRQ with an octal coded
number. Setting the SRQ line true announces to the computer that the
receiver requires attention. The computer can then command the
receiver to send its \status byte." The status byte indicates the type
of service request. The status byte is the binary equivalent of the
octal SRQ number.
Note
If the instrument display annotation has been blanked, the service

request notation will not appear.
A serial polling technique must be used by the computer to test for
service requests. The receiver does not respond to parallel polling.
A service request can be cleared from the display by doing an
instrument preset.
Status byte denition
The status byte sent by the receiver determines the nature of the
service request. The meaning of each bit of the status byte is
explained in Table A-1.
SRQ
A-1
Table A-1. Status Byte Denition

Bit
0 (LSB)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Message
Overload Detected
Unit Key Pressed
End of sweep
Hardware broken
Command complete
Illegal command
Universal HP-IB service request HP-IB RQS bit
Unused
Display Message
SRQ 101
SRQ 102
SRQ 104
SRQ 110
SRQ 120
SRQ 140
The display message is an octal number based on the binary value of

the status byte. This octal number always begins with a \1" since this
is translated from bit 6, the universal service request bit. The status
byte for an illegal receiver command (SRQ 140) is as follows:
bit number 7 6
5 4 3
2 1 0
status byte
1 0 0
0 0 0
0 1
This displays the octal equivalent of the status byte binary number:
SRQ 140
The octal equivalent is based on the whole binary number: 01100000

(binary) = 140 (octal)
One simple way to determine the octal equivalent of the binary
number is to partition the binary number three bits at a time from the
least signicant bit, and treat each part as a single binary number:
binary
0 1
0 0 0
octal
1 0 0
The decimal equivalent of the octal number is determined as follows:

140 (octal) = 1 2 (8) + 4 2 (8) + 0 2 (8) = 96 (decimal)
More than one service request can be sent at the same time. For
example, if an illegal receiver command (SRQ 140) and the end of a
sweep (SRQ 104) occurred at the same time, SRQ 144 appears on the
receiver display, because both bit 5 and bit 2 are set as shown below:
bit number
SRQ
5 4 3
2 1 0
status byte
octal value
A-2
7 6
0 1
1
1 0 0
4
1 0 0
4
= SRQ 144
Service request activating commands
With the exceptions of SRQ 101, SRQ 140, and SRQ 110, service
requests can only be activated from a computer. (SRQ 101, SRQ 140,
and SRQ 110 are activated at instrument preset.) Your programmer's
guide describes service request activating commands under RQS and
SRQ.
SRQ
A-3
B
EMC Setups, Limit Lines and Antenna Factors Card
This appendix describes the les on the EMC Setups, Limit Lines and
Antenna Factors Card, HP part number 08590-10027.
Auto-execute radiated emissions test setup sample

Equipment:
HP 11966P Broadband Antenna

HP 8447F Option H64 Dual Preamp
Instrument Settings:
IF Bandwidth
Averaging Bandwidth
RF Attenuation
Reference Level
08447FH Correction Factors
nHP11966P Correction Factors
120 kHz
300 kHz
+10 dB
+70 dBV/m
Auto-Execute Radiated Emissions Test Setup Sample

Filename
Test
Frequency
Range
Limit
Lines
eAUTOEXEC Sample AUTOEXEC Radiated Setup 30 to 1000 MHz FCC15B3M
B-1
Radiated emissions test setup sample

Equipment:
HP 11966C Broadband Antenna

IF Bandwidth
Averaging Bandwidth
RF Attenuation
Reference Level
nHP11966C Correction Factors
o8447FHI Correction Factor
120 kHz
300 kHz
+10 dB
+70 dBV/m
Radiated Emissions Test Setup Sample

Filename
Test
Frequency
Range
Limit
Lines
eSAMPLE R Sample Radiated Setup 30 to 300 MHz FCC15B3M
Conducted emissions test setup sample

Equipment:
HP 11967C LISN
HP 11947A Transient Limiter (010 dB)
IF Bandwidth
Averaging Bandwidth
RF Attenuation
Reference Level
nLISN Correction Factors
nHP11947A Correction Factors
9 kHz
30 kHz
+10 dB
+85 dBV/m
Conducted Emissions Test Setup Sample

Filename
Test
Frequency
Range
Limit
Lines
eSAMPLE C Sample Conducted Setup 150 kHz to 30 MHz EN022 BC
B-2
Diagnostic emissions test setup sample

Equipment:
HP 11940A Close Field Probe

IF Bandwidth
Averaging Bandwidth
RF Attenuation
Reference Level
HP 11940A Correction Factors
120 kHz
300 kHz
0 dB
+90 dBV/m
Diagnostic Emissions Test Setup Sample

Filename
Test
Frequency
Range
Limit
Lines
eSAMPLE D Sample Diagnostic Setup 30 to 1000 MHz OFF
B-3
Setups
Filename
eAUTOEXEC
eSAMPLE R
eSAMPLE C
eSAMPLE D
Description
Auto-execute radiated emissions setup
Radiated emissions test setup
Conducted emissions test setup
Diagnostic setup
Antenna Correction Factors

Filename
nBICONICAL
nHF LOG
nHORN
nHP11940
nHP11941
nHP11966P
nLISN
nLISN10A
nLOG PERD
nMAG LOOP
Description
Antenna Factors for HP 11966C Biconical Antenna (30 MHz to 300 MHz) at
3m spacing
Antenna Factors for HP 11966N HF Log Periodic Antenna (200 MHz to 5 GHz)
at 3m spacing
Antenna Factors for HP 11966E Double-Rigid Waveguide Horn Antenna
(1 GHz to 18 GHz) at 3m spacing
Typical Antenna Factors for HP 11940A Probe
Typical Antenna Factors for HP 11941A Probe
Typical Antenna Factors for HP 11996P Broadband Antenna
(30 MHz to 1 GHz)
Transducer Factors for HP 11967C Line Impedance Stabilization Network
(10 kHz to 105 MHz)
Transducer Factors for HP 11967D Line Impedance Stabilization Network
(9 kHz to 30 MHz)
Antenna Factors for HP 11966D Periodic Antenna (200 MHz to 1 GHz) at 3m
spacing
Transducer factors for the HP 11966A Active Loop H-Field Antenna
Cable Correction Factors

Filename
cCABLE
Description
Correction factors for the HP 11966L 10m cable, type-N
Other Correction Factors

Filename
oHP11947A
o8447FLO
o8447FHI
B-4
Description
Correction factors for the HP 11947A Transient Limiter
Correction factors for the low frequency amplier of the HP 8447F option
H64
Correction factors for the high frequency amplier of the HP 8447F option
H64
Limit Lines
Filename
1EN011 A1
1EN011 A2
1EN011 BC
1EN011A1R
1EN011A2R
1EN011B1R
1EN011B2R
1EN014 HH
1EN014 HL
1EN014 P1
1EN014 P2
1EN014 P3
1EN014 P4
1EN014 P5
1EN014 P6
1EN022 AC
1EN022 BC
1EN022A10
1EN022A30
1EN022B10
1FCC15 AC
1FCC15 BC
1FCC15A10
1FCC15B3M
1VCCI 1C
1VCCI 2C
1VCCI1 10
1VCCI1 3M
1VCCI2 10
1VCCI2 3M
1VDE71 1A
1VDE71 1B
1VDE71 2A
1VDE71 2B
1VFG43 10
1VFG43 3M
1VFG43 CP
1VFG43 CS
Description
EN55011 Class A, Group 1 Conducted Limits1

EN55011 Class A, Group 2 Conducted Limits1
EN55011 Class B, Groups 1 and 2 Conducted Limits1
EN55011 Test Site Radiated, 30m distance, Class A
EN55011 Test Site Radiated, 30m distance, Class A, Group 2
EN55011 Test Site Radiated, 10m distance, Class B, Group 1
EN55011 Test Site Radiated, 10m distance, Class B, Group 2
EN55014 Interference Limits household (30 MHz to 300 MHz)
EN55014 Interference Limits household (150 kHz to 30 MHz)
EN55014 Interference Portable tools 700W (150 kHz to 30 MHz)
EN55014 Interference Portable tools 700 to 1000W (150 kHz to 30 MHz)
EN55014 Interference Portable tools 1000 to 2000W (150 kHz to 30 MHz)
EN55014 Interference Portable tools 700W (30 MHz to 300 MHz)
EN55014 Interference Portable tools 700 to 1000W (30 MHz to 300 MHz)
EN55014 Interference Portable tools 1000 to 2000W (30 MHz to 300 MHz)
EN55022 Class A Conducted Limits1
EN55022 Class B Conducted Limits1
EN55022 Class A Radiated, 10m limit
EN55022 Class A Radiated, 30m limit
EN55022 Class B Radiated, 10m limit
FCC Part 15, Class A Conducted Limits
FCC Part 15, Class B Conducted Limits
FCC Part 15, Class A Radiated, 10m limit
FCC Part 15, Class B Radiate, 3m limit
VCCI, Class 1 Conducted Limits1
VCCI, Class 2 Conducted Limits1
VCCI, Class 1 Radiated, 10m limit
VDE 0871 Part 11; Group 1, Class A Radiated 30m limit
VDE 0871 Part 11; Group 1, Class B Radiated 10m limit
VDE 0871 Part 11; Group 2, Class A Radiated 30m limit
VDE 0871 Part 11; Group 2, Class B Radiated 10m limit
VFG 243/1991 (electric eld, 10m)
VFG 243/1991 (magnetic eld, 3m)
VFG 243/1991 (conducted: power lines)1
VFG 243/1991 (conducted: signal and control lines)1
1 Limit Line 1 contains the quasi peak limit value. Limit Line 2 contains the average limit value.
B-5
Index
0-2.9 Gz BAND 0, 17-5, 17-27
10 MHz reference DAC setting, 17-34

10 MHz REF OUTPUT, 2-7
+10V REF DETECTOR, 17-2, 17-8
-10V REF DETECTOR, 17-8
120 kHz EMI BW, 17-10
12.4-19 BAND 3, 17-8
150 kHz 030 MHz, 17-10
19.1-22 BAND 4, 17-9
200 Hz EMI BW, 17-10

200 MHz 01 GHZ, 17-11
2.75-6.5 BAND 1, 17-6, 17-27
2v REF DETECTOR, 17-2, 17-6
30 MHz 0300 MHz, 17-9

3 dB POINTS, 17-6
3rd ORD MEAS, 17-6
6.0-12.8 BAND 2, 17-7

6 dB POINTS, 17-7
99% PWR BW, 17-9

9 kHz EMI BW, 17-8
9 kHz 0150 kHz, 17-7
ABCDEF, 17-13
Abort, 17-13
accessories, 18-2
ac coupling, 17-56
activating
amplitude correction, 10-6
analyzer limit-line testing, 9-7, 9-15
overview mode, 11-5
windows display mode, 11-2
active function, 2-13
active function clearing, 17-96
adding
data to signal list, 5-4, 6-5
addressing plotter, 17-139
addressing printer, 17-148
ADD TO LIST, 17-13
Index-1
A <|> B, 17-11
ALC INT EXT, 17-14
ALC MTR INT XTAL, 17-14
ALC TEST, 17-14
ALL DLP ! CARD, 17-15
alpha characters, 17-13, 17-96, 17-193, 17-213
% AM, 17-4
A0B ! A ON OFF, 17-12
Amp Cor, 17-15
AMP COR ON OFF, 17-15
AMPLITUDE, 2-2, 17-16
amplitude accuracy, 17-55
amplitude and frequency dierence, measuring, 8-20
amplitude correction
activating, 10-6
saving and recalling, 10-7
tables, creating, 10-1
tables, editing, 10-6
amplitude correction factors
edit done, 17-73
select amplitude, 17-169
select frequency, 17-171
select point, 17-173
amplitude demodulation, 17-66
amplitude menus, 17-16
amplitude modulation, 17-4
measuring with the FFT function, 8-12
amplitude scale, 17-168
amplitude units, 17-17
dBm, 17-58
dBV, 17-58
dBmV, 17-58
Volts, 17-211
Watts, 17-212
AMPL SCL LOG LIN, 17-16
Amptd Units, 17-17
analog+ display
using, 8-25{27
ANALOG+ ON OFF, 17-17
analyzer
battery, 3-9
clock, 3-10
limit line format , 9-14
limit lines, activating, 9-15
limit lines, creating, 9-10
limit lines, editing, 9-12
ANALYZER ADDRESS, 17-17
ANNOTATN ON OFF, 17-18
Antenna Factors, 17-19
ANTENNA ON OFF, 17-19
ANTENNA ! CARD, 17-18
Antenna Units, 17-19
APND CAT ITEM, 17-20
A ! C, 17-12
ATTEN AUTO MAN, 17-20
Index-2
attenuation coupling, 17-21

attenuator-error factors, 17-179
AUTO ALL, 17-21
autocal, 3-10
AUTO CAL ON OFF, 17-21
AUTO COUPLE, 17-22
AUTOEXEC ON OFF, 17-23
automated diagnostic emission test, 7-3
auto-measure, 4-19
AUTO-MEASURE, 17-22
autoranging, 4-7
AUTORANG ON OFF, 17-23
AUX B, 17-23
Aux Conn Control, 17-24
AUX IF OUTPUT, 2-8
auxiliary connector input, 17-69
auxiliary interface
control line A, 17-47
control line B, 17-47
control line C, 17-47
control line D, 17-48
AUX INTERFACE, 2-7
AUX/USER, 17-24
AUX VIDEO OUTPUT, 2-8
available memory, 17-36
AV DWELL TIME, 17-24
average bandwidth
modifying, 4-5
reducing, 7-34
average video bandwidth coupling, 17-21
AVG BW AUTO MAN, 17-25
AVG ON OFF, 17-25
AV/IF BW RATIO, 17-26
band boundaries, measuring signals near, 7-48

band lock
band selection, 17-6{9
Band Lock, 17-27
BAND LOCK, 7-48
band locking, 17-30
bandwidth
functions, 17-30
measuring 3 dB and 6 dB, 8-17
measuring 99% power, 8-18
modifying, 4-5
battery
changing the battery, 3-7
BAUD RATE, 17-28
B <|> C, 17-26
bias-current DAC adjustment, 17-33
binary, A-2
BINARY SPAN, 17-28
BLANK A, 17-28
BLANK B, 17-29
Index-3
BLANK C, 17-29
BLANK CARD, 17-29
B0DL ! B, 17-27
BND LOCK ON OFF, 7-48, 17-30
B ! C, 17-26
BW, 17-30
Index-4
Cable Factors, 17-31

CABLE ON OFF, 17-31
CABLE ! CARD, 17-31
CAL, 3-1, 17-31
CAL AMP, 17-32
CAL AMPTD, 3-2
Cal At Time, 17-32
CAL CISPR BW, 17-32
CAL FETCH, 3-2, 17-32
CAL FREQ, 3-2, 17-33
CAL FREQ & AMPTD, 1-10, 3-1, 17-33
calibration
attenuator-error factors, 17-179
self-calibration routines, 3-1
CAL MXR, 17-2, 17-33
CAL OUT, 2-5
cal output, 2-5
CAL STORE, 1-11, 3-2, 17-34
CAL TIMEBASE, 17-2, 17-34
CAL TRK GEN, 3-3, 17-34
CAL YTF, 3-4, 17-35
card
catalog, viewing, 9-9
delete le, 17-61
formatting, 12-2
inserting a memory card, 3-6
loading amplitude correction factors from, 4-11
loading limit lines, 4-9
loading pre-dened congurations, 4-4, 4-23
Card Cong, 17-35
CATALOG ALL, 17-35
CATALOG CARD, 17-36
Catalog Internal, 17-36
CATALOG PREFIX, 17-38
CATALOG REGISTER, 17-38
CATALOG VARIABLS, 17-39
CENTER FREQ, 17-39
center frequency, 17-39
step size, 17-40
window zone, 17-214
CF STEP AUTO MAN, 17-40
change function values, 2-9
change prex
edit done, 17-73
Change Prex, 17-41
Change Title, 17-42
changing the frequency step, 6-5

characters, 17-13, 17-96, 17-193, 17-213
CLEAR ANNOTATN, 17-42
clear display
active function area, 2-9
clearing a service request, A-1
clearing the active function, 17-96
CLEAR MARK, 17-43
CLEAR WRITE A, 17-44
CLEAR WRITE B, 17-45
CLEAR WRITE C, 17-46
clock, 3-10
close-eld probe, 7-2{10
CLR ALL MARKS, 17-46
CNTL A 0 1, 17-47
CNTL B 0 1, 17-47
CNTL C 0 1, 17-47
CNTL D 0 1, 17-48
CNT RES AUTO MAN, 7-17, 17-48
COARSE TUNE DAC, 17-2, 17-48
COMB GEN ON OFF, 7-48, 17-49
command complete, A-1
commands
front panel execution, 17-83
comparing signals, 7-27
compliance measurements
conguring a printer, 12-14
generating a report, 12-15
COMPLMNT MARKS, 17-49
CompuServe, 15-3
conducted emissions, B-2
condence test, 17-49
CONFIG, 17-50
conguration
plotter, 17-139
printer, 17-148
conguring a printer, 4-20, 12-14
conguring pre-compliance system, 4-3
conguring systems for diagnostic emissions, 7-2
CONF TEST, 17-49
connector
10 MHz ref output, 2-7
aux IF output, 2-8
aux video output, 2-8
earphone, 2-6
ext alc input, 2-6
external keyboard, 2-8
ext ref in, 2-7
ext trig input, 2-8
hi sweep in/out, 2-8
HP-IB interface, 2-8
LO output, 2-6
monitor output, 2-7
sweep output, 2-8
sweep + tune output, 2-6
Index-5
TV trig output, 2-6

continuous sweep, 17-194
control functions, 2-4
control line A
auxiliary interface, 17-47
control line B
control line C
control line D
COPY, 2-3, 17-51
COPY DEV PRNT PLT, 17-55
COPY SCREEN, 17-55
correction factors, 3-1, 3-3, 17-55
data display, 17-69
default, 17-59
self-calibration, 17-32
storing, 17-34
Correctn Factors, 17-56
CORRECTN ON OFF, 17-56
CORRECT ON OFF, 3-3, 17-55
COUPLE AC DC, 17-56
coupled functions menu, 17-22
coupled sweep time, 17-196
coupling
ac or dc, 17-56
all functions, 17-21
creating
amplitude correction tables, 10-1
analyzer limit lines, 9-2, 9-10
new programs, 17-131
reports, 4-20, 12-14
signal lists, 5-2
CRT HORZ POSITION, 17-57
CRT VERT POSITION, 17-57
customizing standard congurations, 4-5
Index-6
DAC
bias current adjustment, 17-33
extra ne-tune, 17-212
ne tune, 17-88
mixer bias, 17-126
sweep time, 17-195
YTF coarse tune, 17-213
YTF ne-tune, 17-213
DACS, 17-2, 17-57
data
controls, 2-9
entry using external keyboard, 13-9
keys, 2-9
output, 12-14
protection, 12-13
DATEMODE MDY DMY, 17-57
dBm, 17-58
dBV, 17-58
dBmV, 17-58
dc coupling, 17-56
deactivate function, 2-9
deactivating the active function, 17-96
DEFAULT CAL DATA, 17-59
DEFAULT CONFIG, 17-59
DEFAULT SYNC, 17-60
Dene List, 17-60
Dene Report, 17-60
dening a analyzer limit margin, 9-7
DELETE ALL SIGS, 17-61
DELETE FACTORS, 17-61
DELETE FILE, 17-61
DELETE LIMIT, 17-63
DELETE MARKED, 17-63
DELETE POINT, 17-64
DELETE SEGMENT, 17-64
DELETE SIGNAL, 17-65
Delete Signals, 17-65
deleting, limit lines in analyzer mode, 9-2
deleting signals from signal list, 5-8
delta marker, 7-27, 17-117
DELTA MEAS, 17-65
DEMOD, 17-65
DEMOD AM FM, 17-66
DEMOD ON OFF, 17-66
demodulating an AM or FM signal, 7-44
demodulation
AM, 17-66
dwell time, 17-71
FM, 17-66
FM gain, 17-90
FM oset, 17-90
FM span, 17-90
on and o, 17-66
speaker on o, 17-188
squelch, 17-189
demodulator, 13-2
DESKJET 310/550C, 17-67
DESKJET 540, 17-67
DET, 17-67
detection mode
positive peak, 17-68
sample, 17-68
detector
quasi peak, 17-152
DETECTOR PK QP AV, 17-67
DETECTOR PK SP NG, 17-68
detectors, 4-6, 6-3
DETECTOR SMP PK, 17-68
diagnostic emission
conguring system, 7-2
testing, 7-2{8
Index-7
diagnostic emissions, B-3

automated test, 7-3
manual test, 7-9
diagnostic emission test
manual, 7-10
diagnostic measurements, 7-1{53
resolving signals of equal amplitude, 7-11
resolving small signals hidden by large signals, 7-14
disable peak detector reset, 17-70
DISPLAY, 17-69
DISPLAY CAL DATA, 17-2, 17-69
DISPLAY CNTL I, 17-69
display line, 17-71
DISPLAY ! CARD, 17-69
Display Sys Data, 17-2
display, two windows, 17-135
display zone
change span, 17-216
nd left peak, 17-215
nd right peak, 17-215
move center, 17-214
Dispose User Mem, 17-70
distortion, testing, 7-38
DLP editor, 17-80
function appending, 17-20
double display, 17-135
DROOP, 17-2, 17-70
DSP LINE ON OFF, 17-71
DUT emissions, 7-2
DWELL TIME, 17-71
dwell times, 4-7, 6-3
modifying, 4-7
Index-8
earphone connector, 2-6

EDIT AMP COR, 17-71
EDIT ANNOTATN, 17-72
EDIT ANTENNA, 17-72
EDIT CABLE, 17-72
EDIT CAT ITEM, 17-73
EDIT DONE, 17-73
EDIT FLATNESS, 17-2, 17-74
editing
amplitude correction tables, 10-6
analyzer limit lines, 9-2, 9-5, 9-10, 9-12
DLPs, 17-80
EDIT LAST, 17-75
Edit Limit, 17-75
EDIT LIMIT, 17-76
EDIT LIST, 17-76
EDIT LOWER, 17-77
EDIT MID/DELT, 17-78
Editor, 17-80
EDIT OTHER, 17-78
EDIT PA FLATNESS, 17-2
EDIT UP/LOW, 17-79

EDIT UPPER, 17-79
EDIT UPR LWR, 17-80
electrostatic discharge (ESD), 1-22
EMC ANALYZER, 17-80
EMC analyzer auto-coupled sweep time, 17-195
EMC analyzer conguration
default, 17-59
EMC analyzer error messages, 14-1
EMC analyzer state recalled, 17-143
EMI bandwidth
120 kHz, 17-10
200 Hz, 17-10
9 kHz, 17-8
emissions
conducted, B-2
diagnostic, B-3
radiated, B-1{2
emission testing
diagnostic, 7-2{8
emulation, spectrum analyzer, 13-1
end of sweep, A-1
ENTER, 17-82
entering a prex, 12-3
EPSON LQ, 17-82
EPSON MX80, 17-82
ERASE DLP MEM, 17-82
ERASE MEM CARD, 17-82
ERASE STATEALL, 17-83
ERASE TRACEALL, 17-83
erase user programs and variables, 17-70
error messages, 14-1
errors, non recoverable, 14-12
ESD (electrostatic discharge), 1-22, 1-23
exchange trace A and B, 17-11
exchange trace B and C, 17-26
execute a command
front panel, 17-83
EXECUTE TITLE, 17-2, 17-83
EXIT, 17-83
EXIT CATALOG, 17-84
EXIT EDIT, 17-85
EXIT GRAPH, 17-86
EXIT MEASURE, 17-86
EXIT SHOW, 17-86
expanding a window, 17-216
EXT ALC INPUT, 2-6
EXTERNAL, 17-87
external/internal leveling, 17-14
external keyboard, 13-4
connector, 2-8
EXTERNAL PREAMPG, 17-87
EXT KEYBOARD, 2-8
EXT REF IN, 2-7
EXT TRIG INPUT, 2-8
Index-9
Index-10
fast Fourier transform, 17-88

fast Fourier transform function, 8-12
measuring sidebands, 8-12
fatal errors, 14-12
FAX
form, 15-7
support, 15-4
FFT MEAS, 17-88
lenames, 12-2
ne-focus control, 2-10
FINE TUNE DAC, 17-2, 17-88, 17-212
rmware date, 1-9
xed, limit line type, 17-105
x-tuned analyzer, 7-45
FLAT, 17-89
atness
factory defaults, 17-98
atness correction constants, 17-74, 17-89
Flatness Data, 17-2, 17-89
FM COIL DRIVE, 17-2, 17-89
FM GAIN, 17-2, 17-90
FM OFFSET, 17-2, 17-90
FM SPAN, 17-2, 17-90
FORMAT CARD, 17-91
format date, 17-57
formatting a card, 12-2
FREE RUN, 17-91
FREQ DIAG, 17-2, 17-91
FREQ OFFSET, 17-92
FREQ SCL LOG LIN, 17-93
FREQ STEP, 17-94
frequency
changing the step, 6-5
decreasing the span, 7-19
modifying, 4-5
stop, 17-192
FREQUENCY, 2-2, 17-94
frequency demodulation, 17-66
frequency, improving accuracy, 17-112
frequency oset, 17-92
frequency span, 17-187
changing to full span, 17-95
front panel execution of programming commands, 17-83
front-panel features, 2-2{5
FRQ DISC NORM OFF, 17-2, 17-94
FRQ SCAN ON OFF, 17-95
FULL SPAN, 17-95
function coupling, 17-21
fuse holder, 2-7
Gauss, 17-95
generating a report, 4-21, 12-15
GHIJKL, 17-96
GND REF DETECTOR, 17-2, 17-96
graphing signal lists, 5-13
GRAT ON OFF, 17-96
hardware broken, A-1

hardware error messages, 14-1
harmonic band
menu, 17-27
slope and oset adjust, 17-35
harmonic band 1, 17-6
harmonic lock, 7-48, 17-30
highest peak
nding next, 17-132
highest signal peak, 17-188
HIGH SWEEP IN/OUT, 2-8
HOLD, 2-9, 17-96
HP 85420E option 1EM
using, 8-23{25
HP B&W DJ540, 17-97
HP B&W PRINTER, 17-97
HP-IB interface connector, 2-8
IDNUM, 17-2, 17-97

IF bandwidth
function, 7-11
modifying, 4-5
reducing, 7-33
IF BW AUTO MAN, 17-97
IF GAINS, 17-2, 17-98
illegal command, A-1
impulse noise measurement, 7-35
increase frequency readout resolution, 7-17
informational screen messages, 14-1
INIT FLT, 17-2, 17-98
initial inspection, 1-4
INPT LOCK ON OFF, 17-98
Input, 17-99
INPUT 1 9k-50M, 17-99
INPUT 2 20M-2.9G, 17-99
INPUT 2 BYPASS, 17-100
INPUT 50
, 2-4
INPUT 75
, 2-4
input and output
auxiliary control, 17-24
input attenuation
control, 17-20
modifying, 4-5
reducing, 7-30
Index-11
input impedance, 17-100

INPUT Z 50
75
, 17-100
instrument preset, 17-145
instrument state, 2-3
intensity control, 2-5
interface connectors, 2-8
intermeditate frequency bandwidth coupling, 17-21
intermodulation distortion, measuring, 8-22
internal data protection, 12-13
internal/external leveling, 17-14
internal memory, 17-36
cataloging functions, 17-36
catalog variables, 17-39
delete le, 17-61
erase user programs and variables, 17-70
program and variable cataloging, 17-35
saving to, 17-203
state and trace register status, 17-38
INTERNAL ! STATE, 17-100
Internal ! Trace, 17-101
Index-12
keyboard
entering data, 13-9
external keyboard functions, 13-4
template, 13-7
key menus, 16-1{15
knob, 2-9
LAST SPAN, 17-101
LIF lenames, 12-2
Limit 1, 17-102
LIMIT 1 ON OFF, 17-102
Limit 2, 17-102
LIMIT 2 ON OFF, 17-103
limit lines
activating analyzer, 9-15
analyzer, 9-10
analyzer, activating testing, 9-7
analyzer, editing, 9-12
analyzer, format, 9-14
analyzer, saving, 9-8
delete point, 17-64
delete segment, 17-64
deleting in analyzer mode, 9-2
displaying, 17-108
edit lower table, 17-77
edit mid/delta amplitude, 17-78
edit table, 17-75{76
edit upper and lower tables, 17-79{80
xed and relative, 17-105
at type, 17-89
point, 17-142
purge, 17-150
purging in signal analysis mode, 9-11

recalling, 9-9
recall table, 17-156
save table, 17-164
select amplitude, 17-169
select frequency, 17-171
select frequency or time, 17-106
select lower amplitude, 17-173
select middle amplitude, 17-173
select segment, 17-176
select type, 17-178
select upper amplitude, 17-178
slope type, 17-185
testing, 17-109
using, 9-2
Limit Lines, 17-103
LIMIT LINES, 17-104
limit margin, analyzer, 9-7
LIMITS FIX REL, 17-105
LIMITS FRQ TIME, 17-106
LIMITS ! CARD, 17-104
LIN CHCK ON OFF, 17-106
LINE, 17-107
linear
scale, 17-168
step, 6-7
sweep, 17-194
linearity check, using, 7-38, 7-41
LINE front-panel key, 2-5
LIN ON OFF, 17-107
listening to an AM of FM signal, 7-44
LIST ON OFF, 17-108
LIST ! CARD, 17-107
LMT DISP Y N AUTO, 17-108
LMT TEST ON OFF, 17-109
LOAD FILE, 17-110
loading
amplitude correction factors from a card, 4-11
pre-dened congurations from a card, 4-4, 4-23
(LOCAL), 17-50, 17-111
localized susceptability testing, 7-51{53
local operation, 17-50, 17-111
lock harmonic band, 17-30
lock internal state and trace registers, 17-167
logarithmic
step, 6-7
sweep, 17-194
LOGF SPD, 17-112
LOG ON OFF, 17-111
log scale, 17-168
LO OUTPUT, 2-6
lower limit line
editing, 17-77
low-level signals
reducing attenuation, 7-30
Index-13
reducing averaging bandwidth, 7-34

reducing IF bandwidth, 7-33
video averaging, 7-35
Index-14
MAIN COIL DR, 17-2, 17-112

MAIN SPAN, 17-2, 17-112
MAN TRK ADJUST, 17-113
manual diagnostic emission test, 7-9{10
manual tracking adjustment, 17-113
MARGIN 1 ON OFF, 17-113
MARGIN 2 ON OFF, 17-114
MARK ALL DUPLICAT, 17-114
MARK ALL SIGNALS, 17-114
marker, 2-4, 6-4
counter, 7-17, 17-127
delta, 7-27
menu of controls, 17-128
noise, 17-127
pause, 17-128
pause, dwell time, 17-71
readout modes, 17-129
selection, 17-168
trace selection, 17-129
tracking, 7-19, 17-130
MARKER, 17-116
MARKER ALL OFF, 17-120
MARKER AMPTD, 17-120
MARKER NORMAL, 17-121
MARKER # ON OFF, 17-116
MARKER ! CF, 17-117
MARKER !CF STEP, 17-118
MARKER ! HIGH, 17-118
MARKER !MINIMUM, 17-118
MARKER !PK-PK, 17-119
MARKER !REF LVL, 17-119
MARKER ! START, 17-119
MARKER ! STOP, 17-120
MARKER TUNE SPN, 17-122
MARKER 1, 17-117
MARKER 1 SPAN, 17-117
marking signals, 5-10
MARK LWR DUPLICAT, 17-115
MARK SIGNAL, 17-115
MARK TO END, 17-115
MAX HOLD A, 7-25, 17-123
MAX HOLD B, 17-123
maximum
hold, 7-24
mixer level, 17-124
MAX/MIN ON OFF, 17-123
MAX/MIN VIEW, 17-124
MAX MXR LVL, 17-124
MEAS SNG CONT, 17-124
MEAS STEPPED, 17-125
measure-at-marker, 4-16
Measure at Marker, 4-7
MEASURE AT MKR, 17-125
Measure Detector, 17-125
measurement
restarting, 6-5
stopping, 6-5
measuring
3 dB and 6 dB bandwidth, 8-17
99% power bandwidth, 8-18
amplitude and frequency dierence, 8-20
low-level signals, 7-30
percent AM modulation, 8-19
return loss, 8-10
signals near band boundaries, 7-48
third order products, 8-22
MEM LOCKED, 17-126, 17-167
memory, amount available, 17-36
memory card, B-1
battery, 3-7
reader, 2-5
write-protect switch, 3-8
memory card reader, 2-5
menu and softkey overview, 2-13
menus, 16-1
A/m, 17-4
V/m, 17-5
mid/delta limit line
editing amplitude, 17-78
MIN HOLD C, 7-25, 17-126
minimizing scan time, 17-112
minimum hold, 7-24
minimum to marker, 17-118
010V REF DETECTOR, 17-2
MIXER BIAS DAC, 17-2, 17-126
mixer input level maximum, 17-124
MK COUNT ON OFF, 7-17, 17-127
MK NOISE ON OFF, 17-127
MK PAUSE ON OFF, 17-128
MKR, 17-128
MK READ F T I P, 17-129
MKR !, 17-128
MK TRACE AUTO ABC, 17-129
MK TRACK ON OFF, 7-22, 17-130
MNOPQR, 17-130
MODE, 17-130
modifying standard congurations, 4-5
MONITOR OUTPUT, 2-7
move trace A into C, 17-12
moving zone markers, 11-3
multipen plotter, 17-53
Index-15
octal to binary, A-2

ON, 17-135
on/o switch, 2-5
operation, local, 17-111
optimizing frequency accuracy, 17-112
options, 18-1
Other Factors, 17-136
OTHER ON OFF, 17-136
OTHER ! CARD, 17-136
output
data, 12-14
power, 17-190
screen data, 17-51
OUTPUT, 17-136
OUTPUT front-panel key, 4-1
OUTPUT REPORT, 17-137
overview
menus and softkeys, 2-13
mode, activating, 11-5
overwrite protection, 12-13
OVLD ON OFF, 17-137
Index-16
NEW EDIT, 17-131

NEXT, 17-131
NEXT PAGE, 17-131
NEXT PEAK, 17-132
NEXT PK LEFT, 17-132
NEXT PK RIGHT, 17-132
NO CONVERSN, 17-133
non recoverable errors, 14-12
NORM A/B ON OFF, 17-133
normalization, 8-5
normal marker, 17-121
NORMLIZE ON OFF, 17-134
NORMLIZE POSITION, 17-134
No User Menus, 17-133
NTSC, 17-134
number/units keypad, 2-9
packing material, 15-5

PAINTJET PRINTER, 17-137
PAL, 17-137
PAL0M, 17-138
parallel
interface connector, 2-8
polling, A-1
pass code, 17-59
PC board connector cleaning, 1-22
peak
next, 17-132
next left, 17-132
next right, 17-132
peak detection mode
positive/negative, 17-68
PEAK EXCURSN, 17-138

peaking signal amplitude, 7-20
peak response routine, 17-204
peak search
outside of the zone, 17-215
peak to peak measurement, 17-119
percent AM modulation
measuring, 8-19
percent amplitude modulation, 17-4
phase lock on/o, 17-4
LOCK ON OFF, 17-2
LOCK ON OFF, 17-4
PK DWELL TIME, 17-139
PK-PK MEAS, 8-20, 17-139
Plot Cong, 17-139
PLOTTER ADDRESS, 17-139
plotter conguration, 17-50
plotting, 17-51, 17-55
PLT nLOC , 17-140
PLT MENU ON OFF, 17-140
Plt Port Cong, 17-140
PLT PORT HPIB PAR, 17-140
PLT PORT SER PAR, 17-141
PLT!LJT ON OFF, 17-140
PLTS/PG 1 2 4, 17-141
POINT, 17-142
point deletion, 17-64
positive peak detection mode, 17-68
power bandwidth, measuring, 8-18
power cable, 1-20
power input, 2-7
POWER ON IP LAST, 17-143
power-on state of EMC analyzer, 17-143
preamplier gain, 17-87
PREAMP ON OFF, 17-144
pre-compliance measurements
analyzer tuning, 4-14
analyzer tuning using marker, 4-15
autoranging, using, 4-7
bandwidths, modifying, 4-5
conguring, 4-3
conguring a printer, 4-20
creating a report, 4-20
customizing standard congurations, 4-5
detector, selection, 4-6
dwell time, modifying, 4-7
frequencies, modifying, 4-5
generating a report, 4-21
loading amplitude correction factors from a card, 4-11
loading congurations from a card, 4-4, 4-23
measure at marker, 4-7
radiated, 4-14
reference level, modifying, 4-5
setting up, 4-1
standard congurations, 4-2
Index-17
using limit lines, 4-8

using measure-at-marker, 4-16
predetermined correction factors, 17-59
prex
catalog of, 17-38
editing, 12-4
entering, 12-3
entry, 17-41
selection, 17-174
PRESEL DAC, 17-2, 17-144
PRESEL DEFAULT, 7-20, 17-144
preselector
default, 17-144
peak, 7-20, 17-145
preselector peak, 7-20
PRESEL PEAK, 17-145
PRESET, 17-145
preset conditions
EMC analyzer, 17-145
spectrum analyzer, 17-146
Print Cong, 17-148
printer
conguration, 17-50
conguring, 4-20, 12-14
HP Paintjet, 17-51
PRINTER ADDRESS, 17-148
PRINTER SETUP, 17-148
printing, 17-51, 17-55
print menu, 17-149
Prn Port Cong, 17-148
PRN PORT HPIB PAR, 17-149
PRN PORT SER PAR, 17-149
probe, close-eld, 7-2{10
PROBE PWR, 2-5
problems, how to solve, 15-2
program cataloging, 17-35
program (DLP) editor, 17-80
program editing and creating, 17-80
programming command
PRT MENU ON OFF, 17-149
pTesla, 17-149
PURGE AMP COR, 17-150
PURGE LIMITS, 17-150
purging, limit lines in signal analysis mode, 9-11
PWR SWP ON OFF, 17-151
Index-18
QP/AVG 10X OFF, 17-152

QP DET ON OFF, 17-3, 17-152
QPD OFFSET, 17-3, 17-153
QPD RST ON OFF, 17-3, 17-154
QP DWELL TIME, 17-152
QP GAIN ON OFF, 17-3, 17-153
QP ON OFF, 17-153
quasi-peak, detector, 17-152
radiated emissions, B-1, B-2

real-time clock, 17-198
set date, 17-180
set time, 17-180
time and date display, 17-198
rear-panel battery information label, 3-9
rear-panel features, 2-6{8
RECALL AMP COR, 17-154
RECALL ANTENNA, 17-154
RECALL CABLE, 17-155
Recall Card, 17-155
RECALL DISPLAY, 17-155
RECALL DLP, 17-155
recalling
a trace from internal memory, 17-101
limit-line table, 9-9
signal lists, 5-13
state, internal, 12-11
trace, 12-6
trace, internal, 12-12
Recall Internal, 17-156
RECALL LIMITS, 17-156
RECALL LIST, 17-156
RECALL OTHER, 17-157
RECALL SETUP, 17-157
RECALL STATE, 17-157
RECALL TRACE, 17-158
reference connector, 1-9
reference detector
2V, 17-6
ground, 17-96
reference level, 17-158
modifying, 4-5
oset, 17-159
re ection calibration measurements, 8-9
REF LVL, 17-158
REF LVL OFFSET, 17-159
relative, limit line type, 17-105
REMEAS ALL SIGS, 17-159
REMEAS MARKED, 17-160
REMEAS SIGNAL, 17-160
Re-measure, 17-160
remeasuring signals, 5-12
remote command
Index-19

remote operation, 17-50
report
conguring, 4-21, 12-15
creating, 4-20, 12-14
generating, 4-21, 12-15
resolving signals, 7-14
RESTART, 17-161
return loss, measuring, 8-10
RF lter section, using, 8-23{25
RPG knob, 2-9
RPG TITLE, 17-161
RS-232 interface connector, 2-8
Index-20
sales and service oces, 15-6

sample detection mode, 17-68
SAVE AMP COR, 17-161
SAVE ANTENNA, 17-162
SAVE AUTOEXEC, 17-162
SAVE CABLE, 17-162
Save Card, 17-163
save current state
state register, 17-191
saved analyzer state, 17-100
SAVE EDIT, 17-163
Save Internal, 17-163
SAVE LIMITS, 17-164
SAVE LIN GRAPH, 17-164
SAVE LIST, 17-165
SAVE LOG GRAPH, 17-165
SAVE OTHER, 17-166
Save/Rcln List, 17-166
SAVE/RECALL, 17-166
SAVE SETUP, 17-167
saving
analyzer limit-line table, 9-8
signal lists, 5-12
state, internal, 12-11
to internal memory, 17-203
trace, 12-4
trace, internal, 12-12
SAV LOCK ON OFF, 17-167
SCALE LOG LIN, 17-168
scan time, minimizing, 17-112
screen annotation, 2-11{12, 2-18{19
on or o, 17-18
screen characters, 17-96, 17-130, 17-193, 17-213
screen data output, 17-51
screen graticule, 17-96
screen title, 17-42
characters, 17-13
SECAM0L, 17-168
segment deletion, 17-64
SELECT 1 2 3 4, 17-168
SELECT AMPLITUD, 17-169
Select Axis, 17-170
SELECT DLT AMPL, 17-170
SELECT FREQ, 17-171
SELECT FRM LIST, 17-172
selecting detectors, 4-6, 6-3
SELECT LWR AMPL, 17-173
SELECT MID AMPL, 17-173
SELECT POINT, 17-173
SELECT PREFIX, 17-174
SELECT SEGMENT, 17-176
SELECT TIME, 17-177
SELECT TYPE, 17-178
SELECT UPR AMPL, 17-178
Selectv Mark, 17-179
self-calibration routines, 3-1{4
correction factors, 17-32
tracking generator, 17-34
sensitivity, analyzer, 7-30
serial polling, A-1
Service Cal, 17-2, 17-179
Service Diag, 17-2, 17-179
service functions, 17-2
Service Cal, 17-2
Service Diag, 17-2
service request, A-1
service, returning for, 15-5
SET ATTN ERROR, 17-2, 17-179
Set B&W Printer, 17-180
Set Colr Printer, 17-180
SET DATE, 17-180
SET TIME, 17-180
SETTINGS ON OFF, 17-181
SETUP, 17-181
SETUP front-panel key, 4-1
setup, printer, 17-148
SETUP ! CARD, 17-181
SGL SWP, 17-181
SHOW COR ON OFF, 17-182
SHOW DET PK QP AV, 17-183
SHOW MKR ON OFF, 17-183
SHOW SETUP, 17-183
SHOW 1 1n PK QP AV, 17-182
SHOW 1 2n PK QP AV, 17-182
SHW INST CONFIG, 17-184
sidebands, measuring, 8-12
SIG LIST ON OFF, 17-184
signal
comparison, 7-27
dierence on and o screen, 7-28
dierences, 7-27
separation, 7-14
tracking, 7-19
signal list
Index-21
adding signals, 5-4

creating, 5-2
deleting signals, 5-8
graphing, 5-13
marking, 5-10
remeasuring, 5-12
saving and recalling, 5-12
sorting, 5-7
table, 6-5
viewing, 5-6
Signal Marking, 17-184
signal peak, highest, 17-188
single sweep, 17-194
SLOPE, 17-185
small signals, measuring in presence of large ambient, 7-38
softkeys, 2-2
location, 16-1
overview, 2-13
SORT BY AVG AMP, 17-185
SORT BY DLTA LIM, 17-186
SORT BY FREQ, 17-186
SORT BY QP AMP, 17-187
SORT BYn PK AMP, 17-186
sorting signal lists, 5-7
Sort Signals, 17-187
source power, 17-190
space character, 17-213
span
0 Hz, 17-214
LAST SPAN, 17-101
window zone, 17-216
SPAN, 2-2, 17-187
SPAN ZOOM, 7-22, 17-188
SPEAKER ON OFF, 17-188
SPECTRUM ANALYZER, 17-188
spectrum analyzer emulation, 13-1
split screen, 17-135
SQUELCH, 17-189
SRC ATN MAN AUTO, 17-189
SRC PWR OFFSET, 17-190
SRC PWR ON OFF, 17-190
SRC PWR ON OFF softkey, 8-3
SRC PWR STP SIZE, 17-190
SRQ, A-1
standard congurations, 4-2
customizing, 4-5
standard timebase, 17-34
start and stop frequencies, 17-117
modifying, 4-5
START FREQ, 17-191
state of EMC analyzer at power on, 17-143
state registers, locking, 17-167
STATE ! CARD, 17-191
STATE ! INTRNL, 17-191
static-safe work station, 1-22
Index-22
static-shielding containers, 1-23

status byte, A-1
step
frequency, 6-5
keys, 2-10
linear, 6-7
logarithmic, 6-7
STEP KEYS, 2-4
STEP LOG LIN, 17-192
stepped measurements, 6-1
step size
center frequency, 17-40
coupling, 17-21
stimulus-response
measurements, 8-2
mode, 8-4, 17-195
STOP, 17-192
STOP FREQ, 17-192
store correction factors, 17-34
STORE FLATNESS, 17-2, 17-192
storing the correction factors
CAL STORE, 1-11
STOR PWR ON UNITS, 17-2, 17-193
STP GAIN ZERO, 17-3, 17-193
STUVWX, 17-193
subtract display line from trace B, 17-27
subtract trace B from A, 17-12
support, FAX, 15-4
susceptability testing, 7-51{53
sweep control
continuous, 17-194
single, 17-194
SWEEP CONT SGL, 17-194
SWEEP LOG LIN, 17-194
sweep modes, 2-11, 2-18
SWEEP OUTPUT, 2-8
SWEEP RAMP, 17-3, 17-194
sweep time, 7-11, 17-196
coupling, 17-21
SWEEP TIME DAC, 17-3, 17-195
SWEEP/TRIG, 17-195
SWEEP+TUNE OUTPUT, 2-6
switch trace A and B, 17-11
SWP CPLG SR RECV, 17-195
SWP TIME AUTO MAN, 17-196
SYNC NRM NTSC, 17-196
SYNC NRM PAL, 17-197
Index-23
Index-24
TABLE ADDRESS, 17-197

TABLE CCW STOP, 17-197
TABLE CW STOP, 17-197
tables
amplitude correction, activating, 10-6
amplitude correction, creating, 10-1
amplitude correction, editing, 10-6
amplitude correction, saving and recalling, 10-7
analyzer limit line, saving, 9-8
limit line, format of analyzer, 9-14
limit line, recalling, 9-9
TEST, 17-198
TEST front-panel key, 4-1
testing
diagnostic emission, 7-2{8
localized susceptability, 7-51{53
TG UNLVL message, 8-8
ThinkJet Printer mode switch settings, 17-51
third order measurements, 8-22
THRESHLD ON OFF, 17-198
threshold line, 17-198
Time Date, 17-198
TIMEDATE ON OFF, 17-199
TOWER ADDRESS, 17-199
TOWER DN STOP, 17-199
Tower Turntable, 17-199
TOWER UP STOP, 17-199
TOWER VERT HOR, 17-200
trace
A <|> B, 17-11
A0B ! A, 17-12
A ! C, 17-12
blank trace A, 17-28
blank trace B, 17-29
blank trace C, 17-29
B0DL ! B, 17-27
clear write trace A, 17-44
clear write trace B, 17-45
clear write trace C, 17-46
move trace B into C, 17-26
view mode, 17-209{210
TRACE, 17-200
trace A
maximum hold, 17-123
TRACE A, 17-200
TRACE A B C, 17-200
trace B
maximum hold, 17-123
TRACE B, 17-201
TRACE B VW OFF, 17-201
TRACE C, 17-202
trace modes, 2-11, 2-18
trace registers, locking, 17-167
Trace ! Card, 17-202
Trace ! Intrnl, 17-203
Track Gen, 17-203

TRACK GEN front-panel key, 8-3
tracking generator, 13-2
external leveling input, 2-6
frequency adjustment, 17-113
internal/external leveling, 17-14
normalization, 8-5
output power, 17-190
peak response, 17-204
power sweep, 17-151
power sweep range, 17-190
self-calibration, 17-34
self-calibration routine, 3-3
source attenuator, 17-189
source power oset, 17-190
source power step size, 17-190
stimulus-response, 8-2
unleveled condition, 8-8
warm-up time, 3-3
TRACKING PEAK, 17-204
tracking unstable signals, 7-22
transducers, 18-2
trigger
external, 17-87
free run, 17-91
line, 17-107
video, 17-208
Trigger, 17-204
triggering on a selected line, video picture eld, 8-28
trigger modes, 2-11, 2-18
troubleshooting, 15-2
TUNE SLO FAST, 17-204
turning o markers, 17-120
turning o windows display, 17-212
turn o active function, 2-9
TV LINE #, 17-205
TV Standard, 17-205
TVSTND, 8-29
TV SYNC NEG POS, 17-205
TV TRIG, 8-28, 17-206
TV TRIG EVEN FLD, 8-29, 17-206
TV triggering, 8-28
TV TRIG ODD FLD, 17-207
TV TRIG OUTPUT, 2-6
TV TRIG VERT INT, 17-207
two display windows, 17-135
type of limit line, 17-178
Index-25
variable cataloging, 17-35

VERIFY TIMEBASE, 17-208
VID AVG ON OFF, 17-208
VIDEO, 17-208
video averaging, 7-35, 17-208
video picture eld
triggering on a selected line, 8-28
VIEW A, 17-209
VIEW B, 17-210
VIEW C, 17-210
VIEW CAL ON OFF, 17-211
viewing
analyzer limit lines, 9-2, 9-10
card catalog, 9-9
signal list, 5-6
VIEW PK QP AV, 17-211
VIEW 1 OFF, 17-209
VOL-INTEN, 2-5
VOLTAGE SELECTOR, 2-7
Volts, 17-211
volume control, 2-5
Index-26
underscore character, 17-213

unit key pressed, A-1
units, amplitude, 17-17
universal HP-IB service request, A-1
unleveled condition, tracking generator, 8-8
upper and lower limit lines, editing, 17-79
user-created error messages, 14-1
User Menus, 17-207
warm-up time, 3-1

Watts, 17-212
when self-calibration is needed, 3-4
windows
ON, 17-135
ZOOM, 17-216
windows display mode
activating, 4-12, 11-2
activating overview mode, 11-5
moving zone markers, 11-3
turning o, 11-6
WINDOWS OFF, 17-212
write protection, 12-13
write-protect switch, 3-8
X FINE TUNE DAC, 17-3
YTF DRIVER, 17-3, 17-212

YTF self-calibration routine, 3-4
YTF slope and oset adjustment, 17-35
YTF SPAN, 17-3, 17-213
YTF TUNE COARSE, 17-3, 17-213
YTF TUNE FINE, 17-3, 17-213
YZ # Spc Clear, 17-213
ZERO SPAN, 7-20, 17-214

ZONE CENTER, 17-214
zone markers, 11-3
ZONE PK LEFT, 17-215
ZONE PK RIGHT, 17-215
ZONE SPAN, 17-216
ZOOM, 17-216
zooming a window, 17-216
Index-27

Analizoare de Spectru - 5963-2930

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Analizoare de Spectru - 5963-2930

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

About this Manual

Support for Your Product

HP References in this Manual

Restricted Rights Legend

The information contained in this document is subject to change

All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without

Hewlett-Packard Company certi es that this product met its

This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects

The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from

THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER'S SOLE AND

Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance

This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with

The following safety notes are used throughout this manual.

Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure

Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if

General Safety Considerations

No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to

The instruction documentation symbol. The product is

HP 8590 EM Series Documentation Description

The following documents are provided with the EMC analyzer.

HP 8590 EM Series EMC Analyzer Documentation Description

Describes how to prepare the analyzer for use.

Provides analyzer speci cations and characteristics.

Describes how to make a simple measurement with your EMC

Option 910: Additional User's Documentation

Describes troubleshooting and repair of the EMC analyzer.

HP 8590 Series, and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer,

assembly level repair of the analyzer.

HP 8590 Series, and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer,

for component-level repair of the analyzer.

How to Order Manuals

Each of the manuals listed above can be ordered individually. To

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Getting Acquainted with the EMC Analyzer

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . .

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . .

Setting the analyzer's clock . . . . . . . . . . . .

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . .

What you'll nd in this chapter

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . .

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Making EMC Diagnostic Measurements

Tuning the tracking generator . . . . . . . . . . .

What you'll nd in this section . . . . . . . . . . .

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . .

10. Amplitude Correction Factors

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . .

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . .

12. Saving, Recalling, and Outputting Data

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . .

13. Additional Features

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . .

14. EMC Analyzer Error Messages

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

15. Customer Support

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . .

16. Key Menus

What you'll nd in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . .

17. Key Dictionary

What you'll nd in this chapter

AVG BW AUTO MAN

CAL FREQ & AMPTD

Hewlett-Packard Company certies that this product met its

Provides analyzer specications and characteristics.

Turning the preamplier on. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

veried that the line voltage is correct, the